Design and Application Guidelines

CHAPTER D1
SEISMIC BUILDING CODE REVIEW
Purpose, Extent and Limitations of Analysis
D1.1
Referenced Standards
D1.2
Overview of Analytical Methods Used
D1.3
Static vs Dynamic Modeling Techniques
D1.4
Required Calculation Input
D1.5
Understanding Standard Calculation Output
D1.6
Understanding non-Standard Calculation Output
D1.7
General Assumptions and Disclaimer
D1.8
KINETICS Seismic Design Manual
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS (Chapter D1)

KINETICS SEISMIC ENGINEERING
DUBLIN, OHIO, USA MISSISSAUGA, ONTARIO, CANADA
Toll Free (USA only):

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
RELEASE DATE: 10/1/03

800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
www.kineticsnoise.com
sales@kineticsnoise.com
PAGE:
D1.0
MEMBER
Kinetics Noise Control 2003
PURPOSE, EXTENT AND LIMITATIONS OF A SEISMIC ANALYSIS
There are many inherent limitations as to the extent of such an analysis. The primary
limitation is that, by law, an Engineer can only take responsibility for those components
over which he has direct control or knowledge. The typical items that are addressed in an
analysis are the determination of design seismic forces, the resulting reactions at the
restraint connections to the structure (if the equipment remains rigid) and the capabilities
of the hardware and anchorage to resist those forces.
The capabilities of equipment to withstand seismic forces must be determined by either
the equipment manufacturer or by an independent party that has access to all of the
technical information relative the equipment. As to its structural durability, all material
strengths, thicknesses, geometry and operating loads must be accounted for and added
to the seismic load requirements. The issue becomes more complex when continued
operation of the equipment is mandated. As the ability of an independent party to obtain
this information is extremely limited, the manufacturer must normally address the
equipment durability issues.
There are also building structural issues that must be considered. These relate to the
ability of the building structure to withstand the local seismic forces placed on it by the
equipment. In a similar fashion to the equipment, to properly analyze these factors, a
detailed knowledge of both the building structure and the loads anticipated in that
structure during a seismic event must be considered. These must be added to the forces
generated by the equipment. As there is no one else with access to this information, this
analysis falls into the domain of the Structural Engineer of Record.
Finally, in order for the system to work, it is assumed that all of the componentry is
properly installed. Critical information on the installation of the various parts is provided
and frequently once installed, it is extremely difficult to determine if the appropriate
procedures were followed. As a result, after the fact inspections are based only on what
can be observed in the final installation and are not comprehensive. The responsibility for
following the appropriate procedures falls to the installation contractor with possible
oversight by an independent on site observer.
The primary purpose for a seismic analysis with regard to equipment, piping, ductwork
and conduit is to offer a degree of confidence to the Engineer of Record that a competent
individual has reviewed the application, specified appropriate componentry and
documented that, properly installed, it is in compliance with code and specification
requirements.
PURPOSE, EXTENT AND LIMITATIONS OF A SEISMIC ANALYSIS

PAGE 1 OF 1

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D1.1
MEMBER
REFERENCED STANDARDS
Listed below are the significant documents referenced and or used in the creation of this
manual.
ACI (American Concrete Institute) 318-02 Building Code Requirements for Structural
Concrete, 2002
ASCE (American Society of Civil Engineers) 7-02 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings
and Other Structures, 2002
ASD (Allowable Stress Design) National Design Specification for Wood Construction
Manual (American Forest and Paper Association / American Wood Council) 1999
ASHRAE (American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers)
HVAC Application Handbook, 2003
ASHRAE (American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers)
RP-812 A Practical Guide to Seismic Restraint, 1999
BOCA (Building Officials and Code Administrators) National Building Code, 1996 and
Amendments
FEMA (Federal Emergency Management Agency) FEMA 412 Installing Seismic Restaints
for Mechanical Equipment, 2002
for Electrical Equipment, 2004
for Ducts and Pipe, 2004
ASCE (American Society of Civil Engineers) 7-98 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings
and Other Structures, 1998
IBC (International Building Code) (International Code Council), 2000

IBC (International Building Code) (International Code Council), 2003
NFPA (National Fire Protection Association) NFPA 13 Installation of Sprinkler Systems,
1999
NRC-CNRC (National Research Council Canada) National Building Code of Canada,
1995
PAGE 1 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D1.2
MEMBER
SBC (Standard Building Code) (Southern Building Code Congress International), 1997
and Amendments
TI-809-04 (US Army Corps of Engineers) Seismic Design for Buildings, 1998
UBC (Uniform Building Code) (International Conference of Building Officials), 1997 and
Amendments
PAGE 2 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D1.2
MEMBER
OVERVIEW OF ANALYTICAL METHODS USED

Kinetics Noise Control are based
the equipment being restrained is
code parameters and with the
forces to the various structural
Generally speaking, this analysis models a piece of restrained equipment as a rigid body
with a lateral and possibly vertical load as defined by the code applied to its center of
gravity. The application of these loads generates forces at the equipment restraints,
which can eventually be reconciled to anchor loads. As the wave front angle for the
earthquake is unknown, this analysis work must ensure that the design loads are applied
in the directions which will generate the highest forces in the anchors.
There are several types of reactive loads that result from the analysis of a typical piece of
equipment. A horizontal shear load, an imbalance load, a vertical uplift load, an
overturning load and the static deadweight load. The interaction between these results in
worst case combinations at each restraint point.
SHEAR LOAD ANALYSIS
The most obvious restraint loading that occurs during a seismic event is the horizontal
force that is generated by the lateral load. In its simplest case this results in the lateral
load being split among the restraints. If the center of gravity of the equipment is aligned
with the geometric center of the restraints, the split will be equal as shown in Figure 1.
Unless otherwise specified, the analyses performed by

on a worst case statically applied load and assume that
rigid. These assumptions are in compliance with
application of appropriate factors, address dynamic
elements involved as well.
Figure 1
IMBALANCED LOAD ANALYSIS
More frequently, the unit center of gravity is not aligned with the geometric center. When
this is the case, an imbalanced load is generated which needs to be combined with the
shear loads previously discussed. Figure 2 shows that the method of analyzing this

PAGE 1 0F 6

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D1.3
MEMBER
Figure 2
OVERTURNING LOAD ANALYSIS
The accurate modeling of overturning forces is critical in determining the vertical forces to
which the restraints are exposed. In the simple case where the center of gravity is
coincident with the geometric center of the system and with four restraints, the vertical
components are a simple function of the height of the center of gravity and the restraint
spacing (Figure 3).
situation is to treat the horizontal shear load at each restraint as a function of the mass
that is associated with them.
Figure 3
In the case of a system with more than four restraints, the number of points that can be
considered to share the overturning load becomes a function of clearance that may be
present. Note in Figure 4, that with no clearance, resistance to the overturning load will
occur at every restraint location. The most common type of installation that exhibits this
property is a rigidly bolted system.

PAGE 2 0F 6

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D1.3
MEMBER
Figure 4
In systems that have more than four restraints and contain restraints that maintain an
operating clearance, only the end restraints can be considered effective in resisting
overturning loads. With this type of restraint, some elastomeric snubbing must be present
to prevent impact loading and resulting force amplification. In some cases, if the snubbing
pads are thick enough and the operating clearance small enough, some load sharing may
be present, but in general this effect is minimal. This is clearly illustrated in Figure 4.
LOAD DIRECTION ANALYSIS
Because the direction of the seismic load is unknown, it is necessary to determine the
worst case overturning load at each restraint point based on any possible load direction.
The method used by Kinetics Noise Control is to set up a mathematical model of the
equipment arrangement and then index the application angle of the design seismic force
for the full 360 degrees of possible application angles in 1-degree increments. At each
increment, the overturning load for each point is computed and the worst case load
encountered at each restraint point is used in the analysis.
9-1
Figure 5

PAGE 3 0F 6

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D1.3
MEMBER
OTHER SIGNIFICANT FACTORS

Before a mathematical model can be built, there are several other key hardware factors
that need to be accounted for. These factors relate to specific snubber or system designs
that can have a major impact on the final restraining loads.
Figure 6A shows a system using four single direction lateral restraints. Because this type
of restraint only restrains a single direction lateral load, they must be used in sets of four.
Some versions of these include a vertical snubbing pad for uplift loads. Although these
are then biaxial restraints, they behave very similarly. It is important to note that since
each restraint only works in a single direction, that any restraint must absorb the entire
lateral force by itself.
MULTI-DIRECTION SNUBBERS
In contrast to this, the same unit fitted with four multi-axial restraints will produce an
average lateral load per restraint equal to 1/4 of the total load. This results in a series of
restraints, which can be significantly smaller than what would be required for single
direction components (Figure 6B).
SINGLE DIRECTION SNUBBERS
Figure 6

PAGE 4 0F 6

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D1.3
MEMBER
OPEN SPRING ISOLATORS

When restraining vertical loads, there are two distinct types of restraints that can be used.
The first of these I will call an open or non-contained spring isolator. This is one in which
the spring bears against the floor and the anchor bolts have the possibility of absorbing
the spring load. An illustration of this is shown in Figure 7 (Labeled OPEN).
Another more common type of restrained spring isolator is one, which I will call a
contained spring isolator. In this type, the spring load is contained within the restraint
housing. The net result is that the anchor bolts, while still required to resist the equipment
loading, do not have to absorb any additional loading that may be generated by the
spring. This is shown in Figure 7 (Labeled CONTAINED).
To illustrate this point more clearly, The first illustration in Figure 7 shows the two types of
isolators under normal load. Note that in either case the anchors are effectively unloaded.
If the equipment weight is now suddenly removed, the situation occurs that is illustrated in
the second illustration. In this case nearly all the spring load is transferred directly to the
anchor bolts in the open case, but the anchors are still unloaded in the contained one.
CONTAINED SPRING ISOLATORS
Figure 7

PAGE 5 0F 6

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D1.3
MEMBER
SEPARATE SNUBBERS
A quick review of systems which incorporate spring supports and independent snubbers
will show that they perform in the same manner as those which use open spring isolators.
These cases are illustrated in the right half of Figure 7.
Two static models are set up for a given piece of equipment. One would be an X-axis
model and the other a Y-axis version. In these models, all translational, vertical and
overturning loads are accounted for including factors for the center of gravity offsets in
each of the two major axes. The input load can be considered to be applied in any
direction and X and Y components are extracted from it.
Using the above concept and generating loads for each restraint point based on the load
angle discussed earlier. The angle is incremented from 0 to 360 degrees, generating the
resulting forces at each restraint point for each angle. The worst case force at each
restraint location is then stored and used for the evaluation of the restraint at that location.
RESTRAINT ANALYSIS
Up to now, the analysis has been limited to the entire system. It now becomes necessary
to use the loads developed for each restraint location to determine the adequacy of each
restraint.
In general each restraint behaves like a small piece of equipment with its own horizontal,
vertical and overturning components. Because these parameters are clearly defined for
each restraint however, these factors can be boiled down to a capacity chart listing the
maximum vertical, lateral and combined capacity of the restraint. These values are
different for anchorage to concrete or attachment to steel. The previously computed
forces are then compared to the restraint limits to ensure their adequacy.
MODEL GENERATION

PAGE 6 0F 6

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D1.3
MEMBER
STATIC vs DYNAMIC MODELING
The static analysis involves applying a force either mathematically to a mathematically

modeled system or to apply an actual force to a physical model. This force must be
applied in the direction that will generate the largest possible static forces in the
equipment, the equipment anchorage and the restraint. The force at that restraint is then
measured or computed for comparison to the statically rated capacity of the restraint, the
equipment, the anchorage device or the local load conditions on the structure. In order to
use this analysis to address the forces that occur in a dynamic situation, like an
earthquake, a factor (or series of factors) is then applied to the computed forces. These
factors have been fine tuned with experience and currently offer a high degree of
confidence. Unfortunately, these amplified factors can only be directly related to the
structural performance of the system.
In a dynamic analysis, a time varying input force is used. The force is generated from
historical ground acceleration data from an earthquake that has properties that are
expected to be similar to those that would be experienced at the proposed project site.
The amplitude of this profile is adjusted upward or downward to provide peaks that
coincide with the seismic design values for the project.
In the case of equipment, if the study is done analytically, a model that not only addresses
the basic geometry of the system, but also models the dynamic cushioning in the restraint
device itself is needed. If an actual sample is tested, samples of the equipment, restraints
and anchorage systems as well as a shake table large enough to mimic the appropriate
seismic accelerations are necessary. In addition, the dynamic input forces must
accurately portray not only the expected earthquake, but must also accurately account for
the direction of the wave front and the impact of dynamic factors in the structure.
The basic format for tests and/or analyses of seismic resistant systems follow one of the
following two primary paths, static or dynamic modeling. Within these major categories
there are a myriad of detailed approaches that will not be addressed here. Instead, this
document will focus on the significant differences between the static and dynamic models,
what can be gained from each and when one might be preferred over another.
On the surface, it is obvious that a dynamic test will be considerably more expensive than
would be a static one. In order for it to be justified in the practical world, there is a
requirement that if offers a fair trade-off in value to the end user.
Dynamic modeling has been most commonly used with regard to building structures and
with systems were failure can result in serious danger or loss of life (Nuclear facilities for
example). With regard to the building structures themselves, there are several factors
that allow dynamic models to offer easily justified benefits. First, the cost of the analysis,
compared to the cost of the structure, is relatively low. In addition, since buildings are
generally one-offs, they normally include extensive individualized design work specific to

PAGE 1 OF 3

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D1.4
MEMBER
the application anyway and as such, frequently are already modeled. An additional
factor specific to a structure is that the consequences of failure, from a life-safety
standpoint, are significant. Finally, from a cost/benefit side, the use of a dynamic model
can open the potential to reduce or simplify the structure and can actually reduce its cost.
Hospitals and other facilities that must remain operational after a seismic event pose more
of a dilemma. The dynamic analysis of the structure can often be justified as noted
above, however the mechanical equipment inside can be a problem. Of primary concern
is the current requirement identified in the IBC and TI-809-04 codes for critical equipment
to remain operational. This means that not only must the equipment be structurally
substantial enough to ride out an event, but also that its internals must be tough enough
that the tremor will not generate internal mechanical failures. There is no practical way to
model this statically. Instead, the individual equipment component parts must be
designed to accept significant forces within allowable fatigue limits. This type of analysis
is common for vehicles or other devices that are subject to dynamic loads, but is not
commonly used in the design of static equipment. The only other option would be to
perform substantial dynamic testing over a wide input spectrum (both in frequency and
direction) on existing equipment. This would likely cost considerably more than the value
of the equipment itself.
Note that the above also holds true for those pieces of equipment in non-critical
structures, but whos continued operation after a seismic event would be needed to
ensure life-safety.
Benefits of a static analysis become clear in non-critical applications. Here, the use of
static techniques and appropriate factors offer conservative, easily documented and
repeatable results that can confirm the structural durability of the equipment and
anchorage for minimal cost. In these cases (where continued operation of the equipment
is not required), life safety can be addressed simply by applying a conservative static
analysis.
With regard to those applications involving the potential for extremely hazardous material
release, cost is not even an issue. It is critical to all concerned that the system is
analyzed in absolutely the best way possible. Both static and dynamic modeling methods
should be used and conservative factors applied to the result.
In these applications, if the potential cost or downtime that might result from internal
damage to this equipment is a significant issue, features could be added internally by the
manufacturers for minimal cost that could increase the confidence level of continued
operation greatly. The key here is that the cost to offer a 90% chance of success would
only be a fraction of the cost that would be required to guarantee success.
Over the long term, it is likely that equipment designed to be installed in seismically active
areas, will become more robust and will be designed to meet some reasonable fatigue

PAGE 2 OF 3

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D1.4
MEMBER
criteria. Once this becomes common practice, much of the need to perform detailed
dynamic analyses or testing of this equipment will likely disappear.
Where it is necessary to certify the continued operation of the equipment as well, current
practice is that it be dynamically tested or analyzed. At best, this is not comprehensive
and requires that all factors are appropriately accounted for, that the actual ground forces
experienced are similar to those assumed in type, frequency and magnitude and that the
unit in the field behaves at least as well as the unit in the lab.
Better than the dynamic qualification test however, is that the equipment should be
designed to withstand all anticipated and factored forces expected on its internal
components within the fatigue limits of the materials that make it up and with some
reasonable additional safety factor.
Currently, the best value is to perform static analyses with the inclusion of appropriate
factors on all equipment installations. The resulting forces can be used to validate the
capability of the equipment to remain in place during an appropriate seismic event.

PAGE 3 OF 3

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D1.4
MEMBER
Required Calculation Input
The appropriate building code for the project is required and is the first piece of
information to be determined, as it governs everything else. Since the codes vary with
time and local jurisdiction, and because there are periods during which it may be possible
to use different codes for the same project, it is critical that the code, and code version,
used are consistent with the project requirements.
More recent codes require project site data that impacts the seismic design forces. This
includes soil type and, in the 97 UBC, the type and proximity of the nearest fault. This
data is not something that can be quickly pulled from a map, and as such is not something
that it is available to anyone offsite who is attempting to perform an analysis.
The end use of the building also needs to be identified. Factors are assigned in the
course of the analysis based on the end use, and the project impact (safety and/or cost)
can be significant if the wrong factors are used.
Once the general information is identified, specific information relative to the equipment
and system is required. Besides the obvious geometric and weight data for the
equipment (height, width, length, weight, approximate center of gravity location, and
locations of any mounting hardware), generic material as to what type of equipment it is
and whether its continued function is needed for life safety must be determined. The
95 NBC (Canada), 97 UBC, 2000 IBC, 2003 IBC and TI-809-04 all require that the
mounting elevation of the equipment relative to the roof height of the structure be known
as well.
In some cases, some of the required data must be estimated. Kinetics Noise Control will
attempt to do this conservatively, and in so doing the net result is a more conservative
analysis and potentially costly installation. While attempts are made to make reasonable
and conservative estimates, it remains the responsibility of others to compare these
values to the actual equipment and indicate to Kinetics Noise Control if something
appears to be inconsistent. All values used in the analysis are provided on the output; the
responsibility to review this data will normally fall to the general contractor or the engineer
of record.
There are several pieces of information that are required for Kinetics Noise Control to
perform an analysis on an equipment installation. Some of this information is project
and/or code related and some is equipment related. The input requirements will vary
depending on the project building code.
To aid in collecting the appropriate information to perform analyses, the following checklist
has been developed and should be filled out for each piece of equipment addressed by
the project.
REQUIRED CALCULATION INPUT

PAGE 1 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D1.5
MEMBER
Seismic Checklist
General Data:
Project:_____________________________________________Date:_________
Seismic Code:
o SBC
o UBC
o BOCA
o UBC (Calif)
o IBC
o NBC-Canada
o Other _____________________________
Code Year of issue:
o 1993
o 1994
o 1995
o 1996
o 1997
o 2000
o 2003
o Other _____________________
Accel factor or Proj location (Av, v, Z, or SDS (.2 Sec Response Accel)):_____________
Optional
Minimum G factors from Spec:_________Horiz, __________Vert
Building Use:______________________________________________________
Total Occupancy:___________________________________________________
Addition data for 1997 UBC
If Av = .4, provide distance to nearest fault and source type.
o <= 2 km
o > 2 km ,< 10 km
o > 10 km
o A (Frequent Lrg Magnitude)
o B (Other) o C (Rare Sml Magnitude)
Addition data for 2000 IBC, TI-809-04
Equipment Importance Factor (Ip):________
Failure of this Equipment will result in a life safety issue:
o Yes
o No
Addition data for 1997 UBC, IBC and TI-809-04 codes only:
Soil Type:
o Sa (Hard Rock) o Sb (Rock) o Sc (Dense Soil/Soft Rock)
o Sd (Stiff Soil)
o Se (Soft Soil)
o Sf (Other-Backfill, etc.)
Provide detail data on soil conditions if Sf selected.
Addition data for the NBC-Canada Code only:
Foundation Factor:
Failure of this Equipment can release Hazardous Materials: o Yes
o No
Tag Data:
Equipment Location in Building:
o At or Below Grade
o Above Grade
Roof Elevation _______
o If 1997 UBC, IBC, TI-809-04 or NBC
Equipment Mounting Elevation_______
Type of Equipment:___________
Equipment Weight: ___________
Height from base of Equipment to Vertical CG:_______________
The Equipment will be attached to:
o Concrete Anchors
o Through Bolt to Steel or Concrete
o Welded
o Bolt to Wood (Thickness, width, and type of wood required.) Include structural
drawings if available showing unit location with respect to structural members.
Equipment Geometry (Include Drawing)
REQUIRED CALCULATION INPUT

PAGE 2 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D1.5
MEMBER
UNDERSTANDING KNC S STANDARD CERTIFICATION OUTPUT

Most of the seismic and wind certifications performed by Kinetics Noise Control will be
done using proprietary analytical software and will generate a report in the format shown
on the following pages. In cases that cannot be modeled using this software, the results
will be obtained using customized spreadsheet documents that will vary in format
depending on the analysis involved.
There will always be at least one output sheet per seismic calculation. If special
anchorage is required, a second sheet indicating the special anchorage requirements will
be added. If wind is also an issue, and a wind analysis was requested, a third document
(for standard anchorage) and possibly a fourth (for special anchorage) would be included
as well.
In all cases, the output documents will have three portions. The upper half of the sheet
indicates the information input into the program. The second segment indicates the
program outputs, and the last segment lists special notes that are applicable.
This section will provide insight and understanding of the data presented using the
standardized computer-generated format.
Seismic Certification Document (A)

All standard seismic certifications will include the (A)-type document. It can be identified
by the (A) in the top right corner and the word Seismic included in the title.
Input Data
Looking first at the input data, there are several key areas that are grouped together as
follows:
UNDERSTANDING KNCS STANDARD CERTIFICATION OUTPUT
PAGE 1 OF10

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540

DOCUMENT:
D1-6
MEMBER
Also listed is the code used to perform the analysis and any overriding horizontal and
vertical seismic design acceleration coefficients, if specified.
For some codes, the soil type, fault type, and fault proximity come into play and if they are
applicable they are listed as shown above.
The next data segment is specifically related to the particular equipment installation being
certified. In the figure below, the location of this information has been indicated.
General project data is generally across the top of the document. Included is the
reference purchase order number from Kinetics Noise Control in the top left-hand corner.
Below this is the name assigned to the project by Kinetics Noise Control, the
representative s name, reference to the representative s purchase order number, and the
date that the certification was performed.
For ease of reference, the tag data listed at the top right-hand corner as well as on the
third line refers to the component being evaluated.
Within the body of the text a name for the equipment is listed along with the tag
identification and below this is the mounting arrangement. In this case, the mounting is
identified as Base Mounted, Common Support/Restraint Loc. This indicates that the
equipment is mounted at its base (typically to the floor) and that the restraints and
supports are at the same locations (meaning that if isolated, combination
isolator/restraints are used, or if hard mounted, that the unit is bolted down and restrained
PAGE 2 OF 10

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540

DOCUMENT:
D1-6
MEMBER
with the same hardware). Other options that may be listed are:
Listed on the right side of the certification are Code G (ASD) and Conc Ancs (ASD)
values. These are the computed seismic force values used by the program to determine
the forces at the restraint points expressed in ASD (Allowable Stress Design or Working
Stress based) units. Code G is the basic design force and is used to evaluate component
capacity and through-bolted anchorage. Conc Ancs includes additional factors that must
be used to evaluate anchorage to concrete. The (H/V) terms are the horizontal and
vertical force components.
Base Mounted, Different Support/Restraint Loc. (for separate isolators & restraints)
Base Mounted, 4 Isolators/2 Restraints (where 2 restraints are located at the equipment
centerline)
Hanging, Common Support/Restraint Loc. (where equipment is hung with 4 or more rods
and is restrained at the same points)
Hanging, Different Support/Restraint Loc. (where equipment is hung with 4 or more rods
and is restrained at different points)
Hanging, 2 Supports/4 Restraints (where equipment is hung on 2 hanger rods and is
restrained with 4 restraint cables).
Weight, geometry, and equipment specific seismic design factors are the last items that
fall into this segment of the input data. Wgt (weight) is the operating weight of the
equipment. Elev-Roof/Equip is the relative elevation of the equipment in the structure to
the roof elevation and is required only by some codes.
Seismic factors Ap, Ss, I, Rp s/c are the factors drawn from the code and are used to
PAGE 3 OF 10

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540

DOCUMENT:
D1-6
MEMBER
compute the previously discussed seismic force values. The names of these terms will
vary from code to code, but they will always be found in this location on the certification
document. Where s/c appears, this indicates that different values are used for throughbolted (s for steel) and anchored to concrete (c for concrete) connections.
The last item that relates to the equipment data is the height (Hgt). The value here is the
vertical distance between the equipment center of gravity and the restraint contact point.
With hanging equipment, two values will be listed. The first is the vertical distance
between the equipment center of gravity and the restraint connection point and the
second is the distance between the restraint connection point and the elevation at which
the hanger rods connect to the equipment.
Moving on to the installation sketch:
Values for A, B, ex, and ey are identified in the schematic. These represent the spacing
between the outermost restraint elements and the assumed offset in the center of gravity
of the system. When the restraint components are independent of the supports, the
values a and b will also be listed. In the sketch, support points are represented by O s
and restraint points by X s.
The diagram represents schematically the general layout of the equipment. Restraint
points are labeled 1, 2, 3, etc. and the previously discussed dimension locations are
identified. If the equipment has more than 4 restraint points, the sketch will show added
restraint locations at the midpoint of the long axis; however, the actual number of
restraints will be listed under the restraint data heading.
In some cases, there may be 2 restraints grouped in each corner. If this is the case the
PAGE 4 OF 10

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540

DOCUMENT:
D1-6
MEMBER
schematic drawing will reflect that condition.
Listed here is information on the total number of restraints and the number visible on each
side (or axis). Also identified is the restraint type and assumed anchor embedment depth
(in bolt diameters) for concrete anchors.
Finally, by location (as shown on the sketch) the model of the restraint is identified. If
more than 4 restraints, the smallest of the remaining restraints is listed after the heading
Other. For hard-mounted applications, the restraints will be identified as Solid. If cable
restrained, the cable quantity and size will be identified.
Output Data
This section of the certification is broken into 2 major subdivisions. First is a summary of
the design loads used at each restraint location.

PAGE 5 OF 10

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
The last segment listed in the input data portion of the certification is the restraint data
section.

DOCUMENT:
D1-6
MEMBER
Listed here is the static load (deadweight), the worst-case uplift load condition, the worstcase horizontal load condition, and the effective corner weight used when considering
overturning factors. If the system is a hanging system, the maximum tensile load in the
cable (based on an angle of 45 degrees to the horizontal) is listed instead of the effective
corner weight. All seismic forces as presented are based on the G-forces appropriate for
through-bolted or welded connections. Higher G-forces, as noted at the top of the sheet,
are, however, used by the program when appropriate if computing safety factors for
concrete anchors.
Note: If evaluating or independently analyzing special concrete anchorage conditions,
where a 2:1 factor is required (IBC, 97 UBC, TI809-04), the forces listed must be
increased as follows. Horizontal forces should be doubled. The effective corner weight
should be subtracted from the maximum uplift force and the result added to the maximum
uplift force to determine a new uplift component. In addition, the restraint geometry must
be accounted for as the listed forces act at the snubbing location of the restraint and
forces at the anchors can be considerably different. (This is only required for evaluating
the anchorage.)
The effective corner weight differs from the static load in that it is the force required at that
corner to lift the equipment (if the equipment is assumed to be rigid). For example, it will
take the same force to lift the corner of a table with 4 legs as it will to lift a corner of the
same table if 10 legs are added somewhere in the middle. While the centrally located
legs spread the load out from a support standpoint, they do not share the load when
resisting rocking motions.
The lower section of the output data segment presents restraint and hardware capacity
information as shown below.
If more than 4 restraints are used on a piece of equipment, a final column will appear
labeled Other. The data displayed will be the worst-case condition of those restraints not
listed as 1 through 4.
This information will vary depending on the restraint components used, but in general it
will present safety factors for the restraint component used, through-bolt size and quantity
PAGE 6 OF 10

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540

DOCUMENT:
D1-6
MEMBER
(if through bolted), anchor size, quantity and embedment (if anchored to concrete), and
through-bolt/anchor safety factors. If a hanging system is used, the worst-case
compressive load in the hanger rod is also identified.
All safety factors listed must exceed 1.0 to have a valid installation with the following
exception. In cases where only the concrete anchor safety factor is less than 1.0, an
oversized base plate can be provided to allow higher capacity. In these cases, a second
certification sheet labeled (B) will be included and will address this condition.
Notes
The final segment of the certification document is comprised of general notes and the
standard disclaimer.
The notes will vary with the restraint devices used and the application, but will in general
offer the following added information.
Weld sizes that can be used as an option to bolting when appropriate for the restraint
devices are listed.
Data presented in the Other column reflects worst-case loading in conjunction with the
smallest Other restraint and as such is a worst-case condition for the remaining
components.
When one or more of the concrete anchor safety factors is less than 1.0, a note indicating
that Sheet B will be included and information addressing the need for an oversized
baseplate will appear.
Additional notes relating to allowable cable angles, A-307 hardware requirements, and
edge distances for concrete anchors are also included when appropriate.
General Comments on Document (A)
Often, due to a lack of comprehensive input data, Kinetics Noise Control engineers will
conservatively estimate the center of gravity location. While estimating a dimension or
magnitude for this isn t unreasonable, the direction of the imbalance is almost always
PAGE 7 OF 10

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540

DOCUMENT:
D1-6
MEMBER
unknown. Because of this, unless the direction of the imbalance is clearly stated (relative
to features on the equipment that are spelled out) the worst-case computed corner
restraint condition should be assumed for all corner locations.
While it is formatted in the same manner and includes much the same information as the
(A) document, it contains detailed information relating to the capacity of the required
oversize base plate and additional anchors.
Input Data
The only difference between the (A)- and (B)-documents within the input data section is
that the schematic equipment layout sketch is changed to show the size and layout of the
required oversize base plate.
Seismic Certification Document (B)

When appropriate and as indicated above, the seismic certifications will include the (B)type document. It can be identified by the (B) in the top right corner and the word Seismic
included in the Title.
Information on the on the bolt pattern, anchor size, overall dimensions, and weld locations
are all presented in a readable format.
Output Data
The first portion of the output data (which indicates the loads at the restraint points)
remains unchanged from the (A)-Document. Information on the modified anchorage
arrangement is, however, new.
PAGE 8 OF 10

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540

DOCUMENT:
D1-6
MEMBER
Notes
Additional notes are provided that relate directly to the oversized base plate and the
anchors that go with them.
Wind Certification Document (A)
When requested, Kinetics Noise Control will perform an additional wind certification. It is
very similar to the seismic certification and can be identified by the (A) in the top right
corner and the words Wind Load included in the title.
Input Data
Listed will be the quantity and size of the anchors, the required anchor embedment depth,
and the resulting anchorage safety factor for each location.
The areas where there are differences between the wind load input data and the seismic
load input data are indicated above.
PAGE 9 OF 10

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540

DOCUMENT:
D1-6
MEMBER
The seismic G-forces listed in the seismic certification are replaced by a design wind
pressure. In addition, the length, width, and height of the restrained equipment are
indicated.
All of the remaining input information remains the same.
As with the seismic certification, the possibility exists in a wind application that concrete
anchorage may be inadequate. If this is the case, a (B)-document similar to the (B)seismic document is generated.
Wind Certification Document (B)
Without going into great detail, the difference between the (B)-wind certification document
and the (A)-wind certification document is identical to the differences between the (B)seismic document and the (A)-seismic document. Refer back to the earlier comments for
further clarification.

PAGE 10 OF 10

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Output Data
The output data format is exactly the same as the output data in the seismic certification.
The only difference is that the values listed are the result of the wind load and not of the
seismic load.

DOCUMENT:
D1-6
MEMBER
UNDERSTANDING NON-STANDARD CERTIFICATION OUTPUT
This data comprises those items that must be verified by the end user to ensure that the
appropriate information was provided, was understood and was used. Because of the
number of links in the chain, miscommunication in this area is common and failure to do
validate this data can make the certification invalid.
It also provides input that should be used by the equipment manufacturer and the building
structural engineer to ensure that the durability of the equipment and locally, of the
structure, is adequate to withstand the seismic inputs.
Echoed Input Data
First there should be a list of assumed inputs. Overall, there should be a listing of the
project, any reference order numbers to which the certification applies and the date the
calculation was performed. In addition, global parameters like the Code used, the ground
acceleration coefficient, the soil type, any appropriate fault factors and Importance factors
should be listed. If there are over-riding design accelerations included in the spec, these
should be defined as well.
This data is necessary to communicate to all concerned which code was applied and what
factors were either provided to the individual doing the calculation or were assumed by
them. The date should be included as changes are sometimes required in the field and
calculations need to be re-run. If there are multiple calculations that end up in a job file,
the date offers a historical link as to which calculation is valid.
There are periodically equipment applications that do not fit well into the automated
seismic computation programs developed by Kinetics Noise Control. This holds true for
others that perform this service as well. This section of the manual indicates the minimum
material that should be expected to be included in the output document, from Kinetics
Noise Control or from any other reputable organization.
Moving on to the application specific information, there should be a listing of the

Equipment Importance factor (if different from the structure), assumed or dictated
equipment elevation data, equipment type (by definition), mounting parameters and
overall geometric and weight data. The parameters used here can significantly impact the
performance of the system and frequently are not fully disclosed to the individual
performing the analysis. Items such as CG locations, elevations in the structure, lifesafety assumptions, and even weights are often not clear. Even when provided, this
information often comes in piecemeal via phone, fax or separate email correspondence.
Because the individual has no direct control over the accuracy of the input information, it
is critical that it be echoed back to ensure that the data applied makes sense to the user.

PAGE 1 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D1.7
MEMBER
Computed Output Information
1) The computed Seismic load (in Gs) appropriate for the particular piece of equipment
in question.
2) A selection of a restraint device (or devices) including model, size, quantity, general
arrangement and specific locations.
3) The maximum expected horizontal and vertical forces at those devices resulting from
the application of a worst case seismic load.
4) Confirmation that the restraint device is adequate in size to withstand the loads.
5) If anchored to concrete and an oversized baseplate is required, the size of that
baseplate.
6) Minimum size and embedment depth of anchors for concrete applications.
7) If required, identification of anchor type (Wedge or Undercut).
8) If bolted to steel, the minimum acceptable size of attachment bolts.
9) If welded to steel, the minimum size of welds required to make the connection.
10) An installation sketch or schematic orienting the equipment.
A Seismic Calculation Assumptions and Disclaimer Document
This critical document spells out in detail, what is and what is not addressed by the
certification. In addition, it indicates what assumptions may have been made in putting
the analysis together. Lastly, it indicates to whom this information should be forwarded to
ensure that all facets relating to the acceptability of the installation are addressed.
Stamped or Sealed Coversheet
A dated coversheet listing the certification document by Tag and indicating the name of
the individual who performed the certification along with their Professional Engineering
seal must also be included. If there is only one calculation, in lieu of a coversheet, the
certification document itself can include this information.
The minimum output material that must be offered to the end user as a result of the
computation is the following:

PAGE 2 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D1.7
MEMBER
Seismic and Wind Certification

General Assumptions and Disclaimer
Loads Considered
The loads considered in this certification are limited to those forces described in the
seismic portion of the specified code for the project. If Kinetics Noise Control is not
otherwise informed, the most recent version of the appropriate code will be used. Wind
will not be considered during the analysis unless it is specified to be included in the
seismic certification request. In the absence of wind velocity and the appropriate factors,
Kinetics Noise Control will use 35 PSF as a wind load requirement. If this is not
adequate, it is the responsibility of the Design Professional of Record to notify Kinetics
Noise Control.
Extent of the Certification
The certification addresses those items that directly restrain a component or piece of
equipment and are provided by Kinetics Noise Control. It includes the attachment weld,
anchor or bolt that is required to affix the restraint to the building structure, or third-party
support structure, and extends through the weld or bolt that attaches the restraint to the
restrained component or piece of equipment. An example of a third-party support
structure is a sheet metal roof curb or equipment rail or base not provided by Kinetics
Noise Control. The certification does not cover the capabilities of the building structure or
third-party support structure to withstand the seismic loading, nor does it cover the ability
of the equipment, component or component frame to structurally withstand these same
forces. Provided in the certification are the design horizontal and vertical loads at the
attachment locations that can be used by others to evaluate the ability of the building or
third-party support structure or piece of equipment to withstand these loads.
Determination of the applicability of the certification design loads to a specific project
remains the responsibility of the Design Professional of Record.
Equipment Data
The equipment weight, geometry, and CG data used to perform the certification have
been provided to Kinetics Noise Control by others, no attempt has been made by Kinetics
Noise Control to verify its accuracy and it is up those providing the information to do so.
Where CG data is not provided, associates of Kinetics Noise Control will attempt to make
reasonable yet conservative estimates as to the magnitude of any imbalance, although it
must be recognized that the direction of the imbalance is often unknown. Unless the
equipment orientation is obvious from the diagram in the certification document, it should
be assumed that the orientation is not known. Under these conditions, the worst-case
restraint, attachment and/or anchorage selection indicated for any particular location must
be used for all locations.
All Seismic and Wind Certifications performed by Kinetics Noise Control, Inc., and/or its
associates, unless clearly stated otherwise in the body of that certification document, will
be performed in accordance with the assumptions and disclaimers identified herein.
GENERAL ASSUMPTIONS AND DISCLAIMER

PAGE 1 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D1.8
MEMBER
Equipment Durability
Kinetics Noise Control and its associates make no representations as to equipment
durability and its ability to survive a seismic event and remain functional.
Equipment, Restraint, and Component Attachment Holes

For seismic restraint, it is necessary that any attachment bolts positioned in the path
between the equipment to be restrained and the building structure be a tight fit with their
mating holes (the hole is to be not more than 1/16 in diameter larger than the attachment
bolt). In the case of Kinetics Noise Control-supplied restraint components, attachment
safety factors are based on hardware sized per the above. In the case of directly
attached equipment, the hardware and components provided by Kinetics Noise Control
are the minimum required to withstand the seismic loading. If attachment holes in the
equipment exceed the recommendation above, the attachment hole is to be sleeved or
grouted to bring its effective diameter down to not more than 1/16 larger than the
attachment hardware used.
Anchor Capacity and Edge Distances
All anchor load allowables are based on ICBO test data and assume full anchor
embedment in 3000 psi concrete and a minimum spacing between the anchor centerline
and the edge of the slab into which it is sunk in accordance with the included anchorage
data. The anchor data used is appropriate for the anchors provided by Kinetics Noise
Control, unless otherwise noted. Under some conditions as noted in the calculations,
undercut anchors may be required
Stamps
Stamped documents are intended to support the Engineer of Record on the project. If the
project is located in an area for which Kinetics does not have a valid PE license, the
documents will be stamped with a valid out-of-state seal. This practice is intended solely
to indicate that a competent individual has reviewed the document. It is not intended to
imply that the licensee is legally empowered to practice in the jurisdiction of the project.
Installation
Where detailed installation procedures are not addressed in KNC-provided
documentation, all seismic hardware and components must be installed in conformance
with FEMA 412, 413, and 415. Free copies are available from FEMA (1-800-480-2520) or
through Kinetics Noise Control.
General
Kinetics Noise Control, Inc., and its associates guarantees that we will use that degree of
care and skill ordinarily exercised under similar conditions by reputable members of our
profession to determine restraint and/or attachment safety factors based on customersupplied input data. No other warranty, expressed or implied, is made or intended.
GENERAL ASSUMPTIONS AND DISCLAIMER

PAGE 2 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D1.8
MEMBER
CHAPTER D2
Understanding the 2000 IBC Code
D2.1
IBC 2000 Piping Restraint Rules
D2.2
IBC 2000 Ductwork Restraint Rules
D2.3
BOCA 1996/SBC 1997 Piping Restraint Rules
D2.4
BOCA 1996/SBC 1997 Ductwork Restraint Rules
D2.5
UBC 1997 Piping Restraint Rules
D2.6
UBC 1997 Ductwork Restraint Rules
D2.7
Evaluating Seismic Requirements in Specifications
D2.8
National Building Code of Canada Requirements
D2.9
Other Referenced Standards (OSHPD, VISCMA, SMACNA)
D2.10
TABLE OF CONTENTS


International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:

800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
PAGE:
D2.0
MEMBER
KINETICS Guide to Understanding IBC Seismic for MEP

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
Title
D2.1 1.0
Introduction
D2.1 2.0
Seismic Restraint Basics for Pipe and Duct
D2.1 2.1
Introduction
D2.1 2.2
Building Use Nature of Occupancy
D2.1 2.3
Site Class
D2.1 2.4
Mapped Acceleration Parameters
D2.1 2.5
Seismic Design Category
D2.1 2.6
Summary
D2.1 3.0
Component Importance Factor
D2.1 3.1
Introduction
D2.1 3.2
Criteria for Assigning a Component Importance Factor
D2.1 3.3
Summary
D2.1 4.0
General Exemptions and Requirements
D2.1 4.1
Introduction
D2.1 4.2
Exemptions for Seismic Design Categories A and B
D2.1 4.3
Exemptions for Seismic Design Category C
D2.1 4.4
Exemptions for Seismic Design Categories D, E, and F
D2.1 4.5
Chandelier Exemption
D2.1 4.6
Component Size Relative to the Building Structure
D2.1 4.7
Reference Documents
D2.1 4.8
Allowable Stress Design
D2.1 4.9
Submittals and Construction Documents
D2.1 4.10 Equipment Certification for Essential Facilities

D2.1 4.11 Consequential or Collateral Damage
D2.1 4.12 Flexibility of Components and Their Supports and Restraints
D2.1 4.13 Summary
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE 1 of 3
Toll Free (USA Only):
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
Dublin, Ohio, USA Mississauga, Ontario, Canada
D2.1 0.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
RELEASED ON: 05/06/2008
Member

Section
Title
D2.1 5.0
Exemptions for Piping Systems
D2.1 5.1 Introduction

D2.1 5.2 The 12 Rule
D2.1 5.3 Single Clevis Supported Pipe in Seismic Design Categories A and B
D2.1 5.4 Single Clevis Supported Pipe in Seismic Design Category C
D2.1 5.5 Single Clevis Supported Pipe in Seismic Design Categories D, E, and F
D2.1 5.6 Exemptions for Trapeze Supported Pipe per VISCMA Recommendations
D2.1 5.6.1 Trapeze Supported Pipe in Seismic Design Categories A and B
D2.1 5.6.2 Trapeze Supported Pipe in Seismic Design Category C
D2.1 5.6.3 Trapeze Supported Pipe in Seismic Design Category D
D2.1 5.6.4 Trapeze Supported Pipe in Seismic Design Categories E and F
D2.1 5.7 Summary
D2.1 6.0
Exemptions for HVAC Ductwork

D2.1 6.2 The 12 Rule
D2.1 6.3 Size Exemption
D2.1 6.4 Further Exemptions for Ductwork
D2.1 6.5 Restraint Allowance for In-Line Components
D2.1 6.6 Summary
D2.1 7.0
Exemptions for Electrical

D2.1 7.2 Implied Blanket Exemption Based on Component Importance Factor
D2.1 7.3 Conduit Size Exemptions
D2.1 7.4 Trapeze Supported Electrical Distribution Systems
D2.1 7.5 Summary
D2.1 8.0
Seismic Design Forces

D2.1 8.2 Horizontal Seismic Design Force
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE 2 of 3
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
D2.1 0.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member

Section
Title
D2.1 8.3 Vertical Seismic Design Force

D2.1 8 .4 The Evolution of a P and R P Factors
D2.1 8.5 LRFD versus ASD
D2.1 8.6 Summary
D2.1 9.0
Anchorage of MEP Components to the Building Structure

D2.1 9.2 General Guidelines for MEP Component Anchorage
D2.1 9.3 Anchorage in (Cracked) Concrete and Masonry
D2.1 9.4 Undercut Anchors
D2.1 9.5 Prying of Bolts and Anchors
D2.1 9.6 Power Actuated or Driven Fasteners
D2.1 9.7 Friction Clips
D2.1 9.8 Summary
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE 3 of 3
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
D2.1 0.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member

INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this manual is to provide design professionals, contractors, and building officials
responsible for the MEP, Mechanical, Electrical, and Plumbing, with the information and guidance
required to ensure that the seismic restraints required for a specific project are selected and/or
designed, and installed in accordance with the provisions code. This guide will be written in
several easily referenced sections that deal with specific portions of the code.
This guide is based on the International Building Code (IBC). The 2000 IBC and the 2003 IBC are
very similar, and in fact are almost identical. When they are referenced in this manual, it will be as
2000/2003 IBC. The latest version of the IBC that is currently being adopted by the various states
is 2006 IBC. This is the version that will form the core basis for this manual. When appropriate the
differences between the 2006 IBC and the 2000/2003 IBC will be pointed out. The intent is to have
a working guide that is based on the current 2006 IBC, but is also relevant to the 2000/2003 IBC.
The code based requirements for the restraint of pipe and duct are found in the following
references.
1. 2007 ASHRAE HANDBOOK Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning Applications;

American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc., 1791 Tullie
Circle, N.E. Atlanta, GA 30329, 2007; Chapter 54 Pp 54-11 and 54-12.
2. 2000 International Building Code; International Code Council, 5203 Leesburg Pike, Suite
708, Falls Church, Virginia, 22041-3401; 2000.
3. ASCE 7-98 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American Society of
Civil Engineers, 1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, Virginia 20191-4400, Chapter 9.
4. 2003 International Building Code; International Code Council, Inc., 4051 West Flossmoor
Road, Country Club Hills, Illinois 60478-5795; 2002.
5. ASCE/SEI 7-02 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American
Society of Civil Engineers, 1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, Virginia 20191-4400, Chapter
9.
INTRODUCTION
PAGE 1 of 2
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
D2.1 1.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member

6. 2006 International Building Code; International Code Council, Inc., 4051 West Flossmoor
Road, Country Club Hills, Illinois 60478-5795; 2006.
7. ASCE/SEI 7-05 Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American
Society of Civil Engineers, 1801 Alexander Bell Drive, Reston, Virginia 20191-4400,
Chapters 1, 2, 11, 13, 20, and 21.
8. SMACNA, Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems with Addendum
No. 1 2nd Edition; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.,
4201 Lafayette Center Drive, Chantilly, Virginia 20151-1209, 1998.
9. UNIFIED FACILITIES CRITERIA (UFC) Seismic Design for Buildings; United States
Department of Defense Document UFC 3-310-03A, 1 March 2005; Table 3-3, Pp 3-13 317.
The selection and installation of the proper seismic restraints for MEP systems requires good
coordination with the design professionals and contractors involved with the building project. A
good spirit of cooperation and coordination is especially required for projects that have been
designated as essential facilities, such as hospitals, emergency response centers, police and fire
stations. Coordination between the various design professionals and contractors will be a constant
theme throughout this guide. This coordination is vital for the following reasons.
1. The seismic restraints that are installed for a system can and will interfere with those of
another unless restraint locations are well coordinated.
2. The space required for the installed restraints can cause problems if non-structural walls
need to be penetrated, or other MEP components are in the designed load path for the
restraints.
3. The building end of the seismic restraints must always be attached to structure that is
adequate to carry the code mandated design seismic loads. It is the responsibility of the
structural engineer of record to verify this.
INTRODUCTION
PAGE 2 of 2
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
D2.1 1.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member

REQUIRED BASIC PROJECT INFORMATION
D2.1 2.1 Introduction:
As with any design job, there is certain basic information that is required before seismic restraints
can be selected and placed. The building owner, architect, and structural engineer make the
decisions that form the basis for the information required to select the seismic restraints for the
pipe and duct systems in the building. This is information that should be included in the
specification and bid package for the project. It also should appear on the first sheet of the
structural drawings. For consistency, it is good practice to echo this information in the specification
for each building system, and on the first sheet of the drawings for each system. In this fashion,
this information is available to all of the contractors and suppliers that will have a need to know.
D2.1 2.2 Building Use Nature of Occupancy (Section 1.5) [Section 1.5]1:
How a building is to be used greatly affects the level of seismic restraint that is required for the
MEP (Mechanical, Electrical, and Plumbing) components. In the 2006 IBC the building use is
defined through the Occupancy Category, which ranges from I to IV. Occupancy Category I is
applied to buildings where failure presents a low hazard to human life. At the other end of the
range, Occupancy Category IV is applied to buildings which are deemed to be essential. In the
previous two versions of the IBC (2000/2003), the building use was defined though the Seismic
Use Group which varied from I to III. Table 1-1 of ASCE 7-98/02 and ASCE 7-05 describes which
types of buildings are assigned to which Occupancy Category. Table 2-1 below summarizes the
information found in Tables 1-1 and 9.1.3 of ASCE 7-98/02 and Table 1-1 of ASCE 7-05, and ties
the Seismic Use Group from the previous versions of the IBC to the Occupancy Category. The
nature of the building use, or its Occupancy Category, is determined by the building owner and the
architect of record.
References in brackets (Section 1.5) and [Section 1.5] apply to sections, tables, and/or equations in ASCE 7-98/02
ASCE 7-05 respectively which forms the basis for the seismic provisions in 2000/2003 IBC and 2006 IBC respectively.

PAGE 1 of 15
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.1 2.0
Member

Table 2-1; Building Use vs. Occupancy Category & Seismic Use Group (Table 1-1, Table 9.1.3)
[Table 1-1]
Occupancy
Seismic
Category
Use
2000/2003
Group
& 2006
2000/2003
IBC
IBC
I
I
Building Use or Nature of Occupancy
Buildings and structures in which failure would pose a low hazard to human life. These
buildings include, but are not limited to:
Agricultural buildings and structures.
Certain temporary buildings and structures.
Minor storage buildings and structures.
Buildings and structures that are not listed as Occupancy Category I, III, or IV. Also,
cogeneration power plants that do not supply power to the national power grid.
II
Buildings and structures, in which failure would pose a substantial hazard to human life, have
the potential to create a substantial economic impact, and/or cause a mass disruption of dayto-day civilian life. These buildings include, but are not limited to:
Where more than 300 people congregate in one area.
III
II
Daycare facilities with a capacity greater than 50.

Elementary and Secondary school facilities with a capacity greater than 250 and
colleges and adult educational facilities with a capacity greater than 500.
Healthcare facilities with 50 or more resident patients that do not have surgery or
emergency treatment facilities.
Jails, prisons, and detention facilities.
Power generation stations.
Water and sewage treatment facilities.
Telecommunication centers.
Buildings and structures which are not in Occupancy Category IV which contain enough toxic
or explosive materials that would be hazardous to the public if released.
IV
III
Buildings and structures which are designated as essential facilities which include but are not
limited to:
Hospitals & healthcare facilities with surgical or emergency treatment facilities.
Fire, rescue, ambulance, police stations, & emergency vehicle garages.
Designated emergency shelters.
Facilities designated for emergency preparedness & response.
Power generating stations and other public utilities required for emergency response
and recovery.
Ancillary structures required for the continued operation of Occupancy Category IV
buildings and structures.
Aviation control towers, air traffic control centers, and emergency aircraft hangers.
Water storage facilities and pumping stations required for fire suppression.
Buildings and structures required for national defense.
Buildings and structures that contain highly toxic and/or explosive materials in
sufficient quantity to pose a threat to the public.

PAGE 2 of 15
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.1 2.0
Member

D2.1 2.3 Site Class Soil Type (Sections 9.4.1.2.1, 9.4.1.2.2) [Section 11.4.2 & Chapter 20]:
The Site Class is related to the type of soil and rock strata that directly underlies the building site.
The Site Class ranges from A to F progressing from the stiffest to the softest strata. Table 2-2 lists
the various Site Classes and their corresponding strata.
Generally the structural engineer is responsible for determining the Site Class for a project. If the
structural engineers firm does not have a geotechnical engineer on staff, this job will be
contracted to a geotechnical firm. The Site Class is determined in accordance with the references
stated above from ASCE 7-98/02 and ASCE 7-05. The site profile is normally obtained by drilling
several cores on the property. If there is insufficient information concerning the soil properties,
then the default Site Class D is assigned to the project.
Table 2-2; Site Class vs. Soil Type (Table 9.4.1.2) [Table 20.3-1]
Site Class
Soil Type
A
B
C
D
E
Hard Rock
Rock
Very Dense Soil & Soft Rock
Stiff Soil (Default Site Class)
Soft Clay Soil
Liquefiable Soils, Quick Highly Sensitive Clays, Collapsible Weakly Cemented Soils, & etc.
These require site response analysis.
D2.1 2.4 Mapped Acceleration Parameters (Sections 9.4.1.2.4 & 9.4.1.2.5) [Sections 11.4.3
& 11.4.4 and Chapters 21 & 22]
The United States Geological Survey, USGS, has mapped all of the known fault lines in the United
States and its possessions. They have assigned ground level acceleration values to each location
based on the Maximum Considered Earthquake, MCE, for two earthquake periods, 0.2 sec and
1.0 sec, at 5% damping. The mapped values are listed in terms of %g, where 1g is 32.2 ft/sec2,
386.4 in/sec2, 9.8 m/sec2. The long period values are generally applied to the buildings and other

PAGE 3 of 15
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.1 2.0
Member

structures since they react more strongly to the long period excitation due to their relatively high
mass and low stiffness. The code specifies the use of short period values when evaluating nonstructural components, which include pipe and duct, as they respond more strongly to the short
period excitation due to their relatively low mass and high stiffness.
The Mapped Acceleration Parameters are available in ASCE 7-98/02 for 2000/2003 IBC and
ASCE 7-05 for 2006 IBC, or may be obtained from the USGS cataloged by ZIP Code. The short
period Mapped Acceleration Parameter is usually denoted as S S and the Long period Mapped
Acceleration Parameter is denoted as S1 . Note that the values for S S and S 1 may be different for
2000/2003 IBC and 2006 IBC. Be sure the correct values are being used for the code that is in
force in your jurisdiction.
Special Note: For the purpose of making preliminary estimates, the long and short period
mapped acceleration parameters for selected U. S. cities are given in Table 2.4, and for selected
international cities in Table 2.5. Please be aware that these values do not necessarily represent
the maximum acceleration values that may occur in the named cities. For the U. S. cities please
refer to the data compiled by the USGS by ZIP CODE. For international locations, local geological
assessments should be sought from reputable sources at that location.
The Site Class information is then used to determine the Design Spectral Acceleration
Parameters, S DS and S D 1 , for the short and long period MCE respectively. Equations 2-1 and 2-2
may be used to estimate the Design Spectral Acceleration Parameters.
S DS =
2
Fa S S
3
Equation 2-1 (9.4.1.2.4-1) [11.4-3]
And

PAGE 4 of 15
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.1 2.0
Member

S D1 =
2
Fv S 1
3
Equation 2-2 (9.4.1.2.4-2) [11.4-5]
Where:
Fa = the short period Site Coefficient which is listed in Table 2-5. The values for Fa which correspond
to values of S S that fall between those listed in Table 2-5 may be obtained through linear
interpolation.
Fv = the long period Site Coefficient which is listed in Table 2-6. The values for Fv which correspond
to values of S 1 that fall between those listed in Table 2-6 may be obtained through linear
interpolation.
S DS = the Design Short Period Spectral Acceleration Parameter which has been corrected for the
Site Class.
S D1 = the Design Long Period Spectral Acceleration Parameter which has been corrected for the
Site Class.
S S = the Mapped Short Period Acceleration Parameter for the MCE @ 5% damping.
S 1 = the Mapped Long Period Acceleration Parameter for the MCE @ 5% damping.
If not otherwise listed for the project, the structural engineer should be contacted for the values
of S DS and S D1 . These values are not only required to determine the design accelerations, but also
to determine the Seismic Design Category for the building, which will be discussed next.

PAGE 5 of 15
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.1 2.0
Member

Table S2-3; Mapped Acceleration Parameters for Selected U.S. Cities
2000/2003 IBC & 2006 IBC
State, City
ZIP
CODE
SS
S1
2000
2006
2003
2000
2006
2003
State, City
ZIP
CODE
SS
S1
2000
2000
2006
2006
2003
2003
Alabama
-------
------
------
------
------
Illinois
-------
------
------
------
------
Birmingham
35217
0.33
0.31
0.12
0.10
Chicago
60620
0.19
0.17
0.07
0.06
Mobile
36610
0.13
0.12
0.06
0.05
Moline
61265
0.14
0.14
0.06
0.06
Montgomery
36104
0.17
0.16
0.08
0.07
Peoria
61605
0.18
0.18
0.09
0.08
Arkansas
-------
------
------
------
------
Rock Island
61201
0.13
0.13
0.06
0.06
Little Rock
72205
0.48
0.50
0.18
0.16
Rockford
61108
0.17
0.15
0.06
0.06
Arizona
-------
------
------
------
------
Springfield
62703
0.27
0.29
0.12
0.11
Phoenix
85034
0.23
0.19
0.07
0.06
Indiana
-------
------
------
------
------
Tucson
85739
0.33
0.29
0.09
0.08
Evansville
47712
0.82
0.72
0.23
0.21
California
-------
------
------
------
------
Ft. Wayne
46835
0.17
0.15
0.06
0.06
Fresno
93706
0.76
0.78
0.30
0.29
Gary
46402
0.18
0.16
0.07
0.06
Los Angeles
90026
1.55
2.25
0.60
0.83
Indianapolis
46260
0.18
0.19
0.09
0.08
Oakland
94621
1.98
1.97
0.87
0.77
South Bend
46637
0.12
0.12
0.06
0.05
Sacramento
95823
0.59
0.64
0.23
0.25
Kansas
-------
------
------
------
------
San Diego
92101
1.61
1.62
0.86
0.82
Kansas City
66103
0.12
0.13
0.06
0.06
San Francisco
94114
1.50
1.61
0.86
0.82
Topeka
66614
0.19
0.17
0.06
0.05
San Jose
95139
2.17
1.60
0.78
0.60
Wichita
67217
0.14
0.14
0.06
0.05
Colorado
-------
------
------
------
------
Kentucky
-------
------
------
------
------
Colorado Springs
80913
0.18
0.22
0.06
0.06
Ashland
41101
0.22
0.19
0.09
0.07
Denver
80239
0.19
0.21
0.06
0.06
Covington
41011
0.19
0.18
0.09
0.08
Connecticut
-------
------
------
------
------
Louisville
40202
0.25
0.25
0.12
0.10
Bridgeport
06606
0.34
0.27
0.09
0.06
Louisiana
-------
------
------
------
------
Hartford
06120
0.27
0.24
0.09
0.06
Baton Rouge
70807
0.14
0.12
0.06
0.05
New Haven
06511
0.29
0.25
0.08
0.06
New Orleans
70116
0.13
0.11
0.06
0.05
Waterbury
06702
0.29
0.25
0.09
0.06
Shreveport
71106
0.17
0.15
0.08
0.07
Florida
-------
------
------
------
------
Massachusetts
-------
------
------
------
------
Ft. Lauderdale
33328
0.07
0.06
0.03
0.02
Boston
02127
0.33
0.28
0.09
0.07
Jacksonville
32222
0.14
0.14
0.07
0.06
Lawrence
01843
0.38
0.33
0.09
0.07
Miami
33133
0.06
0.05
0.02
0.02
Lowell
01851
0.36
0.31
0.09
0.07
St. Petersburg
33709
0.08
0.07
0.04
0.03
New Bedford
02740
0.26
0.22
0.08
0.06
Tampa
33635
0.08
0.07
0.03
0.03
Springfield
01107
0.26
0.23
0.09
0.07
Georgia
-------
------
------
------
------
Worchester
01602
0.27
0.24
0.09
0.07
Atlanta
30314
0.26
0.23
0.11
0.09
Maryland
-------
------
------
------
------
Augusta
30904
0.42
0.38
0.15
0.12
Baltimore
21218
0.20
0.17
0.06
0.05
Columbia
31907
0.17
0.15
0.09
0.07
Maine
-------
------
------
------
------
Savannah
31404
0.42
0.43
0.15
0.13
Augusta
04330
0.33
0.30
0.10
0.08
Iowa
-------
------
------
------
------
Portland
04101
0.37
0.32
0.10
0.08
Council Bluffs
41011
0.19
0.18
0.09
0.08
Michigan
-------
------
------
------
------
Davenport
52803
0.13
0.13
0.06
0.06
Detroit
48207
0.12
0.12
0.05
0.04
Des Moines
50310
0.07
0.08
0.04
0.04
Flint
48506
0.09
0.09
0.04
0.04
Iowa
-------
------
------
------
------
Grand Rapids
49503
0.09
0.09
0.04
0.04
Boise
83705
0.35
0.30
0.11
0.10
Kalamazoo
49001
0.12
0.11
0.05
0.05
Pocatello
83201
0.60
0.63
0.18
0.19
Lansing
48910
0.11
0.10
0.04
0.04

PAGE 6 of 15
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.1 2.0
Member

Table 2-3 Continued; Mapped Acceleration Parameters for Selected U.S. Cities
2000/2003 IBC & 2006 IBC
State, City
ZIP
CODE
SS
S1
2000
2006
2003
2000
2006
2003
State, City
ZIP
CODE
SS
S1
2000
2000
2006
2006
2003
2003
Minnesota
-------
------
------
------
------
Raleigh
27610
0.22
0.21
0.10
0.08
Duluth
55803
0.06
0.06
0.02
0.02
Winston-Salem
27106
0.28
0.24
0.12
0.09
Minneapolis
55422
0.06
0.06
0.03
0.03
North Dakota
-------
------
------
------
------
Rochester
55901
0.06
0.06
0.03
0.03
Fargo
58103
0.07
0.08
0.02
0.02
St. Paul
55111
0.06
0.06
0.03
0.03
Grand Forks
58201
0.05
0.06
0.02
0.02
Missouri
-------
------
------
------
------
Ohio
-------
------
------
------
------
Carthage
64836
0.16
0.17
0.09
0.08
Akron
44312
0.18
0.17
0.06
0.05
Columbia
65202
0.19
0.21
0.10
0.09
Canton
44702
0.16
0.14
0.06
0.05
Jefferson City
65109
0.22
0.23
0.11
0.10
Cincinnati
45245
0.19
0.18
0.09
0.07
Joplin
64801
0.15
0.16
0.08
0.08
Cleveland
44130
0.20
0.19
0.06
0.05
Kansas City
64108
0.15
0.13
0.06
0.06
Columbus
43217
0.17
0.15
0.07
0.06
Springfield
65801
0.21
0.22
0.10
0.10
Dayton
45440
0.21
0.18
0.08
0.07
St. Joseph
64501
0.12
0.12
0.05
0.05
Springfield
45502
0.26
0.21
0.08
0.07
0.05
St. Louis
63166
0.59
0.58
0.19
0.17
Toledo
43608
0.17
0.16
0.06
Mississippi
-------
------
------
------
------
Youngstown
44515
0.17
0.16
0.06
0.05
Jackson
39211
0.19
0.20
0.10
0.09
Oklahoma
-------
------
------
------
------
Montana
-------
------
------
------
------
Oklahoma City
73145
0.34
0.33
0.09
0.07
Billings
59101
0.16
0.17
0.06
0.07
Tulsa
74120
0.16
0.16
0.07
0.07
Butte
59701
0.74
0.65
0.21
0.20
Oregon
-------
------
------
------
-----0.34
Great Falls
59404
0.29
0.26
0.09
0.09
Portland
97222
1.05
0.99
0.35
Nebraska
-------
------
------
------
------
Salem
97301
1.00
0.80
0.4
0.34
Lincoln
68502
0.18
0.18
0.05
0.05
Pennsylvania
-------
------
------
------
------
Omaha
68144
0.13
0.13
0.04
0.04
Allentown
18104
0.29
0.26
0.08
0.06
Nevada
-------
------
------
------
------
Bethlehem
18015
0.31
0.27
0.08
0.07
Las Vegas
89106
0.64
0.57
0.19
0.18
Erie
16511
0.17
0.16
0.05
0.05
Reno
89509
1.36
1.92
0.50
0.77
Harrisburg
17111
0.23
0.20
0.07
0.05
New Mexico
-------
------
------
------
------
Philadelphia
19125
0.33
0.27
0.08
0.06
Albuquerque
87105
0.63
0.59
0.19
0.18
Pittsburgh
15235
0.13
0.13
0.06
0.05
Santa Fe
87507
0.62
0.54
0.19
0.17
Reading
19610
0.30
0.26
0.08
0.06
New York
-------
------
------
------
------
Scranton
18504
0.23
0.20
0.08
0.06
Albany
12205
0.28
0.24
0.09
0.07
Rhode Island
-------
------
------
------
------
Binghamton
13903
0.19
0.17
0.07
0.06
Providence
02907
0.27
0.23
0.08
0.06
Buffalo
14222
0.32
0.28
0.07
0.06
South Carolina
-------
------
------
------
-----0.56
Elmira
14905
0.17
0.15
0.06
0.05
Charleston
29406
1.60
2.19
0.45
New York
10014
0.43
0.36
0.09
0.07
Columbia
29203
0.60
0.55
0.19
0.15
Niagara Falls
14303
0.31
0.28
0.07
0.06
South Dakota
-------
------
------
------
-----0.04
Rochester
14619
0.25
0.21
0.07
0.06
Rapid City
57703
0.16
0.17
0.04
Schenectady
12304
0.28
0.24
0.09
0.09
Sioux Falls
57104
0.11
0.11
0.04
0.03
Syracuse
13219
0.19
0.18
0.08
0.06
Tennessee
-------
------
------
------
------
Utica
13501
0.25
0.22
0.09
0.07
Chattanooga
37415
0.52
0.46
0.14
0.12
North Carolina
-------
------
------
------
------
Knoxville
37920
0.59
0.53
0.15
0.12
Charlotte
28216
0.35
0.32
0.14
0.11
Memphis
38109
1.40
1.40
0.42
0.38
Greensboro
27410
0.26
0.23
0.11
0.08
Nashville
49503
0.09
0.09
0.04
0.04

PAGE 7 of 15
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.1 2.0
Member

Table 2-3 Continued; Mapped Acceleration Parameters for Selected U.S. Cities
2000/2003 IBC & 2006 IBC
State, City
Texas
Amarillo
ZIP
CODE
------79111
SS
S1
2000
2006
2003
2000
2006
2003
------
------
------
0.17
0.18
0.05
0.04
------
Austin
78703
0.09
0.08
0.04
0.03
0.04
Beaumont
77705
0.12
0.10
0.05
Corpus Christi
78418
0.10
0.08
0.02
0.02
Dallas
75233
0.12
0.11
0.06
0.05
El Paso
79932
0.37
0.33
0.11
0.11
Ft. Worth
76119
0.11
0.11
0.06
0.05
Houston
77044
0.11
0.10
0.05
0.04
Lubbock
79424
0.10
0.11
0.03
0.03
San Antonio
78235
0.14
0.12
0.03
0.03
Waco
76704
0.10
0.09
0.05
0.04
------
Utah
-------
------
------
------
Salt Lake City
84111
1.82
1.71
0.78
0.09
Virginia
-------
------
------
------
------
0.13
0.05
Norfolk
23504
0.12
0.06
Richmond
23233
0.32
0.25
0.09
0.06
Roanoke
24017
0.30
0.26
0.10
0.08
Vermont
-------
------
------
------
------
Burlington
05401
0.47
0.40
0.13
0.10
Washington
-------
------
------
------
------
Seattle
98108
1.56
1.57
0.54
0.54
Spokane
99201
0.38
0.40
0.09
0.11
Tacoma
98402
1.24
1.22
0.40
0.42
Washington, D.C.
-------
------
------
------
------
Washington
20002
0.18
0.15
0.06
0.05
Wisconsin
-------
------
------
------
------
Green Bay
54302
0.07
0.06
0.03
0.03
Kenosha
53140
0.14
0.12
0.05
0.05
0.04
Madison
53714
0.12
0.11
0.05
Milwaukee
53221
0.12
0.11
0.05
0.05
Racine
53402
0.13
0.12
0.05
0.05
Superior
54880
0.06
0.06
0.02
0.2
West Virginia
-------
------
------
------
------
Charleston
25303
0.21
0.19
0.08
0.07
Huntington
25704
0.23
0.20
0.09
0.07
Wyoming
-------
------
------
------
------
Casper
82601
0.38
0.39
0.08
0.08
Cheyenne
82001
0.19
0.20
0.06
0.05
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
-------------------------
---------------------
---------------------
---------------------
---------------------

PAGE 8 of 15
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.1 2.0
Member

Table 2-4; Mapped Acceleration Parameters for Selected International Cities
UFC 3-310-03A (1 March 2005)
Country, City
SS
S1
Country, City
SS
S1
Country, City
SS
S1
-----------
-----------
Kenya
------
------
South Africa
------
------
Algeria
Nairobi
0.62
0.28
Cape Town
1.24
0.56
Alger
1.24
0.56
Lesotho
------
------
Durban
0.62
0.28
Oran
1.24
0.56
Maseru
0.62
0.28
Johannesburg
0.62
0.28
Angola
------
------
Liberia
------
------
Natal
0.31
0.14
Luanda
0.06
0.06
Monrovia
0.31
0.14
Pretoria
0.62
0.28
------
AFRICA
Benin
------
------
Libya
------
------
Swaziland
------
Cotonou
0.06
0.06
Tripoli
0.62
0.28
Mbabane
0.62
0.28
Botswana
------
------
Wheelus AFB
0.62
0.28
Tanzania
------
-----0.28
Gaborone
0.06
0.06
Malagasy Republic
------
------
Dar es Salaam
0.62
Burundi
------
------
Tananarive
0.06
0.06
Zanzibar
0.62
0.28
Bujumbura
1.24
0.56
Malawi
------
------
Togo
------
------
Cameroon
------
------
Blantyre
1.24
0.56
Lome
0.31
0.14
Douala
0.06
0.06
Lilongwe
1.24
0.56
Tunisia
------
------
Yaounde
0.06
0.06
Zomba
1.24
0.56
Tunis
1.24
0.56
Cape Verde
------
------
Mali
------
------
Uganda
------
------
Praia
0.06
0.06
Bamako
0.06
0.06
Kampala
0.62
0.28
Central African Republic
------
------
Mauritania
------
------
Upper Volta
------
------
Bangui
0.06
0.06
Nouakchott
0.06
0.06
Ougadougou
0.06
0.06
Chad
------
------
Mauritius
------
------
Zaire
------
------
Ndjamena
0.06
0.06
Port Louis
0.06
0.06
Bukavu
1.24
0.56
Congo
------
------
Morocco
------
------
Kinshasa
0.06
0.06
Brazzaville
0.06
0.06
Casablanca
0.62
0.28
Lubumbashi
0.62
0.28
Djibouti
------
------
Port Lyautey
0.31
0.14
Zambia
------
------
Djibouti
1.24
0.56
Rabat
0.62
0.28
Lusaka
0.62
0.28
Egypt
------
------
Tangier
1.24
0.56
Zimbabwe
------
------
Alexandria
0.62
0.28
Mozambique
------
------
Cairo
0.62
0.28
Maputo
0.62
0.28
------
Harare
ASIA
Afghanistan
1.24
0.56
-----------
-----------
Port Said
0.62
0.28
Niger
------
Equatorial Guinea
------
------
Niamey
0.06
0.06
Kabul
1.65
0.75
Malabo
0.06
0.06
Nigeria
------
------
Bahrain
------
------
Ethiopia
------
------
Ibadan
0.06
0.06
Manama
0.06
0.06
Addis Ababa
1.24
0.56
Kaduna
0.06
0.06
Bangladesh
------
------
Asmara
1.24
0.56
Lagos
0.06
0.06
Dacca
1.24
0.56
Gabon
------
------
Republic of Rwanda
------
------
Brunei
------
------
Libreville
0.06
0.06
Kigali
1.24
0.56
Bandar Seri Begawan
0.31
0.14
Gambia
------
------
Senegal
------
------
Burma
------
-----0.56
Banjul
0.06
0.06
Dakar
0.06
0.06
Mandalay
1.24
Guinea
------
------
Seychelles
------
------
Rangoon
1.24
0.56
Bissau
0.31
0.14
Victoria
0.06
0.06
China
------
------
Conakry
0.06
0.06
Sierra Leone
------
------
Canton
0.62
0.28
Ivory Coast
------
------
Freetown
0.06
0.06
Chengdu
1.24
0.56
Abidijan
0.06
0.06
Somalia
------
------
Nanking
0.62
0.28
-----------------------------------
------
------
Mogadishu
0.06
0.06
Peking
1.65
0.75

PAGE 9 of 15
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.1 2.0
Member

Table 2-4 Continued; Mapped Acceleration Parameters for Selected International Cities
UFC 3-310-03A (1 March 2005)
SS
S1
Country, City
SS
S1
Country, City
SS
S1
-----------
-----------
Jordan
------
------
Thailand
------
------
Amman
1.24
0.56
Bangkok
0.31
0.14
Shanghai
0.62
0.28
Korea
------
------
Chinmg Mai
0.62
0.28
Shengyang
1.65
0.75
Kwangju
0.31
0.14
Songkhia
0.06
0.06
Tibwa
1.65
0.75
Kimhae
0.31
0.14
Udom
0.31
0.14
Country, City
ASIA
China
Tsingtao
1.24
0.56
Pusan
0.31
0.14
Turkey
------
------
Wuhan
0.62
0.28
Seoul
0.06
0.06
Adana
0.62
0.28
Cyprus
------
------
Kuwait
------
------
Ankara
0.62
0.28
Nicosia
1.24
0.56
Kuwait
0.31
0.14
Istanbul
1.65
0.75
Hong Kong
------
------
Laos
------
------
Izmir
1.65
0.75
Hong Kong
0.62
0.28
Vientiane
0.31
0.14
Karamursel
1.24
0.56
India
------
------
Lebanon
------
------
United Arab Emirates
------
------
Bombay
1.24
0.56
Beirut
1.24
0.56
Abu Dhabi
0.06
0.06
Calcutta
0.62
0.28
Malaysia
------
------
Dubai
0.06
0.06
Madras
0.31
0.14
Kuala Lumpur
0.31
0.14
Viet Nam
------
------
New Delhi
1.24
0.56
Nepal
------
------
Ho Chi Min City
0.06
0.06
Indonesia
------
------
Kathmandu
1.65
0.75
Yemen Arab Republic
------
------
Bandung
1.65
0.75
Oman
------
------
Sanaa
1.24
0.56
Jakarta
1.65
0.75
Muscat
0.62
0.28
-----------
-----------
Medan
1.24
0.56
Pakistan
------
------
ATLANTIC OCEAN AREA

Azorea
Surabaya
1.65
0.75
Islamabad
1.68
0.65
All Locations
0.62
0.28
Iran
------
------
Karachi
1.65
0.75
Bermuda
------
------
Isfahan
1.24
0.56
Lahore
0.62
0.28
Shiraz
1.24
0.56
Peshawar
1.65
0.75
------
All Locations
CARIBBEAN SEA
Bahama Islands
0.31
0.14
-----------
-----------
Tabriz
1.65
0.75
Quatar
------
Tehran
1.65
0.75
Doha
0.06
0.06
All Locations
0.31
0.14
Iraq
------
------
Saudi Arabia
------
------
Cuba
------
------
Baghdad
1.24
0.56
Al Batin
0.31
0.14
All Locations
0.62
0.28
Basra
0.31
0.14
Dhahran
0.31
0.14
Dominican Republic
------
------
Israel
------
------
Jiddah
0.62
0.28
Santo Domingo
1.24
0.56
Haifa
1.24
0.56
Khamis Mushayf
0.31
0.14
French West Indies
------
------
Jerusalem
1.24
0.56
Riyadh
0.06
0.06
Martinique
1.24
0.56
------
Tel Aviv
1.24
0.56
Singapore
------
------
Grenada
------
Japan
------
------
All Locations
0.31
0.14
Saint Georges
1.24
0.56
Fukuoka
1.24
0.56
South Yemen
------
------
Haiti
------
------
Itazuke AFB
1.24
0.56
Aden City
1.24
0.56
Port au Prince
1.24
0.56
Misawa AFB
1.24
0.56
Sri Lanka
------
------
Jamaica
------
------
Naha, Okinawa
1.65
0.75
Colombo
0.06
0.06
Kingston
1.24
0.56
Osaka/Kobe
1.65
0.75
Syria
------
------
Leeward Islands
------
------
Sapporo
1.24
0.56
Aleppo
1.24
0.56
All Locations
1.24
0.56
Tokyo
1.65
0.75
Damascus
1.24
0.56
Puerto Rico
------
------
Wakkanai
1.24
0.56
Taiwan
------
------
All Locations
0.83
0.38
Yokohama
1.65
0.75
All Locations
1.65
0.75
Trinidad & Tobago
------
------
Yokota
1.65
0.75
--------------------
------
------
All Locations
1.24
0.56

PAGE 10 of 15
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.1 2.0
Member

UFC 3-310-03A (1 March 2005)
Country, City
SS
S1
Country, City
SS
S1
Country, City
SS
S1
Belize
------
------
Denmark
------
------
Trieste
1.24
0.56
Beimopan
0.62
0.28
Copenhagen
0.31
0.14
Turin
0.62
0.28
Canal Zone
------
------
Finland
------
------
Luxembourg
------
------
All Locations
0.62
0.28
Helsinki
0.31
0.14
Luxembourg
0.31
0.14
Costa Rica
------
------
France
------
------
Malta
------
------
San Jose
1.24
0.56
Bordeaux
0.62
0.28
Valletta
0.62
0.28
El Salvador
------
------
Lyon
0.31
0.14
Netherlands
------
------
San Slavador
1.65
0.75
Marseille
1.24
0.56
All Locations
0.06
0.06
Guatemala
------
------
Nice
1.24
0.56
Norway
------
------
Guatemala
1.65
0.75
Strasbourg
0.62
0.28
Oslo
0.62
0.28
Honduras
------
------
Germany
------
------
Poland
------
-----0.28
Tegucigalpa
1.24
0.56
Berlin
0.06
0.06
Krakow
0.62
Nicaragua
------
------
Bonn
0.62
0.28
Poznan
0.31
0.14
Managua
1.65
0.75
Bremen
0.06
0.06
Waraszawa
0.31
0.14
Panama
------
------
Dsseldorf
0.31
0.14
Portugal
------
------
Colon
1.24
0.56
Frankfurt
0.62
0.28
Lisbon
1.65
0.75
Galeta
0.83
0.38
Hamburg
0.06
0.06
Oporto
1.24
0.56
Panama
1.24
0.56
Munich
0.31
0.14
Romania
------
------
Mexico
------
------
Stuttgart
0.62
0.28
Bucharest
1.24
0.56
Ciudad Juarez
0.62
0.28
Vaihigen
0.62
0.28
Spain
------
------
Guadalajara
1.24
0.56
Greece
------
------
Barcelona
0.62
0.28
Hermosillo
1.24
0.56
Athens
1.24
0.56
Bilbao
0.62
0.28
Matamoros
0.06
0.06
Kavalla
1.65
0.75
Madrid
0.06
0.06
Mazatlan
0.60
0.28
Makri
1.65
0.56
Rota
0.62
0.28
Merida
0.06
0.06
Rhodes
1.24
0.75
Seville
0.62
0.28
Mexico City
1.24
0.56
Sauda Bay
1.65
0.56
Sweden
------
------
Monterrey
0.06
0.06
Thessaloniki
1.65
0.56
Goteborg
0.62
0.28
Nuevo Laredo
0.06
0.06
Hungary
------
------
Stockholm
0.31
0.14
------
1.24
0.56
Budapest
0.62
0.28
Switzerland
------
-----------
-----------
Iceland
------
------
Bern
0.62
0.28
Keflavick
1.24
0.56
Geneva
0.31
0.14
Tirana
1.24
0.56
Reykjavik
1.65
0.75
Zurich
0.62
0.28
Austria
------
------
Ireland
------
------
United Kingdom
------
------
Salzburg
0.62
0.28
Dublin
0.06
0.06
Belfast
0.06
0.06
Vienna
0.62
0.28
Italy
------
------
Edinburgh
0.31
0.14
Belgium
------
------
Aviano AFB
1.24
0.56
Edzell
0.31
0.14
Antwerp
0.31
0.14
Brindisi
0.06
0.06
Glasgow/Renfrew
0.31
0.14
0.14
Tijuana
EUROPE
Albania
Brussels
0.62
0.28
Florence
1.24
0.56
Hamilton
0.31
Bulgaria
------
------
Genoa
1.24
0.56
Liverpool
0.31
0.14
Sofia
1.24
0.56
Milan
0.62
0.28
London
0.62
0.28
Czechoslovakia
------
------
Naples
1.24
0.56
Londonderry
0.31
0.14
Bratislava
0.62
0.28
Palermo
1.24
0.56
Thurso
0.31
0.14
Prague
0.31
0.14
Rome
0.62
0.28
U. S. S. R.
------
------
--------------------
------
------
Sicily
1.24
0.56
Kiev
0.06
0.06

PAGE 11 of 15
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.1 2.0
Member

UFC 3-310-03A (1 March 2005)
Country, City
SS
S1
Country, City
SS
S1
Country, City
SS
S1
U. S. S. R.
------
------
Valparaiso
1.65
0.75
Baguio
1.24
0.56
Leningrad
0.06
0.06
Colombia
------
------
Samoa
------
------
Moscow
0.06
0.06
Bogot
1.24
0.56
All Locations
1.24
0.56
Yugoslavia
------
------
Ecuador
------
------
Wake Island
------
------
Belgrade
0.62
0.28
Quito
1.65
0.75
All Locations
0.06
0.06
Zagreb
1.24
0.56
Guayaquil
1.24
0.56
NORTH AMERICA
Greenland
-----------
-----------
Paraguay
------
------
Asuncion
0.06
0.06
All Locations
0.31
0.14
Peru
------
------
Canada
------
------
Lima
1.65
0.75
Argentia NAS
0.62
0.28
Piura
1.65
0.75
------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Calgary, Alb
0.31
0.14
Uruguay
------
Churchill, Man
0.06
0.06
Montevideo
0.06
0.06
Cold Lake, Alb
0.31
0.14
Venezuela
------
------
Edmonton, Alb
0.31
0.14
Maracaibo
0.62
0.28
East Harmon AFB
0.62
0.28
Caracas
1.65
0.75
PACIFIC OCEAN AREA

Australia
-----------
-----------
Fort Williams, Ont.
0.06
0.06
Frobisher N. W. Ter.
0.06
0.06
Goose Airport
0.31
0.14
Brisbane
0.31
0.14
Halifax
0.31
0.14
Canberra
0.31
0.14
0.14
Montreal, Quebec
1.24
0.56
Melbourne
0.31
Ottawa, Ont.
0.31
0.28
Perth
0.31
0.14
St. Johns, Nfld.
1.24
0.56
Sydney
0.31
0.14
Toronto, Ont.
0.31
0.14
Caroline Islands
------
------
Vancouver
1.24
0.56
Koror, Paulau, Is.
0.62
0.28
Winnipeg, Man.
0.31
0.14
Ponape
0.06
0.06
SOUTH AMERICA
Argentina
-----------
-----------
Fiji
------
------
Suva
1.24
0.56
Buenos Aires
0.25
0.10
Johnson Island
------
------
Brazil
------
------
All Locations
0.31
0.14
Belem
0.06
0.06
Mariana Islands
------
------
Belo Horizonte
0.06
0.06
Guam
1.24
0.56
0.56
Brasilia
0.06
0.06
Saipan
1.24
Manaus
0.06
0.06
Tinian
1.24
0.56
Porto Allegre
0.06
0.06
Marshall Islands
------
------
Recife
0.06
0.06
All Locations
0.31
0.14
Rio de Janeiro
0.06
0.06
New Zealand
------
-----0.56
Salvador
0.06
0.06
Auckland
1.24
Sao Paulo
0.31
0.14
Wellington
1.65
0.75
Bolivia
------
------
Papua New Guinea
------
------
La Paz
1.24
0.56
Port Moresby
1.65
0.75
Santa Cruz
0.31
0.14
Philippine Islands
------
------
Chile
------
------
Cebu
1.65
0.75
Santiago
1.65
0.75
Manila
1.65
0.75

PAGE 12 of 15
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.1 2.0
Member

Table 2-5; Short Period Site Coefficient, Fa (Table 9.4.1.2.4a) [Table 11.4-1]
Site
Class
Mapped MCE Short Period Spectral Response Acceleration Parameter

(Linear Interpolation Is Permitted)
SS 0.25
SS=0.50
SS=0.75
SS=1.00
SS 1.25
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.2
1.2
1.1
1.0
1.0
1.6
1.4
1.2
1.1
1.0
2.5
1.7
1.2
0.9
0.9
These values to be determined by site response analysis.
Table 2-6; Long Period Site Coefficient, Fv (Table 9.4.1.2.4b) [Table 11.4-2]
Site
Class
Mapped MCE Long Period Spectral Response Acceleration Parameter

S1 0.10
S1 = 0.20
S1 = 0.30
S1 = 0.40
S1 0.50
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.7
1.6
1.5
1.4
1.3
2.4
2.0
1.8
1.6
1.5
3.5
3.2
2.8
2.4
2.4
D2.1 2.5 Seismic Design Category (Section 9.4.2.1) [Section 11.6]:
This parameter is of great importance to everyone involved with MEP systems. The Seismic
Design Category to which a building has been assigned will determine whether seismic restraints
are required or not, and if they qualify for exemption, which MEP components may be exempted,
and which will need to have seismic restraints selected and installed. The MEP components within

PAGE 13 of 15
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.1 2.0
Member

a building will be assigned to the same Seismic Design Category as the building itself. There are
six Seismic Design Categories, A, B, C, D, E, and F. The level of restraint required increases from
Seismic Design Category A through F. Up through Seismic Design Category D, the Seismic
Design Category to which a building or structure is assigned is determined though the use of
Tables 2-6 and 2-7.
To determine the Seismic Design Category both the Long ( S D1 ) and Short ( S DS ) Period Design
Response Acceleration Parameter must be determined. The most stringent Seismic Design
Category, resulting from the two acceleration parameters, will be assigned to the project.
For Occupancy I, II, or III (Seismic Use Group I or II) structures, if the Mapped Spectral
Response Acceleration Parameter is greater than or equal to 0.75, S1 0.75 , then the structure will
be assigned to Seismic Design Category E. For Occupancy Category IV (Seismic Use Group III)
structures, if the Mapped Spectral Response Acceleration Parameter is greater than or equal to
0.75, S1 0.75 , then the structure will be assigned to Seismic Design Category F. To ensure
consistency, the Seismic Design Category should be determined by the structural engineer.
Table 2-7; Seismic Design Category Based on the Short Period Design
Response Acceleration Parameter (Table 9.4.2.1a) [Table 11.6-1]
Occupancy Category
(Seismic Use Group)
Value of SDS
SDS < 0.167
I or II
(I)
III
(II)
IV
(III)
0.167
SDS < 0.33
0.33
SDS < 0.50
0.50
SDS

PAGE 14 of 15
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.1 2.0
Member

Table 2-8; Seismic Design Category Based on the Long Period Design
Response Acceleration Parameter (Table 9.4.2.1b) [Table 11.6-2]
Occupancy Category
(Seismic Design Category)
Value of SD1
SD1 < 0.067
I or II
(I)
III
(II)
IV
(III)
0.067
SD1 < 0.133
0.133
SD1 < 0.20
0.20
SD1
D2.1 2.6 Summary:
The following parameters will be required by the design professionals having responsibility for
MEP systems in a building, and should be determined by the structural engineer of record.
1. Occupancy Category (Seismic Use Group for 2000/2003 IBC): This defines the building use
and specifies which buildings are required for emergency response or disaster recovery.
2. Seismic Design Category: This determines whether or not seismic restraint is required.
3. Short Period Design Response Acceleration Parameter ( S DS ): This value is used to compute
the horizontal seismic force used to design and/or select seismic restraints required.
These parameters should be repeated in the specification and drawing package for the particular
system, mechanical, electrical, or plumbing, in question.

PAGE 15 of 15
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.1 2.0
Member

COMPONENT IMPORTANCE FACTOR
MEP components and systems are categorized in ASCE 7-98/02 and ASCE 7-05 as nonstructural components. There are just two values for the Component Importance Factors for MEP
components, 1.0 and 1.5, which are not directly linked to the importance factor for the building
structure. The Component Importance Factor is designated as I P in the body of the code. All MEP
components must be assigned a component importance factor. The design professional that has
responsibility for the MEP system in question is also responsible for assigning the Component
Importance Factor to that system.
D2.1 3.2 Criteria for Assigning a Component Importance Factor (Sections 9.6.1 and
9.6.1.5) [Section 13.1.3]1:
For MEP systems, the Component Importance Factor ( I P ) assigned to the components within the
system shall be determined as follows.
1. If the MEP system is required to remain in place and function for life-safety purposes
following and earthquake the importance factor assigned to the MEP system and its
components shall be 1.5. Some examples of this type of system would be;
a. Fire sprinkler piping and fire suppression systems.
b. Smoke removal and fresh air ventilation systems.
c. Systems required for maintaining the proper air pressure in patient hospital rooms to
prevent the transmission of infectious diseases.
d. Systems that maintain proper air pressure, temperature, and humidity in surgical suites,
bio-hazard labs, and clean rooms.
1
References in brackets (Sections 9.6.1 and 9.6.1.5) and [Section 13.1.3] apply to sections, tables, and/or equations in
ASCE 7-98/02 and ASCE 7-05 respectively which forms the basis for the seismic provisions in 2000/2003 IBC and 2006
IBC respectively..
PIPE AND DUCT COMPONENT IMPORTANCE FACTOR

PAGE 1 of 3
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.1 3.0
Member

e. Medical gas lines.
f. Steam lines or high pressure hot water lines.
2. If the MEP system contains or is used to transport hazardous materials, or materials that are
toxic if released in quantities that exceed the exempted limits a Component Importance
Factor of 1.5 shall be assigned to that MEP system and its components. Examples are as
follows.
a. Systems using natural gas.
b. Systems requiring fuel oil.
c. Systems used to exhaust laboratory fume hoods.
d. Boilers, furnaces and flue systems.
e. Systems that are used to ventilate bio-hazard areas and infectious patient rooms.
f. Chemical or by-product systems which are required for industrial processes.
3. If the MEP system is in or attached to a building that has been assigned to Occupancy
Category IV (Seismic Use Group III), i.e. essential or critical facilities, and is required for the
continued operation of that facility following an earthquake, then a Component Importance
Factor of 1.5 shall be assigned to that system and its components. Hospitals, emergency
response centers, police stations, fire stations, and etc. fall in Occupancy Category IV. The
failure of any system could cause the portion of the building it serves to be evacuated and
unusable would cause that system and its components to be assigned a Component
Importance Factor of 1.5. Even the failure of domestic water lines can flood a building and
render it uninhabitable. So, all of the items listed above under items 1 and 2 would apply to
facilities in Occupancy Category IV.
4. If the MEP system that is located in or attached to an Occupancy Category IV facility and its
failure would impair the operation of that facility, then a Component Importance Factor of 1.5
shall be assigned to that MEP system and its components. This implies that any MEP system
or component that could be assigned a Component Importance Factor of 1.0 that is located
above an MEP system or component that has been assigned a Component Importance
Factor of 1.5 must be reassigned to a Component Importance Factor of 1.5.

PAGE 2 of 3
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.1 3.0
Member

5. All other MEP systems that are not covered under items 1, 2, 3, or 4 may be assigned a
Component Importance Factor of 1.0.
D2.1 3.3 Summary:
The Component Importance Factor is very important to the designer responsible for selecting and
certifying the seismic restraints for an MEP system or component. This factor is a direct multiplier
for the horizontal seismic design force, which shall be discussed in a later section. The
Component Importance Factor will also be a key indicator as to whether a particular component
will qualify for and exemption or not. If a Component Importance Factor has not been assigned to
an MEP system, the designer responsible for selecting the seismic restraints must assume that
the Component Importance Factor is equal to 1.5. If the MEP system actually could be assigned a
Component Importance Factor of 1.0, this could result in a large increase in the size and number
of restraints required along with a corresponding increase in the cost for the system.
It is in the best interest of the design professionals responsible for an MEP system to properly
assign the Component Importance Factor to that MEP system. The Component Importance Factor
for each MEP system and component should be clearly indicated on the drawings that are
distributed to other design professionals, contractors, suppliers, and building officials.

PAGE 3 of 3
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.1 3.0
Member

GENERAL EXEMPTIONS AND REQUIREMENTS
The International Building Codes (IBCs) allow certain exemptions to be made for MEP systems
and components from the need for seismic restraint. These exemptions are based on the Seismic
Design Category, the Component Importance Factor, and the size and weight, of the MEP
components.
There are further general provisions in the IBC pertaining to MEP components that must be
acknowledged at the outset of a project. These are provisions ranging from the upper bound size
for an MEP component in order for it to be considered as a non-structural component to the
component certifications and documentation required.
This section will present the general exemptions for MEP systems and components and discuss
the general requirements that apply to them.
D2.1 4.2 Exemptions for Seismic Design Categories A and B (Section 9.6.1-1 and 9.6.1-3)
[Section 13.1.4-1 and 13.1.4-2]1:
MEP systems and their components that are located in or on buildings that have been assigned to
Seismic Design Categories A and B are exempt from the requirements for seismic restraints.
These two exemptions point out the need for having the correct seismic deign in formation for the
project available to all of the design professionals and contractors during the bidding stage of the
project. Being able to use these exemptions can save the MEP contractors as much as 10% to
15% in their costs.
References in brackets (Section 9.6.1-1 and 9.6.1-2) [Section 13.1.4-1 and 13.1.4-2] apply to sections, tables, and/or
equations in ASCE 7-98/02 and ASCE 7-05 respectively, which forms the basis for the seismic provisions in 2000/2003
IBC and 2006 IBC respectively.

PAGE 1 of 10
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.1 4.0
Member

For example, a critical piece of information required at the outset is the Site Class. If the Site
Class has not been determined by a qualified geotechnical engineer, then Site Class D must be
assumed. The resulting combination of the mapped acceleration parameters and soil profile of
Site Class D may force the project to be assigned to Seismic Design Category C which in turn
forces the requirement for seismic restraints. If instead the Site Class had been determined to be
Site Class B by a qualified geotechnical engineer, then the project may have been found to fall
into Seismic Design Category A or B, thus eliminating the need for seismic restraints for MEP
systems and components.
D2.1 4.3 Exemptions for Seismic Design Category C (Section 9.6.1-4) [Section 13.1.4-3]:
MEP systems and components that have been assigned to Seismic Design Category C, and that
have been assigned a Component Importance Factor of 1.0, are exempt from the requirements for
seismic restraints. In this case it is very important that the design professionals responsible for the
various MEP systems and components assign the correct Component Importance Factors to
those systems and components. If no Component Importance Factor is assigned, the installing
contractor should prudently assume that the Component Importance Factor is equal to 1.5, and
provide restraints for that system or component. This is particularly true of duct runs where it is
very likely that the ventilation components may also be required for smoke control.
It is also critical to know which MEP systems and components have a component Importance
Factor of 1.0 and which ones have a Component Importance Factor of 1.5. To the extent possible,
those with Component Importance Factors equal to 1.5 should be installed above those with
Component Importance Factors equal to 1.0 in order to reduce the over all number of restraints
needed for the project.

PAGE 2 of 10
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.1 4.0
Member

D2.1 4.4 Exemptions for Seismic Design Categories D, E, and F (Sections 9.6.1-5 and
9.1.6-6) [Sections 13.1.4-4 and 13.1.4-5]:
There are basically three exemptions that apply here.
1. MEP components that:

a. Are in Seismic Design Categories D, E, and F.
b. Have a Component Importance Factor equal to 1.0,
c. Have flexible connections between the components and all associated duct, piping,
conduit.
d. Are mounted at 4 ft (1.22 m) or less above a floor level.
e. And weigh 400 lbs (1780 N) or less.
2. MEP components that:
b. Have a Component Importance Factor equal to 1.0.
conduit.
d. And weigh 20 lbs (89 N) or less.
3. MEP distribution systems that:
b. Have a Component Importance Factor equal to 1.0.
conduit.
d. And weigh 5 lbs/ft (73 N/m) or less.
D2.1 4.5 Chandelier Exemption (Section 9.6.3.2) [Section 13.6.1]:
This exemption applies to light fixtures, lighted signs, ceiling fans, and other components that are
not connected to ducts or piping and which are supported by chains or other wise suspended from

PAGE 3 of 10
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.1 4.0
Member

the structure by a method that allows the component to swing freely. These components will
require no further seismic support provided that all of the following conditions are met.
1. The design load for these components shall be equal to:

a. 3.0 times the operating load, applied as a gravity design load, for 2000/2003 IBC.
b. 1.4 times the operating weight of the component acting downward with a simultaneous
horizontal load that is also equal to 1.4 times the operating weight for 2006 IBC. The
horizontal load is to be applied in the direction that results in the most critical loading
and thus the most conservative result.
2. The component shall not impact other components, systems, or structures as it swings
through its projected range of motion.
3. The connection to the structure shall allow a 360 range of motion in the horizontal plane. In
other words, this must be a free swinging connection.
D2.1 4.6 Component Size Relative to the Building Structure (Section 9.6.1) [Section
13.1.5]:
For the most part MEP components will be treated as nonstructural components by the code.
However, if the MEP component is very large relative to the building it must be treated as a
nonbuilding structure, which has a completely different set of design issues. For 2000/2006 IBC, If
the weight of the MEP component is greater than or equal to 25% of the combined weight of the
MEP Component and the supporting structure, the MEP component must be treated as a
nonbuilding structure per Section 9.14 of ASCE 7-98/02. For 2006 IBC, if the weight of the
nonstructural component is greater than or equal to 25% of the effective seismic weight of the
building as defined in Section 12.7.2 of ASCE 7-05, then that component must be classified as a
nonbuilding structure and designed accordingly.
When might this apply? This applies to very large pieces of MEP equipment such as large cooling
towers, and the very large air handling units that are placed on the roofs of buildings employing

PAGE 4 of 10
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.1 4.0
Member

lightweight design techniques. The structural engineer of record will have a value for the effective
seismic weight of the building. This must be compared to the operating weight of the MEP
component in question.
D2.1 4.7 Reference and Accepted Standards (Sections 9.6.1.1 and 9.6.1.2) and Reference
Documents [Section 13.1.6]:
Typically reference standards, acceptance standards, and reference documents are other
publications that will provide a basis for earthquake resistant design. Examples of reference
documents currently in existence would be the SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual, listed in
Section 1.0 Introduction of the guide, and NFPA 13. These documents may be used with the
approval of the jurisdiction having authority as long as the following conditions are met.
1. The design earthquake forces used for the design and selection of the seismic restraints
shall not be less that those specified in Section 9.6.1.3 of ASCE 7-98/02 and Section 13.3.1
of ASCE 7-05, which is also covered in Section 8.0 of this guide.
2. The seismic interaction of each MEP component with all other components and building
structures shall be accounted for in the design of the supports and restraints.
3. The MEP component must be able to accommodate drifts, deflections, and relative
displacements that are defined in ASCE 7-05. This means that flexible connections for pipe,
duct, and electrical cables for MEP components are in general, a good idea to prevent
damage if the MEP component, and/or the pipe, duct, and electrical cables that are attached
to it are unrestrained.
D2.1 4.8 Allowable Stress Design (Sections 2.3 and 2.4) [Sections 2.3, 2.4, and 13.1.7]:
Reference documents that use allowable stress design may be used as a basis for the design and
selection of seismic restraints. However, the design earthquake loads determined in accordance
with Section 9.6.1.3 of ASCE 7-98/02 and Section 13.3.1 of ASCE 7-05 must be multiplied by 0.7.

PAGE 5 of 10
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.1 4.0
Member

D2.1 4.9 Submittals and Construction Documents (Sections 9.6.3.6, 9.6.3.15 and A.9.3.4.5)
[Sections 13.2.1, 13.2.5, 13.2.6, and 13.2.7]:
Projects that require seismic restraints for MEP systems and components will require project
specific certification that the design of the seismic restraints selected for the MEP systems and
their components will meet the code, specification, or details which ever is most stringent. This
certification is to be provided both in the submittals and in the construction documents.
For the submittal of seismic restraints and supports, the certification may be satisfied by one of the
following means.
1. Project and site specific designs and documentation that are prepared and submitted by a
registered design professional. Please note that a specific discipline is not mentioned
regarding the registered design professional that is responsible for the design and signing
and sealing of the documentation.
2. Manufacturers certification accompanying the submittal the restraints are seismically
qualified for the project and site. The certification may be made in any one of three ways as
detailed below.
a. Analysis this is typical for the seismic restraints used for MEP systems and
components. Manufacturers of these seismic restraint devices will normally have
families of the various types of restraint devices that have different seismic force
capacity ranges. The manufacturer will perform an analysis to determine the project
and site specific seismic design loads, and then analyze the MEP system and/or
components to determine the required restraint capacities at the restraint attachment
points to the system and/or components. The proper restraint will be selected from the
manufacturers standard product offering, or a special restraint may be designed and
built for the application. The manufacturers certification will include a statement
signed and seal by a registered design professional that the restraint devices will meet
the appropriate code, specification, and/or details.

PAGE 6 of 10
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.1 4.0
Member

b. The manufacturer of the restraint devices may have them tested in accordance with
ICC-ES AC 156 as outlined in Sections 9.6.3.6 and A.9.3.4.5 of ASCE 7-98/02 and
Section 13.2.5 of ASCE 7-05. They will then provide a signed and sealed certification
document stating that the restraint devices will provide adequate protection for the
MEP system and components.
c. Experience data per the requirements in Sections 9.6.3.6 and A.9.3.4.5 of
ASCE 7-98/02 and Section 13.2.6 of ASCE 7-05. This is not a normal avenue for a
manufacturer of seismic restraint devices to use to certify their products as being fit for
a specific project. In using this method, the manufacturers would incur a great deal of
liability.
Section A.9.3.4.5 of ASCE 7-98/02 and Section 13.2.7 of ASCE 7-05 indicates that seismic
restraints for MEP systems and components will require construction documents that are prepared
and, signed and sealed by a registered design professional. Frequently, the submittal package
provided by the manufacturer of the seismic restraints will also have enough information to fulfill
this requirement.
The registered design professional mentioned above needs to be one with knowledge and
experience in force analysis, stress and analysis, and the proper use of steel, aluminum,
elastomers, and other engineering materials in the design of force resisting systems. There are
several disciplines that may fulfill these requirements such as, structural engineers, civil
engineers, and mechanical engineers involved in the area of machine design.
D2.1 4.10 Equipment Certification for Essential Facilities (Sections 9.6.3.6, 9.6.6.15, and
A9.3.4.5) [Sections 13.2.2, 13.2.5, and 13.2.6]:
For buildings that have been assigned to Seismic Design Categories C, D, E, and F designated
seismic systems will require certification. Designated seismic systems are those whose failure has
the potential to cause loss of life or loss of function for buildings that were deemed essential for
recovery following an earthquake. Typically essential facilities are those that have been assigned

PAGE 7 of 10
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.1 4.0
Member

to Occupancy Category IV, see Section 2.2 of this guide. For these types of systems, certification
shall be provided as follows.
1. For active MEP systems and components that must remain functional after an earthquake
shall be certified by the supplier or manufacturer as being operable after the design level
earthquake for the project site based on:
a. Shake table testing such as that specified in ICC-ES AC 156 as described in Section
A.9.3.4.5 of ASCE 7-98/02 and Section 13.2.5 of ASCE 7-05. Evidence of compliance is
to be submitted to the jurisdiction having authority and the design professional of record
for approval.
b. Experience or historical data as outlined in Sections 9.6.3.6, 9.6.3.15 and A.9.3.4.5 of
ASCE 7-98/02 and Section 13.2.6 of ASCE 7-05. This experience data is to come from
a nationally recognized procedures and data base that is acceptable to the authority
having jurisdiction. The substantiated seismic capacities from the experience data must
meet or exceed the specific seismic requirements for the project. As in a. above
evidence of compliance will need to be submitted to the design professional of record,
and the jurisdiction having authority for approval.
2. MEP systems and components that contain hazardous materials must be certified as
maintaining containment of the hazardous materials following an earth quake. Evidence of
compliance must be submitted to the design professional of record and the jurisdiction having
authority for approval. This certification may be made through:
a. Analysis.
b. Approved shake table testing specified in Section 9.6.3.6 of ASCE 7-98/02 and Section
13.2.5 of ASCE 7-05.
c. Experience data as described in Section 9.6.3.6 of ASCE 7-98/02 and Section 13.2.6 of
ASCE 7-05.

PAGE 8 of 10
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.1 4.0
Member

D2.1 4.11 Consequential or Collateral Damage (Section 9.6.1) [Section 13.2.3]:
The potential interaction of the MEP systems and components with surrounding systems,
components or building structures must be considered when locating and restraining the MEP
systems and components. The failure of an MEP system or component that has been assigned a
Component Importance Factor equal to 1.0 must not cause the failure of an MEP system or
component that has been assigned a Component Importance Factor equal to 1.5. This goes back
to the issue of assigning a Component Importance Factor of 1.5 to MEP systems or components
with a Component Importance Factor of 1.0 whose failure would cause the failure of a system or
component with a Component Importance Factor of 1.5.
D2.1 4.12 Flexibility of Components and their Supports and Restraints (Sections 9.6.1 and
9.6.1.2) [Section 13.2.4]:
All MEP systems and components that are constructed of normal engineering materials will have
a certain amount of flexibility, or springiness. So how these systems and components behave
during an earthquake will greatly affect their performance and survivability. The system or
component could have a flexibility that would put it to resonance with the building and/or the
earthquake, in which case the displacements and stresses in the system would be much larger
than expected. Conversely the flexibility of the system or component could be such that it was not
in resonance with either the building or the earthquake. In this case, the displacements and
stresses may be much lower than a code based analysis would indicate. Therefore, the code
indicates that the flexibility of the components and their supports be considered as well as the
strength of the parts to ensure that the worst cases are considered.

PAGE 9 of 10
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.1 4.0
Member

D2.1 4.13 Summary:
The exemptions and requirements outlined in this section are intended to assist the MEP design
professionals and contractors in planning their project contribution efficiently. Also, they help
define the limits of responsibility for each MEP design profession and trade.

PAGE 10 of 10
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.1 4.0
Member

EXEMPTIONS FOR PIPING SYSTEMS
The exemptions that apply specifically to piping are covered in Section 9.6.3.11.4 of ASCE 798/02 and Section 13.6.8 of ASCE 7-05. The provisions of this section do not cover elevator
system piping which is covered in Section 9.6.3.16 of ASCE 7-98/02 and Section 13.6.10 of
ASCE 7-05. The piping considered in this section is assumed to be high-deformability piping. This
implies pipes made from ductile materials that are joined by welding, brazing, or groove type
couplings, similar to VICTAULIC couplings, where the grooves in the pipe have been roll formed
rather than cut. Limited deformability piping on the other hand, would be pipes made of ductile
materials that are joined by threading, bonding, or the use of groove type couplings where the
grooves in the pipe have been machine cut. Low deformability piping would be comprised of pipes
made from relatively brittle materials such as cast iron or glass. Also not covered in this section is
fire protection piping. Fire protection piping will be covered in a separate publication.
D2.1 5.2 The 12 Rule (9.6.3.11.4-c) [Section 13.6.8-1]1:
No restraints will be required for piping that meets the requirements of the 12 Rule for the entire
piping run. The 12 Rule will be said to apply to a piping run if:
1. The piping is supported by rod hangers.

a. For single clevis supported pipe, all of the hangers in the piping run are 12 in. (305 mm)
or less in length from the top of the pipe to the supporting structure.
b. For trapeze supported pipe, all of the hangers in the piping run are 12 in. (305 mm) or
less in length from the top of the trapeze bar to the supporting structure.
2. For 2000/2003 IBC The hanger rods and their attachments are not to be subjected to
bending moments. For 2006 IBC the hangers are to be detailed to avoid bending of the
1
References in brackets (9.6.3.11.4-c) [Section 13.6.8-1] apply to sections, tables, and/or equations in ASCE 7-98/02 and

PAGE 1 of 6
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
D2.1 5.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member

hangers and their attachments. This statement very is ambiguous. It does not clearly define
the phrase significant bending, and leaves it up to the design professional responsible for
the piping system, or worse, the contractor responsible for installing the piping system. The
past practice by SMACNA and other recognized authorities in the industry to call for the
connection between the hanger and the supporting structure to be non-moment generating.
This means that the connector must be one that allows the piping run to swing freely on its
hangers without introducing a bending moment in the hanger.
3. There must be sufficient space around the piping run to accommodate the expected motion
of the pipe as it sways back and forth with the earthquake motion in the building.
4. Connections between the piping and the interfacing components must be designed and/or
selected to accept the full range of motion expected for both the pipe and the interfacing
component.
D2.1 5.3 Single Clevis Supported Pipe in Seismic Design Categories A and B (Sections
9.6.1-1 and 9.6.1-3) [Sections 13.1.4-1 and 13.1.4-2]
No seismic restraints are required for piping in building assigned to Seismic Design Categories A
and B. This is implied by the general exemptions found in Section 9.6.1 of ASCE 7-98/02 and
Section 13.1.4 of ASCE 7-05.
D2.1 5.4 Single Clevis Supported Pipe in Seismic Design Category C (Sections 9.6.1-1 and
9.6.3.11.4-d2) [Sections 13.1.4-3 and 13.6.8-2b]
1. For single clevis supported piping in buildings assigned to Seismic Design Category C for
which the Component Importance Factor is equal to 1.0, no seismic restraint is required.
2. For piping in Buildings assigned to Seismic Design Category C, for which the Component
Importance Factor is equal to 1.5, and for which the nominal size is 2 in. (51 mm) or less; no
seismic restraint is required.

PAGE 2 of 6
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
D2.1 5.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member

D2.1 5.5 Single Clevis Supported Pipe in Seismic Design Categories D, E, and F (Sections
9.6.3.11.4-d1 and 9.6.3.11.4-d3) [Sections 13.6.8-2a and 13.6.8-2c]
1. For single clevis supported piping in buildings assigned to Seismic Design Categories D, E,
and F, for which the Component Importance Factor is equal to 1.5, and for which the nominal
size is 1 in. (25 mm) or less; no seismic restraint is required.
2. For single clevis supported piping in buildings assigned to Seismic Design Categories D, E,
and F, for which the Component Importance Factor is equal to 1.0, and for which the nominal
size is 3 in. (76 mm) or less; no seismic restraint is required.
D2.1 5.6 Exemptions for Trapeze Supported Pipe per VISCMA Recommendations:
Neither ASCE 7-98/02 nor ASCE 7-05 specifies how the piping is to be supported. The point is
that many pipes of the exempted size may be supported on a common trapeze bar using hanger
rods of the same size as would be specified for a single clevis supported pipe. Keep in mind that
the purpose of the seismic restraints is to make sure the pipe moves with the building. The
amount of force that the hanger rod must carry will be a direct function of the weight of pipe being
supported. It is apparent that there must be some limit to how much weight a trapeze bar can
support for a given hanger rod size before seismic restraint is required. VISCMA (Vibration
Isolation and Seismic Control Manufacturers Association) has investigated this issue and can
make the following recommendations on the application of the exemptions in Sections 5.4 and 5.5
above to trapeze supported pipe, www.viscma.com.
The following basic provisions must apply.
1. The hangers must be ASTM A36 all-thread rod.

2. The threads must be roll formed.
3. The pipes must be rigidly attached to the hanger rods.

PAGE 3 of 6
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
D2.1 5.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member

4. Provisions must be made to avoid impact with adjacent pipe, duct, equipment, or building
structure, or to protect the pipe from such impact.
D2.1 5.6.1 Trapeze Supported Pipe in Seismic Design Categories A and B: (Sections 9.6.11 and 9.6.1-3) [Sections 13.1.4-1 and 13.1.4-2]
For trapeze supported piping in Seismic Design Categories A and B, no seismic restraint is
required.
D2.1 5.6.2 Trapeze Supported Pipe in Seismic Design Category C: (Sections 9.6.1-1 and
9.6.3.11-d2) [Sections 13.1.4-3 and 13.6.8-2b]
1. For trapeze supported piping in buildings assigned to Seismic Design Category C, which
have a Component Importance Factor equal to 1.0, and for which the nominal size is 2 in. (51
mm) or less, nor seismic restraint is required.
2. For trapeze supported piping in buildings assigned to Seismic Design Category C, which
mm) or less, no seismic restraint is required if:
a. The trapeze bar is supported by 3/8-16 UNC, or larger, hanger rods.
b. The maximum hanger spacing is 10 ft. on center.
c. The total weight supported by the trapeze bar is 15 lbs/ft or less.
D2.1 5.6.3 Trapeze Supported Pipe in Seismic Design Category D: (Sections 9.6.1-6,
9.6.3.11.4-d2 and 9.6.3.11.4-d3) [Sections 13.1.4-5, 13.6.8-2a, and 13.6.8-2c]
1. For trapeze supported piping in buildings assigned to Seismic Design Category D, which

PAGE 4 of 6
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
D2.1 5.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member

D2.1 5.6.4 Trapeze Supported Pipe in Seismic Design Categories E and F: (Sections 9.6.16, 9.6.3.11.4-d2 and 9.6.3.11.4-d3) [Sections 13.1.4-5, 13.6.8-2a, and 13.6.8-2c]
1. For trapeze supported piping in buildings assigned to Seismic Design Categories E and F,
which have a Component Importance Factor equal to 1.5, and for which the nominal size is 1
in. (25 mm) or less, no seismic restraint is required if:
D2.1 5.7 Summary:
The exemptions and allowances outlined in this section can, with careful planning save a lot of
time and money. They may also mean the difference between making a profit on a project and
breaking even, or worse, losing money. In order to take proper advantage of these exemptions,

PAGE 5 of 6
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
D2.1 5.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member

the Seismic Design Category to which the project has been assigned must be known. This is
readily available from the structural engineer. Also, the design professional who is responsible for
the piping system must assign an appropriate Component Importance Factor to the system.
As a sidebar to the previous statement, it should be noted that the specification for the building
may increase the Seismic Design Category in order to ensure an adequate safety margin and the
continued operation of the facility. This is a common practice with schools, government buildings,
and certain manufacturing facilities. Also, the building owner has the prerogative, through the
specification, to require all of the piping systems to be seismically restrained. So, careful attention
to the specification must be paid, as some or all of the exemptions in this section may be nullified
by specification requirements that are more stringent than those provided by the code.

PAGE 6 of 6
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
D2.1 5.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member

EXEMPTIONS FOR HVAC DUCTWORK
The 2000/2003/2006 IBC has some general exemptions that apply to HVAC ductwork based on
Component Importance Factor and the size of the duct. At present, there are not as many
exemptions for ductwork as there are for piping. The number of exemptions for ductwork changed
with SMACNA being dropped as a reference document in the 2003/2006 IBC. This will be
discussed below in the appropriate section.
D2.1 6.2 The 12 Rule (Section 9.6.3.10-a) [Section 13.6.7-a]1:
No seismic restraints will be required for ductwork with a Component Importance Factor equal to
1.0 that meets the requirements of the 12 Rule for the entire run of ductwork. The 12 Rule is said
to apply to a run of ductwork if:
1. The HVAC ducts a suspended for hangers that are 12 (305 mm) or less in length for the
entire run of ductwork. This is usually measured from the supporting structure to the top of
the trapeze bar that is supporting the ductwork.
2. The hangers have been detailed and constructed in order to avoid significant bending of the
hanger and its attachments. As with the 12 rule applied to piping, the industry generally
interprets this to mean that the connection of the hanger to the structure must be nonmoment generating, or free swinging.
References in brackets (Section 9.6.3.10-a) [Section 13.6.7-a] apply to sections, tables, and/or equations in
IBC respectively.

PAGE 1 of 3
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
D2.1 6.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member

D2.1 6.3 Size Exemption (Section 9.6.3.10-b) [Section 13.6.7-b]:
No seismic restraints are required for ductwork with a Component Importance Factor equal to 1.0
if the cross-sectional area is less than 6 ft2 (0.557 m2).
D2.1 6.4 Further Exemptions for Ductwork (Sections 9.6.1.1.2 and 9.6.3.10) [Section
13.6.7]:
There are no further exemptions for ductwork in 2006 IBC. The SMACNA Seismic Restraint
Manual does have exemptions for ductwork that has been assigned a Component Importance
Factor equal to 1.5. For 2000 IBC the SMACNA Seismic Design Manual was an accepted
standard, and ductwork with a cross-sectional area of less than 6 ft2 (0.557 m2) may be exempted
from the need for seismic restraint. However for 2003 IBC and 2006 IBC, the SMACNA Seismic
Design Manual was removed from the design portion of the code and was, instead, incorporated
as an Accepted Standard in Section 9.6.1.1.2 of ASCE 7-02, which applies to 2003 IBC. The
SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual is not specifically identified in ASCE 7-05, 2006 IBC instead
the following statement was inserted into the design portion of the code.
HVAC duct systems fabricated and installed in accordance with standards approved by the
authority having jurisdiction shall be deemed to meet the lateral bracing requirements of this
section.
In other words, it will be up to the local building authority to approve or disapprove SMACNA or
any other reference documents. So, the HVAC design professional and contractor will need to
petition the local building authority for permission to use the exemptions in the SMACNA Seismic
Restraint Manual.

PAGE 2 of 3
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
D2.1 6.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member

D2.1 6.5 Restraint Allowance for In-Line Components (Section 9.6.3.10) [Section 13.6.7]:
This allowance deals with components, such as fans, heat exchangers, humidifiers, VAV boxes,
and the like, that are installed in-line with the ductwork. Components that have an operating
weight of 75 lbs (334 N) or less may be supported and laterally, seismically, braced as part of the
duct system. Where the lateral braces, seismic restraints, have been designed and sized to meet
the requirements of ASCE 7-98/02 Section 9.6.1.3 or ASCE 7-05 Section 13.3.1. The following
requirements will also apply to these components.
1. At least one end of the component must be hard, rigidly, attached to the ductwork. The other
end may have a flex connector or be open. The flex connected, or open end, of the
component must be supported and laterally braced. This requirement is not mentioned as
part of ASCE 7-98, -02, or -05, but is a requirement that is born out of common sense.
2. Devices such as diffusers, louvers, and dampers shall be positively attached with mechanical
fasteners.
3. Unbraced piping and electrical power and control lines that are attached to in-line
components must be attached with flex connections that allow adequate motion to
accommodate the expected differential motions.
D2.1 6.6 Summary:
As with the piping exemptions these exemptions and allowances, with careful planning, can save
the contractor and the building owner a great deal of effort and money. There is also a great
advantage to petition the local building authority to allow the SMACNA Seismic Design Manual to
become a reference document for the project. This will allow the exemptions spelled out in the
SMACNA Seismic Design Manual to be utilized to best advantage

PAGE 3 of 3
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
D2.1 6.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member

EXEMPTIONS FOR ELECTRICAL
The exemptions mentioned in both ASCE 7-98/02 and ASCE 7-05 are actually implied exemptions
that are stated as requirements. This section is an attempt to more fully define these provisions for
the design professional responsible for the design of the electrical components and distribution
systems, and also for the installing contractor who is responsible for bidding and installing the
restraints.
D2.1 7.2 Implied Blanket Exemption Based on Component Importance Factor I P

(Section 9.6.3.14) [Sections 13.6.4 and 13.6.5]1:
Section 9.6.3.14 of ASCE 7-98/02 states that;
Attachments and supports for electrical equipment shall meet the force and displacement
provisions of Sections 9.6.1.3 and 9.6.1.4 and the additional provisions of this Section. In addition
to their attachments and supports, electrical equipment designated as having I P = 1.5 , itself, shall
be designed to meet the force and displacement provisions of Sections 9.6.1.3 and 9.6.1.4 and
the additional provisions of this Section.
In this statement, there really are no implied exemptions for electrical equipment, except that if the
supports for the equipment have been designed by the manufacturer to meet the seismic load
requirements with the specified mounting hardware, no further analysis and restraint will be
required.
In Section 13.6.4 of ASCE 7-05, the text reads as follows.

1
References in brackets (Section 9.6.3.14) [Sections 13.6.4 and 13.6.5] apply to sections, tables, and/or equations in
IBC respectively.

PAGE 1 of 4
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
D2.1 7.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member

Electrical components with I P greater than 1.0 shall be designed for the seismic forces and
relative displacements defined in Sections 13.3.1 and 13.3.2 .
ASCE 7-05 Section 13.6.5 states the following;

Mechanical and electrical component supports (including those with I P = 1.0 ) and the means by
which they are attached to the component shall be designed for the forces and displacements
determined in Sections 13.3.1 and 13.3.2. Such supports including structural members, braces,
frames, skirts, legs, saddles, pedestals, cables, guys, stays, snubbers, and tethers, as well as
elements forged or cast as part of the mechanical or electrical component.
ASCE 7-05 Section 13.6.4 implies that electrical components that have been assigned a
Component Importance Factor equal to 1.0, regardless of the Seismic Design Category to which
they have been assigned, will not require seismic restraints beyond the attachment provisions
normally included with the component, provided that a qualified component is selected. This
means that if the component has four mounting feet with holes for
the component should be attached to the structure with four
3/8 mounting hardware, then
3/8 bolts, or anchors. Beyond that
nothing further is required.
However, ASCE 7-05 Section 13.6.5 insists that the supports must be designed to withstand the
code mounted forces and displacements. So, as with ASCE 7-98/02 this is not a general blanket
exemption. The manufacturer of the component must be able to certify that the supports designed
as part of the component will withstand the seismic requirements for the project using hardware of
the appropriate size and strength.
So, while additional analysis and restraint may not be required for electrical components
with I P = 1.0 , the supports for this equipment must be designed by the manufacturer with sufficient
strength to meet the code mandated requirements. After this the design professional of record for
a project and the contractor may provide attachment hardware of the appropriate type, size, and

PAGE 2 of 4
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
D2.1 7.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member

strength, as recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment, without doing any further
analysis, or providing any further restraint.
While this sounds rather wishy-washy, its really not. If the manufacturer of the equipment and its
supports certifies that is was design to handle accelerations in excess of the design acceleration
for the project, then it may be exempted from the need for further seismic restraint or analysis.
D2.1 7.3 Conduit Size Exemption [13.6.5.5-6a]:
There are no specific size exemptions for electrical conduit in 2000/2003 IBC, ASCE 7-98/02.
However, 2006 IBC, ASCE 7-05 does have exemptions for electrical conduit. They seem to follow
the exemptions, in terms size, that are used for piping. Therefore, it is reasonable to use the
exemptions in 2006 IBC for 2000/2003 IBC since it is the most recent version, and takes into
account any new testing or analysis.
For 2006 IBC, ASCE 7-05, seismic restraints are not required for conduit that has been assigned
a Component Importance Factor equal to 1.5, and whose trade size is 2.5 in. (64mm) or less.
When sizing and selecting restraints for electrical conduit, that the weight per linear foot of conduit
varies greatly depending on the exact type of conduit being used. Also, when computing the total
weight per foot of the conduit plus the cabling, it standard practice to assume that there will be
~40% copper fill for the cabling.
D2.1 7.4 Trapeze Supported Electrical Distribution Systems [13.6.5.5-6b]:
As with conduit, no specific exemptions for trapeze supported electrical distribution systems exist
in 2000/2003 IBC, ASCE 7-98/02. However, an exemption is allowed under 2006 IBC, ASCE 705. It makes sense to argue for the use of this exemption in 2000/2003 IBC as well. The
exemption matches the weight limits proposed for trapeze supported pipe in Section 5.6 of this
guide.

PAGE 3 of 4
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
D2.1 7.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member

No restraints are required for conduit, bus ducts, or cable trays that are supported on trapeze
bars, that have been assigned a Component Importance Factor equal to 1.5, and that have a total
weight that is 10 lb/ft (146 N/m) or less. This total weight includes not only the conduit, bus duct,
or cable trays, but also includes the trapeze bars as well.
D2.1 7.5 Summary:
All of the implied exemptions above are made without regard for the Seismic Design Category to
which the building has been assigned. Further, a complete reading of the project specification is in
order to ensure that these exemptions have not been negated by the wishes of the building owner.

PAGE 4 of 4
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
D2.1 7.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member

SESIMIC DESIGN FORCES
The code based horizontal seismic force requirements for MEP systems and components are
either calculated by the seismic restraint manufacturer as a part of the selection and certification
process, or may be determined by the design professional of record for the MEP systems under
consideration.
This is an informational section. It will discuss the code based horizontal seismic force demand
equations and the variables that go into them. This discussion will provide a deeper understanding
for the designer responsible for selecting the seismic restraints for MEP systems and their
components and the nature of the seismic forces and the factors that affect them.
D2.1 8.2 Horizontal Seismic Design Force (Section 9.6.1.3) [Section 13.3.1]1:
The seismic force is a mass, or weight, based force, and as such is applied to the MEP
component at its center of gravity. Keep in mind that the earthquake ground motion moves the
base of the building first. Then the motion of the building will accelerate the MEP component
through its supports and/or seismic restraints. The horizontal seismic force acting on an MEP
component will be determined in accordance with Equation 9.6.1.3-1 of ASCE 7-98/02 and
Equation 13.3-1 of ASCE 7-05.
FP =
0.4a P S DS W P
z
1 + 2
h
RP
IP
Equation 8-1 (9.6.1.3-1) [13.3-1]
References in brackets (Section 9.6.1.3) [Section 13.3.1] refer to sections and/or tables in ASCE 7-98/02 and
SEISMIC DESIGN FORCES

PAGE 1 of 9
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
D2.1 8.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member

ASCE 7-98/02, and -05 define and upper and lower bound for the horizontal force that is to be
applied to the center of gravity of a component. The horizontal seismic force acting on an MEP
component is not required to be greater than;
F P = 1.6 S DS I P W P
Equation 8-2 (9.6.1.3-2) [13.3-2]
And the horizontal seismic force acting on an MEP component is not to be less than;
F P = 0.3 S DS I PW P
Equation 8-3 (9.6.1.3-3) [13.3-3]
Where:
FP = the design horizontal seismic force acting on an MEP component at its center of gravity.
S DS = the short period design spectral acceleration.
a P =the component amplification factor. This factor is a measure of how close to the natural period
of the building the natural period of the component is expected is expected to be. The closer the
natural period of the component is to that of the building, the larger a P will be. Conversely, the
further the natural period of the component is away from that of the building, the smaller a P will be.
Typically a P will vary from 1.0 to 2.5, and is specified by component type in ASCE 7-98/02 and -05
and listed in Table 8-3.
I P = the component importance factor which be either 1.0 or 1.5.

W P = the operating weight of the MEP system or component that is being restrained.
R P = the response modification factor which varies from 1.25 to 5.0 in ASCE 7-98, 1.5 to 5.0 in
ASCE 7-02, and 1.50 to 12.0 in ASCE 7-05 by component type. This factor is a measure of the
ability of the component and its attachments to the structure to absorb energy. It is really a
measure of how ductile or brittle the component and its attachments are. The more flexible, ductile
the component and its supports and/or restraints are the larger R P will be. And conversely, the
more brittle and inflexible the component and its supports and/or restraints are, the smaller R P will

PAGE 2 of 9
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
D2.1 8.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member

be. The values are specified by component type in Table 8-1 for ASCE 7-98, Table 8-2 for ASCE
7-02, and Table 8-3 for ASCE 7-05.
z = the structural attachment mounting height of the MEP component in the building relative to the
grade line of the building.
h = the average height of the building roof as measured from the grade line of the building.
The 0.4 factor was introduced as a modifier for S DS as a recognition that the MEP components
inside the building would react more strongly to the long period earthquake ground motion than to
the short period motion. The 0.4 factor brings the design level acceleration for the MEP
components more in line with the design level acceleration that is applied to the building structure
itself.
The 1 + 2 term in Equation 8-1 is recognition of the fact that all buildings and structures become
h
more flexible as they increase in height. That is they are much stiffer, stronger, at the foundation
level than the roof. Since the ground motion from an earthquake enters the building structure at
the foundation level, the actual accelerations imparted an MEP component will be greater the
higher in the building they are attached. A building may be likened to a vertically mounted
cantilever beam that is being shaken by the bottom. It is a vibrating system that will have a certain
natural period that is, in a general fashion, based on its mass and stiffness. If the natural period of
the building is at, or close too, the earthquake period, the motion of the building could be extreme.
This was the case in the Mexico City earthquake of September 19, 1985.
The horizontal seismic design force must be applied independently to the component in at least
two perpendicular directions in the horizontal plane. The horizontal seismic design force must be
applied in conjunction with all of the expected dead loads and service loads. The idea here is that
the horizontal seismic design force is to be applied in the direction that causes the highest stress
in the supports and restraints, and thus produces the most conservative results.

PAGE 3 of 9
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
D2.1 8.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member

D2.1 8.3 Vertical Seismic Design Force (Sections 9.5.2.7 and 9.6.1.3) [Sections 12.4.2.2
and 13.3.1]:
The MEP component, its supports, and its restraints must also be designed for a vertical seismic
design force that acts concurrently with the horizontal seismic design force. This vertical seismic
design force must be directed such that it also produces the highest stress in the supports and
restraints, thus producing the most conservative result. This vertical seismic design force is
defined as follows.
FV = 0.2 S DS W P
Equation 8-4 (9.5.2.1-1/-2) [12.4-4]
Where:
FV = the vertical seismic design force.
D2.1 8.4 The Evolution of a P and R P Factors (Sections 9.6.1.3 and 9.6.3.2 and Table 9.6.3.2)
[Sections 13.3.1 and 13.6.1 and Table 13.6-1]:
The MEP component, along with its supports, will also form a vibrating system with a natural
period that depends on the mass of the component and the stiffness of the supports. The
component amplification factor ( a P ) is a measure of how closely the natural period of the
component and its supports matches the natural period of the building. For a P = 1.0 the natural
periods are not close, while for a p = 2.5 the natural period of the MEP component and their
support is very close to that of the building.
The component response modification factor( R P )is a measure of how much energy the MEP
component along with its supports and attachments can absorb without sustaining crippling
damage. A common term used throughout the HVAC industry is fragility. As the term implies, it is
concerned with how fragile a component might be. That is, how easily a component may be

PAGE 4 of 9
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
D2.1 8.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member

damaged, and to what degree it might be damaged by a specified load and loading rate.
The R P factor, then, is considered to be an indicator of how fragile an MEP component might be.
For R P = 1.0 the component is extremely fragile. For R P = 12.0 , on the other hand, would be a
component that is very robust.
The values for a P and R P are assigned by the ASCE 7 committee based on accumulated
experience throughout the building industry. The evolution of these factors may be traced through
Tables 8-1; 8-2, and 8-3 which represent 2000 IBC, ASCE 7-98; 2003 IBC, ASCE 7-02; and 2006
IBC, ASCE 7-05 respectively. The different values for the same items in the three tables indicate
the lack of knowledge and understanding concerning these components throughout the industry.
Only time, experience, and shake table testing will produce true usable values for a P and R P .
D2.1 8.5 LRFD versus ASD: (Sections 2.3 and 2.4) [Sections 2.3, 2.4 and 13.1.7]
This topic was briefly touched upon in Section 4.8 of this guide. However, more should be said
about it in this section dealing the design seismic forces that will be applied to the MEP
components. The Civil and Structural Engineering community has adopted the LRFD, Load
Resistance Factor Design, philosophy. With this design philosophy the factors controlling the
serviceability of the structure as assigned to the design loads. ASD, Allowable Stress Design, is
the design philosophy which preceded LRFD. In ASD, the factors controlling the serviceability of
the structure are assigned to the yield strength or to the ultimate strength of the material.
Traditionally the factors controlling the serviceability of the structure have been known as the
Safety Factors, or Factors of Safety.
The forces calculated using Equations 8-1, 8-2, 8-3, and 8-4 will have magnitudes that correspond
to LRFD. Many standard components such a concrete anchors, bolts, screws, and etc. will have
their capacities listed as ASD values. Components whose capacities are listed as ASD values
may be compared to the LRFD results from Equations 8-1 through 8-4 by multiplying the ASD
values by 1.4.

PAGE 5 of 9
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
D2.1 8.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member
Table 8-1; Component Amplification and Response Modification Factors for 2000 IBC
(Table 9.6.3.2)
Mechanical & Electrical Component2
aP 3
RP 4
General Mechanical Equipment
-----
-----
Boilers and furnaces.

Pressure vessels on skirts and free-standing.
Stacks & cantilevered chimneys
Other
1.0
2.5
2.5
1.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
Piping Systems
-----
-----
High deformability elements and attachments (welded steel pipe & brazed copper pipe).
Limited deformability elements and attachments (steel pipe with screwed connections, no hub
connections, and Victaulic type connections).
Low deformability elements and attachments (iron pipe with screwed connections, and glass lined
pipe).
1.0
3.5
1.0
2.5
1.0
1.25
HVAC Systems
-----
-----
Vibration isolated.
Non-vibration isolated.
Mounted-in-line with ductwork.
Other
2.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
General Electrical
-----
-----
Distributed systems (bus ducts, conduit, and cable trays).

Equipment.
Lighting fixtures.
2.5
1.0
1.0
5.0
2.5
1.25
Components mounted on vibration isolators shall be restrained in each horizontal direction with bumpers or snubbers,
and the horizontal seismic design force shall be equal to 2FP.
3
The value for aP shall not be less than 1.0. Lower values shall not be used unless justified by a detailed dynamic
analysis. A value of aP=1.0 is to be applied to equipment that is rigid or rigidly attached. A value of aP=2.5 is to be applied
to equipment regarded as flexible or flexibly attached.
4
A value of RP=1.25 is to be used for component anchorage design with expansion anchor bolts, shallow chemical
anchor, shall low deformability cast in place anchors, or when the component is constructed of brittle materials. Shallow
anchors are those with an embedment depth to nominal diameter ratio that is less than 8.

PAGE 6 of 9
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
D2.1 8.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member
(Table 9.6.3.2)
Mechanical & Electrical Component5
aP 6
RP
General Mechanical Equipment
-----
-----
Boilers and furnaces.

Pressure vessels on skirts and free standing.
Stacks and cantilevered chimneys.
Other
1.0
2.5
2.5
1.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
Piping Systems
-----
-----
High deformability elements and attachments (welded steel pipe & brazed copper pipe).
Limited deformability elements and attachments (steel pipe with screwed connections, no hub
connections, and Victaulic type connections).
Low deformability elements and attachments (iron pipe with screwed connections, and glass lined
pipe).
1.0
3.5
1.0
2.5
1.0
1.5
HVAC Systems
-----
-----
Vibration isolated.
Non-vibration isolated.
Mounted-in-line with ductwork.
Other
2.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
General Electrical
-----
-----
Distribution systems (bus ducts, conduit, and cable trays).

Equipment
Lighting fixtures.
2.5
1.0
1.0
5.0
2.5
1.5
Components mounted on vibration isolators shall be restrained in each horizontal direction with bumpers or snubbers. If
the maximum bumper/snubber clearance, or air gap, is greater than 1/4 in., the horizontal seismic design force shall be
equal to 2FP. If the maximum bumper/snubber clearance, air gap, is less than or equal to 1/4 in., the horizontal seismic
design force shall be taken as FP.
6
analysis. A value of aP=1.0 is to be applied to equipment that is rigid or rigidly attached. A value of aP=2.5 is to be applied
to equipment regarded as flexible or flexibly attached.

PAGE 7 of 9
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
D2.1 8.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member

[Table 13.6-1]
MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
aP 7
RP 8
Air-side HVAC fans, air handlers, and other mechanical components with sheet metal framing.
Wet-side HVAC boilers, chillers, & other mechanical components constructed of ductile materials.
Engines, turbines, pumps compressors, and pressure vessels not supported on skirts.
Skirt supported pressure vessels.
Generators, batteries, transformers, motors, & other electrical components made of ductile materials.
Motor control cabinets, switchgear, & other components constructed of sheet metal framing.
Communication equipment, computers, instrumentation and controls.
Roof-mounted chimneys, stacks, cooling and electrical towers braced below their C.G.
Roof-mounted chimneys, stacks, cooling and electrical towers braced below their C.G.
Lighting fixtures.
Other mechanical & electrical components.
2.5
1.0
1.0
2.5
1.0
2.5
1.0
2.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
6.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
6.0
2.5
3.0
2.5
1.5
1.5
Vibration Isolated Components & Systems
-----
-----
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.0
2.5
2.0
2.5
2.5
Distribution Systems
-----
-----
Piping in accordance with ASME B31, this includes in-line components, with joints made by welding or
brazing.
2.5
12.0
Piping in accordance with ASME B31, this includes in-line components, constructed of high or limited
deformability materials with joints made by threading, bonding, compression couplings, or grooved
couplings.
2.5
6.0
Piping & tubing that is not in accordance with ASME B31, this includes in-line components, constructed
with high deformability materials with joints made by welding or brazing.
2.5
9.0
2.5
4.5
2.5
3.0
2.5
9.0
2.5
6.0
2.5
1.0
2.5
3.0
2.5
6.0
Components & systems isolated using neoprene elements & neoprene isolated floors with elastomeric
snubbers or resilient perimeter stops
Spring isolated components & systems & vibration isolated floors closely restrained with elastomeric
snubbing devices or resilient perimeter stops.
Internally isolated components or systems.
Suspended vibration isolated equipment including in-line duct devices & suspended internally isolated
components.
Piping & tubing that is not in accordance with ASME B31, this includes in-line components, constructed
of high or limited deformability materials with joints made by threading, bonding, compression
couplings, or grooved couplings.
Piping & tubing of low deformability materials, such as cast iron, glass, or non-ductile plastics.
Ductwork, including in-line components, constructed of high deformability materials, with joints made by
welding or brazing.
Ductwork, including in-line components, constructed of high or limited deformability materials, with
joints made by means other than welding or brazing.
Duct work constructed of low deformability materials such as cast iron, glass, or non-ductile plastics.
Electrical conduit, bus ducts, rigidly mounted cable trays, & plumbing.
Suspended cable trays.
7
analysis. A value of aP=1.0 is to be applied to components that are rigid or rigidly attached. A value of aP=2.5 is to be
applied to components regarded as flexible or flexibly attached.
8
Components mounted on vibration isolators shall be restrained in each horizontal direction with bumpers or snubbers. If
the maximum bumper/snubber clearance, or air gap, is greater than 1/4 in., the horizontal seismic design force shall be
equal to 2FP. If the maximum bumper/snubber clearance, air gap, is less than or equal to 1/4 in., the horizontal seismic
design force shall be taken as FP.

PAGE 8 of 9
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
D2.1 8.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member

D2.1 8.6 Summary:
This section has provided an insight into the way in which the seismic design forces for MEP
systems and components are to be computed. It is generally not necessary for a designer to
actually run the computations for the seismic design forces. These forces are normally computed
by the manufacturer of the seismic restraint devices as part of the selection and certification
process to ensure that the proper components are selected per the code and the specification.

PAGE 9 of 9
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
D2.1 8.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member

ANCHORAGE OF MEP COMPONENTS TO THE BUILDING STRUCTURE
The anchorage, or attachment, of the MEP components and their seismic restraints to the building
structure has always been a gray area generally left to the installing contractor with little or no
guidance from the design professionals responsible for the MEP systems or the building structure.
ASCE/SEI 7-05 does give some general guidance for the making these attachments. However,
the design professionals involved with the MEP systems and the building structure must share the
responsibility for ensuring the adequacy of these attachments. This section will cover the guidance
provided to the design professionals of record in ASCE/SEI 7-05.
D2.1 9.2 General Guidelines for MEP Component Anchorage (Section 9.6.1.6 and 9.6.3.4)
[Section 13.4]1:
1. The MEP component, its supports, and seismic restraints must be positively attached to the
building structure without relying on frictional resistance generated by the dead weight of the
component. The following are some of the acceptable ways and means of attachment.
a. Bolting
b. Welding
c. Post installed concrete anchors
d. Cast in place concrete anchors
2. There must be a continuous load path of sufficient strength and stiffness between the
component and the building structure to withstand the expected seismic loads and
displacements. This means that when cable restraints are used for distributed MEP systems,
the cables can not bend or wrap around any other component or structure in a straight line
path between the component and the structure.
1
References in brackets (Sections 9.6.1.6 and 9.6.3.4) [Section 13.4] apply to sections, tables, and/or equations in ASCE
7-98/02 and ASCE 7-05 respectively which forms the basis for the seismic provisions in 2000/2003 IBC and 2006 IBC
respectively.

PAGE 1 of 4
D2.1 9.0
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member

3. The local areas of the building structure must be designed with sufficient strength and
stiffness to resist and transfer the seismic restraint forces from the MEP systems and
components to the main force resisting structure of the building. It is at this point that the
design professional of record, and the installing contractor for the MEP system must work
closely with the structural engineer of record to make sure that the intended anchorage
points for the MEP system seismic restraints have sufficient capacity.
D2.1 9.3 Anchorage in (Cracked) Concrete and Masonry (Section 9.6.1.6) [Section 13.4.2]:
1. Anchors for MEP component seismic restraints and supports are to be designed and
proportioned to carry the least of the following:
a. A force equal to 1.3 times the seismic design forces acting on the component and its
supports and restraints.
b. The maximum force that can be transferred to the anchor by the component and its
supports.
2. R P 1.5 will be used to determine the component forces unless:
a. The design anchorage of the component and/or its restraints is governed by the
strength of a ductile steel element.
b. The design of post installed anchors in concrete used for the anchorage of the
component supports and restraints is prequalified for seismic applications according to
ACI 355.2.
i. Anchors that have been prequalified per ACI 355.2 will have an ICC-ES ESR
Report issued for that anchor stating the fact that it is suitable for seismic
applications for the current version of IBC. It will also give the allowable loads,
embedments, and edge distances pertinent to the allowable loads.
ii. Anchors from different manufacturers may not be directly substituted on a oneto-one basis. Each manufacturer will have a different design that will have
different allowable loads when tested under ACI 355.2. The allowable loads for
equivalent anchor sizes may be radically different.

PAGE 2 of 4
D2.1 9.0
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member

c. The anchor is designed in accordance with Section 14.2.2.14 of ASCE 7-05.
For 2000 IBC, ASCE 7-98, the cracked concrete anchors are not required, and standard post
installed wedge type anchors may be used for seismic restraint as long as there is an ICC Legacy
report stating that the anchors may be used in seismic applications. For 2003 IBC, ASCE 7-02,
there are no specific statements in ASCE 7-02 that require the use of cracked concrete anchors
in seismic applications. However, ASCE 7-02 Section 9.9 adopts ACI 318-02 as a reference
document. ACI 318-02 specifies that the post installed anchors meet ACI 355.2 and are required
to be qualified for moderate or high seismic risk zone usage. ACI 355.2 is the test standard by
which post installed anchors are to be pre-qualified for seismic applications in cracked concrete.
So, by inference, cracked concrete anchors should also be used for 2003 IBC. However, that
has not yet been widely enforced since few if any post installed anchors had been qualified to this
standard before 2006 IBC was issued.
D2.1 9.4 Undercut Anchors (Section 9.6.3.13.2-c) [Section 13.6.5.5-5]:
For both 2000 IBC, ASCE 7-98, and 2006 IBC, ASCE 7-05, post installed expansion, wedge,
anchors may not be used for non-vibration isolated mechanical equipment rated over 10 hp (7.45
kW). However, post installed undercut expansion anchors may be used.
For 2003 IBC, ASCE 7-02, post installed expansion, wedge, anchors may not be used for nonvibration isolated mechanical equipment. However, post installed undercut expansion anchors are
permitted.
D2.1 9.5 Prying of Bolts and Anchors (Section 9.6.1.6.3) [Section 13.4.3]:
The design of the attachment of the MEP component supports and restraints must take into
account the mounting conditions such as eccentricity in the supports and brackets, and prying of
the bolts or anchors.

PAGE 3 of 4
D2.1 9.0
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member

D2.1 9.6 Power Actuated or Driven Fasteners (Section 9.6.1.6.5) [Section 13.4.5]:
Power actuated or driven fasteners, such as powder shot pins, may not be used for tensile load
applications in Seismic Design Categories D, E, and F unless specifically approved for this
application.
D2.1 9.7 Friction Clips (Section 9.6.3.13.2-b) [Section 13.4.6]:
Friction clips may not be used to attach seismic restraints to the component or the building
structure. A typical example would be the attachment of a cable restraint to a structural beam with
a standard beam clamp. A beam clamp with a restraint strap or safety strap, capable of resisting
the applied seismic load that will ensure that the clamp will be prevented from walking off the
beam may be used.
D2.1 9.8 Summary:
Attachment of the MEP components and their seismic restraints to the building structure is of the
utmost importance to maintaining the building function following an earthquake. It is the
responsibility of the design professionals of record for the MEP systems to work with the structural
engineer of record and the architect of record for the building to ensure that the anchorage points
for the MEP component supports and restraints have been properly designed to transfer the
design seismic loads as well as any other dead weight and service loads.

PAGE 4 of 4
D2.1 9.0
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member
IBC 2000/2003 Piping Restraint Rules
For the remainder of this document pipingrefers only to piping not related to those items
above.
Prior to using this document, the appropriate (SDS) design spectral response for the
project in question must be determined. This is a function of the mapped short period
spectral response and the soil classification factor. If the soil type is unknown, type D
should be assumed.
In addition, the project must be classified according to seismic use group. Refer to the
code or separate documentation for a detailed breakdown as to the definitions of various
seismic use groups.
Lastly, the piping system
s importance factor must be determined. This factor is now tied
more closely to the use of, or hazard generated by, the piping rather than the use of the
structure. There are two levels of importance: 1.0 and 1.5. The importance factor of 1.5
is used under the following conditions:
1) The component is a life-safety component that must function after an
earthquake.
2) The component contains hazardous or flammable material in excess of
exempted limits.
3) Components needed for continued operation of Group III occupancy structure.
4) Components whose failure could result damage to a system or space required
for continued operation of Group III occupancy structure.
5) All other conditions use an importance factor of 1.0.
The following information is based on the 2000 IBC Code. (The same data is present in
the 2003 IBC and/or Chapter 9 of ASCE 7-02, but the citation references would vary).
These do not take into account more stringent specifications or local requirements.
Systems relating to power piping; process piping; liquid transportation systems for
hydrocarbons, LPG, anhydrous ammonia and alcohol; refrigeration; slurries; or gas
transmission are subject to ASME standards that should also be consulted where
applicable.
Should such requirements exist, they would need to be evaluated
independently.
Using the seismic use group in conjunction with the design spectral response, the seismic
design category can be determined from the table below:
IBC 2000 PIPING RESTRAINT RULES

PAGE 1 OF 4

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D2.2
MEMBER
Seismic Design Category based on

.2 Second Response Accelerations
Seismic Use Group
SDS Value
I
II
III
SDS < 0.167g
A
A
A
B
0.33<SDS<0.50g
0.50g<SDS
a
0.75g<S1
S1 is mapped max considered spectral response
Piping Exempt from Restraint Requirements

Piping of all types that does not require seismic restraint per code:
1) Any piping that is placed in a structure that falls into seismic design category A or B
(1621.1.1).
2) Any piping that is placed in a structure that falls into seismic design category C and
has an importance factor of 1.0 (1621.1.1).
3) Any piping system in any seismic design category that has an importance factor of 1.0,
weighs less than 400 lb, is mounted within 4 ft of the floor, is flexibly mounted to all
interfacing equipment, and is not critical to the continued operation of the structure
(1621.1.1).
Fire-Protection piping that does not require seismic restraint per code:
1) All piping when not subject to earthquakes(NFPA 13 6-4). As this definition is not
clear, defer back to IBC 1621.1.1 indicating nothing required for design category A or
B (only).
2) Lateral bracing not required if the top of the pipe is within 6of the support structure
and the pipe is individually supported. Longitudinal bracing still is required (NFPA 13
6-4.5.3, NFPA 13 6-4.5.4).
3) Branch lines that are under 2.5diameter require no bracing (NFPA 13 6-4.5.3).
0.167g<SDS<0.33g
Gas, fuel or other high hazard piping systems that do not require seismic restraint
per code:
1) Runs of piping supported by hangers where all rod hangers are a maximum of 12
long (from top anchor position to top of pipe or from top anchor position to top of
trapeze bar, whichever is longer). The rods must be fitted with a non-moment
generating free swinging connection at the top and adequate flexes at the equipment
interfaces must be provided. (Note, all hanger rods on the run must comply with the
above to meet this criteria, and the swinging of the pipes must not interfere with other
pipes and systems.) (1621.3.10.2.1-2.2.1 and 1621.3.10)
2) High deformability piping (see below for examples) in seismic design category D, E, or

PAGE 2 OF 4

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D2.2
MEMBER
Medical gas piping systems that do not require seismic restraint per code:
interfaces must be provided. Note that all hanger rods on the run must comply with
the above to meet this criteria, and the swinging of the pipes must not interfere with
other pipes and systems (1621.3.10.2.1-2.2.1 and 1621.3.10).
F if the diameter is 1.0or less. The piping must also be located such that impacts with
other piping or equipment will not occur during a seismic event, and adequate flexes at
the equipment interfaces must be provided (1621.3.10.2.1-2.2.2 and 1621.3.10).
3) High deformability piping (see below for examples) in seismic design category C if the
diameter is 2.0or less. The piping must also be located such that impacts with other
piping or equipment will not occur during a seismic event, and adequate flexes at the
equipment interfaces must be provided (1621.3.10.2.1-2.2.3 and 1621.3.10).
General Piping Systems that do not require Seismic Restraint per Code:
the above to meet this criteria and the swinging of the pipes must not interfere with
other pipes and systems (1621.3.10.2.1-2.2.1).
F and an importance factor of 1.5, if the diameter is 1.0or less. The piping must also
be located such that impacts with other piping or equipment will not occur during a
seismic event, and adequate flexes at the equipment interfaces must be provided
(1621.3.10.2.1-2.2.2).
3) High deformability piping (see below for examples) in seismic design category C and
an importance factor of 1.5, if the diameter is 2.0or less. The piping must also be
located such that impacts with other piping or equipment will not occur during a
(1621.3.10.2.1-2.2.3 and 1621.3.10).
F if the diameter is 1.0or less. The piping must also be located such that impacts
with other piping or equipment will not occur during a seismic event, and adequate
flexes at the equipment interfaces must be provided. (1621.3.10.2.1-2.2.2 and
1621.3.10).
3) High deformability piping (see below for examples) in seismic design category C if the
diameter is 2.0or less. The piping must also be located such that impacts with other
piping or equipment will not occur during a seismic event, and adequate flexes at the
equipment interfaces must be provided. (1621.3.10.2.1-2.2.3 and 1621.3.10).

PAGE 3 OF 4

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D2.2
MEMBER
F and an importance factor of 1.0, if the diameter is 3.0or less. The piping must also
be located such that impacts with other piping or equipment will not occur during a
(1621.3.10.2.1-2.2.4).
The Code identifies piping systems by levels of deformability. Unfortunately the

definitions as expressed in the body of the code are difficult to match up to typical
hardware that might be used. As a guide, various types of commonly used components
and corresponding deformability ratings are listed below.
High deformability: These are comprised of piping made of ductile materials and
connected with strain tolerant connections. Steel or copper pipe with welded, brazed or
roll formed groove type connections, PVC/PVDF plastic piping with glued connections or
ductile iron pipe with no-hub connections can normally be assumed to fall into this
category.
Medium deformability: These are systems that are commonly made up of relatively ductile
materials, but are connected together with couplings that are less strain resistant. Steel
pipe and fittings as well as plastic piping connected with screwed joints or cut groove type
connections can normally be assumed to fall into this category.
Low deformability: These systems are made of brittle materials and/or have connectors
with a low strain tolerance. Plain cast iron, glass lined and FRP pipe and connectors fall
into this group.
Flexibility: Some motion tolerant coupling types, when used in seismic applications, are
actually too flexible. On these a reduced restraint spacing (one half that specified by
SMACNA) must be used to prevent excessive motion in and resulting damage to the
piping system. Examples of these include non-rigid groove type connectors and 2 band
no-hub couplings.
Piping system deformability Classifications and Flexibility Issues:
Unless noted otherwise, KNC assumes piping installed in seismic areas to meet the high
deformability criteria and that measures have been taken to control the system flexibility
when sizing and locating restraint components.

PAGE 4 OF 4

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D2.2
MEMBER
IBC 2000 Ductwork Restraint Rules

The following information is based on the 2000 IBC Code itself and does not take into
account more stringent specifications or local requirements.
In addition, the project must be classified according to seismic use group. Refer to the
seismic use groups.
Lastly, the ductwork systems importance factor must be determined. This factor is now
tied more closely to the use of, or hazard generated by, the ductwork rather than the use
of the structure. There are two levels of importance: 1.0 and 1.5. The importance factor
of 1.5 is used under the following conditions:
earthquake.
exempted limits.
3) Components needed for continued operation of Group III occupancy structures.
4) Components whose failure could result in damage to a system or space
required for continued operation of Group III occupancy structures.
5) All other conditions use an importance factor of 1.0.
Using the seismic use group in conjunction with the design spectral response, the seismic
design category can be determined from the table below:
Seismic Use Group
SDS Value
I
II
III
SDS < 0.167g
A
A
A
0.167g<SDS<0.33g
0.33<SDS<0.50g
0.50g<SDS
a
0.75g<S1
Prior to using this document, the appropriate (SDS) design spectral response for the
project in question must be determined. This is a function of the mapped short period
spectral response and the soil classification factor. If the soil type is unknown, type D
should be assumed.
S1 is mapped max considered spectral response
IBC 2000 DUCTWORK RESTRAINT RULES

PAGE 1 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D2.3
MEMBER
Ductwork Exempt from Restraint Requirement
High hazard ductwork systems that do not require seismic restraint per code:
1) Restrain all ducts regardless of size (1621.3.9).
General ducting systems that do not require seismic restraint per code:
1) Runs of ductwork with an importance factor of 1.0 that are supported by hangers
where all rod hangers are a maximum of 12 long (from top anchor position to top of
duct or from top anchor position to top of trapeze bar, whichever is longer). The rods
must be detailed to avoid significant bending of the hanger rods or connections Note
that all hanger rods on the run must comply with the above to meet this criteria and the
swinging of the ducts must not interfere with other ducts or systems (1621.3.9 item 1).
2) Ducts with an importance factor of 1.0 and with a cross-sectional area of 6 square feet
of less. The ductwork must also be located such that impacts with other ductwork or
equipment will not occur during a seismic event, and adequate flexes at the equipment
interfaces must be provided (1621.3.9 item 2).
Ductwork of all types that does not require seismic restraint per code:
1) Any ductwork that is placed in a structure that falls into seismic design category A or B
(1621.1.1).
2) Any ductwork that is placed in a structure that falls into seismic design category C and
has an importance factor of 1.0 (1621.1.1).
3) Any ducting system in any seismic design category that has an importance factor of
1.0, weighs less than 400 lb, is mounted within 4 ft of the floor, is flexibly mounted to
all interfacing equipment, and is not critical to the continued operation of the structure
(1621.1.1).
IBC 2000 DUCTWORK RESTRAINT RULES

PAGE 2 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D2.3
MEMBER
BOCA 1996/SBC 1997 Piping Restraint Rules

The following information is based on the 1996 BOCA and 1997 SBC codes and does not
take into account more stringent specifications or local requirements. Systems relating to
power piping; process piping; liquid transportation systems for hydrocarbons, LPG,
anhydrous ammonia and alcohol; refrigeration; slurries; or gas transmission are subject to
ASME standards that should also be consulted where applicable. Should such
requirements exist, they would need to be evaluated independently.
Prior to using this document, the appropriate peak velocity related acceleration (Av) for the
project in question must be determined.
In addition, the project must be classified by seismic performance category. Refer to the
seismic hazard exposure groups.
Effective Peak Velocity
Related Accelerations
Av<.05
Seismic Hazard Exp Grp

I
II
III
A
.05<Av<.10
B
B
.10<Av<.15
C
C
.15<Av<.20
C
D
.20<Av
D
D
Seismic Performance Category
A
C
C
D
E
Piping Exempt from Restraint Requirements

Piping of all types that does not require seismic restraint per code:
1) Any piping that is placed in a structure that falls into seismic performance category A
or B (BOCA-1610.6 item 2 and SBC-1607.6 item 2).
For the remainder of this document piping refers only to piping not related to those items
above.
Fire-Protection piping that does not require seismic restraint per code:
1) All piping when not subject to earthquakes (NFPA 13 6-4). As this definition is not
clear, defer back to BOCA code 1610-2 and SBC-1607.6-2 indicating nothing required
for performance category A or B (only).
2) Lateral bracing not required if the top of the pipe is within 6 of the support structure
6-4.5.3, NFPA 13 6-4.5.4).
3) Branch lines that are under 2.5 diameter require no bracing (NFPA 13 6-4.5.3).
BOCA 1996/SBC 1997 PIPING RESTRAINT RULES

PAGE 1 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D2.4
MEMBER
Medical gas piping systems that do not require seismic restraint per code
(assumed other pipe systems in BOCA-Table 1610.6.4(1) and SBC-Table
1607.6.4A as no other categories apply, however 1992 SMACNA indicates 1 max
for unrestrained medical gas piping (Section 3.3)):
1) Runs of piping individually supported by hangers where all rod hangers are a
maximum of 12 long (from top anchor position to top of pipe or from top anchor
position to top of trapeze bar, whichever is longer). Adequate flexes at the equipment
other pipes and systems (BOCA 1610.6.4.2 and Table 1610.6.4(1) note c1 / SBC
1607.6.4.2 and Table 1607.6.4A note 3a).
2) Piping in mechanical rooms that is 1.0 diameter or less. The piping must also be
(BOCA Table 1610.6.4(1) note c2 and SBC Table 1607.6.4A note 3b).
3) Piping in other areas that is 2.0 diameter or less. The piping must also be located
such that impacts with other piping or equipment will not occur during a seismic event,
and adequate flexes at the equipment interfaces must be provided (Min of 1992
SMACNA (3.3) and BOCA Table 1610.6.4(1) note c3 or SBC Table 1607.6.4A
note 3c).
General piping systems that do not require seismic restraint per code:
1) Runs of piping individually supported by hangers where all rod hangers are a
maximum of 12 long (from top anchor position to top of pipe or from top anchor
position to top of trapeze bar, whichever is longer). Adequate flexes at the equipment
other pipes and systems (BOCA 1610.6.4.2 and Table 1610.6.4(1) note c1 / SBC
1607.6.4.2 and Table 1607.6.4A note 3a).
2) Piping in mechanical rooms that is 1.0 diameter or less. The piping must also be
seismic event ,and adequate flexes at the equipment interfaces must be provided
(BOCA Table 1610.6.4(1) note c2 and SBC Table 1607.6.4A note 3b).
3) Piping in other areas that is 2.0 diameter or less. The piping must also be located
such that impacts with other piping or equipment will not occur during a seismic event,
and adequate flexes at the equipment interfaces must be provided (BOCA Table
1610.6.4(1) note c3 and SBC Table 1607.6.4A note 3c).
Gas, fuel or other high hazard piping systems that do not require seismic restraint
per code:
1) No exceptions, must all be restrained (BOCA-Table 1610.6.4(1) and SBC-Table
1607.6.4A no applicable notes)
BOCA 1996/SBC 1997 PIPING RESTRAINT RULES

PAGE 2 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D2.4
MEMBER
BOCA 1996/SBC 1997 Ductwork Restraint Rules

The following information is based on the 1996 BOCA and 1997 SBC codes and does not
take into account more stringent specifications or local requirements.

Av<.05

I
II
III
A
.05<Av<.10
B
B
.10<Av<.15
C
C
.15<Av<.20
C
D
.20<Av
D
D
Seismic Performance Category
A
C
C
D
E
Ductwork Exempt from Restraint Requirements

Ductwork of all types that does not require seismic restraint per code:
1) Any ductwork that is placed in a structure that falls into seismic performance category
A or B (BOCA-1610.6 item 2 and SBC-1607.6 item 2).
High hazard ductwork systems that do not require seismic restraint per code:
1) No exceptions, must all be restrained (BOCA-Table 1610.6.4(1) and SBC-Table
1607.6.4A no applicable notes).
HVAC ducting systems that do not require seismic restraint per code:
1) Runs of ductwork supported by hangers where all rod hangers are a maximum of 12
long (from top anchor position to top of duct or from top anchor position to top of
trapeze bar, whichever is longer). Adequate flexes at the equipment interfaces must
be provided. Note that all hanger rods on the run must comply with the above to meet
this criteria, and the swinging of the ducts must not interfere with other ducts and
systems (BOCA 1610.6.4.2 and Table 1610.6.4(1) note d1 / SBC 1607.6.4.2 and
Table 1607.6.4A note 4a).
2) Ductwork that is less than 6 square feet in area. The ductwork must also be located
such that impacts with other ductwork or equipment will not occur during a seismic
event, and adequate flexes at the equipment interfaces must be provided (BOCA
Table 1610.6.4(1) note d2 and SBC Table 1607.6.4A note 4b).
Prior to using this document, the appropriate peak velocity related acceleration (Av) for the
project in question must be determined. In addition, the project must be classified by
seismic performance category. Refer to the code or separate documentation for a
detailed breakdown as to the definitions of various seismic hazard exposure groups.
BOCA 1996/SBC 1997 DUCTWORK RESTRAINT RULES

PAGE 1 OF 1

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D2.5
MEMBER
UBC 1997 Piping Restraint Rules

The following information is based on the 1997 UBC code and does not take into account
more stringent specifications or local requirements. Systems relating to power piping;
process piping; liquid transportation systems for hydrocarbons, LPG, anhydrous ammonia
and alcohol; refrigeration; slurries; or gas transmission are subject to ASME standards
that should also be consulted where applicable. Should such requirements exist, they
would need to be evaluated independently.
The UBC grants several exclusions without regard to the project or piping systems importance
factor or the expected peak ground accelerations. As such, it is not necessary to review
project importance factors or Seismic Zone when reviewing piping systems for possible
exclusion (Footnotes on Table 16-O).
Piping, Except Fire, Exempt from Restraint Requirements
Any piping that meets all of the following criteria (Table 16-O Footnotes):
A) Lateral motion will not cause damaging impact with other systems.
B) Piping uses exclusively ductile materials and contains ductile connections.
C) Lateral motion will not cause damage to fragile appurtenances (example: sprinkler
heads).
D) If mounted on a post protruding up from the floor, the post is checked for stability.
E) The piping supports are under 12 in length and contain a connection that will not
allow them to carry a moment (swivel).
Rule of Thumb Exclusions
While the code does not identify any exclusions based on pipe size or fluid carried, most
jurisdictions will apply limits to the minimum piping size that requires bracing based on
SMACNA. In addition, because hazardous materials such as gas are not addressed in
the 97UBC, again the SMACNA document will typically be considered to be the guiding
reference. Because the local authority has the final say on this, however, both of these
items should be confirmed for each locale.
For the remainder of this document piping refers only to piping not related to those items
above.
Restraints can be excluded per SMACNA for:

1) Piping in mechanical rooms that is 1.0 diameter or less (SMACNA 3.3).
2) Piping in other areas that is 2.0 diameter or less (SMACNA 3.3).
Additional locations where restraint is required:
1) All gas and hazardous piping regardless of size (SMACNA 3.3).
UBC 1997 PIPING RESTRAINT RULES

PAGE 1 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D2.6
MEMBER
Assuming fire-protection is governed by NFPA 13, restraint exclusions associated

with it would be:
1) Lateral bracing not required if the top of the pipe is within 6 of the support structure
6-4.5.3, NFPA 13 6-4.5.4).
2) Branch lines that are under 2.5 diameter require no bracing (NFPA 13 6-4.5.3).
UBC 1997 PIPING RESTRAINT RULES

PAGE 2 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D2.6
MEMBER
UBC 1997 Ductwork Restraint Rules

The following information is based on 1997 UBC Code and does not take into account
more stringent specifications or local requirements.
The UBC grants several exclusions without regard to the project or ductwork systems
importance factor or the expected peak ground accelerations. As such, it is not necessary to
review project importance factors or seismic zone when reviewing ductwork systems for
possible exclusion (Footnotes on Table 16-O).
Any duct that meets all of the following criteria (Table 16-O footnotes):
A) Lateral motion will not cause damaging impact with other systems.
B) Lateral motion will not result in the loss of vertical support.
C) If mounted on a post protruding up from the floor, the post is checked for stability.
D) The duct supports are under 12 in length and contain a connection that will not
allow them to carry a moment (swivel).
Rule of Thumb Exclusions
While the code does not identify any exclusions based on duct size or importance factor,
most jurisdictions will apply limits to the minimum duct size that requires bracing based on
SMACNA. Because the local authority has the final say on this, however, this should be
confirmed for each locale.
Restraints can be excluded per SMACNA for:
1) All ductwork that is under 6 sq feet in area (SMACNA 3.2).
Ductwork Exempt from Restraint Requirements
UBC 1997 DUCTWORK RESTRAINT RULES

PAGE 1 OF 1

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D2.7
MEMBER
Evaluating Seismic Requirements in Specifications

There are four or five items that are critical when determining the extent of seismic
restraint required by a specification. Once the need for restraint is determined, the
magnitude of the seismic forces must be evaluated to select the required components.
1) The effective national code (code document and year).

2) The location of the project and the ground acceleration coefficient (Av or Z depending
on the code).
3) The occupancy category (essential, hazardous, or emergency service-related in
particular).
4) Any special seismic factors that may be listed in the spec and that exceed code
requirements. These may dictate restraint even if the code would not normally require
it, and a seismic requirement is often added to a spec to afford some degree of bomb
blast protection.
A fifth item that affects only the 97 UBC, 2000 IBC, and TI 809-04 spec is:
5) The class of soil present at the jobsite (geotechnical report data).
The above information will need to be applied to the code requirements to determine the
extent of seismic restraint to be included in the project. Once the above information is
gathered, we can compare it to the appropriate code to determine specific requirements.
A typical map for the BOCA, SBC, and UBC codes is shown below for reference.
The initial four items affecting all codes are:
EVALUATING SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS IN SPECIFICATIONS

PAGE 1 OF 16

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D2.8
MEMBER
1996 BOCA and 1997 SBC

The last version of both the BOCA and SBC codes, although being phased out by the
2000 IBC code, are still occasionally referenced at the state level or for a specific project.
These two codes have basically identical seismic design parameters and will be
considered together in this section.
The first step in calculating the seismic requirements for a job is to determine if restraint
can be ruled out for the entire project. Start by determining the seismic use (or hazard
exposure) group. All structures are placed into one of three classifications:
I Anything not in Groups II or III
II High occupancy structures and schools
III Emergency, hazardous, and essential facilities.
Using the seismic use group, along with the site ground acceleration factor and the table
below, a performance factor can be obtained.
Equipment in buildings with a
performance factor of A or B is exempt from seismic design requirements.
Av<.05

I
II
III
A
B
B
.10<Av<.15
C
C
.15<Av<.20
C
D
.20<Av
D
D
Seismic Performance Factor
C
C
D
E
.05<Av<.10
In addition, mechanical equipment in performance category C buildings which falls into

seismic use group I occupancies and is not related to safety, emergency power, or
hazardous material transfer is also exempt.
Equipment Exempt from Seismic Requirements
Piping does not require restraint in any seismic zone or performance category as long as
it is 1) not hazardous, and 2) mounted such that the dimension from the top of the pipe to
the supporting surface does not exceed 12 and adequate flexes are included at
equipment connections. In addition, if the pipe is under 2-1/2 in diameter and is not in a
mechanical room, or if it is under 1-1/4 in diameter and is in a mechanical room, no
restraint is required.
Ducting does not require restraint in any seismic zone or performance category as long as
it is 1) not hazardous, and 2) mounted such that the pendulum length from the support

PAGE 2 OF 16

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D2.8
MEMBER
surface to the trapeze does not exceed 12 and adequate flexes are included at
equipment connections. Also, if the duct is less than 6 sq ft in area no restraint is
required.
In the BOCA and SBC codes there is no specific equipment exemption by weight or
mounting location. If there is a requirement in the building to restrain equipment, it must
all be restrained without regard to weight.
Estimating Seismic Forces
Fp = Av C c Pac W c
(Eq. 2.8-1)
where:
Fp
Av
Cc
P
ac
= lateral seismic load

= ground acceleration coefficient
= seismic coefficient (Table 2.8-1)
= performance criteria factor (Table 2.8-1)
= attachment amplification factor
= 2.0 for resiliently mounted equipment above grade
= 1.0 for all others
Wc = equipment/component weight.
Worst-Case Load/Required Restraint Estimates
The worst-case loads can be estimated for preliminary design as:
Lateral Load: 2 * (total lateral load / number of restraints)
Vertical Load: 0 (Fp < .25Wc)
0.5Fp (.25Wc < Fp < .5Wc)
1.0Fp (.5Wc < Fp < 1.0Wc)
2.0Fp (Fp > 1.0Wc)
The global lateral seismic load is
For general guidance, when restraint is required with these codes, FHS and FLSS
isolators and 1/4" restraint cables will work in virtually all zones and with most equipment
types. For attachment to concrete in higher seismic zones, load spreader plates will
almost certainly be required.
For non-hazardous piping and ductwork, a reasonable estimate of the number of
restraints required is the total length of restrained pipe divided by 25, or the total length of
restrained duct divided by 20. For hazardous systems, the values would be about 3/2 of

PAGE 3 OF 16

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D2.8
MEMBER
the above.
Table 2.8-1. Seismic Coefficients and Performance Criteria Factors (BOCA and SBC).
Cc
Fire protection equip and systems
P
Ssmc Hzrd Grp
I
II
III
2.0 1.5 1.5 1.5
Emergency or standby electrical systems
2.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
General Equipment
A) Boilers, furnaces, incinerators, water htrs, and other equipment utilizing combustible
energy sources or high-temperature energy sources
B) Communication systems
C) Electrical bus ducts and primary cable systems suspended farther than 12" from
supporting surface or 2-1/2" or more inside diameter
D) Electrical motor control centers, motor control devices, switchgear, transformers, and
unit substations
E) Reciprocating or rotating equipment
F) Tanks, heat exchangers and pressure vessels.
2.0
0.5
1.0
1.5
Manufacturing and process machinery
0.67
0.5
1.0
1.5
Pipe systems
A) Gas and high-hazard piping
B) Fire suppression piping
C) Other pipe systems
2.0
2.0
0.67
1.5
1.5
0.5
1.5
1.5
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
HVAC ducts
Electrical panel boards
Lighting fixtures
(Cc for pendulum fixtures must be 1.5)
0.67
0.67
0.67
0.5
0.5
0.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.5
1.5
1.5
1997 UBC
The 97 UBC code is considerably more complex than the BOCA or SBC codes. This
code introduces soil factors, equipment elevation, and fault proximity into the equation.
When determining the seismic requirements the first step, as with BOCA and SBC, is to
review the job to see if restraint can be ruled out of the project globally. The 97 UBC code
contains only a single global exclusion. All components in buildings constructed in seismic
zones 2 and higher must be designed for seismic loads. By exclusion, this indicates that
components in all buildings constructed in seismic zone 1 (Z < .075) need not be reviewed
for seismic loads.
Mech / Elec component or system
The 97 UBC excludes equipment weighing 400 lb or less which is floor or roof mounted.
For equipment meeting this exclusion it need be restrained only in the manner normally
recommended for general applications by the equipment manufacturer. No engineering
support documentation is required to substantiate the design and no special components

PAGE 4 OF 16

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D2.8
MEMBER
are required.
Piping does not require restraint in any zone as long as it is 1) not hazardous, and 2)
mounted with a swivel-type connection such that the dimension from the top of the pipe to
the supporting surface does not exceed 12 and adequate flexes are included at
equipment connections.
Raceways do not require restraint in any seismic zone or performance category as long
as they are mounted with a swivel-type connection such that the pendulum length from
the support surface to the raceway does not exceed 12 and adequate flexes are included
at equipment connections.
Although not in the code, it is accepted practice to not restrain piping outside of
mechanical rooms that is under 2-1/2 in diameter or ductwork that is under 6 sq ft in area.
This is referenced in the SMACNA guidelines and these guidelines have been accepted
by the UBC as meeting code compliance. These can be excluded if SMACNA is
referenced in the specification.
The lateral seismic force acting on a component or piece of equipment is calculated as
Fp =
a pC a I p
h
1 + 3 x
Rp
hr
W p
Fp
ap
Ca
Ip
Rp
hx
hr
Wp
= total design lateral force

= component amplification factor (Table 2.8-2)
= seismic coefficient
= importance factor
= component response modification factor (Table 2.8-2)
= component attachment elevation with respect to grade
= roof elevation with respect to grade
= weight of component.
(Eq. 2.8-2)
where:
Ducting does not require restraint in any seismic zone or performance category as long as
it is mounted with a swivel-type connection such that the pendulum length from the
support surface to the trapeze does not exceed 12 and adequate flexes are included at
equipment connections.
The design lateral force need not exceed

PAGE 5 OF 16

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D2.8
MEMBER
Fp = 4.0Ca I pW p
and the absolute minimum design load is
(Eq. 2.8-3)
Fp = 0.7C a I pW p .
In any case, if the equipment is anchored to concrete the load can be reduced by a factor
of 1.4 to account for the different design factors used for the anchor capacity and load
determination (this applies to either hard-mounted or isolated equipment). If the
equipment is isolated and anchored to concrete with post installed or shallow (less than 8
bolt diameter) cast-in-place anchors, the design load used must be doubled to account for
dynamic impact.
The importance factor Ip for a piece of equipment is 1.5 if the equipment is essential to the
continued operation of essential or hazardous services (whether or not the building itself
is essential). Otherwise the importance factor is 1.0.
Table 2.8-2. Component Amplification and Response Modification Factors.
Horizontal Force Factors
Components
Ceilings and light fixtures
Equipment
Tanks and vessels
Elec, mech, plumbing equip, conduit, piping, ductwork
All equip anchored to structure below its center of mass
Emergency systems and essential communications
Isolated equipment
ap
1
Rp
3
1
1
2.5
1
2.5
3
3
3
3
1.5
The seismic coefficient (Ca) is a measure of the ground motion acceleration and its
calculation requires the following information.
1) The Site Ground Acceleration Coefficient (z). This will range from .075 to .4
depending on location.
2) The Site Soil Classification (Hard Rock - SA, Rock - SB, Dense Soil - SC, Stiff
Soil - SD, Soft Soil - SE, and Other - SF). If unknown, use soil profile SD.
3) If the Site Ground Acceleration Coefficient (z) is 0.4 (Seismic Zone 4) the
proximity to the nearest active fault is required. Fault maps can be pulled up on
the Internet to help in this task, but it should be specified by the Engineer of
Record. If the distance to the fault is greater than 10 km, the forces are not
increased. If less than 10 km, the distance in km should be estimated.
4) If the Site Ground Acceleration Coefficient (z) is 0.4 (Seismic Zone 4) the
seismic source type must be identified. A faults that are capable of producing
large magnitude earthquakes and that have a high rate of seismic activity. C
faults not capable of producing large magnitude earthquakes and that have a
relatively low rate of seismic activity. B all other faults.
(Eq. 2.8-4)

PAGE 6 OF 16

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D2.8
MEMBER
The Seismic Coefficient is determined from Table 2.8-3b. The table is entered with the
Seismic Zone Factor and Soil Profile and the value of Ca is determined. In Seismic
Zone 4 (z = 0.4) the Near Source Factor (Na) should be determined from Table 2.8-3a.
Table 2.8-3. Near Source Factor and Seismic Coefficient.
(a) Near Source Factor
(b) Seismic Coefficient
Seismic Zone Factor, z

Soil Profile Type z = 0.075 z = 0.15 z = 0.2
z = 0.3
Sa
0.06
0.12
0.16
0.24
Near Source Factor (Na)
Sb
Closest Distance to know Seismic Source

Seismic Source Type
<= 2 km
5 km
>= 10 km
A
1.5
1.2
1.0
B
1.3
1.0
1.0
C
1.0
1.0
1.0
Linear Interpolation for distance is permitted
0.08
0.15
0.20
z = 0.4
0.32Na
0.30
0.40Na
Sc
0.09
0.18
0.24
0.33
0.40Na
Sd
0.12
0.22
0.28
0.36
0.44Na
Se
Sf
0.36Na
0.19
0.30
0.34
0.36
Site Specific Geotechnical Report Required
Worst-Case Load/Required Restraint Estimates

The worst-case loads can be estimated for preliminary design as:
Lateral Load: 2 * (total lateral load / number of restraints)
Vertical Load: 0 (Fp < .25Wp)
0.5Fp (.25Wp < Fp < .5Wp)
1.0Fp (.5Wp < Fp < 1.0Wp)
2.0Fp (1.0Wp < Fp < 2.0Wp)
4.0Fp (Fp > 2.0Wp)
When restraint is required with this code, FHS and FLSS isolators and 1/4 inch restraint
cables will generally work for at grade applications in virtually all zones and with most
equipment types. For equipment locations at higher elevations and the roof, particularly in
higher seismic zones, it may be necessary to use separate restraints (HS-5 or 7) or FMS
isolator/restraints. If attached to concrete, load spreader plates will almost certainly be
required.
Seismic Coefficient Ca
For non-hazardous piping and ductwork at grade, a reasonable estimate of the number of
restraints required is the total length of restrained pipe divided by 20 and the total length
of restrained duct divided by 15. For hazardous systems the values would be about 3/2
the above. For piping and duct at the roof, the required restraints will approximately
double. For pipes over 6 diameter in all cases cable sizes will increase to 3/8 and for

PAGE 7 OF 16

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D2.8
MEMBER
pipes over 12 diameter the size can increase to 1/2".

2000 IBC and TI 809-04
The primary difference between TI 809-04 and the 2000 IBC is in the area of exclusions.
The 2000 IBC excludes some structures and components from the seismic design scope
that TI 809-04 does not.
As with all building codes, the first step in calculating the seismic requirements for a job is
to determine if restraint can be ruled out for the entire project.
The 2000 IBC exempts components from the seismic requirements as follows:
Entire Structures (and contents):
1) Group R-3, single-family, stand-alone residential structures not more than three
stories in height, in areas where the mapped SDS value is less than .5g.
2) Agricultural storage structures intended only for incidental human occupancy.
3) All structures where the mapped SDS value is less than .167g and the mapped
SD1 value is less than .067g.
Mechanical/Electrical Components and Architectural Elements:
1) All non-structural mechanical components and architectural elements in
structures that fall into seismic design category A or B.
2) All mechanical components in structures that fall into seismic design category C
and where the importance factor is 1.0
3) All architectural elements in structures that fall into seismic design category C
and where the importance factor is 1.0, and there are fewer than three stories.
This code and federal spec represent the latest round of thinking in seismic design. They
are similar to the 97 UBC but use new maps and factors to allow more accurate load
assessments at a given site without having to research fault information. Soil factors and
equipment elevation still factor into the equation.
Specific Mechanical/Electrical Equipment:

1) All components (no matter what seismic design category) with an importance
factor of 1.0 weighing less than 400 lb, mounted to the floor with legs under 4 in
height, connected via flexible connections between components and associated
ductwork, piping, etc., and not critical to the continued operation of the
structure.

PAGE 8 OF 16

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D2.8
MEMBER
Specific Architectural Elements:
2) Mechanical and electrical components in seismic design categories D and E

that weigh 20 lb or less (no matter where mounted), that are connected via
flexible connections between components and associated ductwork, piping,
etc., where the importance factor does not exceed 1.0.
3) Ductwork that is less than 6 sq ft in area for the full length of a run where the
importance factor does not exceed 1.0 (no matter what seismic design
category) and the motion induced by a seismic event will not result in contact
with other components.
4) All ductwork that is suspended on hangers 12 or less in length for the full
length of a run with a non-moment generating connection to the structure and
where the importance factor does not exceed 1.0 (no matter what seismic
design category) and motion induced by a seismic event will not result in
contact with other components.
5) High deformability piping in all seismic design categories that is 3.0 inches or
less in diameter and has an importance factor of 1.0. (Note: High deformability
is a measure of ductility as defined in the code section 1602.1.) (Note: if
trapeze mounted and the cumulative total area of the pipes supported is less
than 5, no restraint is required.)
6) High deformability piping in seismic design category C that is 2.0 inches or less
in diameter with an importance factor of 1.5. (Note: if trapeze mounted and the
cumulative total area of the pipes supported is less than 3.2, no restraint is
required.)
7) High deformability piping in seismic design category D or E that is 1.0 inch or
less in diameter, with an importance factor of 1.5.
8) All piping that is suspended on hangers 12 or less in length (from the top of the
pipe) with a non-moment generating (swivel) connection to the structure, for all
importance factors and seismic eesign categories.
9) Any component that is supported from above by chains or other non-moment
generating connection provided it cannot be damaged by or cannot damage
any other component and has a supporting connection designed to take at least
three times the operating weight.
1) Components supported on chains or otherwise suspended from the structural

system above, as long as they are capable of moving a minimum of 12 or a
swing of 45 degrees without damage or contact with an obstruction, and as long
as the gravity design load used when sizing the attachment hardware is 3g.
2) Seismic load of less than 5 psf.
Other:
1) Equipment installed in line and hard mounted to the ductwork that weighs 75 lb
or less can be restrained as though it is part of the duct (no separate restraints

PAGE 9 OF 16

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D2.8
MEMBER
are required).
There are considerably fewer exemptions from seismic restraint design in the TI 809-04
Code. There are no exemptions for entire structures or general equipment types and
there are only a few for specific components as follows:
1) Piping in seismic design category A.

2) Piping in seismic design category B in structures that are not categorized as
essential or hazardous.
3) Gas piping under 1 diameter.
4) Piping in boiler and mechanical rooms of less than 1-1/4 diameter.
5) All other piping of less than 2-1/2 diameter.
6) All electrical conduit of less than 2-1/2 diameter.
7) Ductwork that is less than 6 sq ft in area .
8) All ductwork that is suspended on hangers 12 or less in length for the full
length of a run with a non-moment generating connection to the structure.
9) All piping that is suspended on individual hangers 12 or less in length (from the
top of the pipe) with a non-moment generating (swivel) connection to the
structure.
The lateral seismic force acting on a component or piece of equipment in both the 2000
IBC and TI 809-04 is calculated as
Fp =
0.4a p S DS
z
1 + 2 W p
Rp I p
h
Fp
ap
SDS
Ip
Rp
z
h
Wp
= total design lateral force

= component amplification factor (Table 2.8-4)
= design spectral response acceleration at short periods
= component importance factor
= component response modification factor (Table 2.8-4)
= component attachment elevation with respect to grade
= average roof elevation with respect to grade
= weight of component.
(Eq. 2.8-5)
where:
Specific Mechanical Equipment:
The design lateral force need not exceed

Fp = 1.6S DS I pW p
(Eq. 2.8-6)

PAGE 10 OF 16

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D2.8
MEMBER
and the absolute minimum design load is

Fp = 0.33SDS I pW p .
(Eq. 2.8-7)
The Component Amplification (ap) and Response Modification (Rp) factors are shown in
Table 2.8-4. When anchoring components to concrete using shallow embedment anchors
(those with an embedment length-to-diameter ratio of less than 8), an Rp value of 1.5 is to
be used and overides the value identified in the Component Coefficient table.
Table 2.8-4. Component Amplification and Response Modification Factors.

Component Coefficients
Mechanical and Electrical Component or Element
General Mechanical
Boilers and furnaces
Pres vessels, stacks, cantilevered chimneys
Other
Mfg and Process Equipment
General
Conveyors
Piping
High deformability elements and attachments
Limited deformability elements and attachments
Low deformability elements or attachments
HVAC Equipment
Vibration isolated
Non-vibration isolated
Mounted in line with ductwork
Elevator & Escalator Components
Trussed Towers
General Electrical
Distribution systems
Equipment
Lighting Fixtures
Architectural Component or Element
Interior Non-Structural Walls and Partitions
Plain (unreinforced) masonry
Other
Ceilings
Access Floors
Floors (built on and affixed to seismic frame)
Other
Flexible Components
High deformability
Limited deformability
Low deformability
ap
Rp
1.0
2.5
1.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
1.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
3.5
2.5
1.25
2.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
1.0
1.0
1.0
3.5
2.5
1.25
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.25
2.5
2.5
1.0
1.0
2.5
1.25
1.0
2.5
2.5
3.5
2.5
1.25
The importance factor in the 2000 IBC or TI 809-04 document is now tied more closely to
the use of the equipment rather than the use of the structure. There are two levels of

PAGE 11 OF 16

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D2.8
MEMBER
importance: 1.0 and 1.5.

conditions:
The importance factor of 1.5 is used under the following
All other conditions use an importance factor of 1.0.

Determination of the seismic response spectral acceleration at short periods (SDS)
requires the use of a spectral response map. Current maps applicable to either
specification can be quite detailed and unreadable in a small scale. To avoid this
problem, dynamic maps can be downloaded from the following website:
http://geohazards.cr.usgs.gov/eq/design/ibc/IBC1615-1us.pdf.
For evaluating the
attachment of equipment and architectural components, the maps of interest are those
that list the maximum short period spectral response (.2 second). The maps identifying
maximum long period spectral response (1 second) are of interest to us only to determine
if the structure can be exempted (IBC applications only) from seismic analysis and would
only come into play if the design spectral response at short period (.2 second) is less than
0.167.
It must be noted that the maps indicate the maximum spectral response for long and short
periods (SMS & SMl) and not the design spectral response. The ground accelerations used
for the design of architectural and equipment attachment are the short period (.2 second)
values only (SS). These are multiplied by the site (soil) classification factor (Fa) from the
table below (2.8-5a) and then reduced by a factor of 2/3 except in the case of immediate
occupancy structures under TI 809-04. In the TI 809-04 immediate occupancy case (A)
the reduction factor is increased to 3/4. The result, the design spectral response at short
periods (SDS) is the final acceleration coefficient used in the design.

earthquakea
exempted limits.
3) Storage racks in structures that are open to the public (Home Depot for
example).
4) Components needed for continued operation of Group III occupancy structure.
Levels of seismic concern are identified in the new code as the seismic design category.
These are a function of the structures end use and the ground acceleration coefficient. A
rough definition of the three possible use groups (I, II, and III) is as follows: Group III is an
emergency treatment, an essential service structure or a structure containing potentially
hazardous material; Group II is a high occupancy structure or non-essential utilities;;
Group I is what is left. Table 2.8-5b indicates the seismic design categories for various
conditions.

PAGE 12 OF 16

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D2.8
MEMBER
Table 2.8-5. Site Factors and Seismic Design Categories.

(b) Seismic Design Category
Site Factor (F a) Based on Site Class and Mapped

Seismic Use Group
SDS Value
I
II
III
SDS < 0.167g
A
A
A
Site
Class
A
B
C
c
D
E
F
a
b
c
Spectral Response for Short Periods (Ss)

Mapped Spectral Response Accel at Short Periods
Soil
S s < 0.25 S s = 0.50 Ss = 0.75 Ss = 1.0 Ss > 1.25
Type
Hard Rock
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
Moderate Rock
1
1
1
1
1
Dense Soil, Soft Rock
1.2
1.2
1.1
1
1
Stiff Soil
1.6
1.4
1.2
1.1
1
Soft Soil, Clay
2.5
1.7
1.2
0.9
Note b
Fill and Other
Note b
Note b
Note b
Note b
Note b
0.167g<SDS<0.33g
0.33<SDS<0.50g
0.50g<SDS
Use straight line interpolation for intermediate values of mapped spectral acceleration
0.75g<S1
Site specific geotechnical investigation and dynamic site response analyses shall be performed to determine values
In lieu of geotechnical data and in cases where Site Class E or F are not expected, Site Class D shall be assumed.
S1 is Mapped Max Considered Spectral Response
Vertical Force Component

It can be assumed that a vertical force component must be factored into the restraint
analysis for most situations. The vertical force to be used is
Fpv = 0.2SDS
(Eq. 2.8-8)
Force Tailoring Factors

In order to apply the above forces, there are additional factors that may be applicable,
depending on the component being analyzed and the method of attachment used.
1) As with the 97 UBC, the forces obtained from the above equations are working
strength figures. Because of this, the forces can be reduced by a factor of 1.4 when
computing concrete anchorage loads (working stress-based ratings). It comes into
play when evaluating connections using the older ASD (Allowable Stress Design) bolt
allowables, connections to timber with lag screws, or connections to concrete with post
installed anchors.
2) Permitted design loads and the resulting stresses in the attachment hardware can be
increased by a factor of 1.33 for short-term wind and seismic load applications when
working with working stress-based allowables.
3) Shallow embedment anchors must be sized to withstand 1.95 (or 1.3 x Rp (where Rp
equals 1.5)) times the computed design load.
4) For mechanical or electrical equipment that is supported on vibration isolation
systems, the design lateral force shall be taken as 2 Fp .
(a) Site Factors

PAGE 13 OF 16

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D2.8
MEMBER
Consolidating the above into simple understandable equations, we get the following:
Using the previously determined design force Fp, steel bolt and fastener allowables as per
LFRD, ASD and/or published post installed anchor allowables per ICBO
1) Rigid Equipment Connection via Through Bolts using the ASD Bolt Allowables:
2) Rigid Equipment Connection to Concrete with Post-Installed Anchors using ICBO

Anchor Ratings (Non OSHPD Applications):
Increase all anchor allowables by multiplying by 4/3 in all cases.
Shallow embed anchors (< 8 dias)
Lateral Design Load = 1.95Fp / 1.4
Vertical Design Load = 1.95Fpv / 1.4
Standard embed anchors (>= 8 dias)
3) Rigid Equipment Connection to Concrete with Post Installed Anchors using ICBO
Special Inspection Anchor Ratings (OSHPD Applications):
Lateral Design Load = Fp / 1.4, but increase bolt allowables by multiplying by 4/3
Vertical Design Load = Fpv / 1.4, but increase bolt allowables by multiplying by 4/3

4) Rigid Equipment Connection to Wood with Lag Screws as rated per ASD:
Lateral Design Load = Fp / 1.4, but increase Lag Screw Allowables by 1.6
Vertical Design Load = Fpv / 1.4, but increase Lag Screw Allowables by 1.6

PAGE 14 OF 16

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D2.8
MEMBER
5) Isolated Equipment Connection via Through Bolts using the ASD Bolt Allowables:
Increase Bolt Allowables by multiplying by 4/3 in all cases.
Lateral Design Load = 2Fp / 1.4
Vertical Design Load = 2Fpv / 1.4
Increase Anchor Allowables by multiplying by 4/3 in all cases.

7) Isolated Equipment Connection to Concrete with Post Installed Anchors using ICBO
Special Inspection Anchor Ratings (OSHPD Applications):
6) Isolated Equipment Connection to Concrete with Post Installed Anchors using ICBO
Anchor Ratings (Non OSHPD Applications):
8) Isolated Equipment Connection to Wood with Lag Screws as rated per ASD:
Increase Lag Screw Allowables by multiplying by 1.6 in all cases.
Lateral Design Load = 2Fp / 1.4
Vertical Design Load = 2Fpv / 1.4

PAGE 15 OF 16

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D2.8
MEMBER
Special Anchorage Requirements
For general guidance, when restraint is required with this code, FHS and FLSS isolators
as well as 1/4 restraint cables will work for at grade applications in lower level (below
1g) zones and with most equipment types. For equipment locations in more severe zones
and/or at higher elevations and the roof, particularly in higher seismic zones, it will likely
be necessary to use separate restraints (HS-5 or 7) or FMS isolator/restraints. If attached
to concrete, load spreader plates will be required.
For non-hazardous piping and ductwork at grade, a reasonable estimate of the restraints
required is (for piping) the total length of restrained pipe divided by 20 and (for ductwork)
the total length of restrained duct divided by 15. For hazardous systems, the values
would be about 2/3 of the above. For piping and duct at the roof, these spacings will
decrease to about half of the above values. For pipes over 6 diameter in all cases, cable
sizes will increase to 3/8 and for pipes over 12 diameter, the size can increase to 1/2.
In higher seismic areas, the use of anchor bolts will be heavily restricted, not only
because of severe limitations for their use on equipment over 10 hp, but also because of
factors that dictate more severe design load magnitudes when they are used. The higher
loads require larger anchors and the larger anchors require greater embedment depths. If
an embedment depth of under 8 bolt diameters is required due to slab thickness
limitations, the design load is again doubled and the idea of using concrete anchors can
be effectively eliminated. This leaves through-bolting through the slab as the only viable
option.
Unless housekeeping pads are monolithic to the floor slab, their added thickness cannot
be included in the embedment depth. Therefore, an anchor that penetrates a 6
housekeeping pad and extends 2 into the structural floor slab is considered to have an
embedment depth of 2 instead of 8. Significant pre-planning is needed to ensure that
the problems that can result from these situations are adequately addressed.
With the exception of undercut anchors, expansion anchors shall not be used to attach
non-vibration isolated equipment rated at over 10 hp. Conventional wedge-type, postinstalled anchors are acceptable for isolated equipment as long as they meet the load
requirements as defined here.

PAGE 16 OF 16

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D2.8
MEMBER
KINETICS Guide to Understanding NBCC Seismic for MEP

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
Title
D2.9 1.0
Introduction
D2.9 2.0
Required Basic Project Information
D2.9 2.1
Introduction
D2.9 2.2
Building Use Nature of Occupancy
D2.9 2.3
Site Class Soil Type
D2.9 2.4
Spectral Response Acceleration Value at 0.2 Second
D2.9 2.5
Importance Factor for Earthquake Loads
D2.9 2.6
Summary
D2.9 3.0
Design Seismic Forces
D2.9 3.1
Introduction
D2.9 3.2
Lateral Design Seismic Force
D2.9 3.3
Basis of Design for NBCC 2005
D2.9 3.4
Summary
D2.9 4.0
General Exemptions and Requirements
D2.9 4.1
Introduction
D2.9 4.2
General Acceleration Based Exemption for MEP Components
D2.9 4.3
Chandelier Exemption
D2.9 4.4
Isolated vs. Rigidly Connected Components
D2.9 4.5
Design Horizontal Seismic Load Application
D2.9 4.6
Connection of MEP Components to the Building Structure
D2.9 4.7
Lateral Deflections of MEP Components
D2.9 4.8
Transfer of Seismic Restraint Forces
D2.9 4.9
Seismic Restraints for Suspended MEP Components & Hanger Rods
D2.9 4.10 Summary
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE 1 of 1
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
D2.9 0.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member
Other Referenced Standards

Several other standards and codes are frequently mentioned in specifications. A short
summary of these standards, and their applicability, is presented in this section.
ASCE 7, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures, published by the
American Society of Civil Engineers, is the basis for the seismic and wind load provisions
in most building codes. It has been adopted virtually word-for-word, and in the future will
be adopted by reference. Specifications occasionally refer to ASCE 7 for determining the
loads, especially wind loads, on equipment or non-structural components.
For
preliminary, estimating purposes, this can be assumed to be identical to the 2000 IBC
provisions. Final design must explicitly consider the referenced standard and/or
applicable code.
OSHPD
OSHPD is the California Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development. It is
responsible for overseeing the design of hospitals and their contents within the state of
California. Outside of that narrow focus, OSHPD has no legal authority.
OSHPD has a pre-approval process for seismic restraints of equipment (as well as for the
equipment itself). In order to gain pre-approval, a manufacturer submits drawings, load
test results, and calculations for OSHPD that show the equipment seismic capacities and
how they were determined.
OSHPD may approve the listed capacities, request
additional information, or reject the submittal. Upon approval, the equipment can then be
used in California hospitals, up to the loads listed on the drawings, without further review
by OSHPD. The time required to obtain approval is currently up to three years after
submittal of the initial information. Note that a lack of pre-approval does not mean that a
piece of equipment cannot be used in projects under OSHPD jurisdiction. Approval of
equipment for individual projects can be obtained by submitting similar information to the
OSHPD office overseeing the particular project. The time required to obtain these onetime approvals is typically a few weeks.
ASCE 7
A recent trend in specifications is to require OSHPD pre-approval for projects that do not
fall under OSHPD jurisdiction. There are several reasons why this is not a good idea.
First, OSHPD has no legal authority outside of hospitals in California. Therefore, their
pre-approval has no meaning and does not supply any extra legitimacy to the product.
Second, there are no consistent standards for the data used to obtain OSHPD approval.
The required test data and calculations vary widely depending upon the reviewer. Thus,
OSHPD approval could mean that an extensive set of tests was performed, backed by
numerous calculations; alternatively, it could mean that a one-page letter listing the
capacities was submitted, or anything in between. Until consistent standards are applied,
OTHER REFERENCED STANDARDS

PAGE 1 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D2.10
MEMBER
OSHPD approval has no more meaning than sales literature, other than for California
hospitals.
SMACNA
NFPA 5000
The NFPA 5000 (National Fire Protection Association) is an alternate building code. It is
currently not adopted for use in any jurisdiction, although California has preliminarily
adopted it for the next round of code revisions in that state. Expect the provisions to be
very similar to the IBC.
FEMA
FEMA (Federal Emergency Management Agency) has produced several documents
intended to provide practical guidance for the installation of seismic restraints. The
documents are FEMA 412 (Installing Seismic Restraints for Mechanical Equipment),
FEMA 413 (Installing Seismic Restraints for Electrical Equipment ), and FEMA 415
(Installing Seismic Restraints for Ducts and Pipe). These manuals give detailed
installation instructions, including numerous photographs and illustrations, and specify
which types of restraints are appropriate for different conditions. They are meant to be
used in the field by installers and, to a lesser extent, by designers looking for the correct
type of restraint. They are not design guides and give no information for selecting the
appropriate size of restraints.
ASHRAE Practical Guide
The SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.)
Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems contains guidelines for
the restraint of ducts and piping. These guidelines do not replace the applicable building
code, but can be considered to be the state of the practice for seismic bracing of ducts
and piping.
The ASHRAE (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning

Engineers, Inc.) has produced A Practical Guide to Seismic Restraint. This guide
contains practical information about the building code requirements related to seismic
restraint and presents clarifying examples and calculation procedures. This is a very
useful publication for understanding the code requirements and how both the letter and
spirit can be followed.
OTHER REFERENCED STANDARDS

PAGE 2 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D2.10
MEMBER

INTRODUCTION
The purpose of this guide is to provide design professionals, contractors, and building officials
responsible for the MEP, Mechanical, Electrical, and Plumbing, with the information and guidance
required to ensure that the seismic restraints required for a specific project are selected and/or
designed, and installed in accordance with the code provisions. This guide will be written in
several easily referenced sections that deal with specific portions of the code.
This guide is based on the National Building Code of Canada 2005 (NBCC 2005). The NBCC
2005 appears to be very different in the formulation of the design forces than the previous NBCC
1995 version. This document will be based entirely on the newer NBCC 2005 version.
1. National Building Code of Canada 2005; Canadian Commission on Building and Fire Codes
and National Research Council of Canada, 1200 Montreal RD, Ottawa, ON K1A 9Z9 Chapter
Division B Part 4 Structural Design.
The selection and installation of the proper seismic restraints for MEP systems requires good
coordination with the design professionals and contractors involved with the building project. A
good spirit of cooperation and coordination is especially required for projects that have been
designated as post-disaster buildings, such as hospitals, emergency response centers, police and
fire stations. Coordination between the various design professionals and contractors will be a
constant theme throughout this guide. This coordination is vital for the following reasons.
1. The seismic restraints that are installed for a system can and will interfere with those of
another unless restraint locations are well coordinated.
2. The space required for the installed restraints can cause problems if non-structural walls
need to be penetrated, or other MEP components are in the designed load path for the
restraints.
INTRODUCTION
PAGE 1 of 2
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
D2.9 1.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member

3. The building end of the seismic restraints must always be attached to structure that is
adequate to carry the code mandated design seismic loads. It is the responsibility of the
structural engineer of record to verify this.
INTRODUCTION
PAGE 2 of 2
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
D2.9 1.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member

As with any design job, there is certain basic information that is required before seismic restraints
can be selected and placed. The building owner, architect, and structural engineer make the
decisions that form the basis for the information required to select the seismic restraints for the
pipe and duct systems in the building. This is information that should be included in the
specification and bid package for the project. It also should appear on the first sheet of the
structural drawings. For consistency, it is good practice to echo this information in the specification
for each building system, and on the first sheet of the drawings for each system. In this fashion,
this information is available to all of the contractors and suppliers that will have a need to know.
D2.9 2.2 Building Use Nature of Occupancy [Sentence 4.1.2.1]1:
How a building is to be used greatly affects the level of seismic restraint that is required for the
MEP (Mechanical, Electrical, and Plumbing) components. In the NBCC 2005 the building use is
defined through the Importance Category, which ranges in four stages from Low to Post-Disaster.
Table 2-1 below summarizes the information found in Tables 4.1.2.1 of the NBCC 2005. The
nature of the building use, or its Occupancy Category, is determined by the building owner and the
architect of record.
References in brackets [Sentence 4.1.2.1 and Table 4.1.2.1] apply to sections, tables, and/or equations in the
National Building Code of Canada 2005.

PAGE 1 of 11
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.9 2.0
Member
Table 2-1; Importance Category vs. Building Use and Occupancy [Table 4.1.2.1]
Importance
Category
Building Use or Nature of Occupancy
Low
Buildings whose failure will present a low direct or indirect hazard to human life
Low human occupancy buildings where structural collapse is unlikely to cause
injury or other serious consequences.
Minor storage buildings and structures.
Normal
Buildings not listed as Importance Category Low, High, or Post-Disaster.

Buildings which are likely to be used in Post-Disaster situations as shelters, which will
include the following building types:
High
Elementary, middle, or secondary schools.
Community centers.
Manufacturing and storage facilities which contain toxic, explosive, or hazardous

materials in sufficient quantities to pose a hazard to the public is released, such as:
PostDisaster
Petrochemical facilities.
Fuel storage facilities
Manufacturing and storage facilities for dangerous goods.
Buildings and structures which are designated as essential facilities which include but
are not limited to:
Hospitals, emergency treatment facilities, and blood banks.
Emergency response facilities, fire, rescue, ambulance, and police stations,
housing for emergency response equipment, and communications facilities
including radio and television, unless exempted by the jurisdiction having
authority).
Power generating stations and sub-stations.
Control centers for air land and marine transportation.
Water treatment, storage, and pumping facilities.
Sewage treatment facilities and buildings or structures required for national
defense.

PAGE 2 of 11
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.9 2.0
Member

D2.9 2.3 Site Class Soil Type [Sentences 4.1.8.4.(2) and 4.1.8.1.(3)]:
The Site Class is related to the type of soil and rock strata that directly underlies the building site.
The Site Class ranges from A to F progressing from the stiffest to the softest strata. Table 2-2 lists
the various Site Classes and their corresponding strata.
Generally the structural engineer is responsible for determining the Site Class for a project. If the
structural engineers firm does not have a geotechnical engineer on staff, this job will be
contracted to a geotechnical firm. The site profile is normally obtained by drilling several cores on
the property. Unlike the U. S. building codes, there is no published default Site Class that may be
that can be substituted for the actual Site Class that is determined from soils testing performed at
the actual project location.
Table 2-2; Site Class vs. Soil Type [Table 4.1.8.4A]
Site Class
Soil Type
A
B
C
D
E
Hard Rock
Rock
Very Dense Soil & Soft Rock
Stiff Soil
Soft Soil
Liquefiable Soils, Quick Highly Sensitive Clays, Collapsible Weakly Cemented Soils, & etc.
These require site-specific evaluation.
D2.9 2.4 Spectral Response Acceleration Value at 0.2 Second [Sentence 4.1.8.4.(1) and
Table C-2]
The Spectral Response Acceleration Values at 0.2 Second, which are denoted as S a (0.2 ) , have
been determined for selected location in Canada and documented in the Canadian Journal of Civil
Engineering, Volume 10, Number 4, pp 670-680, 1983. These values for selected location in
Canada are presented in Table C-2 of the NBCC 2005, and are repeated for convenience below
in Table 2-3

PAGE 3 of 11
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.9 2.0
Member

Table 2-3; Spectral Response Acceleration Value at 0.2 Second for Selected Locations in Canada
[Table C-2]
Sa(0.2)
Province & Location
Sa(0.2)
Masset
McBride
0.53
0.27
Langley
New Westminster
1.10
0.99
Mcleod Lake
0.18
North Vancouver
0.88
0.67
Merrit
0.32
Richmond
1.10
0.75
Mission City
0.93
Surrey (88 Ave & 156 St.)
1.10
Ashcroft
0.33
Montrose
0.27
Vancouver
0.94
Beatton River
0.12
Nakusp
0.27
Vancouver (Granville & 41 Ave)
0.88
Burns Lake
0.12
Nanaimo
1.00
Vernon
0.27
Cache Creek
0.33
Nelson
0.27
Victoria Region
------
Campbell River
0.62
Ocean Falls
0.38
Victoria (Gonzales Hts.)
1.20
Carmi
0.28
Osoyoos
0.28
Victoria (Mt. Tolmie)
1.20
Castlegar
0.27
Penticton
0.28
Victoria
1.20
Chetwynd
0.24
Port Alberni
0.75
Williams Lake
Chilliwack
0.73
Port Hardy
0.43
Youbou
Comox
0.66
Port McNeill
0.43
Courtenay
0.65
Powell River
0.67
Athabasca
0.12
Cranbrook
0.27
Prince George
0.13
Banff
0.24
Crescent Valley
0.27
Prince Rupert
0.38
Barrhead
0.12
Crofton
1.10
Princeton
0.42
Beaverlodge
0.13
Dawson Creek
0.12
Qualicum Beach
0.82
Brooks
0.12
Dog Creek
0.32
Quesnel
0.27
Calgary
0.15
Duncan
1.10
Revelstoke
0.27
Campsie
0.12
Elko
0.27
Salmon Arm
0.27
Camrose
0.12
Fernie
0.27
Sandspit
0.56
Cardston
0.18
Fort Nelson
0.12
Sidney
1.20
Claresholm
0.15
Fort St. John
0.12
Smith River
0.52
Cold Lake
0.12
Glacier
0.27
Smithers
0.12
Coleman
0.24
Golden
0.26
Squamish
0.72
Coronation
0.12
Grand Forks
0.27
Stewart
0.30
Cowley
0.20
Hope
0.63
Taylor
0.12
Drumheller
0.12
Kamloops
0.28
Terrace
0.34
Edmonton
0.12
Kaslo
0.27
Tofino
1.20
Edson
0.15
Kelowna
0.28
Trail
0.27
Embarras Portage
0.12
Kimberley
0.27
Ucluelet
1.20
Fairview
0.12
Kitimat Plant
0.37
Vancouver Region
------
Fort MacLeod
0.16
Kitimat Townsite
0.37
Burnaby (Simon Fraser Univ.)
0.94
Fort McMurray
0.12
Lilooet
0.60
Cloverdale
1.00
Fort Saskatchewan
0.12
Lytton
0.60
Haney
0.97
Fort Vermilion
0.12
Mackenzie
0.23
Ladner
1.10
Grande Prairie
0.12
Province & Location
Sa(0.2)
British Columbia
100 Mile House
-----0.28
Abbotsford
0.92
Agassiz
Alberi
Province & Location
1.00
Alberta

PAGE 4 of 11
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
0.28
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
------
D2.9 2.0
Member

Table 2-3 Continued; Spectral Response Acceleration Value at 0.2 Second for Selected Locations in
Canada [Table C-2]
Province & Location
Sa(0.2)
Province & Location
Sa(0.2)
Province & Location
Sa(0.2)
Alberta
Habay
-----0.12
Humboldt Bay
Island Falls
0.12
0.12
Selkirk
Spit Lake
0.12
0.12
Hardisty
0.12
Kamsack
0.12
Steinbach
0.12
High River
0.15
Kindersley
0.12
Swan River
0.12
Hinton
0.24
Lloydminster
0.12
The Pas
0.12
Jasper
0.24
Maple Creek
0.12
Virden
0.12
Keg River
0.12
Meadow Lake
0.12
Winnipeg
Lac la Bishe
0.12
Melfort
0.12
Lacombe
0.12
Melville
0.12
Ailsa Craig
0.16
Lethbridge
0.15
Moose Jaw
0.12
Ajax
0.22
Manning
0.12
Nipawin
0.12
Alexandria
0.68
Medicine Hat
0.12
North Battleford
0.12
Alliston
0.17
Peace River
0.12
Prince Albert
0.12
Almonte
0.58
Pincher Creek
0.19
Qu Appelle
0.12
Armstrong
0.12
Ranfurly
0.12
Regina
0.12
Arnprior
0.64
0.12
Ontario
------
Red Deer
0.12
Rosetown
0.12
Atikokan
0.12
Rocky Mountain House
0.15
Saskatoon
0.12
Aurora
0.19
Slave Lake
0.12
Scott
0.12
Bancroft
0.26
Stettler
0.12
Strasbourg
0.12
Barrie
0.16
Stony Plain
0.12
Swift Current
0.12
Beaverton
0.16
Suffield
0.12
Uranium City
0.12
Belleville
0.26
Taber
0.12
Weyburn
0.23
Belmont
0.20
Turner Valley
0.15
Yorktown
Valleyview
0.12
Vegreville
0.12
Vermilion
0.12
Wagner
0.12
Wainwright
Wetaskiwin
Whitecourt
Wimborne
Saskatchewan
0.12
Big Trout Lake
0.12
------
CFB Borden
0.16
Beausejour
0.12
Bracebridge
0.18
Boussevain
0.12
Bradford
0.18
Churchill
0.12
Brampton
0.26
0.12
Dauphin
0.12
Brantford
0.24
0.12
Flin Flon
0.12
Brighton
0.25
0.12
Gimli
0.12
Brockton
0.40
0.12
Island Lake
0.12
Burks Falls
0.21
Manitoba
------
Lac du Bonnet
0.12
Burlington
0.36
Assiniboia
0.17
Lynn Lake
0.12
Cambridge
0.22
Battrum
0.12
Morden
0.12
Campbellford
0.23
Biggar
0.12
Neepawa
0.12
Cannington
0.17
Broadview
0.12
Pine Falls
0.12
Carleton Place
0.52
Dafoe
0.12
Portage la Prairie
0.12
Cavan
0.20
Dundurn
0.12
Rivers
0.12
Centralia
0.14
Estevan
0.15
Sandilands
0.12
Chapleau
0.12

PAGE 5 of 11
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.9 2.0
Member

Canada [Table C-2]
Sa(0.2)
Province & Location
Sa(0.2)
Grimsby
Guelph
0.40
0.21
Mattawa
Midland
0.51
0.15
0.13
Guthrie
0.16
Milton
0.30
Clinton
0.13
Haileybury
0.29
Milverton
0.15
Coboconk
0.18
Haldimand (Caledonia)
0.34
Minden
0.19
Cobourg
0.24
Haldimand (Hagersville)
0.29
Mississauga
0.31
Cochrane
0.21
Haliburton
0.21
Mississauga (Port Credit)
0.32
Colborne
0.24
Halton Hills (Georgetown)
0.25
Mitchell
0.14
Collingwood
0.14
Hamilton
0.33
Moosonee
0.15
Cornwall
0.67
Hanover
0.13
Morrisburg
0.63
Corunna
0.14
Hastings
0.23
Mount Forest
0.15
Deep River
0.66
Hawkesbury
0.65
Nakina
0.12
Deseronto
0.27
Hearst
0.12
Nanticoke (Jarvis)
0.26
Dorchester
0.19
Honey Harbour
0.15
Nanticoke (Port Dover)
0.23
Dorion
0.12
Hornepayne
0.12
Napanee
0.28
Dresden
0.18
Huntsville
0.20
New Liskeard
0.29
Dryden
0.12
Ingersoll
0.19
Newcastle
0.22
Dunnville
0.35
Iroquois Falls
0.21
Newcastle (Bowmanville)
0.21
Durham
0.14
Jellicoe
0.12
Newmarket
0.19
Dutton
0.20
Kapuskasing
0.14
Niagara Falls
0.41
Earlton
0.26
Kemptville
0.60
North Bay
0.29
Edison
0.12
Kenora
0.12
Norwood
0.22
Elmvale
0.15
Killaloe
0.48
Oakville
0.35
Embro
0.18
Kincardine
0.12
Orangeville
0.18
Englehart
0.25
Kingston
0.30
Orillia
0.16
Espanola
0.12
Kinmount
0.19
Oshawa
0.21
Exeter
0.14
Kirkland Lake
0.24
Ottawa
0.66
Fenelon Falls
0.18
Kitchener
0.19
Owen Sound
0.13
Fergus
0.18
Lakefield
0.20
Pagwa River
0.12
Forest
0.14
Lansdowne House Leamington
0.20
Paris
0.22
Fort Erie
0.40
Lindsay
0.18
Parkhill
0.15
Fort Erie (Ridgeway)
0.39
Lions Head
0.15
Parry Sound
0.16
Gananoque
0.31
London
0.18
Pelham (Fonthill)
0.40
Geraldton
0.12
Lucan
0.16
Pembroke
0.66
Glencoe
0.19
Maitland
0.41
Penetanguishene
0.15
Goderich
0.12
Markdale
0.14
Perth
0.39
Gore Bay
0.12
Markham
0.22
Petawawa
0.66
Graham
0.12
Martin
0.12
Peterborough
0.20
Gravehurst (Muskoka Airport)
0.17
Matheson
0.22
Petrolia
0.16
Province & Location
Sa(0.2)
Ontario
Chatham
-----0.20
Chesley
Province & Location

PAGE 6 of 11
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.9 2.0
Member

Canada [Table C-2]
Sa(0.2)
Province & Location
Sa(0.2)
Province & Location
Sa(0.2)
Ontario
Pickering (Dunbarton)
-----0.23
Temagami
Thamesford
0.30
0.18
Beauport
Bedford
0.60
0.60
Picton
0.26
Thedford
0.14
Beloeil
0.67
Plattsville
0.18
Thunder Bay
0.12
Brome
0.42
Point Alexander
0.66
Tillsonburg
0.20
Brossard
0.68
Port Burwell
0.21
Timmins
0.17
Buckingham
0.68
Port Colborne
0.38
Timmins (Porcupine)
0.19
Campbells Bay
0.67
Port Elgin
0.12
Toronto (Metropolitan)
------
Chambly
0.67
Port Hope
0.23
Etobicoke
0.26
Chicoutimi
0.62
Port Perry
0.19
North York
0.24
Chicoutimi (Bagotville)
0.63
Port Stanley
0.20
Scarborough
0.24
Chicoutimi (Kenogami)
0.62
Prescott
0.44
Toronto
0.26
Coaticook
0.41
Princeton
0.20
Trenton
0.25
Contrecoeur
0.66
Province & Location
Raith
0.12
Trout Creek
0.25
Cowansville
0.48
Rayside-Balfour (Chelmsford)
0.14
Uxbridge
0.19
Deux-Montagnes
0.68
Red Lake
0.12
Vaughan (Woodbridge)
0.24
Dolbeau
0.31
Renfrew
0.63
Vittoria
0.21
Drummondville
0.50
Richmond Hill
0.22
Walkerton
0.13
Farnham
0.59
Rockland
0.66
Wallaceburg
0.18
Fort-coulonge
0.67
Sault Ste. Marie
0.12
Waterloo
0.19
Gagon
0.12
Schreiber
0.12
Watford
0.16
Gasp
0.22
Seaforth
0.14
Wawa
0.12
Gatineau
0.68
Simcoe
0.22
Welland
0.40
Gracefield
0.62
Sioux Lookout
0.12
West Lorne
0.20
Granby
0.48
Smith Falls
0.42
Whitby
0.21
Harrington-Harbour
0.12
Smithville
0.40
Whitby (Brooklin)
0.20
Harve-St-Pierre
0.33
Smooth Rock Falls
0.19
White River
0.12
Hemmingford
0.68
South River
0.23
Wiarton
0.12
Hull
0.68
Southhampton
0.12
Windsor
0.18
Iberville
0.66
St. Catharines
0.41
Wingham
0.13
Inukjuak
0.12
St. Marys
0.16
Woodstock
0.19
Joliette
0.63
St. Thomas
0.20
Wyoming
Stirling
0.25
Stratford
0.16
Strathroy
Sturgeon Falls
Sudbury
Sundridge
Tavistock
0.15
Jonquire
0.62
------
Kuujjuaq
0.12
Acton-Vale
0.45
Kuujjuarapik
0.12
0.17
Alma
0.59
La-Malbaie
2.30
0.23
Amos
0.17
La-Tuque
0.29
0.15
Asbestos
0.37
Lac-Mgantic
0.40
0.22
Aylmer
0.67
Lachute
0.64
0.17
Baie-Comeau
0.66
Lennoxville
0.38
Qubec

PAGE 7 of 11
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.9 2.0
Member

Canada [Table C-2]
Sa(0.2)
Province & Location
Sa(0.2)
Richmond
Rimouski
0.38
0.63
New Brunswick
Alma
-----0.27
Rivire-du-loup
1.10
Bathhurst
0.41
0.63
Roberval
0.43
Campbellton
0.39
0.38
Rock-Island
0.42
Chatham
0.41
Malartic
0.21
Rosemre
0.68
Edmundston
0.41
Maniwaki
0.66
Rouyn
0.20
Fredericton
0.39
Masson
0.66
Salaberry-de-Valleyfield
0.69
Gagetown
0.34
Matane
0.68
Schefferville
0.12
Grand Falls
0.42
Mont-Joli
0.62
Senneterre
0.20
Moncton
0.30
Mont-Laurier
0.66
Sept-les
0.37
Oromocto
0.36
Montmagny
0.89
Shawinigan
0.58
Sackville
0.25
Montral Region
------
Shawville
0.67
Saint John
0.34
Beaconsfield
0.69
Sherbrooke
0.37
Shippagan
0.34
Dorval
0.69
Sorel
0.65
St. Stephen
0.66
Woodstock
Province & Location
Sa(0.2)
Qubec
Lry
-----0.70
Loretteville
0.63
Louisevilee
Magog
Province & Location
Laval
0.68
St-Flicien
0.31
Montral
0.69
St-Georges-de-Cacouna
0.98
0.41
Nova Scotia
------
Montral-Est
0.68
St-Hubert
0.68
Amherst
0.24
Montral-Nord
0.69
St-hubert-de-Temiscouata
0.64
Antigonish
0.19
Outremont
0.69
St-Hyacinthe
0.59
Bridgewater
0.23
Pierrefonds
0.69
St-jean
0.69
Canso
0.24
St-Lambert
0.69
St-Jrme
0.64
Debert
0.22
St-Laurent
0.69
St-Jovite
0.63
Digby
0.26
Ste-Anne-de-Bellevue
0.69
St-Nicolas
0.59
Greenwood (CFB)
0.25
Verdun
Halifax Region
------
0.69
Ste-Agathe-des-Monts
0.59
Nicolet (Gentilly)
0.64
Sutton
0.44
Dartmouth
0.23
Nitchequon
0.12
Tadoussac
0.84
Halifax
0.23
Noranda
0.20
Tmiscaming
0.59
Kentville
0.24
Perc
0.20
Thetford Mines
0.35
Liverpool
0.24
Pincourt
0.69
Thurso
0.63
Lockeport
0.26
Plessisville
0.45
Trois-Rivires
0.64
Louisburg
0.22
Port-Cartier
0.46
Val-dOr
0.22
Lunenburg
0.23
Povungnituk
0.22
Varennes
0.68
New Glasgow
0.18
Qubec City Region
------
Verchres
0.67
North Sydney
0.19
Ancienne-Lorette
0.60
Victoriaville
0.43
Pictou
0.18
Levis
0.58
Ville-Marie
0.33
Port Hawkesbury
0.21
Qubec
0.59
Waterloo
0.41
Springhill
0.24
Sillery
0.58
Windsor
0.36
Stewiacke
0.22
Ste-Foy
0.59
------
Sydney
0.20
-------------------------------

PAGE 8 of 11
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.9 2.0
Member

Canada [Table C-2]
Sa(0.2)
Province & Location
Sa(0.2)
Nova Scotia
Tatamagouche
-----0.19
Echo Bay / Port Radium

Fort Good Hope
0.12
0.15
Truro
0.21
Fort Providence
0.12
Wolfville
0.25
Fort Resolution
0.12
Yarmouth
0.23
Fort Simpson
0.12
------
Fort Smith
0.12
Charlottetown
0.19
Hay River
0.12
Souris
0.15
Holman
0.12
Summerside
0.19
Inuvik
0.12
Tignish
0.22
Mould Bay
0.35
0.51
Province & Location
Prince Edward Island
------
Norman Wells
Argentia
Newfoundland
0.18
Rae-Edzo
0.12
Bonavista
0.17
Tungsten
0.51
Buchans
0.15
Yellowknife
Cape Harrison
0.24
Nunavut
0.12
------
Cape Race
0.20
Alert
0.12
Channel-Port aux Basques
0.15
Arctic Bay
0.18
Corner Brook
0.14
Arviat / Eskimo Point
0.18
Gander
0.16
Baker Lake
0.12
Grand Bank
0.18
Cambridge Bay
0.12
Grand Falls
0.15
Chesterfield Inlet
0.16
Happy Valley-Goose Bay
0.15
Clyde River
0.50
Labrador City
0.12
Coppermine
0.12
St. Anthony
0.15
Coral Harbour
0.24
St. Johns
0.18
Eureka
0.33
Stephenville
0.14
Iqaluit
0.13
Twin Falls
0.12
Isachsen
0.40
Wabana
0.12
Nottingham Island
0.24
Wabush
0.12
Rankin Inlet
0.12
------
Resolute
0.35
Aishihik
Yukon
0.26
Resolution Island
0.44
Dawson
0.54
-------------------------------
------
Destruction Bay
0.73
-------------------------------
------
Snag
0.61
-------------------------------
------
Teslin
0.19
-------------------------------
------
Watson Lake
0.45
-------------------------------
------
Whitehorse
Northwest Territories
Aklavik
0.22
-------------------------------
------
------
-------------------------------
------
0.18
-------------------------------
------

PAGE 9 of 11
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.9 2.0
Member

D2.9 2.5 Importance Factor for Earthquake Loads [Sentence 4.1.8.5 and Table 4.1.8.5]:
The Importance Factor for Earthquake Loads ( I E ) for the building is assigned based on the
Importance Category of the building. It may be prudent to request both the assigned Importance
Category and the Importance Factor for Earthquake Loads. The Importance Factor for Earthquake
Loads may be specified more stringently than the Importance Category of the building would
indicate in order to artificially provide increased protection for the building and its contents. The
Importance Factor for Earthquake Loads is assigned as shown in Table 2-4
Table 2-4; Importance Factor for Earthquake Loads by Importance Category [Table 4.1.8.5]
Importance Category
Importance Factor for Earthquake Loads
IE
Low
0.8
Normal
1.0
High
1.3
Post-Disaster
1.5
D2.9 2.6 Summary:
The following parameters will be required by the design professionals having responsibility for
MEP systems in a building, and should be determined by the structural engineer of record.
1. Importance Category: This defines the building use and specifies which buildings are
required for emergency response or disaster recovery.
2. Spectral Response Acceleration Value at 0.2 Second: This is used to determine the actual
Lateral Design Seismic Force.
3. Importance Factor for Earthquake Loads: This is a numerical value that translates the
building usage into the Lateral Design Seismic Force used to design and/or select seismic

PAGE 10 of 11
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.9 2.0
Member

restraints for non-structural components. This value used in conjunction with the Spectral
Response Acceleration Value at 0.2 Second will determine whether seismic restraints are
required for non-structural components or not.
These parameters should be repeated in the specification and drawing package for the particular
system, mechanical, electrical, or plumbing, in question.

PAGE 11 of 11
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.9 2.0
Member

DESIGN SESIMIC FORCES
The code based horizontal seismic force requirements for MEP systems and components are
either calculated by the seismic restraint manufacturer as a part of the selection and certification
process, or may be determined by the design professional of record for the MEP systems under
consideration.
This is an informational section. It will discuss the code based horizontal seismic force demand
equations and the variables that go into them. This discussion will provide a deeper understanding
for the designer responsible for selecting the seismic restraints for MEP systems and their
components and the nature of the seismic forces and the factors that affect them.
D2.9 3.2 Lateral Design Seismic Force [Sentence 4.1.8.17.(1)]1:
The seismic force is a mass, or weight, based force, and as such is applied to the MEP
component at its center of gravity. Keep in mind that the earthquake ground motion moves the
base of the building first. Then the motion of the building will accelerate the MEP component
through its supports and/or seismic restraints. The lateral seismic force acting on an MEP
component will be determined in accordance with the following set of equations from NBCC 2005.
V P = 0.3Fa S a ( 0.2 ) I E S PW P
Equation 3-1
Where:
V P = the Lateral Design Seismic Force

Fa = the acceleration based site coefficient. Values for this coefficient are given in Table 3-1 based
on the site class. Linear interpolation between these values is permitted.
1
References in brackets [Sentence 4.1.8.17.(1)] apply to sections, tables, and/or equations in the National Building Code
of Canada 2005.
DESIGN SEISMIC FORCES

PAGE 1 of 4
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
D2.9 3.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member

I E = the Importance Factor for Earthquake Loads for the building. See Section D2.9 2.5 of this
guide.
S P = the horizontal force factor for the non-structural component and its anchorage to the building.
W P = the weight of the non-structural component.
The value for S P is computed in the following fashion.
SP =
C P Ar A x
RP
Equation 3-2
Where:
C P = the seismic coefficient for mechanical and electrical equipment. These values are given per
component category in Table 3-2.
Ar = the response amplification factor used to account for the type of attachment of the
mechanical or electrical component to the building listed by component category in Table 3-2.
Ax = the amplification factor at the elevation of the component attachment point in the building. It
is used to account for the increasing flexibility of the building from grade level to roof level.
R P = the element or component response modification factor listed by component category in

Table 3-2.
Ax is computed as follows.
h
Ax = 1 + 2 x
hn
Equation 3-3
Where:
hx = the elevation of the attachment point to the structure of the non-structural component.

PAGE 2 of 4
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
D2.9 3.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member

hn = the elevation of the roof line.
The values for S P must remain within the following limits.
0.7 S P 4.0
Equation 3-4
Table 3-1; Acceleration Based Site Coefficient, Fa [Table 4.1.8.4]

Spectral Response Acceleration Value at 0.2 Second
Site
Class
Sa(0.2)
0.25 Sa(0.2) = 0.50 Sa(0.2) = 0.75 Sa(0.2) = 1.00 Sa(0.2)
1.25
0.7
0.7
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.9
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.3
1.2
1.1
1.1
1.0
2.1
1.4
1.1
0.9
0.9
D2.9 3.3 Basis of Design for NBCC 2005 [Sentences 4.1.3.1.(1a), 4.1.3.2.(4), 4.1.3.2.(6),
4.1.3.2.(7), and 4.1.3.2.(8) and Table 4.1.3.2]:
The design of seismic restraints in the NBCC 2005 is based on the Ultimate Limit State. This limit
state is used for design when life safety is at issue to prevent building or system collapse. This
design basis along with the prescribed loads for earthquake design will produce results which are
consistent with LRFD design techniques. Therefore; LRFD allowable loads may be used for the
design and selection of seismic restraints for MEP components.
D2.9 3.4 Summary:
This section has provided an insight into the way in which the seismic design forces for MEP
systems and components are to be computed. It is generally not necessary for a designer to

PAGE 3 of 4
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
D2.9 3.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member

actually run the computations for the seismic design forces. These forces are normally computed
by the manufacturer of the seismic restraint devices as part of the selection and certification
process to ensure that the proper components are selected per the code and the specification.
Table 3-2; Seismic Coefficient, Response Amplification Factor, and Response Modification Factor
NBCC 2005 [Table 4.1.8.17]
Category
7
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Non-Structural Component
Suspended light fixtures with independent vertical
support
Machinery, fixtures, equipment, ducts, and tanks
(including contents):
That are rigidly connected.
That are flexible or flexibly connected.
Machinery, fixtures, equipment, ducts, and tanks
(including contents) containing toxic or explosive
materials, materials having a flash point below
38C or firefighting fluids:
That are rigidly connected.
That are flexible or flexibly connected.
Flat bottom tanks (including contents) that are
attached directly to the floor at or below grade
within a building.
Flat bottom tanks (including contents) that are
attached directly to the floor at or below grade
within a building that contain toxic or explosive
materials, materials that have a flash point below
38C or firefighting materials.
Pipes, ducts, cable trays (including contents)
Pipes, ducts, cable trays (including contents)
containing toxic or explosive materials.
Electrical cable trays, bus ducts, conduits.
Rigid components with ductile material and
Connections.
Rigid components with non-ductile material or
Connections.
Flexible components with ductile material and
Connections.
Flexible components with non-ductile material or
Connections.
CP
Ar
RP
1.00
1.00
2.50
-----
------
------
1.00
1.00
1.00
2.50
1.25
2.50
-----
------
------
1.50
1.50
1.00
2.50
1.25
2.50
0.70
1.00
2.50
1.00
1.00
2.50
1.00
1.00
3.00
1.50
1.00
3.00
1.00
2.50
5.00
1.00
1.00
2.50
1.00
1.00
1.00
1.00
2.50
2.50
1.00
2.50
1.00

PAGE 4 of 4
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
D2.9 3.0
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
Member

The National Building Code of Canada has limited exemptions for MEP components written in to
it. The SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems, 2nd Edition with
Addendum No. 1, 1998; is not directly referenced in the NBCC. Therefore, it is safe to assume
that any exemptions in the SMACNA manual that have been previously taken are no longer
allowed.
There are, however, some general exemptions for MEP components which will be covered in this
section. Along with the exemptions, this section will the requirements for flexible/flexibly connected
(isolated) components, direction of seismic design force application, structural connections,
deflections, transfer of seismic forces to the building structure, and hanger rods for MEP
components.
D2.9 4.2 General Acceleration Based Exemption for MEP Components [Sentences 4.1.8.1,
and 4.1.8.17.(2)]1
Sentence 4.1.8.1 is a general exemption for building, and also applies to those buildings that have
been assigned to the Importance Category classified as Post Disaster. The deflections and loads
due to earthquake motion as specified in Sentence 4.1.8.17, do not apply to MEP Components
when S a ( 0.2 ) 0.12 . Under this condition seismic restraints will not be required for MEP
components.
The next general exemption is found in Sentence 4.1.8.17.(2) and applies to buildings that have
been assigned to Importance Categories Low, Normal, and High. Section 2.9 3.0 of this guide
References in brackets [Sentence 4.1.8.17.(2)] apply to sections, tables, and/or equations in the National Building Code
of Canada 2005.

PAGE 1 of 4
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.9 4.0
Member

covered the seismic design forces specified by the NBCC. The basic acceleration term multiplying
the weight (mass) of the MEP component is I E Fa S a ( 0.2 ) . This term includes the importance of the
building, the effects of the ground upon which the project is being built, and the expected
horizontal acceleration produced by the design earthquake for the project location. This general
exemption for MEP components is based on the value of this term. If I E Fa S a ( 0.2 ) < 0.35 , then MEP
components that fall into categories 7 through 21 in Table 3-2 of this guide do not require seismic
restraint for buildings assigned to Importance Categories Low, Normal, and High.
D2.9 4.3 Chandelier Exemption [Sentence 4.1.8.17.(13)]
This exemption does not read exactly as the companion exemption in the International Building
Code (IBC); see Kinetics Guide to Understanding IBC Seismic for MEP, Section D2.1 4.5. So,
for clarity it will be directly quoted below.
Isolated suspended equipment and components, such as pendant lights, may be designed as a
pendulum system provided that adequate chains or cables capable of supporting 2.0 times the weight of
the suspended component are provided and the deflection requirements of Sentence 4.1.8.17.(11) are
satisfied.
D2.9 4.4 Isolated vs. Rigidly Connected Components [Sentence 4.1.8.17.(4)]:
The NBCC basically says that MEP components that can be defined by Categories 11 and 12 in
Table 3-2 of this Guide are to be treated as flexible/flexibly connected (isolated) components. If,
however, the fundamental period of the component and its connections to the building structure
can be shown to be less than or equal to 0.06 second, it mat be treated as though it were a rigid
or rigidly connected component.

PAGE 2 of 4
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.9 4.0
Member

D2.9 4.5 Design Horizontal Seismic Load Application [Sentence 4.1.8.17.(7)]:
The design horizontal seismic loads are to be applied in the direction the results in the most
critical loading for the MEP component and its attachment to the structure. This will ensure that
the most conservative design and selection of seismic restraints for the MEP component has been
made.
D2.9 4.6 Connection of MEP Components to the Building Structure [Sentence
4.1.8.17.(8)]:
Connections for the MEP components to the building structure must be designed to resist gravity
loads, meet the requirements of Sentence 4.1.8.1 of the NBCC, and also satisfy the following
additional requirements.
1. Friction due to gravity loads may not be used to resist seismic forces.
2. The R P value for non-ductile fasteners such as adhesives, powder shot pins, and other power
actuated fasteners must be taken as 1.0.
3. Shallow embedment anchors, shallow expansion, chemical, epoxy, or cast-in-place, are
those whose embedment depth to nominal diameter ratio is less than 8:1. For these types of
anchors the value for R P shall be taken as 1.5.
4. Drop in anchors and power actuated fasteners, such as powder shot pins, are not to be used
in tensile applications.
D2.9 4.7 Lateral Deflections of MEP Components [Sentence 4.1.8.17.(10)]:
The lateral deflections based on design horizontal seismic force specified the Sentence
4.1.8.17.(1), see Section D2.9 3.0 of this guide, need to be multiplied by a factor of R P I E to
yield more realistic values for the anticipated deflections. The values of R P and I E are used to

PAGE 3 of 4
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.9 4.0
Member

artificially inflate the loads to ensure the selection of seismic restraints and attachments that will
meet the Post-Disaster criteria.
D2.9 4.8 Transfer of Seismic Restraint Forces [Sentence 4.1.8.17.(11)]:
This provision is intended to engender co-operation between the MEP design professionals and
the structural engineering professionals. It is basically saying that the MEP components and their
attachments to the building structure must be designed in such away that they do not transfer any
loads to the structure that were not anticipated by the structural engineer. This means that the
MEP design professionals must inform the structural engineer of the anticipated dead loads and
seismic restraint forces at the restraint attachment points as soon as the MEP component
selections have been finalized. Conversely, the structural engineer needs to make him or her self
available to the MEP design professionals to work out issues surrounding the seismic loads and
the attachment points for the seismic restraints used for the MEP components.
D2.9 4.9 Seismic Restraints for Suspended MEP Components & Hanger Rods [Sentence
4.1.8.17.(12)]:
The seismic restraints for suspended MEP equipment, pipes, ducts, electrical cable trays, bus
ducts, and so on, must meet the force and displacement conditions of Sentence 4.1.8.17, and be
designed in such away that they do not place the hanger rods in bending.
D2.9 4.13 Summary:
The exemptions and requirements outlined in this section are intended to assist the MEP design
professionals and contractors in planning their project contribution efficiently. Also, they help
define the limits of responsibility for each MEP design profession and trade.

PAGE 4 of 4
International:
FAX
World Wide Web:
E-mail:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
D2.9 4.0
Member
CHAPTER D3
PRODUCT/DESIGN OVERVIEW
The 10 Biggest Problems Contractors Deal with when Installing

Seismic Restraints
D3.1
Cables vs Struts used for Ceiling Mounted Pipe/Duct/Conduit Restraint
D3.2
When to Use Combination Isolators/Restraints
D3.3
When to Use Separate Isolators/Restraints
D3.4
High Capacity Restraint Configurations
D3.5
Hybrid Isolators/Restraints (FMS)
D3.6
Roof Mounted Equipment Applications
D3.7
TABLE OF CONTENTS

PRODUCT/DESIGN OVERVIEW

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
PAGE:
D3.0
MEMBER
The 10 Biggest Problems Contractors Deal With When Installing

Seismic Restraints
(1) Knowing When Restraint is Required

Large areas of the country are now being forced to include some kind of seismic
restraint due to the adoption of the IBC Code and its more stringent seismic design
requirements. This is particularly true for emergency treatment centers, essential
service structures, or facilities that contain some form of hazardous materials. There
are only two significant areas of the country completely exempted by code from
restraint requirements: a belt running generally northward from western Texas to
Minnesota and the tip of the Florida Peninsula. The code will require some level of
restraint (at least in critical facilities) at most other locations.
Even for non-critical facilities, the IBC Code will usually require some form of restraint
in the following regions: New England, the south central US (in a band several
hundred miles wide from Charleston, South Carolina to a point about 150 miles west of
Memphis, Tennessee) and everywhere west of the Rocky Mountains.
Increasingly, customers will specify some form of restraint to ensure continued
operation of a facility or in an effort to reduce insurance premiums, even in areas
where the IBC code does not require restraint. It is critical that specs for individual
projects be fully understood in this regard.
The IBC Code is quickly becoming the code of the land. Since FEMA has targeted
compliance with seismic standards as critical, it should be assumed that some form of
seismic compliance will be required before a final occupancy permit is issued for any
structure built in the above areas.
Anchorage Issues
(2) Equipment Location in the Building
Research has shown that the force generated in a building increases as one rises
through the structure. Surprisingly, the total height of the structure is not as important
a factor as is the location of equipment in that structure relative to the roof. The IBC
Code addresses this condition by requiring that the design used when specifying
equipment anchorage includes forces that increase by a factor of 3 as equipment
locations move upward from grade to the roof.
General
To the designer and installation contractor, this means that sturdier equipment is
required along with a significantly more robust anchorage system. In relatively lowlevel seismic areas, this requirement is often insignificant, but in seismically active
areas it can add substantial cost and can significantly impact the design of the
10 BIGGEST SEISMIC INSTALLATION PROBLEMS

PAGE 1 OF 6

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D3.1
MEMBER
equipment, structure, and restraint system. Common devices frequently used in the
past will no longer be suitable and more exotic devices are needed. In extreme cases,
major design changes are necessary to meet the new force requirements.
(3) Anchorage to Concrete

Concrete has long been identified as a weak point when used in areas exposed to
seismic events. The addition of anchorage holes in the concrete provides locations for
stress cracks to develop. These cracks open up and allow conventional anchors to
easily pull out. Because of the requirement to withstand cyclic pounding during an
event, wedge-type or other special seismically rated anchors are required. Approved
anchors have been tested and carry an ICBO rating based on test results. These
ratings vary by size and by anchor manufacturer. It is critical that the restraint system
design specifies a particular anchor by size and source and that the anchor used
conforms to this specification.
New code requirements mandate that undercut anchors are to be used for
10 horsepower and greater equipment that is hard mounted. At the time of this writing,
the only viable undercut anchor available in the United States is the HILTI HDA-P or
T series anchors. These are metric, but they can interface well with imperial-based
mounting holes. About 25% more labor time should be assumed for their installation
because of the undercut requirement. Detailed installation instructions are available in
ICBO report ER-5608. This document can easily be downloaded from the Internet for
reference.
In addition, the ratings allowed for anchors in seismic applications are considerably
less than ratings for similar-sized A307 bolts. If the equipment being restrained is
isolated, the shock caused by the motion of the equipment pounding against restraint
snubbers is more likely to damage brittle anchors than it is to damage the more ductile
A307 bolts. To account for this, an additional factor must be applied to the load when
using anchors for the final attachment to concrete. The net result is that equipment
using A307 through bolts for attachment have a considerably higher seismic rating
than does equipment attached with the same sized post-installed anchors.
It is most cost effective to locate heavy equipment at lower levels within the building
envelope wherever feasible. If heavy equipment is to be located on upper floors (or on
the roof of even a one-story building) in an area with potentially high seismic
accelerations, addressing seismic issues early can avoid costly delays, significant
redesign, and possible retrofit.
The code severely penalizes applications where the embedment depth is less than 8
anchor bolt diameters (i.e., 4 inches for a inch anchor). Since anchors must be
embedded in a monolithic slab, the thickness of the concrete beneath the equipment
often becomes the factor that limits the anchor size. Since there should be at least 1
inch of cover over the end of an anchor, the minimum slab thickness for a inch

PAGE 2 OF 6

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D3.1
MEMBER
diameter anchor should not be less than 5 inches. If more capacity is required, either
a thicker slab or an array of several inch anchors would be required to obtain an
appropriate rating.
It is still common to find designs that require equipment located high up in buildings in
seismically prone areas to be anchored to concrete. In many cases a review of the
installation shows that this configuration cannot meet code requirements. In these
cases, the options are typically limited to one of three things. 1) Add a steel
attachment structure that ties into the building steel, 2) design an appropriate frame
that allows significantly more anchors to be placed over a larger area, 3) bolt the
equipment down using bolts that go through the floor (or roof deck) and which include
a backer or fish plate on the underside of the slab.
(4) Concrete Housekeeping Pads, Curbs, and Piers
A frequent solution used to obtain a reasonable embedment depth for larger diameter
anchors is to add a housekeeping pad. This practice increases the slab thickness in
the area where the seismic anchors are fitted. As previously mentioned, it is a code
requirement that anchors be embedded in a monolithic pour. This requires that either
the pad be poured concurrent with the structural floor slab and the combined thickness
meets the requirement (not likely), or that a separate pad is added that is
independently thick enough to meet the requirement (more common).
The housekeeping pad must be adequately reinforced and doweled with sufficient
connections to ensure that it will neither shatter nor come loose from the floor during a
seismic event. Even with larger (and deeper) anchors at the restraint locations, it is
the normal practice to attach most housekeeping pads to the structural floor slab
beneath it using a large array of smaller (and shallower) anchors. All such
housekeeping pads should be designed based on the seismic application. Kinetics
Noise Control can offer design tables and general details for this purpose.
Similar to embedment restrictions, anchor spacing and edge distance issues can also
significantly reduce the anchorage capacity. Care should be taken to allow sufficient
edge distances to attain full-rated anchor capacities. Where arrays of anchors are
used to develop sufficient capacity, it must be verified that sufficient slab area exists to
ensure that these minimum dimensions are not violated.
Concrete curbs or piers are occasionally included on roof decks to aid in flashing the
roofing material while leaving a support point for equipment. Where these are used,
size becomes critical as the minimum edge distance and anchor spacing limits
frequently dictate a pier considerably wider than might otherwise be expected. For
example, if a hard-mounted piece of equipment is being attached to several piers
using (1) inch anchor centered on each pier, the minimum edge distance for an
HILTI HDA-P is 7-3/8inch. This means that the minimum pier size would be 2 x 7-3/8

PAGE 3 OF 6

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D3.1
MEMBER
(5) Equipment Durability and Interfacing Support Members

Equipment qualification is a new issue being addressed in the IBC. The code
indicates that if any piece of equipment is used in a seismically active area, it should
be capable of withstanding the design seismic forces for that area (as defined by the
ground acceleration and basic building and foundation parameters) and continue to
operate. In the past this was not a requirement. The equipment manufacturer should
be advised that the equipment is going into a seismically active area and should be
made aware of the seismic forces applicable to the particular piece of equipment,
including the elevation in the structure. In turn, the equipment manufacturer should
provide the installation contractor with appropriate documents ensuring that the
equipment is suitable for the application.
Frequently, the equipment is qualified as if it were to be hard mounted to a slab or
other support structure. The dynamic loads in this case are considerably less than
those used if the equipment is isolated and setting on several independent restraints.
If this is the case, the contractor should make a note of it. Some form of rigid frame
may be required in cases where the equipment is equipped with light structural
connection locations to prevent damage that may result from high twisting or bending
loads generated by directly connected isolators/restraints.
The equipment
manufacturer can best advise if a frame is needed (as they are the only ones who
really know how the equipment is built) and they should indicate the need for a frame if
required.
(6) Restraint of Tall, Narrow, Floor mounted Equipment
Tall, narrow pieces of equipment can be difficult to restrain, particularly if isolated.
Because the restraint points at the floor are relatively close together, small motions at
the floor result in large motions at the top of the equipment. In addition, small lateral
forces acting on the equipments CG generate large uplift forces at the restraint points.
Where possible, this equipment should be restrained to a wall, braced with a frame
that has a relatively wide base, or set on top of an inertia mass to shift the CG
downward. Another option is to use cable restraints to limit lateral motion (if cable
restrained, the restraints must tie to the same surface as the equipment mounting
feet).
or 14-3/4 inches square. If using a plate with (4) inch anchors per pier, the
minimum anchor-to-anchor spacing (for inch anchors) is 14-3/4 inches and thus the
minimum size of the pier becomes 29-1/2 inches square.
Top-heavy equipment can be a particular problem outdoors (where wind effects can
cause wild gyrations) or when mounted on relatively high-deflection springs (which
offer little resistance to rocking loads).

PAGE 4 OF 6

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D3.1
MEMBER
(7) Not Enough Room to Fit Restraints

The most frequent issue that comes up relative to the restraint of piping, duct, or other
ceiling-mounted systems is that there is often not enough room for restraints if the
restraints are arranged in the conventional fashion. Lateral restraints often interfere
with walls, other duct or piping systems, or equipment. Creativity is oftentimes required
to arrange restraints in ways that can fit. For example, on a trapeze, lateral restraint
cables can be arranged in an X instead of in a V or can be grouped together on one
hanger rod instead of having one on each end of the trapeze. In some cases,
attaching to a wall may be better than attaching to the ceiling. Typical details showing
a broad variety of options can be obtained from Kinetics Noise Control.
In many cases, knowing the requirements concerning restraint locations which can be
used to resist forces for two or more different runs can save a significant number of
restraints and reduce the difficulty of installation simply by reducing the quantity of
restraints required.
(8) Mixing Cables and Struts
When arranging restraints along a run, cables and struts cannot be mixed. Thus a
given run must be either all cable or all strut. Both have advantages and
disadvantages that should be understood. When using cables, each restraint point
requires that at least two cables be fitted. As a trade-off, the cables do not load
hanger rods in tension and concerns about tensile forces in the hanger rods need not
be addressed. When using struts, only one strut is required at each restraint location.
Struts do, however, load hanger rods in tension and frequently require that larger
hanger rods be fitted or that the spacing between adjacent restraints be reduced to
one-half or one-quarter of that allowed for cables.
Cables are the preferred method of restraint if the piping or duct system is isolated.
If the hanger rod length becomes excessive, a reinforcement member is required on
the hanger rod to prevent buckling of the hanger when subjected to large seismic
forces. This is required for both cable or strut restraint systems.
Piping/Duct Issues
Tables and design information for installation of both cable and strut systems are
available from Kinetics Noise Control.
(9) Adherence to the 12 Hanger Rod or the Small Duct or Pipe Exception Rules
If installing a system tight to the ceiling to take advantage of the 12 inch hanger
exclusion rule, the 12 inch dimension is measured from the top of the pipe or duct if
the duct or pipe is individually supported without a trapeze bar. If supported by a
trapeze, the 12 inch dimension is from the top of the trapeze bar. In all cases, the

PAGE 5 OF 6

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D3.1
MEMBER
measurement is from the uppermost attachment point to the structure.

All supports for a given run must comply with the above to apply the 12 rule.
If supporting a trapeze, the largest pipe or duct on the trapeze must be used to
determine if the run can be considered for exclusion. (Note: The older codes only
allowed individually supported pipes or ducts to be eligible for exclusion using the size
or 12 inch rule. There is no such limitation in the IBC Code.)
(10) Axial Restraint of Thermally Expanding/Contracting Piping
It can be a challenge to axially restrain pipes that must be allowed to expand or
contract due to thermal considerations. It is often possible to install a lateral restraint
at a short dogleg or at the adjacent leg at the beginning or end of a run. As long as
these are located within 24 inches of the centerline of the run, which is to be axially
restrained, this is permitted.
The addition of flex joints or expansion fittings between independently restrained
segments of a run allows the individual segments to be restrained in a more
conventional fashion.
Where growth or shrinkage is expected, no more than one axial restraint is to be used
for a given run of pipe unless some form of expansion compensation joint is fitted
between the restraints.
A double roller (one top, one bottom) is needed to transfer upward forces generated by
the restraint acting on the pipe back into the supporting hanger rod when roller
supported pipes are directly braced to the ceiling with cables or struts. When pipes
are mounted on trapezes and the trapeze is fitted with a roller, bracing the trapeze will
not axially restrain the pipe.
An additional requirement of the 12 inch rule is that the hanger rod must include a nonmoment generating (free-swinging) connection to the structure. This is to allow the
pipe or duct to swing without stressing the hanger rod. A swivel or isolation hanger
can accomplish this function. If using an isolation hanger, a vertical limit stop must be
positioned on the hanger rod just below the isolator housing. Thus when subjected to
an uplift load, the limit stop will come into contact with the isolator housing and prevent
significant upward motion of the rod.
The bracket fitted to the pipe to which the restraint connects must be either welded to
the pipe or sufficiently clamped to allow transfer of the full restraint force. If the pipe is
insulated, a hardened area or welded saddle must be used that is strong enough to
meet the seismic design needs.

PAGE 6 OF 6

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D3.1
MEMBER
CABLE vs STRUTS IN SEISMIC RESTRAINT APPLICATIONS
Caution must be exercised when restraining overhead piping, ductwork, or equipment with
struts or rigid braces as an alternate to cable. Although they look similar, the two restraint
methods behave very differently in practice.
Component sizes, restraint spacing, and support hardware that may have been specified
for cable restrained systems can be grossly undersized if struts are substituted.
The reason for this is that when the seismic force pushes the restrained component
toward a strut, the strut must absorb the load in compression. This puts additional, often
significant, tensile load into the hanger rod. This is unavoidable!
This does not occur in cable-restrained systems since cables cannot be loaded in
compression. In cable-restrained systems, hanger rods are not subjected to these added
tensile loads. This is also unavoidable!
Struts should never be used to restrain a system that has had its support hanger
rods and anchorage sized strictly on weight.
More detailed information on this subject is available in the Duct, Pipe, Conduit and
Suspended Equipment sections of this manual.
CAUTION
CABLE vs STRUTS IN SEISMIC RESTRAINT APPLICATIONS

PAGE 1 OF 1

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D3.2
MEMBER
When to Use Combination Isolator/Restraints
1) Cost is typically the biggest benefit of combination isolator/restraints. 90% of the time,
a combination device will be less costly than separate elements. 10% of the time there
will be a large enough mismatch between the capabilities of the combined component
and the demands of the application that breaking the two elements apart and selecting
independent components can actually save money.
For example, a typical rating for a seismically rated isolator might be 1g. This means
that it is designed to withstand a lateral seismic force that is approximately equal to its
support capacity (using the largest spring coil for which the unit is designed). In some
applications, however, only a .5g restraint capacity (the horizontal load requirement is
half the vertical load) is actually needed. Also in some of these applications, the weight
is such that the actual spring used is toward the smaller end of the isolator s capacity
range. When these occur simultaneously, the combination isolator/restraint used might
have a capacity well in excess of what is needed (possibly 5 to 10 times). This added
capacity costs money.
2) Space is also an issue that is most efficiently addressed using a combination device. A
combination restraint/isolator will take up about the same amount of room as a standalone isolator. Thus the need for added space to locate separate restraints is
eliminated.
3) Alignment is usually simpler with combination restraints as there are fewer components
to align.
4) When restraints and resilient elements are separated, the force generated by the spring
can and does, when exposed to seismic activity, act on the restraint and its anchorage.
This can greatly reduce the restraint system s capacity.
Most combination
isolator/restraint components are designed to trap all spring forces within the isolator
housing itself. This keeps added tensile forces out of the anchorage and, as a result,
the effective restraint capacity of the system can be higher than would be obtained from
combination elements.
Most isolated equipment can be restrained independently of resilient supports or by

devices that include both resilient support and seismic restraint capabilities. There are
pros and cons to using combined elements. Identified in this section are those occasions
when combination restraints will offer benefits over separate components.
5) If the equipment is mounted on a raised platform the ability to add connection points for
independent restraints is often not present. In these cases the isolator component
must include the restraint feature.
WHEN TO USE COMBINATION ISOLATOR/RESTRAINTS

PAGE 1 OF 1

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D3.3
MEMBER
When to Use Separate Isolator/Restraints
1) Probably the most common reason for using separate restraints is for applications
involving high level seismic applications. Typical combined isolator/restraint units are
designed for a particular lateral force as compared to their weight. For example, a 1g
rated seismic isolator will laterally restrain a force approximately equal to the load it will
support.
Today s applications, however, involve applications where possibly as many as 4 or 5
g s might be required. The selection of combined isolator/restraint components that
can work in this range is extremely limited. In these applications, independent
isolators appropriate for the support load and snubbers appropriate for the lateral
seismic load are often the most attractive alternative.
2) Anchorage is also an issue that can drive the need for separate restraints. Low profile
restraints will typically withstand a higher lateral load than will high profile combination
isolator/restraints. Where anchorage is critical it can frequently be optimized by using
separate elements.
3) Access, adjustment, and visibility are frequently cited as conditions that make
separated isolator/restraint elements preferable. In most combination devices the
ability to see that there is clearance quickly and easily is questionable at best.
Normally clearance is assured by shaking the unit, but sometimes this is not practical.
Sometimes (but not always) with separate elements, this clearance can be viewed
from a distance.
4) Depending on the installation, the support locations on the structure or the connections
to the equipment are not rugged enough to withstand the seismic loads. In these
cases, restraints can be relocated to areas where there is adequate capacity in the
equipment and structure to ensure a good seismic load path.
As mentioned in the previous section, most isolated equipment can be restrained

independently of resilient supports or by devices that include both resilient support and
seismic restraint capabilities. This document will focus on those applications where
independent isolators and restraints are preferable to combined units. Below are listed
reasons for using separate support and restraint hardware.
5) Lastly, occasionally the equipment geometry or weight will make it possible to use
fewer restraints if they are located remotely. For example, bases that are supported
on 4 isolators and use 2 restraints are not uncommon.
WHEN TO USE SEPARATE ISOLATOR/RESTRAINTS

PAGE 1 OF 1

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D3.4
MEMBER
High-Capacity Restraint Configurations

Beginning with the adoption of the 97 UBC code and later with the new IBC code, seismic
design loads have increased dramatically. Applications where large pieces of equipment
are located high in structures and, in particular, where they are anchored to concrete have
become significantly more difficult to address.
These high design forces not only add to the shear load on equipment anchors but also
greatly increase tensile (or uplift) loads. The tensile loads result from overturning factors
on both the equipment and on the restraint itself. While there is often little that can be
done with regard to equipment geometry, the location of the equipment in the structure, or
the material to which it is attached, improvements can be made in the restraint to
minimize tensile loads developed in its attachment anchors.
The need to do this is critical as the allowable tensile capacities of concrete anchors are
very low compared to either their allowable shear loads or the tensile capacities of
equivalent through bolts. This results in a significant penalty in capacity when using
concrete anchors. In addition, the required embedment depth for larger anchors (often 6
to 10 inches) makes their use impractical (or even impossible) for a wide range of
projects.
When the restraints are mounted by concrete anchors, the interaction between the tensile
and shear forces applied to the anchor simultaneously dramatically reduces its ability to
withstand a lateral load. This reduction is highly dependent on the height of the snubber
element above the base of the restraint. For example, a restraint with the snubber
element located 10 inches off the floor will resist only about of the lateral load than
would an identical restraint with the snubber element located 2 inches off the floor.
As a result, especially if attaching to concrete, efforts should be made to keep the restraint
element as close to the floor (or mounting surface) as possible.
Some of the factors driving this are 2:1 increase factors for isolated equipment attached to
concrete, 3:1 or 4:1 increase factors for equipment located at rooftop levels, and higher
basic design acceleration values.
Common older designs for seismically rated isolators have the restraint element located
above the spring coil. The capacities on these units are greatly reduced in concrete
anchorage applications and for critical areas they should be avoided.
A few combination isolator/restraints have the restraint relocated to the base, with the coil
above. The FMS is Kinetics Noise Control s version of this type of seismically rated
assembly.
HIGH-CAPACITY RESTRAINT CONFIGURATIONS

PAGE 1 OF 1

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D3.5
MEMBER
Hybrid Isolators / Restraints (FMS)
FMS 2-Coil Seismically Rated Spring Isolator

The Model FMS Seismically Rated Restraint/Vibration Isolator has been developed by
Kinetics Noise Control using these techniques. It is a modularized system that can be
used as an independent restraint device or as a seismically rated vibration isolator
assembly. It is comprised of a restraint module and an optional vibration isolation module.
This modular design allows the engineer to design for seismic or wind forces independent
of the load and deflection requirements of the vibration isolator. The independent vibration
isolation module can be varied extensively using laterally stable springs compliant with
ASHRAE guidelines.
Hybrid Isolator/Restraints have been developed as an answer to many of the problems

encountered in serving the widely ranging requirements present in applications today.
These components reflect a major shift from past isolator designs in look, ease of
installation, performance, and flexibility. They are the result of a rethink of today s
isolation/restraint requirements and a back to the drawing board approach to design.
The restraint portion of the FMS is available in a wide range of capacities. Vibration
isolation components are available with a full complement of capacities up to 20,000
pounds and in deflections of 1 through 4 inches. Key to the flexibility of the FMS is the
ability to select the restraint module independent of the vibration isolator load and
deflection requirement. This ensures a custom, no-compromise fit for restraint and
vibration control. Using these features, the FMS can be optimized to a wide range of
applications.
HYBRID ISOLATORS / RESTRAINTS (FMS)

PAGE 1 OF 6

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D3.6
MEMBER
ADJUSTMENT NUT
SPRING CAP
ISOLATION ELEMENT
HANGER ROD
SPRING COIL(S)
RESTRAINT ELEMENT
TOP NEOPRENE
RESTRAINT ELEMENT
LOCKING SCREW
LOWER NEOPRENE
RESTRAINT ELEMENT
UPPER RESTRAINT HOUSING
LATERAL NEOPRENE
RESTRAINT ELEMENT
LOWER RESTRAINT HOUSING
RESTRAINT CLEARANCE
FMS Section (Typical)

Offered here is a summary of the FMS isolator/restraint system. Its features, benefits,
and best applications as well as potential limitations will be addressed. While hybrid
isolators, and the FMS in particular, are well suited to many applications, as with anything,
they won t work everywhere.
The initial FMS concept was to shift the seismic snubbing element as close to the floor or
mounting surface as possible. As discussed earlier in this chapter, shifting the snubbing
surface to an elevation close to the mounting surface greatly increases the seismic force
that the restraint can absorb. On the FMS, this was taken to the extreme such that all
lateral loads are absorbed in a snubber element fit directly into the base mounting plate.
This unique design minimizes (virtually eliminates) the vertical load components
transmitted into the anchors or other attachment hardware. As a result, considerably
higher seismic ratings are possible versus older, more conventional designs using similar
sized connection hardware.
NEOPRENE LOAD CAP
Shown below are load diagrams that illustrate the impact that shifting the snubbing point
from the top of the restraint to the bottom has on the anchor loads.

PAGE 2 OF 6

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D3.6
MEMBER
A consequence of moving the restraint element to the bottom of the isolator is that the
spring moves to the top. This allows the use of an open spring design where the spring is
completely visible for inspection and totally accessible for adjustment. Unlike most
conventional isolators, the top adjustment nut can be adjusted with a ratchet or power
impact-type tool if desired.
Impact
Wrench
Anchor Load Reactions
Easy Adjustment Access

The use of a hanger rod as a pendulum offers a couple of less obvious benefits as well.
First, the isolator becomes inherently stable with the hanger rod wanting to return to a
vertical position rather than wanting to drift off to one side or the other. This reduces the
likelihood of vibration shorts in the snubbing element. In addition, a pendulum in this
length range has a much lower natural frequency than could be expected from laterally
deflecting a coil. This offers a benefit in isolation efficiency.

PAGE 3 OF 6

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D3.6
MEMBER
Coils with Different Deflections on the Same FMS Restraint Housing

Not only is it possible to vary capacity or deflection on a given restraint component, but it
is also possible to significantly increase the capacity through the use of multiple coils if
this is appropriate for the application.
A second benefit of relocating the coil to the top of the snubber is that it can be easily
changed. This is true not only in service, but also during the design phase. Within the
limitations of the restraint housing top area, a wide variation of 1, 2, and 4 inch deflection
coils can be fit onto the same restraint element. This flexibility allows the user to custom
select isolator/restraint combinations that could range from as little as g to as much as
10 g s
Multiple Coil Options Used on the Same Restraint Housing

Restraint housing components are available in 8 sizes with horizontal force capacity
ratings ranging from 1,000 lb up to 70,000 lb.
Standard isolation elements are available in 1, 2, and 4 inch deflections with support
capacities ranging from 35 to 23,000 lb.

PAGE 4 OF 6

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D3.6
MEMBER
Application
Because of the limited vertical travel and near constant operating height, the FMS isolator
is excellent for use on cooling towers, chillers, boilers, or other equipment where the
potential for wide weight variations during service is anticipated.
Typical Application Details
Pump-Mounted Inertia Base Application
Because of the extreme design flexibility of the modular concept, Kinetics Model FMS
Seismic Restraint/Vibration Isolators can be used effectively for large, heavy pieces of
equipment in highly active seismic or wind-prone areas as well as for more common
applications in less active areas without financial consequence. The FMS is ideal for
equipment mounted on structural frames or concrete inertia bases. As with any seismic
restraint or vibration isolation device, direct mounting to light pieces of equipment may not
be possible without an intermediate frame.
Structural Fan Base Application

PAGE 5 OF 6

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D3.6
MEMBER
FDS TYPE
ISOLATOR
UNITS
SEISMICALLY RATED FMS MODULE
Cooling Tower Support Rail (FMS used as Restraint with FDS Isolator Modules)
Limitations
The FMS Isolator/Restraint uses a flange for attachment to the supported equipment. As
such, it is not directly applicable to the underside of equipment mounting feet. In addition,
the restraint element and support center for the isolation coil is offset from the flange
mounting surface. This generates a moment force at the mounting flange that must be
absorbed by the supported equipment or cross member.
Both of the above issues can be addressed through the use of an intermediate cross
support member (frame or beam) that is designed to absorb these additional moments
and has provisions for the attachment of the equipment.
Chiller Mounting Arrangement

PAGE 6 OF 6

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D3.6
MEMBER
Roof-Mounted Equipment Applications
Depending on the code used, a multiplier of 2, 3, or 4 is applied to the seismic design

force level at the ground level before applying it to roof-mounted equipment. This is true
whether or not the structure involved has one story or 100. These high forces must be
effectively transferred to what is often a relatively light structure and the entire
arrangement must be weatherproofed. In most coastal regions of the country, hurricaneforce winds must also be withstood. Often the forces generated by these winds is
significantly higher than the seismic design forces.
When working with roof-supported systems it is important to be aware, and to make those
responsible for the structure s design aware, of the issues regarding equipment restraint
as early as possible. It is not uncommon, particularly on concrete roofs, to come across
situations where conventional anchorage does not work. To be more specific, large
diameter anchors are frequently required to achieve the needed capacity. These large
diameter anchors require significant embedment (as much as 10 inches) into a contiguous
(uninterrupted) concrete slab. It is rare that this much concrete exists on the roof and
when it does not the addition of this much additional concrete would overload the
structure.
Under these conditions, through bolts with backer plates, although not ideal, are the only
viable option.
Narrow concrete perimeter roof curbs also pose significant problems in that they will
typically not allow enough edge distance to properly install seismically rated anchors. For
seismic applications, these should be avoided.
Large penetrations in concrete roof decks for ducts or the like can also result in awkward
situations in placing anchors. As much as possible, openings should be held away from
the interior edge of the roof curb by at least 12 inches
Mounting and seismically restraining equipment on the roofs of structures has always
required special treatment. Today, with the advent of multipliers based on the elevation of
equipment within the structure, these connections have become even more critical as well
as more difficult.
For optimum performance dedicated steel structural members should be used to support
large pieces of equipment. These can be located above or below the roof deck, but in any
case must have an interface to which the equipment can be directly connected. For
maximum capacity a welded connection between these members and the supported
equipment is frequently desirable. Particular caution should be exercised in this area to
ensure that twisting moments, which can be put into this structure by loads applied to the
supported equipment, are adequately addressed.
ROOF-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT APPLICATIONS

PAGE 1 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:

800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D3.7
MEMBER
Under some less heavily loaded conditions seismic connections to sheet metal roof
decking may be possible. Under no circumstances, however, should seismic connections
to sheet metal decking be attempted without a complete review of the application,
appropriate reinforcement, and adequate connection capacity between the decking and
structural roof support members.
A frequent design issue with roof-mounted equipment fit with seismic restraints is that light
winds tend to push the equipment against the seismic snubber. This can result in a minor
short, decreasing isolator performance. To avoid this condition a perimeter wind barrier
around the equipment or a soft wind cushion element that can minimize these
occurrences is recommended.
ROOF MOUNTED EQUIPMENT APPLICATIONS

PAGE 2 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
See also later sections of this manual relating to curb-mounted equipment for more
detailed information.

800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D3.7
MEMBER
CHAPTER D4
APPLYING RESTRAINT CAPACITY RATINGS
ASD (Allowable Stress Design) vs LRFD (Load and Resistance

Factor Design)
D4.1
Horizontal/Vertical Seismic Load Capacity Envelopes (Constant)
D4.2
Horizontal/Vertical Seismic Load Capacity Envelopes (Variable)
D4.3
Force Class for Hanging Piping, Ductwork, Conduit and Equipment
D4.4
Force Class Load Determination Sample (Tables 1 and 1a)
D4.5
Maximum Restraint Spacing, Offset, and Drop Length (Tables 2 and 3)
D4.6
Hanger Rod, Rod Stiffener, and Strut Tables (4a, 4b, and 4c)
D4.7
Cable and Anchorage Ratings (Tables 5 and 5a)
D4.8
Force Class Examples
D4.9
TABLE OF CONTENTS

APPLYING RESTRAINT CAPACITY RATINGS

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:

800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
PAGE:
D4.0
MEMBER
ASD (ALLOWABLE STRESS DESIGN) vs LRFD (LOAD AND

RESISTANCE FACTOR DESIGN)
Currently, the building codes that govern the factors used in the design of seismic
components are migrating from one system to the other. Because there is a significant
difference between the two, factors need to be introduced on some occasions to properly
compare design forces and component capacities.
The two systems are ASD (Allowable Stress Design) and LRFD (Load and Resistance
Factor Design).
ASD (Allowable Stress Design)
ASD has been used historically for determining forces and assigning capacities to
restraints, materials, anchors and other critical items. It is also commonly referred to as
Working Stress Design.
When using the ASD system, factors are applied to lower the peak allowable strengths of
the hardware or materials used on a project to the point that, when subjected to peak
design loads, a cushion is built into the materials for safety. Thus, if a component is
determined to be able to withstand a tensile load of 1400 lb without failure, in the ASD
world, it will be rated at only 1000 lb.
The same basic logic is also applied to the loads. The forces used for design in this
system are working loads. While these are the biggest loads normally expected, they do
not include extra factors intended to address unknowns, compounded loads and other
uncommon occurrences. It is assumed that the safety factor in the materials can address
these items.
There are two systems used for the analysis of loads in structures. Both have been used
successfully, but there are reasons that one may be preferred over the other for particular
situations.
Thus both the loads and the strengths of the materials are reduced to a level that is
commonly referred to as the Working Stress Based.
LRFD (Load and Resistance Factor Design)
LRFD is used on the newer codes and is more commonly being used in identifying
material or component capacities as well. It is also commonly referred to as Working
Strength Design.
When using the LRFD design principles, the factors applied to the materials are small or
non-existent. The LRFD capacity listed can be assumed to be all that you will get.
ASD vs LRFD Design

PAGE 1 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.1
MEMBER
The forces that are generated by LRFD computations are similarly not reduced. Every
effort is made to identify the worst case conditions and load combinations and as a result,
there are factors applied to the loads to anticipate these conditions that are not included in
the ASD world.
For purposes of our calculations, it is possible to directly compare working strength to

working stress values by introducing a factor of 1.4. Thus if we go back to our original
material example, the material rated at 1000 lb tensile strength using ASD factors, would
be rated at 1400 lb using LRFD.
Applicability
Currently the BOCA, SBC, and NBC (Canada) codes are ASD based. The 97 UBC, IBC
and TI-809-04 Codes are LRFD based. There are multiple reasons that the codes have
moved toward the LRFD. Probably the primary one however, is that it has been felt the
loads and load combinations can be more accurately portrayed with LRFD factors than
they can with ASD factors.
Unfortunately, there is currently a situation where some materials or hardware are rated in
ASD based units and some in LRFD based units. In addition, as mentioned above, some
of the codes have forces in ASD units and some in LRFD units. The differences between
the values are too big to ignore and it is critical that anyone involved in comparing values,
sizing components or specifying designs must have a good grasp of this and know at all
times, what values he is working with.
Kinetics Noise Control currently performs most analyses on individual pieces of
equipment using ASD units. This is because many of the hardware and material
allowables are still in those units and because of the need to deal with many codes, we
have preferred to standardize. In general, for areas where it is not clear which units might
be used, it will be noted on KNC documentation. For example, on the standardized
certification document that we generate, the seismic design forces listed at the top are
clearly indicated to be in ASD units.
As a result, both the forces and the material capacities used for LRFD computations are
higher than those used with ASD. This is commonly referred to as the Workng Strength
Based.
On the other hand, Kinetics Noise Control produced piping and duct design tables are in
LRFD units. Again, on each of the documents produced, LRFD units are indicated.
LRFD has been used here as primary because these are relatively new tables and as the
codes are heading in that direction, it seemed appropriate to adopt that system.
ASD vs LRFD Design

PAGE 2 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.1
MEMBER
All seismically rated restraints that resist both horizontal and vertical loads and that are
provided by Kinetics Noise Control represent their seismic capacity with a load envelope
diagram. The vertical axis of the diagram is the vertical capacity of the restraint. The
horizontal axis of the diagram is the horizontal capacity of the restraint. The area in
between represents the maximum capacity for applications that have combined vertical
and horizontal load components. Most applications involve combination of these forces.
For restraints that resist horizontal loads only, a single number identifies their capacity.
For all seismic restraints and for most seismically rated isolators, the seismic capacity is
independent of the load that the isolator might support. In some cases, however, the load
being supported by the isolator can increase of decrease its seismic rating. This section
addresses only those isolators where the restraint capacity is unaffected by the load.
Note: The load supported does not impact the capacity of most seismically rated isolators.
Any seismically rated component that has its capacity illustrated as in the diagrams below
are of the constant capacity type. If the seismic rating is load sensitive, the capacity
diagrams will be more complex. Refer to section D4.3 for more information on these and
on how to use the load diagrams appropriate to them.
On most diagrams, there are two curves. One represents the capacity of the restraint
when through bolted and/or welded. This can also be assumed to be the capacity limit of
the restraint device itself.
The other curve indicates the capacity of the restraint if bolted to concrete. This will be
equal to or less than the through bolted capacity and it includes reductions that address
the limitations that must be applied to anchors when the restraint is attached as is to a
concrete slab. It should be noted that the concrete anchorage capacity can increase up to
the limit of the through bolted capacity with the addition of optional oversized base plates
and significantly larger anchors.
HORIZONTAL/VERTICAL SEISMIC LOAD

CAPACITY ENVELOPES (CONSTANT)
In some cases, a family of isolators or restraints may be identified on the same diagram.
If this is the case, each curve will be labeled as to which family member it represents and
where appropriate, both anchored to concrete and through bolted values will be shown.
In addition, not all components are intended to be anchored to concrete. If it is not
appropriate for the given component, no associated curve will be published for it.
A typical set of curves is shown below.
HORIZ / VERT SEISMIC LOAD ENVELOPES (CONSTANT)

PAGE 1 OF 3

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.2
MEMBER
ANCHORED TO CONCRETE
5
0
0
HORIZONTAL FORCE LBS X 1000
To use the diagram, the required capacity at the various restraint (or attachment) points
for the application must be known (or computed). There are a number of ways to obtain
these values. Some of these can be fairly simple but give very conservative values.
Some are more complicated, but may substantiate the use lighter weight attachment
hardware. As part of a standard seismic analysis for given piece of equipment, Kinetics
Noise Control provides these values for particular applications. ASHRAE offers guidance
on alternate ways of computing these forces and there could well be other ways to do it
that result in reasonable answers.
Some caution must be exercised though, as it is not as simple as dividing the total seismic
force by the number or isolators to get a force per isolator (See also Section D1.3 of this
manual).
Once the vertical and horizontal restraint capacity necessary has been determined, these
values should be plotted on the diagram using the vertical force component for the
y-variable and the horizontal force component for the x-variable. Shown below is a
diagram with capacity requirement of 3500 lb vertical and 750 lb horizontal plotted on it.
For our purposes, we will assume that the parameters used to calculate these values are
through bolted parameters. (When using these charts, because the actual computed
load requirement can vary depending on whether the final connection is to steel or
concrete, it is critical to ensure that the load requirement used is appropriate to the
anchorage type being considered. [Concrete anchorage forces compares to concrete
allowables and through bolted forces compare to bolted allowables])
VERTICAL FORCE LBS X 1000
BOLTED ED TO STEEL
6
Note that the point falls between the Anchored to Concrete and Bolted to Steel curves.
Because the point is inside the Bolted to Steel curve, this indicates two things. 1) The
restraint itself is adequate for the application and, 2) if the application involves through

PAGE 2 OF 3

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.2
MEMBER
bolting the restraint to the structure, the restraint can be successfully applied as is.
If the force had been computed using Anchored to Concrete parameters, because the
point falls outside of the anchored to concrete curve, it indicates that if connecting to
concrete using post installed anchors, the restraint cannot be used as is. Since it does
fall inside the Bolted to Steel curve however, it indicates that it could be fitted with an
oversized baseplate and more (or larger) anchor bolts. If this oversized baseplate is sized
to resist these forces, it offers a viable attachment option. Details on selecting an
adequate oversized baseplates can be found in the Floor and Wall Mounted Equipment
Chapter, Section D5.2.
8
BOLTED ED TO STEEL
6
5
0
0
If the point had fallen inside of the Anchored to Concrete curve, the restraint could have
been used as is in the anchored to concrete application.
If the point had fallen outside of the Bolted to Steel curve, the restraint device would
have been inadequate in size for the application and a restraint with higher capacity would
have to be selected.

PAGE 3 OF 3

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.2
MEMBER
HORIZONTAL/VERTICAL SEISMIC LOAD

CAPACITY ENVELOPES (VARIABLE)
Once developed, the vertical axis of the diagram indicates the vertical capacity of the
restraint and the horizontal axis of the diagram is the horizontal capacity of the restraint in
the same manner as does the Constant load capacity envelope. (See also D4.2)
In general, when working with a restraint that has Variable load capacity, increases in
the supported load will make restraints more stable (and resistant to lateral loads) and will
increase the applied force necessary to overcome gravity forces (and increase their
effectiveness in dealing with uplift loads).
If the seismically rated isolator, however, is designed with a cantilever element that
transfers the load from both the spring and the snubber to the supported piece of
equipment, the actual stress in the component is the resultant of these two factors. As the
supported load increases, the maximum restraint load will decrease and vice versa. This
relationship is typically linear and needs to be taken into account when sizing the restraint
component.
8
BOLTED ED TO STEEL
6
5
All seismically rated restraints that resist both horizontal and vertical loads and that are
provided by Kinetics Noise Control represent their seismic capacity with a load envelope
diagram as indicated in the previous section. In some cases involving combined isolation
and restraint devices however, the supported load can significantly impact the lateral,
vertical or combined capacity. This requires the creation of a special load diagram
appropriate to the specific load being supported.
0
0
Typical Constant capacity Envelope

If the restraint being used is of the Variable capacity type, it will be obvious from the load
envelopes provided. Instead of the single graph illustrating the Constant capacity curve
as shown above, there will be 3 separate graphs as shown below.
HORIZ/VERT SEISMIC LOAD ENVELOPES (VARIABLE)

PAGE 1 OF 4

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.3
MEMBER
It should be noted on the Variable load envelope set of graphs, that Figure 1 (the one on
the left) is similar to the graph for the Constant capacity case. This envelope represents
the capacity of the restraint if it does not support any weight. (When it is used as a
restraint only and not as an isolator.)
If the restraint bears weight, a new envelope must be created.
This is accomplished using the following procedure:
1) To generate the seismic restraint capacity envelope for a particular load condition, first
determine the static load on the isolator element.
2) Refer to Figure 2 or 3 depending on whether the restraint is to be through-bolted (Steel
Attachment) or anchored to concrete (Concrete attachment). Locate the above static
load on the X axis and determine the horizontal restraint capacity rating by reading
the intersecting Y axis value from the appropriate curve (#3 or #6).
3) Plot this point on the horizontal axis of the restraint envelope graph.
4) Similarly determine and plot the vertical restraint rating drawn from curve #1 or #4 on
the vertical axis of the restraint envelope graph.
5) Repeat for the combined rating (curve #2 or #5) and plot it at the location where both
the vertical and horizontal force equal this value.
6) Connect the above points to generate the performance envelope for the restraint
under the particular load condition.
Typical Variable capacity Envelope

PAGE 2 OF 4

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.3
MEMBER
Example
Assume we have a seismically rated restraint that supports 600 lb and we want to derive
a restraint capacity curve for it.
Plotting these values on the Restraint Capacity Envelope curve, we produce a curve that
looks like the dashed line shown on the following page.
Using the sample graph below, we can see that the horizontal capacity with a 600 lb
support load is 2650 lb (Curve #3), The vertical capacity is 2000 lb (Curve #1) and the
combined capacity is 1100 (Curve #2).
Also shown on this diagram is the unloaded restraint curve and added is a curve
indicating the capacity for this particular restraint if it were to be loaded to the maximum
(1000 lb.)
At this point, the curve can be applied in the same manner as the constant capacity
envelope addressed in the previous section of the manual.

PAGE 3 OF 4

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.3
MEMBER
Generated Seismic Load Capacity Envelope

PAGE 4 OF 4

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.3
MEMBER
Force Class for Hanging Piping, Ductwork, Conduit and Equipment
Components provided by Kinetics, unless otherwise noted, will be sized for these more
standardized conditions. In general these are worst case conditions depending primarily
on the pipe sizes to be restrained with some adjustment for the systems elevation in the
structure. Components provided by Kinetics will be cable systems based on 60 degree
(worst case) restraint cable angles in conjunction with the longest allowable spans (per
SMACNA). In cases where there are a significant number or items trapezed together,
components will be selected based on total weight and indications will be included on
drawings as appropriate showing where these conditions exist.
The tables described below are shown in the remaining sections of Chapter D4 of this
manual. Note that Tables 1 and 1A are samples and will vary from project to project.
Tables 1 and 1A Force Class and Load Determination Tables
Knowing duct size, pipe size, or weight per linear foot of the system being restrained, this
series of tables allows the end user to determine or verify the Force Class rating of the
properly sized restraint component. This document is tailored with seismic factors
appropriate to the particular project under review, and as such is not applicable to other
projects.
The key information listed on this document is in the right-hand column. At the top, Force
Classes are identified and corresponding force values in pounds are listed. Below this is
the design force in gs for the project in question. The forces are broken down for various
elevations within the structure as the forces vary with elevation.
The Kinetics Noise Control Force Class design guide is used to size components for use
in seismically rated piping and ductwork systems. Addressed in this documentation are
guidelines for sizing restraints, hanger rods, rod stiffeners, and anchorage for seismic
applications. The guide is quite comprehensive and contains a significant level of detail to
allow all aspects of the restraint and anchorage to be optimized where awkward geometry
or critical conditions not obvious during the design process occur. The guide can also be
used to identify a more standardized, yet conservative, selection of components that
would be appropriate for most or all of the restraint locations for a given system.
The bottom six tables are set up based on six different restraint spacings. These tables
indicate, for systems with a known weight per linear foot and a known spacing between
restraints, the required Force Class rating of the restraint components. The tables offer
guidance for 10, 20, 30, 40, 60, and 80 foot restraint spacings.
In the left hand column is reference information that offers a guide to determining the
weight per foot for various pipe and duct components. Individual pipe or duct weights can
be read directly off the table. For trapezed systems, the combined total weights per foot
FORCE CLASS FOR HANGING PIPING, DUCTWORK, CONDUIT, AND EQUIP.

PAGE 1 OF 3

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.4
MEMBER
of the individual pipe or duct components should be used.

For applications where fine tuning of the components is desired, a second similar table
(Table 1A) is available listing the actual force (rather than Force Class). In many cases,
this table can be used to justify the use of smaller restraint components for particular
locations. Linear interpolation between various weights and spacings is permitted.
In order to use these tables, the design seismic force in gs or the applicable SMACNA
SHL level must be known. g values for various floors are listed in Table 1.
Table 3 Maximum Permitted Offset in a run and Drop Length for Piping and
Ductwork
There are two sets of two tables each that make up this family. They address the
maximum allowable centerline offset in a run (on the first table) and the maximum drop
length that can be left unrestrained (on the second table). One set is for piping/conduit
and the other is for ductwork.
As with Table 2, in order to use these tables, the design seismic force in gs or the
SMACNA SHL level must be known. See the g values listed for various floors in Table 1.
Tables 4A and 4B Hanger Rod Sizes and Stiffeners
The two tables that make up 4A indicate the minimum required hanger rod and hanger
rod anchor sizes based the tensile forces that result from the static deadweight load in the
hanger rod in conjunction with the added seismic force component. In order to use these
tables the Force Class (from Table 1) and the static deadweight load per hanger rod
(weight per foot of the supported pipe/conduit/ductwork multiplied by the spacing between
hangers [divided by 2 if two supports carry the load]) are needed.
In addition, if a rigid member is used in lieu of cables for restraint, the angle between the
strut and the horizontal plane becomes a factor. The angle information is not needed for
cable restraints.
Table 2 Maximum Permitted Restraint Spacing for Piping and Ductwork

There are four tables that make up this family. They address the maximum axial and
lateral spacing for piping and conduit (two tables) and ductwork (two tables).
Table 4B allows hanger rod stiffeners to be appropriately sized. The upper portion of the
table indicates the maximum unstiffened hanger rod length for a given location. The
required input information is the Force Class (Table 1), the hanger rod diameter (as
installed, but per Table 4a minimum) and the angle between the horizontal plane and the
restraint cable or strut (as installed, but not to exceed 60 degrees).
If the listed maximum unstiffened hanger rod length has been exceeded, a stiffener is
required. The lower portion of Table 4B indicates the increase allowed in hanger rod

PAGE 2 OF 3

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.4
MEMBER
length for various sizes and types of stiffeners. Detailed instructions walk the user
through the process. For instance, a .62 dia rod stiffened with a .75 dia schedule 40 pipe
lists a factor of 2. This indicates that the listed maximum unstiffened hanger rod length
(based on Force Class) can be doubled if the hanger rod is fitted with the .75 dia
schedule 40 pipe.
Table 4C Seismic Strut Sizing Table

This table indicates the maximum permitted length for various restraint strut materials
subjected to loads as determined by the Force Class (Table 1) and strut angle (from the
horizontal plane).
(Note: KNC does not provide strut members, but does provide hardware that can be used
to attach struts made of angle material. Standard KNC-provided components are based
on cable restraint systems.)
Table 5 Cable and Restraint Anchorage Capacity Data
In the upper right portion of this document, cable restraint capacities by Force Class are
listed for various diameter cables (1/8 to 1/2) installed at various angles relative to the
horizontal plane (up to a worst case of 60 degrees).
In the left-hand column are capacities for KNC-provided attachment clips and anchors (full
embedment of 8 times anchor diameter is assumed). Required input is the Force Class
(Table 1) and restraint cable angle to the horizontal. Data is provided for single anchor,
double anchor and quad anchor arrangements.
The lower right-hand column contains similar information, but it is based on the use of
through bolts to anchor to the structure in lieu of an anchor bolt.
Also included is a supplement to this table (Table 5A). 5A lists the same information as
Table 5 except that the force capacities are listed in lieu of the Force Class. This table
can be used in conjunction with the required force table (Table 1A) to potentially fine
tune the system. Linear interpolation between the parameters listed in table 5A is
permitted.
(Note: KNC does not provided hanger rods or stiffeners. These items are by others. KNC
does provide hanger rod anchors and stiffener attachment hardware.)
For other information and guidance on the installation of restrained equipment and
systems, FEMA Manual 412 should be consulted. The manual is available without charge
directly from FEMA (1-800-480-2520) or through Kinetics Noise Control. Kinetics Noise
Control takes no responsibility for installations not in compliance with this document or
other Kinetics-supplied documentation.

PAGE 3 OF 3

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.4
MEMBER
Force Class Load Determination Sample (Tables 1 and 1A)
FORCE CLASS LOAD DETERMINATION SAMPLE (TABLES 1 AND 1A)

PAGE 1 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.5
MEMBER
Force Class Load Determination Sample (Tables 1 and 1A)
FORCE CLASS LOAD DETERMINATION SAMPLE (TABLES 1 AND 1A)

PAGE 2 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.5
MEMBER
Maximum Allowable Restraint Spacing (Table 2)

KINETICS NO ISE CO N TRO L, INC .
6300 IR ELAN PLAC E
DU BLIN , O HIO 43017
ph 614 889-0480
Maxim um Permitted Restraint Spacing for

Piping and Conduit
Table 2
L ateral R estrain t S pacin g (ft)

Axial Restraint Sp acin g (ft)
Horizontal S eism ic Force (g) (LRF D)
Horizontal Seism ic F orce (g) (LRF D)
0.21 0.42 0.67
1
1.5* 2*
3*
4*
0.21 0.42 0.67
1
1.5* 2*
3*
4*
P ipe and
SM ACN A Designation
S MA CN A Designation
C onduit
C
B
A
AA
C
B
A
AA
Size (in)
< 2.5*
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
2.5
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
80
80
80
80
80
80
80
40
3
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
80
80
80
80
80
80
40
40
4
40
40
40
40
40
40
20
20
80
80
80
80
80
40
40
20
5
40
40
40
40
40
40
20
20
80
80
80
80
40
40
20
20
6
40
40
40
40
40
20
20
20
80
80
40
40
40
20
20
20
8
40
40
40
40
20
20
20
20
80
80
40
40
20
20
20
20
10
40
40
20
20
20
20
20
20
80
80
20
20
20
20
20
20
12
40
40
20
20
20
20
20
20
80
40
20
20
20
20
20
20
14
40
40
20
20
20
20
20
20
80
40
20
20
20
20
20
20
16
40
40
20
20
20
20
20
20
80
40
20
20
20
20
20
20
18*
40
40
20
20
20
20
20
20
80
40
20
20
20
20
20
20
20*
40
40
20
20
20
20
20
10
80
40
20
20
20
20
20
10
24*
40
40
20
20
20
20
10
10
80
40
20
20
20
20
10
10
* Indicates that these sizes and forces are not listed by SM ACNA and hav e been com puted independently
M ax Sp acin gs ap plicable to Hazardo us M aterials an d M edical G as S ystem s are half th e ab o ve values.
Maximum Perm itted Restraint Spacing for D uctw ork

(If oth er than listed, u se d ata for next size larg er)
Duct Size
(in)
(R ound)
36
48
60
84
(Rect)
30 x 30
42 x 42
54 x 54
60 x 60
84 x 84
96 x 96
54 x 28
60 x 30
84 x 42
96 x 48
108 x 54
120 x 60
* Indicates that
L ateral R estrain t S pacin g (ft)

Horizontal S eism ic Force (g) (LRF D)
0.21 0.42 0.67
1
1.5* 2*
3*
SM ACN A Designation
C
B
A
AA
50
40
30
30
20
20
20
50
40
30
30
20
20
20
50
40
30
30
20
20
20
50
40
30
30
20
20
20
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
these
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
sizes
4*
10
10
10
10
Axial Restraint Sp acin g (ft)

Horizontal Seism ic F orce (g) (LRF D)
0.21 0.42 0.67
1
1.5* 2*
3*
S MA CN A Designation
C
B
A
AA
80
80
60
60
40
40
40
80
80
60
60
40
40
40
80
80
60
60
40
40
40
80
80
60
60
40
40
20
30
30
20
20
20
10
80
80
60
60
30
30
20
20
20
10
80
80
60
60
30
30
20
20
20
10
80
80
60
60
30
30
20
20
20
10
80
80
60
60
30
30
20
20
20
10
80
80
60
60
30
30
20
20
20
10
80
80
60
60
30
30
20
20
20
10
80
80
60
60
30
30
20
20
20
10
80
80
60
60
30
30
20
20
20
10
80
80
60
60
30
30
20
20
20
10
80
80
60
60
30
30
20
20
20
10
80
80
60
60
30
30
20
20
20
10
80
80
60
60
and forces are not listed by SM ACNA and hav e been com puted
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
40
independently
4*
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
(If pip e size is oth er than listed, u se d ata for next size larg er)
Listed G load is LRF D [Strength] Based. Multiply S tress based forces by a factor of 1.4 before com paring to the
G v alues listed abov e.
MAX RESTRAINT SPACING, OFFSET AND DROP LENGTH (TABLES 2 AND 3)

PAGE 1 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.6
MEMBER
Maximum Allowable Offset and Drop Length (Table 3)

K INE TIC S N O ISE CO N T RO L, INC .
6300 IRE LAN PLA CE
D UB LIN, O HIO 43017
ph 614 889-0480
M axim um P erm itted O ffset a nd D ro p L eng th

fo r Pip ing
T a ble 3
(If p ipe size is oth er th an listed, u se data for next size larg er)
M ax C en terline O ffs et in R u n (in )

M ax U n -B ra ced P ipe D ro p L eng th (ft)
H orizontal S eism ic F orce (g) (LR F D )
H orizontal Seism ic Force (g) (LR FD )
0.21 0.42 0.67
1
1.5* 2*
3*
4*
0.21 0.42 0.67
1
1.5* 2*
3*
4*
Pipe and
C onduit
SM AC N A D esignation
S M A C N A D esignation
C
B
A
AA
C
B
A
AA
Size (in)
< 2.5*
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
2.5
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
3
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
20
4
30
30
30
30
30
30
15
15
20
20
20
20
20
20
10
10
5
30
30
30
30
30
30
15
15
20
20
20
20
20
20
10
10
6
30
30
30
30
30
15
15
15
20
20
20
20
20
10
10
10
8
30
30
30
30
15
15
15
15
20
20
20
20
10
10
10
10
10
30
30
15
15
15
15
15
15
20
20
10
10
10
10
10
10
12
30
30
15
15
15
15
15
15
20
20
10
10
10
10
10
10
14
30
30
15
15
15
15
15
15
20
20
10
10
10
10
10
10
16
30
30
15
15
15
15
15
15
20
20
10
10
10
10
10
10
18*
30
30
15
15
15
15
15
15
20
20
10
10
10
10
10
10
20*
30
30
15
15
15
15
15
8
20
20
10
10
10
10
10
5
24*
30
30
15
15
15
15
8
8
20
20
10
10
10
10
5
5
* Indicates that these sizes and forces are not listed by SM AC N A and hav e been com puted independently
M ax S p acin gs app licab le to H azard ou s M aterials and M edical G as S ystem s are h alf the ab ove valu es.
M axim um P erm itted O ffset a nd U n-B rac ed D ro p L eng th fo r D u ctw o rk

(If o th er th an listed , u se d ata fo r n ext size larg er)
D uct S ize
(in)
(R ound)
36
48
60
84
(R ect)
30 x 30
42 x 42
54 x 54
60 x 60
84 x 84
96 x 96
54 x 28
60 x 30
84 x 42
96 x 48
108 x 54
120 x 60
* Indicates that
M ax C en terline O ffs et in R u n (in )

H orizontal S eism ic F orce (g) (LR F D )
0.21 0.42 0.67
1
1.5* 2*
3*
SM AC N A D esignation
C
B
A
AA
38
30
23
23
15
15
15
38
30
23
23
15
15
15
38
30
23
23
15
15
15
38
30
23
23
15
15
15
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
these
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
sizes
4*
8
8
8
8
M ax U n -B raced D uct D ro p L en gth (ft)

H orizontal Seism ic Force (g) (LR FD )
0.21 0.42 0.67
1
1.5* 2*
3*
4*
S M A C N A D esignation
C
B
A
AA
25
20
15
15
10
10
10
5
25
20
15
15
10
10
10
5
25
20
15
15
10
10
10
5
25
20
15
15
10
10
10
5
23
23
15
15
15
8
20
20
15
15
23
23
15
15
15
8
20
20
15
15
23
23
15
15
15
8
20
20
15
15
23
23
15
15
15
8
20
20
15
15
23
23
15
15
15
8
20
20
15
15
23
23
15
15
15
8
20
20
15
15
23
23
15
15
15
8
20
20
15
15
23
23
15
15
15
8
20
20
15
15
23
23
15
15
15
8
20
20
15
15
23
23
15
15
15
8
20
20
15
15
23
23
15
15
15
8
20
20
15
15
23
23
15
15
15
8
20
20
15
15
and forces are not listed by SM AC N A and hav e been com puted
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
independently
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
Listed G load is LR FD [S trength] B ased. M ultiply S tress based forces by a factor of 1.4 before com paring to the
G v alues listed abov e.
MAX RESTRAINT SPACING, OFFSET AND DROP LENGTH (TABLES 2 AND 3)

PAGE 2 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.6
MEMBER
Minimum Hanger Rod Diameter (Table 4a)

K IN E T IC S N O IS E C O N T R O L , IN C .
6 3 0 0 IR E L A N P L A C E
D U B L IN , O H IO 4 3 0 1 7
p h 6 1 4 8 8 9 -0 4 8 0
T a b le 4 a
M in i m u m D ia m e t e r o f H a n g e r R o d * ( in i n c h e s )
( R e f e r t o B o t to m T a b l e f o r A n c h o r C a p a c iti e s i f a t t a c h e d to c o n c r e t e )
F o r c e ( lb )
F o rc e C la s s
250
I
500
II
1000
II I
2000
IV
100
250
500
1000
2000
S t ru t A n g le 6 0
d e g re e s f r o m
H o riz o n ta l
P la n e
0 .3 8
0 .5 0
0 .6 3
0 .7 5
0 .8 8
0 .5 0
0 .6 3
0 .6 3
0 .7 5
1 .0 0
0 .7 5
0 .7 5
0 .8 8
0 .8 8
1 .1 2
1 .0 0
1 .0 0
1 .0 0
1 .1 2
1 .2 5
100
250
500
1000
2000
H o riz o n ta l
P la n e
0 .3 8
0 .3 8
0 .5 0
0 .6 3
0 .8 8
0 .5 0
0 .5 0
0 .6 3
0 .7 5
0 .8 8
0 .6 3
0 .6 3
0 .7 5
0 .7 5
1 .0 0
0 .7 5
0 .7 5
0 .8 8
1 .0 0
1 .1 2
1 .1 2
1 .2 5
1 .2 5
1 .2 5
100
250
500
1000
2000
H o riz o n ta l
P la n e
0 .3 8
0 .3 8
0 .5 0
0 .6 3
0 .8 8
0 .3 8
0 .5 0
0 .5 0
0 .6 3
0 .8 8
0 .5 0
0 .5 0
0 .6 3
0 .7 5
1 .0 0
0 .6 3
0 .6 3
0 .7 5
0 .8 8
1 .0 0
0 .8 8
1 .0 0
1 .0 0
1 .1 2
1 .2 5
1 .2 5
1 .2 5
1 .2 5
100
250
500
1000
2000
- -A l l C a b le s -S tr u t A n g l e 0
H o riz o n ta l
P la n e
0 .3 8
0 .3 8
0 .5 0
0 .6 3
0 .8 8
0 .3 8
0 .3 8
0 .5 0
0 .6 3
0 .8 8
0 .3 8
0 .3 8
0 .5 0
0 .6 3
0 .8 8
0 .3 8
0 .3 8
0 .5 0
0 .6 3
0 .8 8
0 .3 8
0 .3 8
0 .5 0
0 .6 3
0 .8 8
0 .3 8
0 .3 8
0 .5 0
0 .6 3
0 .8 8
S u p p o r te d W t p e r
H a n g e r R o d (lb s)
100
250
500
1000
2000
5000
V
10000
VI
S u p p o r te d W t p e r
H a n g e r R o d (lb s)
M in i m u m D ia m e t e r o f K N C H a n g e r
R o d A n c h o r* (in in c h e s )
H o riz o n ta l
P la n e
100
250
500
1000
2000
H o riz o n ta l
P la n e
100
250
500
1000
2000
H o riz o n ta l
P la n e
0 .7 5
0 .8 8
1 .2 5
1 .2 5
1 .2 5
1 .2 5
1 .2 5
0 .6 3
0 .7 5
1 .2 5
1 .2 5
0 .8 8
1 .0 0
1 .2 5
1 .2 5
1 .2 5
1 .2 5
0 .5 0
0 .7 5
1 .0 0
1 .2 5
0 .6 3
0 .8 8
1 .2 5
1 .2 5
0 .8 8
1 .2 5
1 .2 5
1 .2 5
1 .2 5
-- A ll C a b le s -100
0 .3 8
0 .3 8
0 .3 8
0 .3 8
0 .3 8
0 .3 8
S t ru t A n g l e 0
250
0 .6 3
0 .6 3
0 .6 3
0 .6 3
0 .6 3
0 .6 3
500
0 .8 8
0 .8 8
0 .8 8
0 .8 8
0 .8 8
0 .8 8
1000
H o riz o n ta l
1 .2 5
1 .2 5
1 .2 5
1 .2 5
1 .2 5
1 .2 5
2000
P la n e
N o t e s : A ll a b o v e c a p a c iti e s a r e b a s e d o n L R F D [ S tr e n g th ] b a s e d l o a d s , a 5 : 1 S a f e ty
F a c to r a n d a 1 . 3 3 A l l o w a b l e o v e rl o a d f a c to r a p p l i c a b le t o W i n d a n d S e i s m i c L o a d in g s .
A l l A n c h o r c a p a c iti e s a r e b a s e d o n I C B O a ll o w a b le s , s o m e s i z e s m a y h a v e
to b e i n c r e a s e d i f e m b e d d e d i n t o th e t e n s i le s id e o f a s t ru c tu ra l m e m b e r .
* If C a b le s a re u s e d in lie w o f S tru ts , A ll H a n g e r R o d a n d A n c h o r S iz e s
w i ll b e e q u a l to t h e V a l u e s l is te d f o r S t r u t s in t h e " 0 " d e g r e e a n g l e T a b l e .
HANGER ROD, ROD STIFFENER, AND STRUT TABLES (4a, 4b, AND 4c)
PAGE 1 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.7
MEMBER
Hanger Rod Stiffener and Strut Tables (Table 4b & 4c)

KINETICS NOISE CONTROL, INC.
6300 IRELAN PLACE
DUBLIN, OHIO 43017
ph 614 889-0480
Hanger Rod Stiffening Tables
Table 4b
Maximum Unstiffened Hanger Rod Length (in)

Cable Angle (x) degrees from Horizontal
Hanger
Rod
Dia
0.38
0.50
0.62
0.75
0.88
1.00
1.25
60
Rod Size
0.38 0.50 0.62 0.75 0.88 1.00 1.25 0.38 0.50
6
10
17
25
35
45
73
7
14
4
7
12
18
24
32
52
5
10
5
8
12
17
23
37
4
7
6
9
12
16
26
5
8
10
16
12
-
45
Rod Size
0.62 0.75 0.88
22
33
45
16
23
32
11
16
23
8
12
16
7
10
7
1.00 1.25 0.38 0.50

60
97
10
18
42
68
7
13
30
48
5
9
21
34
3
6
13
22
4
9
15
-
30
Rod Size
0.62 0.75 0.88 1.00 1.25
29
43
60
79 127
20
31
42
56
90
14
22
30
39
64
10
15
21
28
45
6
10
13
18
28
7
9
12
20
0
Rod Size
All
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Unlimited
Rod Stiffener Sizing Table (Multipliers)

Schedule 40 Pipe
1
1.25
15.4
23.1
8.3
12.5
5.2
7.8
3.5
5.2
2.5
3.7
1.9
2.8
1.2
1.8
0.75
10.1
5.4
3.4
2.3
1.6
1.2
-
1.5
29.1
15.7
9.8
6.5
4.7
3.6
2.2
Angle Stiffeners
1.5 x 1.5 x .25
2.0 x 2.0 x .12
12.7
14.5
6.8
7.8
4.3
4.9
2.9
3.3
2.1
2.3
1.6
1.8
-
1.0 x 1.0 x .12

5.0
2.7
1.7
1.1
-
2.0 x 2.0 x .25

19.8
10.7
6.6
4.4
3.2
2.4
1.1
Max Length Governed by Buckling (Euler). As Stiffener is not a Primary Load Bearing Member and Compressive Load is Intermittent kL/r factor not applied.
Instructions for Use of the above Tables

1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
Determine the appropriate Force Class for the Hanger Rod in Question.
Determine the Maximum Angle between the Restraint Cable or Strut and Horizontal.
Determine the Hanger Rod used (or to be used) at the Restriant Location.
Determine the Un-Stiffened Hanger Rod Length (Distance from anchor point to pipe or duct support bracket on Hanger Rod).
Using the Maxim um Unstiffened Hanger Rod Length Table Determine if Installed Length exceeds Max Length.
If above length is exceeded, Determ ine ratio between installed Length and Max Length (If Installed Length is 32 in and Max Length
is 16 inches, the ratio is 32/16 or 2. If a fraction, round up to the next largest whole number.)
7) Select an appropriate stiffener using the Rod Stiffener Table based on the existing Hanger Rod Dia, Multiplier and Max Stiffener length.
8) Read off at the top of the colum n the size of the required stiffener (Sch 40 pipe and Typical Angles are listed).
9) 2 clamps (minim um ) are required to attach the stiffener to the hanger rod. The spacing between clamps cannot exceed the
Maxim um Length listed in the first Table.
Seismic Strut Sizing Table
Table 4c
Force (lb)
Force Class
Strut Material
(A36 Angle)
250
I
Maximum Length of Strut (in inches)

500 1000 2000 5000 10000
Strut Material
II
III
IV
V
VI
(A36 Angle)
250
I
500 1000 2000 5000 10000

II
III
IV
V
VI
Strut Angle
60 degrees
from
Horizontal
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.0
x
x
x
x
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.0
x
x
x
x
.12
.25
.12
.25
32
58
80
78
23
58
66
78
16
41
47
64
11
29
33
45
18
21
29
20
2.5
2.5
3.0
4.0
x
x
x
x
2.5
2.5
3.0
4.0
x
x
x
x
.25
.38
.38
.38
98
97
117
158
98
97
117
158
91
97
117
158
64
77
102
158
41
48
65
101
29
34
46
71
Strut Angle
45 degrees
from
Horizontal
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.0
x
x
x
x
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.0
x
x
x
x
.12
.25
.12
.25
38
58
80
78
27
58
79
78
19
49
56
76
13
35
39
54
22
25
34
15
24
2.5
2.5
3.0
4.0
x
x
x
x
2.5
2.5
3.0
4.0
x
x
x
x
.25
.38
.38
.38
98
97
117
158
98
97
117
158
98
97
117
158
76
91
117
158
48
58
77
120
34
41
54
85
Strut Angle
30 degrees
from
Horizontal
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.0
x
x
x
x
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.0
x
x
x
x
.12
.25
.12
.25
39
58
80
78
30
58
80
78
21
54
62
78
15
38
44
60
24
28
38
17
19
27
2.5
2.5
3.0
4.0
x
x
x
x
2.5
2.5
3.0
4.0
x
x
x
x
.25
.38
.38
.38
98
97
117
158
98
97
117
158
98
97
117
158
84
97
117
158
53
64
85
132
38
45
60
94
Strut Angle
0 degrees
from
Horizontal
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.0
x
x
x
x
1.0
1.5
2.0
2.0
x
x
x
x
.12
.25
.12
.25
39
58
80
78
32
58
80
78
23
58
66
78
16
41
47
64
26
30
40
18
21
29
2.5
2.5
3.0
4.0
x
x
x
x
2.5
2.5
3.0
4.0
x
x
x
x
.25
.38
.38
.38
98
97
117
158
98
97
117
158
98
97
117
158
91
97
117
158
57
69
91
142
41
48
65
101
Force
Class
I
II
III
IV
V
VI
See Appendix A8.1.1, A8.2.1, A8.3.1 for Tabulated Values of Rod Stiffeners (4b) for various conditions
HANGER ROD, ROD STIFFENER, AND STRUT TABLES (4a, 4b, AND 4c)
PAGE 2 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.7
MEMBER
Cable and Anchorage Ratings (Table 5)
CABLE AND ANCHORAGE RATINGS (TABLES 5 AND 5a)

PAGE 1 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.8
MEMBER
Cable and Anchorage Ratings (Table 5A)
CABLE AND ANCHORAGE RATINGS (TABLES 5 AND 5a)

PAGE 2 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.8
MEMBER
FORCE CLASS SAMPLE CALCULATIONS
This manual section applies only after it has been determined that restraint is required for
a particular run of piping, ductwork or on a particular piece of equipment. More
information is available to make this determination in section D2 (Codes) and D7 through
D10 (Piping, Ducting, Conduit and Suspended Equipment)
DUCTWORK EXAMPLE
For our example, assume we have a length of pipe as illustrated below.
Further, assume that the 30, 110, 45 and 17 long runs are supported by hanger rods
that are 36 long and which are anchored at the top into the underside of the roof slab for
the structure and are spaced 10 apart. We can look at both struts and cables for
restraint.
Determine Design Seismic Force
The first thing that we need to know is the design seismic force that we must apply. If we
look near the top right corner of Table 1 or Table 1A (D4.5), there are listed the design
accelerations in Gs that are appropriate for various elevations in this structure. Since we
are attaching the piping in our example to the underside of the roof, the value of interest to
us is the acceleration at the roof, in this case .336 G.
All of the following examples are based on the use of the Sample Load Determination
Tables 1 and 1A (D4.5). Note that the tables used are project specific and will change
based on the Code, the Project Location and the Building Use classification. Project
specific Tables 1 and 1A must be obtained from Kinetics Noise Control prior to reviewing
any particular application.
Determine the Maximum Restraint Spacing

Before we can make effective use of the rest of the information on Table 1 or 1A, we need
to determine a spacing for our restraints. Since we do not know yet, what that spacing is,

PAGE 1 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.9
MEMBER
we can refer to Table 2 (D4.6). The upper portion of this table refers to piping and conduit
while the lower portion refers to ductwork. There is also a table for lateral and one for
axial restraing spacing. Beginning with lateral we need to find a column in the table that
meets or exceeds .336 G. The second column lists a value of .42 G. This fulfills our
needs.
Reading down the column until we get to a 6 pipe, we get a maximum allowable lateral
restraint spacing of 40 ft.
Placing Restraints
Using this information, along with the layout information available in section D7.4.1
(piping) or section 9.4.1(conduit), we can determine the we need the following restraints:
Run
25
30
110
45
17
10
Lateral Restraint
2
2
4
2
1
1
Axial Restraint
1
1
2
1
1
1
If we can locate some of these restraints within 2 ft of a corner, they can do double duty
(act as a lateral restraint for one run and an axial restraint for the other). Consolidating
these, we can come up with a layout that looks like this:
Likewise on the axial table we get a maximum allowable restraint spacing of 80 ft.
Note that for the vertical 25 and 10 runs, the hanger rods act as axial restraints.
Determine the maximum length of pipe per restraint
From the above picture, the maximum span between any two adjacent lateral restraints is
36 and the maximum span between any two adjacent axial restraints is 55. For our

PAGE 2 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.9
MEMBER
purposes, we will use this worst case condition and size all restraints to this capacity.
Determine Restraint Hardware Capacity requirements
We can now apply the above information to Table 1 or 1A (D4.5) to determine a hardware
Force Class or a design force requirment to size our restraint components.
Optional
If we would like to fine tune our selection, we can use Table 1A and perform the same
exercise to determine the actual force requirement for the 50 lb per ft pipe restrained 40 ft
OC to be 672 lb. If desired, the values on Table 1A can be pro-rated based on the weight
and spacing. In this case we can multiply the 672 lb by the actual lb per ft divided by the
tabulated lb per ft (35/50) and also by the actual restraint spacing divided by the tabulated
spacing (36/40). After multiplying the 672 lb figure by these 2 factors, we find that the
minimum component that we can select must withstand a design force of 423 lb.
Selecting restraint components
Table 5 and 5A (D4.8) list the capacity of various Kinetics Noise Control provided
hardware and anchorage components. Table 5 indicates capacities in Force Class units
while 5A indicates capacities in lb. The goal is to select components with capacities in
excess of the design requirements.
If the cable or strut installation angle (as compared to the horizontal plane) is unknown, it
should be assumed to be 60 degrees (worst case).
Cable ratings are listed at the top. Table 5 indicates that a .25 cable is adequate for any
Force Class III requirement at 60 degrees.
Best practice using a strut is to limit the angle to 45 degrees. With a 36 long hanger rod
and a 45 degree angle to the strut, the length of the strut would be 1.41 * 36 or 51. This
dimension is not important for cables, but is critical for struts (Use of struts for restraint of
the bottom of the 25 run is not recommended). Refering to Table 4c (D4.7), we need a
strut that will be installed at 45 degrees, will be 51 long and will resist a Force Class III
load. The minimum angle size that will accommodate this is a 2 x 2 x .25.
Refering first to the weight per foot guide, we can see that a filled 6 pipe weighs 35 lb per
foot. Using the Table 1 Force Class tables on the right side of the page and refering to
the 40 ft OC spacing (for the 36 case that we have), we see that for a roof application
involving a pipe that weighs 50 lb per ft, we need a Force Class III rated hardware system.
Returning to Table 5, below the cable data on the left are ratings for various hardware
components that are anchored to concrete. On the right are ratings for hardware
components that are through bolted. These tables list capacities for the clips mounted in
either of the orientations indicated by figure at the top of the page. If the restraint that we
are using is attached to concrete, in order to achieve a Force Class III connection, the 1

PAGE 3 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.9
MEMBER
Bolt anchor table on the left indicates that a CCA clip with a single .75 anchor mounted to
a vertical surface is needed. As an option, at the bottom of the page on the 2 Bolt anchor
chart, either a KSCA or CCA clip mounted with (2) .38 anchors could be used.
Optional
As with the load determination table, it is also possible to fine tune our hardware
selection. This can often verify the acceptability of a smaller hardware component than
that selected based on Force Class. To do this, we use Table 5A in the same manner as
we did above, but we apply the 423 lb figure that we determined earlier as our force
requirement. Using this, we can verify that a either a 5mm or .18 cable with gripple
connectors would be adequate at 60 degrees.
We can also confirm the acceptability of a single .5 anchor with a KSCA clip in any
orientation.
If through bolted, we can use a KSCA clip with a .38 bolt in any orientation.
Thus it can be seen that with a little more effort, smaller hardware can often be justified.
This addresses the lateral restraints. The axial restraints can be addressed in the
identical manner with the following result.
Force Determination
Force Class Method.
Design Requirement (60 ft span, 50 lb/ft pipe) Force Class = IV
Optional Method
Design Requirement (55 ft span, 35 lb/ft pipe) Design Force = 647 lb
Cable / Strut Size Determination
Force Class Method.
Cable size for Force Class IV at 60 degrees = .38
Size for 51 long strut at Force Class IV at 45 degrees = 2.5 x 2.5 x .25
Optional Method
Cable size for 647 lb at 60 degrees = .18 (U-clip connection)
If the restraint is through bolted (or welded), data from the Grade 2 Bolt table on the right
can be used. It indicates that with through bolts, a .5 bolt is adequate, no matter what the
orientation.
Attachment Hardware Determination

Force Class Method.
Concrete Connection for Force Class IV at 60 degrees
CCA clip with (4) .375 anchors at any orientation

PAGE 4 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.9
MEMBER
Through-Bolt Connection
CCA clip with .75 bolt works for any orientation
Optional Method
Concrete Connection for 647 lb at 60 degrees
CCA clip with.875 anchor at any orientation
Through Bolt Connection
KSCA clip with .38 bolt at any orientation
Refer to Table 4a (D4.7) and note that all cables behave the same as a strut that is
oriented horizontally. For supported weights up to 500 lb, the use of a cable restraint and
a Force Class III (Lateral) seismic load, the minimum acceptable hanger rod size is .50.
If a strut is used in place of the cable and the angle of the strut is 45 degrees to the
horizontal, the minimum hanger rod size permissible is .75
Below this is the anchor capacity table. If the hangers are anchored to concrete rather
than through-bolted, this table indicates the size requirments for the anchor. In a similar
fashion to the above, the anchor size for the cable restrained system can be found to be
.88, while that for the strut restrained system jumps to 1.25
When the above table is applied to the axial restraint which needs a Force Class IV rating
based on the 55 ft spacing, supporting from concrete becomes impractical. To resolve
this issue, the piping must be either hung from steel or the spacing between restraints
decreased to reduce the Force Class Requirement.
Evaluating Rod Stiffeners
Using only the lateral restraint example from above and assuming that we are using cable
restraints and the minimum size hanger rods (.50) we can use Table 4b to evaluate the
need for rod stiffeners.
Looking up Force Class III and a cable angle of 60 degrees (worst case) in the upper
table, we find that the maximum unstiffened length that we can have for a .50 hanger rod
is 10. Since our hanger rod is 36, a rod stiffener is required.
Minimum Hanger Rod Size and Anchor Determination

The supported weight per hanger rod based on 10 ft spacing and 35 lb/ft piping is 350 lb.
The second table indicates multipliers that can be used to evaluate the additional length
that can be achieved with the addition of various rod stiffening materials. We would like to
increase our length from 10 to 36, thus we need a multiplier of 3.6 (36/10). If we look at
the line in the table for .50 hanger rod, we can see that a .75 diameter pipe or a 1.5 x 1.5
x .25 angle will both offer multipliers in excess of the 3.6 that we need and would be
acceptable as rod stiffeners.

PAGE 5 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.9
MEMBER
The maximum spacing between clamps cannot exceed the maximum unstiffened rod
length, so a minimum of 3 clamps are needed to clamp the hanger rod to the rod stiffener.
DUCTWORK EXAMPLE
Further, assume that the entire system is supported by hanger rods that are 54 long and
which are anchored at the top into the underside of the roof slab for the structure and are
spaced 10 apart. We can look at both struts and cables for restraint.
The first thing that we need to know is the design seismic force that we must apply. If we
look near the top right corner of Table 1 or Table 1A (D4.5), there are listed the design
are attaching the ductwork in our example to the underside of the roof, the value of
interest to us is the acceleration at the roof, in this case .336 G.
Determine the Maximum Restraint Spacing
Before we can make effective use of the rest of the information on Table 1 or 1A, we need
to determine a spacing for our restraints. Since we do not know yet, what that spacing is,
we can refer to Table 2 (D4.6). The upper portion of this table refers to piping and conduit
while the lower portion refers to ductwork. There is also a table for lateral and one for
axial restraint spacing. Beginning with lateral we need to find a column in the table that
meets or exceeds .336 G. The second column lists a value of .42 G. This will meet our
requirement.
For our example, assume we have a length of duct as illustrated below.
Reading down the column until we get to a 42 x 42 duct, we get a maximum allowable
lateral restraint spacing of 40 ft.
Likewise on the axial table we get a maximum allowable restraint spacing of 80 ft.

PAGE 6 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.9
MEMBER
Placing Restraints
Using this information, along with the layout information available in section D7.4.1
(piping) or section 9.4.1(conduit), we can determine the we need the following restraints:
Lateral Restraint
1
3
2
1
Axial Restraint
1
1
1
1
If we can locate some of these restraints within 2 ft of a corner, they can do double duty
(act as a lateral restraint for one run and an axial restraint for the other. Consolidating
these, we can come up with a layout that looks like this:
Determine the maximum length of duct per restraint

From the above picture, the maximum span between any two adjacent lateral restraints is
34 and the maximum span between any two adjacent axial restraints is 67. For our
purposes, we will use this worst case condition and size all restraints to this capacity.
Force Class or a design force requirement to size our restraint components.
Run
10
70
20
25
Refering first to the weight per foot guide, we can see that a 42 x 42 duct weighs 29 lb per
foot. Using the Table 1 Force Class tables on the right side of the page and refering to
the 40 ft OC spacing (for the 34 case that we have), we see that for a roof application
involving a duct that weighs 50 lb per ft, we need a Force Class III rated hardware system.
Optional
exercise to determine the actual force requirement for the 50 lb per ft pipe restrained 40 ft
OC to be 672 lb. If desired, the values on Table 1A can be pro-rated based on the weight
and spacing. In this case we can multiply the 672 lb by the actual lb per ft divided by the
tabulated lb per ft (29/50) and also be the actual restraint spacing divided by the tabulated

PAGE 7 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.9
MEMBER
spacing (34/40). After multiplying the 672 lb figure by these 2 factors, we find that the
minimum component that we can select must withstand a design force of 332 lb.
Cable ratings are listed at the top. Table 5 indicates that a .25 cable is adequate for any
Force Class III requirement at 60 degrees.
Good design practice is to limit the strut angle to 45 degrees. With a 54 long hanger rod
and a 45 degree angle to the strut, the length of the strut would be 1.41 * 54 or 77. This
dimension is not important for cables, but is critcal for struts. Refering to Table 4c (D4.7),
we need a strut that will be installed at 45 degrees, will be 77 long and will resist a Force
Class III load. The minimum angle size that will accommodate this is a 2.5 x 2.5 x .38.
are using is attached to concrete, in order to achieve a Force Class III connection, the 1
Bolt anchor table on the left indicates that a CCA clip with a single .75 anchor mounted to
a vertical surface is needed. As an option, at the bottom of the page on the 2 Bolt anchor
chart, either a KSCA or CCA clip mounted with (2) .38 anchors could be used as well.
If the restraint is through-bolted (or welded), data from the Grade 2 Bolt table on the right
can be used. It indicates that with through-bolts, a .5 bolt is adequate, no matter what
the orientation.
Optional
requirement. Using this, we can verify that a either a 5mm or .18 cable with gripple
connectors would be adequate at 60 degrees.
We can also confirm the acceptability of a single .5 anchor with a KSCA clip in any
orientation.

PAGE 8 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.9
MEMBER
If through bolted, we can use a KSCA clip with a .25 bolt in any orientation.
Thus it can be seen that with a little more effort, smaller hardware can often be justified.
This addresses the lateral restraints. The axial restraints can be addressed in the
identical manner with the following result.
Force Determination
Force Class Method.

Design Requirement (80 ft span, 50 lb/ft duct) Force Class = IV
Optional Method
Design Requirement (67 ft span, 29 lb/ft duct) Design Force = 653 lb
Cable / Strut Size Determination
Force Class Method.
Cable size for Force Class IV at 60 degrees = .38
Size for 77 long strut at Force Class IV at 45 degrees = 3 x 3 x .38
Optional Method
Cable size for 653 lb at 60 degrees = .18 (U-clip connection)
Attachment Hardware Determination
Force Class Method.
Concrete Connection for Force Class IV at 60 degrees
CCA clip with (4) .375 anchors at any orientation
CCA clip with .75 bolt works for any orientation
Optional Method
Concrete Connection for 653 lb at 60 degrees
CCA clip with.875 anchor at any orientation
KSCA clip with .38 bolt at any orientation
The supported weight per hanger rod based on 10 ft spacing and 29 lb/ft duct is 145 lb
(Note that there are (2) hanger rods splitting the total 290 lb at each support location).
a Force Class III (Lateral) seismic load, the minimum acceptable hanger rod size is .38.

PAGE 9 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.9
MEMBER
than through-bolted, this table indicates the size requirements for the anchor. In a similar

Using only the lateral restraint example from above and assuming that we are using cable
restraints and the minimum size hanger rods (.50) we can use Table 4b to evaluate the
need for rod stiffeners.
Looking up Force Class III and a cable angle of 60 degrees (worst case) in the upper
increase our length from 6 to 54, thus we need a multiplier of 9 (54/6). If we look at the
line in the table for the .38 hanger rod, we can see that a 1 diameter pipe or a 2 x 2 x .12
angle will both offer multipliers in excess of the 9 that we need and would be acceptable
as rod stiffeners.
Because of the large number of clamps needed, in this case it might be preferable to
increase the size of the hanger rod and decrease the number of clamps and the size of
the required rod stiffener.
SUSPENDED EQUIPMENT EXAMPLE
When the above table is applied to the axial restraint which needs a Force Class IV rating
based on the 67 ft spacing, supporting from concrete becomes impractical. To resolve
this issue, the ductwork must be either hung from steel or the spacing between restraints
decreased to reduce the Force Class Requirement.
For our example, assume we have a piece of suspended equipment as illustrated below.

PAGE 10 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.9
MEMBER

The first thing that we need to know is the design seismic force that must be applied. If
we look near the top right corner of Table 1 or Table 1A (D4.5), there are listed the design
are attaching the equipment in our example to the underside of the roof, the value of
interest to us is the acceleration at the roof, in this case .336 G.
Caution should be used here as the specific data in the Table 1 and 1A that might be
provided for ductwork or piping may not contain factors appropriate for use on equipment.
If there is a question about the applicability of the tablulated values to equipment, contact
Kinetics Noise Control for confirmation.
Use of the Force Class Tables to size restraints for equipment should be limited to smaller
equipment requiring not more than 4 supports and 4 restraints (one in each corner
oriented at 45 degrees to the equipment as shown above).
Determine the weight of the equipment that is being restrained
This should be given data received from the equipment supplier.
operating weight of the equipment as installed.
It should be the
Further, assume that the equipment is supported by hanger rods that are 54 long and
which are anchored at the top into the underside of the roof slab for the structure. In
addition, assume that the equipment weights 900 lb. We can look at both struts and
cables for restraint.

Force Class or a design force requirment to size our restraint components.
Since we are working with something that has a known weight, the tabulated data in the
tables needs to be tailored to offer a direct comparison. Use the table that indicates 10 ft
OC spacing. Multiply all of the weights in the weight per foot column by 10. Compare
these updated weights to the actual equipment weight to then determine the appropriate
Force Class from the 10 ft OC table.

PAGE 11 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.9
MEMBER
Thus, the weight per ft values change from 10 lb/Ft to 100 lb, from 25 lb/ft to 250 lb, etc.
Our equipment at 900 lb would than match the row on the table that originally read 100
lb/ft and now reads 1000 lb.
Optional
exercise to determine the actual force requirement for a 1000 lb piece of equipment to be
336 lb. If desired, the values on Table 1A can be pro-rated based on the actual weight.
In this case we can multiply the 336 lb by the actual lb divided by the tabulated lb
(900/1000). After multiplying the 336 lb figure by this factor, we find that the minimum
component that we can select must withstand a design force of 302 lb.
Cable ratings are listed at the top. Table 5 indicates that a .5mm or a .18 cable with
Gripples is adequate for any Force Class II requirement at 60 degrees.
If we are using a strut, the angle should be limited to 45 degrees. With a 54 long hanger
rod and a 45 degree angle to the strut, the length of the strut would be 1.41 * 54 or 77.
This dimension is not important for cables, but is critcal for struts. Refering to Table 4c
(D4.7), we need a strut that will be installed at 45 degrees, will be 77 long and will resist a
Force Class II load. The minimum angle size that will accommodate this is a 2.5 x 2.5 x
.25.
Reading the output from this table, the required Force Class for a roof level application
would be Force Class II.
are using is attached to concrete, in order to achieve a Force Class II connection, the
1 Bolt anchor table on the left indicates that a CCA clip with a single .75 anchor is needed.
As an option, at the bottom of the page on the 2 Bolt anchor chart, either a KSCA or CCA
clip mounted with (2) .25 anchors could be used as well.

PAGE 12 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.9
MEMBER
Optional
requirement. Usng this, we can verify that a either a 5mm or .18 cable with gripple
connectors would be adequate at 60 degrees, but that there is not enough of a difference
to allow a reduction in cable size from the Force Class evaluation.
We can confirm the acceptability of a single .38 anchor with a KSCA clip in any
orientation.
If through-bolted, we can use a KSCA clip with a .25 bolt in any orientation.
The supported weight at the most highly loaded hanger rod should be assumed to be
approx 35% of the equipment weight unless there is some good reason to assume
otherwise. In our case, 35% of 900 lb is 315 lb.
a Force Class II (Lateral) seismic load, The minimum acceptable hanger rod size is .50.
than through bolted, this table indicates the size requirments for the anchor. In a similar
If the restraint is through-bolted (or welded), data from the Grade 2 Bolt table on the right
can be used. It indicates that with through-bolts, a .38 bolt is adequate, no matter what
the orientation.

Using the minimum size hanger rods (.50) we can use Table 4b to evaluate the need for
rod stiffeners.
Looking up Force Class II and a cable angle of 60 degrees (worst case) in the upper

PAGE 13 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.9
MEMBER
increase our length from 14 to 54, thus we need a multiplier of 3.9 (54/14). If we look at
the line in the table for the .50 hanger rod, we can see that a .75 diameter pipe or a 1.5 x
1.5 x .25 angle will both offer multipliers in excess of the 3.9 that we need and would be
acceptable as rod stiffeners.

PAGE 14 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D4.9
MEMBER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FLOOR & WALL MOUNTED EQUIPMENT
Chapter D5
Floor Mounted Equipment Primer
D5.1.1
Forces Transferred between Equipment and Restraints
D5.1.2
Attachment of Equipment to Restraints
D5.1.3
Attachment of Restraints to the Structure
D5.1.4
OVERSIZED BASEPLATES FOR ISOLATORS & BRACKETS

Oversized Baseplates How They Work & Why Use Them
D5.2.1
Oversized Baseplates Capacities and Selection Guide
D5.2.2
WALL MOUNTED EQUIPMENT

Forces Transferred between Equipment and Restraints
D5.3.1
Attachment of Equipment to Structure
D5.3.2
FLOOR MOUNTED EQUIPMENT

FLOOR & WALL MOUNTED EQUIPMENT

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:

800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
PAGE:
D5.0
MEMBER
Floor Mounted Equipment Primer

Introduction:
We will begin the discussion with seismic isolators and restraints that have three axis
restraint elements. Table D5.1.1-1 is a listing of the common isolator and restraint models
having tri-axial restraints offered by Kinetics Noise Control.
Table D5.1.1-1: Typical Kinetics Tri-axial Seismic
Isolator and Restraint Models.
Isolator Restraint
Models Models
FHS
HS-5
FLS
HS-7
FLSS
KSMS
FMS
FMS
KRMS
------------
Kinetics Seismic Certification Analysis Program:

Figure D5.1.1-1 shows a typical arrangement for these types of devices around a typical
piece of equipment. The piece of equipment in Figure D5.1.1-1 may be a generator on an
inertia base located on a concrete housekeeping pad. The Kinetics Seismic Certification
analysis program calculates the code values for horizontal and vertical seismic forces
acting on the equipment. These seismic forces are applied at the center of gravity (C.G.)
of the equipment. The horizontal seismic force may come from any direction. So, the
program will cycle through a full 360 to determine the worst case loading condition for the
isolators or restraints. Then the program will compute the forces acting at each isolator or
restraint location, and then compare these values to the allowable limits for the selected
isolator or restraint model and size. These allowable limits are based on the strength of
the isolator or restraint components as well as the strength of the attachment of the
isolator to the structural steel framing of the building. One half of the lower of these two
values then defines the allowable limit for the isolator or restraint. If the isolator or restraint
is to be attached to concrete, the concrete anchors are evaluated separately. The Kinetics
Seismic Certification program will print out the safety factor for each isolator or restraint,
This section will deal with the basics of the Kinetics Seismic Certification analysis for floor
mounted equipment and the basic location and placement of the required isolators or
restraints around the perimeter of the equipment. Also, there will be a general discussion
concerning the required number and size of fasteners at each isolator or restraint location.
FLOOR MOUNTED EQUIPMENT PRIMER

PAGE 1 OF 6

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.1.1
MEMBER
the safety factor for the bolts required to attach the isolator to the buildings structural
steel, and the safety factor for the concrete anchors that fit the holes in the isolator or
restraint mounting plate. Also included in the information will be the number of bolts or
anchors required for each isolator or restraint location.
5
2
3
6
4
A
A/2
B/2
Figure D5.1.1-1: Typical Equipment and Isolator or Restraint Layout.

Isolator or Restraint Locations:
The isolator or restraints are located of the geometric center lines of the equipment as
indicated in Figure D5.1.1-1. On the Kinetics Seismic Certification sheet there is a
schematic of the plan view of the equipment showing the general isolator or restraint
locations. An example of this schematic is shown in Figure D5.1.1-2. The ATTACHMENT
POINT numbers in Figure D5.1.1-2 correspond to the isolator or restraint numbers in
Figure D5.1.1-1. Isolators or restraints 5 and 6 in Figure D5.1.1-1 are represented by the
unnumbered ATTACHMENT POINTS in Figure D5.1.1-2. Note that the odd numbered
isolators or restraints are always on one side of the equipment, and the even numbered
Isolators or restraints are on the other. If there are more than three pairs of isolators or
restraints, they should be spaced as evenly as possible along the length of the equipment
between pair 1 & 2, and pair 3 & 4 starting with pair 5 & 6 closest to pair 1 & 2. This is
Occasionally the anchorage to concrete is insufficient when using the anchor size,
number, and spacing provided by the standard base plate on the isolator or restraint. In
these cases the Kinetics Seismic Certification program will recommend a standard
oversized base plate to be used with the isolators/restraints. For a discussion on the
Kinetics Noise Control oversized base plates see Documents D5.2.1 and D5.2.2.

PAGE 2 OF 6

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.1.1
MEMBER
further illustrated in Figures D5.1.1-3 through D5.1.1-5. These figures represent the plan
view of a typical air handling unit that is restrained with Kinetics Noise Control Model
KSMS Seismic Equipment Brackets. In these figures the terms L and W are the overall
length and width of the equipment respectively. Dimensions A and B are the dimensions
that establish the isolator/restraint locations. The variable N represents the number of
isolators/restraints.
ATTACHMENT POINT
1
Ex
Ey
B/2
CG
A/2
A
Figure D5.1.1-2: Seismic Certification Isolator or Restraint Location Schematic.
L
L/2
W/2
B/2
B
W
4
A/2
A
Figure D5.1.1-3: Typical of Four Isolator or Restraint Locations.

PAGE 3 OF 6

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.1.1
MEMBER
L
L/2
W/2
B/2
W
4
A/2
A
Figure D5.1.1-4: Typical of Six Isolator or Restraint Locations.
A
A/2
A/(N-1)
A/3
W/2
5 7
B/2
B
W
2
6 8
L/2
L
Figure D5.1.1-5: Typical of Eight or More Isolator or Restraint Locations.

PAGE 4 OF 6

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.1.1
MEMBER
In general, the number of bolts or anchors used to attach the isolator/restraint to the
building structure and their size are specified on the Kinetics Seismic Certification sheet.
The bolts may be ASTM A-307, SAE Grade 2, or better. In some instances, they may be
ASTM A-325, SAE Grade 5 or better. However care must be taken if ASTM A-490 or
SAE Grade 8 bolts are used. These fasteners are made from highly heat treated steels
and may behave in a brittle manner in service. The concrete anchors certified by Kinetics
Noise Control for use with isolators and restraints sold by Kinetics Noise Control are
Model KCAB Seismically Rated Wedge Type Anchors, Model KUAB Seismically
Rated Undercut Type Anchors and KCCAB Seismically Rated Cracked Concrete
Type Anchors. The use of adhesive type concrete anchors or non-wedge type, or nonundercut type anchors are not currently approved by Kinetics Noise Control.
In lieu of proper documentation, the appropriate bolt or anchor size may be determined by
the size of the holes in the mounting plate or the oversized base plate. Table D5.1.1-2 will
be useful in obtaining the proper bolt or anchor size.
Table D5.1.1-2: Bolt or Anchor Size vs. Hole Size
Hole
Size
(in)
Bolt
or
Anchor
Size
(in)
5/16
1/4
7/16
3/8
9/16
1/2
11/16
5/8
13/16
3/4
15/16
7/8
1-1/16
1-3/16
1-1/8
1-5/16
1-1/4
Bolt/Anchor Number & Size and Weld Size & Length:
Unless otherwise specified by Kinetics Noise Control, all of the mounting holes in the
isolator or restraint mounting plate or the oversized base plate are to be used with the
appropriate sized fastener to attach the isolator or restraint to the building structure.

PAGE 5 OF 6

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.1.1
MEMBER
If the isolator or restraint is to be attached to building structure by welding, the weld size
and the linear length as well approximate locations will be specified on the Kinetics
Seismic Certification sheet. The welds specified will have the same strength as the proper
number and type of bolts for the most highly loaded isolator or restraint.

PAGE 6 OF 6

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.1.1
MEMBER
Forces Transferred Between the Equipment & Restraint
Due to the nature of certain seismically restrained isolators, and certain types of seismic
restraints, the forces that are transferred between the equipment and the restraint, and
the restraint and the ground are not what would be normally expected from the normal
static force analysis. In this document we will discuss the basic types of restraints and
isolators, and point out the effects that each will have on the magnitude of the forces
transferred.
The newer building codes such as the IBC Code family and TI-809-04 have mandated
design seismic forces that are much larger in magnitude than were previously specified in
the older model building codes. This means that the restraints that will be specified,
oversized base plates that will be required, and the building structure required to support
the equipment with its isolators, and/or restraints will all increase in size and capacity.
Basic Restraint Types:
The most basic types of restraints are those with built in clearance, and those without built
in clearance. The following list shows the basic restraint types with the Kinetics Noise
Control Models that apply to each.
1.) Restraints with Built In Clearance: Tri-Axial Restraints HS-5, HS-7,
and FMS; Bi-Axial Restraints HS-2; Single-Axis Restraint HS-1.
2.) Restraints without Built In Clearance: KSMS
The restraints with built in clearance are used primarily for three reasons. First this type of
restraint is used when free standing steel coil springs are specified for isolation of the
equipment. This allows the equipment to move, vibrate, slightly when operating without
contacting the restraints. Second they may be used for equipment that is sitting on the
floor and has no provisions to allow it to be attached solidly to the building structure, such
as mounting feet or a structurally sound base. Third, certain models of this type of
restraint, such as the HS-1, may be added after the equipment has been installed and is
operational, if there is enough space on the floor or housekeeping pad.
Introduction:
When restraints with built in clearance are used, the engineer, contractor, equipment
supplier, and building owner need to be aware that impact forces greatly in excess of the
basic code values for the horizontal and vertical seismic forces may be transferred
between the equipment and the restraint. These built in clearances allow the equipment to
be accelerated relative to the restraint. When the restraint is finally contacted, the
equipment has generated an appreciable amount of kinetic energy that must be
dissipated in the restraint. If the contact forces are stiff, the impact forces will be large. If
FORCES TRANSFERRED BETWEEN THE EQUIPMENT & RESTRAINT

PAGE 1 OF 3

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.1.2
MEMBER
In an effort to address this impact between the equipment and the restraint, the newer
codes require that an Impact Factor of 2:1 be applied to the basic computed seismic
force. Depending on the design of the restraint and the magnitude of a seismic event, this
factor may or may not, be representative of the actual acceleration values encountered in
service, however, it is a good point from which to begin.
The equipment manufacturers must to be cognizant of these impact forces as they will
affect the reliability of their equipment. They must be considered when designing
equipment that will be certified under the provisions of the 2000 IBC for continued
operation after an earthquake for facilities that are categorized as essential or hazardous.
For restraints with built in vertical clearance, the forces that resist the overturning of the
equipment are concentrated at the corner restraints. This sometimes leads to the
necessity to select restraints and/or oversized base plates that seem to be larger than
common practice would normally recommend.
The restraints without built in clearance used to mount rigid equipment will not have the
impact force issues that the restraints with clearance have. Also, the forces that resist
overturning are more-or-less evenly distributed between the restraints. These restraints
are equivalent to solid mounting the equipment using the mounting feet provided by the
equipment manufacturer. These restraints may also be used in conjunction with the preexisting mounting feet on the equipment to provide additional restraint as required by the
code provisions.
the contact surfaces are relatively soft, the impact forces will be smaller in magnitude.
This phenomenon is discussed in Document T3.1.1 of the Kinetics Vibration Isolation
Manual. In this document, a Kinetics Noise Control Model HS 1 2000 was studied.
The Impact Factor, IP, is defined as the ratio of the earthquake acceleration rate divided
by the restraint deceleration rate. For a 500 lb piece of equipment, the Impact Factor
varied from a high value of 4.56:1 with an earthquake input acceleration of 0.25 g to a low
value of 1.62:1 with an earthquake input acceleration of 2.00 g. Please realize that these
values are the product of a simplified analysis. However, the physics is sound, and the
need to address higher impact forces than the basic code values is adequately
demonstrated.
Basic Seismic Isolator Types:

The isolators that utilize steel coil springs fall into two basic types as shown below with
Kinetics Noise Control models that typify each type.
1.) Contained Spring Seismic Isolators: FHS with an Oversized Base
Plate; FLS; FLSS; and FMS. In these isolators, when the equipment
moves upward, and the vertical restraint is contacted, the spring
force is not added to the loads in the bolts, anchors, or welds that

PAGE 2 OF 3

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.1.2
MEMBER
For all of the seismic isolator types listed above, the seismic restraint is a tri-axial type
with built in clearance. As such, the previous discussion concerning restraints with built in
clearance will apply to these products as well. Also, the forces that resist the overturning
of the equipment will tend to be concentrated at the corner isolator locations in a similar
fashion.
The Kinetics Noise Control Model KRMS Seismic Neoprene Isolator falls in to the
category of a restraint/isolator assembly without built in clearance. The vertical restraints
forces are carried entirely though the housing to the bolts, anchors, or welds attaching the
isolator to the building structure. So, it does not fall into either the category of restrained
spring, or unrestrained spring. It exhibits the characteristics of both, and must be treated
accordingly.
attach the isolator to the building structure. The spring forces are,
thus, tied up in the isolator housing.
2.) Uncontained Spring Isolators: FHS without an Oversized Base
Plate, or any tri-axial restraint arrangement where the isolator is a
separate component from the restraint and is supported directly by
the building structure. In this type of isolator, when the equipment
moves upward and contacts the vertical restraint, the spring force
is added to the loads in the bolts, anchors, or welds.

PAGE 3 OF 3

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.1.2
MEMBER
Attachment of Equipment to Restraints
Restraints can be attached to equipment in a number of ways. The most obvious is by

directly bolting the equipment mounting face or stud on the restraint devise to the
equipment via a factory provided hole in the equipment. Unfortunately many pieces of
equipment (particularly those not initially designed for seismic service) do not include
mounting provisions. In some cases, several independent components make up the
piece of equipment and often, if provided, holes are not well located or of appropriate size
for direct connection to the restraint device.
Wherever the restraints are attached to the equipment, the equipment manufacturer must
offer assurances that the application of seismically generated forces at these locations will
not exceed the structural capabilities of the equipment. When reviewing the forces, the
manufacturer must take into account shear, tensile and bending forces at the connection
points.
Equipment Directly Bolted to Restraints:
Where equipment can be directly bolted to the restraints and where the pattern is
reasonably appropriate, this is the most appropriate method to use. The installer should
refer to the certification that was performed on that particular piece of equipment and
ensure that the number of attachment points and geometry used are consistent with the
mounting pattern on the equipment. If the computation addressed several similar pieces
of equipment, the spacing used would have been the smallest of all of those included in
the analysis (as this would be the worst case). As such, if the actual bolt pattern found on
the equipment is larger than that used in the analysis, mounting using the larger pattern is
quite acceptable and would not negate the analysis.
It is further assumed, when performing an analysis or certification, that the hardware used
matches the holes or studs in the restraint device. It is not permitted to downsize this
hardware relative to that originally intended for the restraint. If the hole in the equipment
is larger than the restraint hardware, it must be fitted to the bolt used in the restraint.
This can be done by welding a washer plate to the equipment, adding a sleeve or using a
grommet such as the Kinetics TG grommet. The hole size cannot exceed the nominal
hardware diameter by more than 1/8.
Introduction:
If the hole in the equipment is smaller than the size required by the restraint, it must either
be enlarged (with the equipment manufacturers knowledge and permission) or the
equipment must be fitted with an appropriately sized adapter to allow the use of the larger
hardware.
ATTACHMENT OF EQUIPMENT TO RESTRAINTS

PAGE 1 OF 4

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.1.3
MEMBER
Equipment Welded to Restraints:
Weld Equivalents to A307 Hardware

1/8
3/16
1/4
3/8
1/2
Bolt Dia Weld Weld Weld Weld Weld
0.25
0.375
0.5
0.625
0.75
0.875
1
1.11
2.50
4.44
6.94
10.00
13.61
17.77
0.74
1.67
2.96
4.63
6.67
9.07
11.85
0.56
1.25
2.22
3.47
5.00
6.80
8.89
0.37
0.83
1.48
2.31
3.33
4.54
5.92
0.28
0.62
1.11
1.74
2.50
3.40
4.44
Weld Equivalents to A325 Hardware

1/8
3/16
1/4
3/8
1/2
Weld Weld Weld Weld Weld
2.44
5.50
9.78
15.27
22.00
29.94
39.10
1.63
3.67
6.52
10.18
14.66
19.96
26.07
1.22
2.75
4.89
7.64
11.00
14.97
19.55
0.81
1.83
3.26
5.09
7.33
9.98
13.03
0.61
1.37
2.44
3.82
5.50
7.48
9.78
Weld Length in Inches that are Equivalent to 1 Bolt

When using the above table, each weld used should be approximately centered at the
restraint location indicated in the analysis. In addition the leg size must not be larger in
size than the thickness of either of the materials that are being welded together. Welds
should be made to structural members within the equipment and should not be performed
without the knowledge and approval of the equipment manufacturer.
Intermediate Structure:
Intermediate structures are used for a number of reasons. First, cases where the
equipment is not structurally adequate for the direct attachment of the restraints. Second,
cases where the equipment is floated on springs and there are multiple individual
components that must be held in proper alignment with one another. Occasions when
mass must be added to the system for stability can require an intermediate structure and
lastly, when the type of restraint or isolator desired is not directly compatible with the type
of mounting arrangement available on the equipment.
In many instances, there is no provision for bolt down attachment of the equipment, the
arrangement is not conducive to seismic restraint or the bolt attachment provisions are
simply inadequate. In these cases, welding is the most common method of attachment.
Optional welding information is provided on Kinetics Noise Controls standard Certification
document. Where this information is not provided, but the acceptable bolt size is known
and bending forces are not significant, the following table can be used to size the weld
based on the bolt size.
If an intermediate structure is fitted, this structure must be designed to withstand the full
local restraint loads at their points of attachment and must interface with the equipment in
such a fashion that the forces transmitted to the equipment are within the structural
capabilities of the equipment. One of the biggest benefits of the use of intermediate
frames is to distribute the high point loads (and often bending loads) that can be applied

PAGE 2 OF 4

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.1.3
MEMBER
by the restraint components over several connections to the equipment. In the case of
bending loads, intermediate structures can sometimes prevent them from being
transmitted into the equipment at all.
Cautions and Equipment Durability Design Factors:
Care must be taken to ensure that the equipment has the capability to resist the seismic
loads (particularly bending). Shear and Tensile forces can be obtained directly from
Certification documents. These forces act at the center of the snubbing elements in the
restraint device. Bending can be determined by factoring in the distance in the horizontal
and vertical axis between the center of the snubbing element and the center of the
mounting face or stud at the equipment surface.
The maximum moment that the equipment must be capable of withstanding is the sum of
the horizontal and vertical moments. The Horizontal moment is the peak horizontal force
from the analysis multiplied by the vertical distance from the snubber centerline to the
center of the mounting surface face. This must be added to the peak vertical force
multiplied by the horizontal distance between the snubber centerline and the center of the
mounting surface face.
When connecting restraints to equipment, they must be connected in such a way as to be

permanently connected. They cannot be connected to removable panels, doors or
covers. They also must not be located in such a way that they obstruct removable panels,
doors or covers.
For floor mounted equipment, the peak vertical force is compressive and depending on
the restraint type, may not be the uplift force listed in the standard certification document.
If the restraint is separate from the support system or if the spring force is not trapped
within the isolator housing (For example an FHS without an oversized baseplate), the
uplift force is the appropriate number to use. If the support system does not include a
spring or if a spring is used, but it is trapped within a restraint housing (For example and

PAGE 3 OF 4

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.1.3
MEMBER
FLS), the peak vertical force equals the dead load (expressed as a positive number) plus
the uplift force as listed in the standard certification document.
Below is listed some typical output data in which the worst case location is Loc 4. For it,
the peak horizontal force would be 775 lb. If the restraint device in this instance included
a fully contained spring coil (like an FLS) the peak vertical force would be 976 (The static
load expressed as a positive number), + 728 (the uplift load) according to the procedure
above. In this case, it works out to be 1704 lb.

PAGE 4 OF 4

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.1.3
MEMBER
Attachment of Restraints to Structure

Introduction:
In addition to being critical to the anchorage of the equipment, the structural connection
also has the potential to impact the durability of the structure. Because of this, all
connections to structure should be reviewed with the engineer of record prior to
installation to ensure that the attachment method chosen can not result in a structural
weak spot that can cause an unintended failure in the building or other dangerous
situation.
Of particular concern are the following:
1) Connections to structural steel involving drilling holes or otherwise weakening the
structure.
2) Connections to post-tensioned concrete slabs involving drilling into the slab.
3) Bolt or screwed connections to the narrow edge of wooden beams.
4) Any connections to gage material.
Connections to Concrete
Because of the brittle nature of concrete, it is particularly susceptible to failures that result
from the pounding loads generated by earthquakes. As a result, the anchors selected
must be sized conservatively. While cast in place anchors are preferable from a loading
standpoint, the ability to properly locate them at the time of the pour is very low and they
are rarely used in equipment mounting applications. If this hurdle is overcome, they can
be sized using conventional anchor sizing procedures as identified in the current version
of ACI 318.
Unlike the connection between restraints and equipment (which is almost always a metal
to metal connection), the connection to structure can be made to a wide variety of
materials. The most frequent connection is to concrete, but connections to structural
steel, wood and gage materials are also common. As the structural connection has the
potential to be the weakest link in the anchorage chain, proper treatment is critical.
Most commonly, post-installed anchors are used. While these can be installed at the time
the equipment is placed, they do not have the same positive grip as to the cast in place
anchors. As a result, reduced capacities based on ICBO/ICC tests must be used and
frequently factors are added to increase the design forces used in the analysis to further
ensure that the anchors will remain functional.
For equipment that is mounted on springs, wedge type anchors are preferred. These
anchors are relatively easy to install, continue to expand as they are exposed to tensile
loads and offer added confidence that they will continue to function, even in cracked
concrete.

PAGE 1 OF 4

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.1.4
MEMBER
Also used in floor mounted applications are adhesive anchors. These offer good
performance, but the installation is more critical. They are unacceptable for overhead
applications or in areas where they could be subjected to chemical attack however.
When equipment is not isolated and is under 10 hp, the same wedge anchors used above
can be selected. If the equipment is isolated however, depending on the building code in
effect for the project, undercut anchors may be required. These anchors require that a
hole be drilled and then be modified to include an oversized pocket at their base. These
pockets can be created with a special tool or in some cases, can be cut with the anchor
itself. These pockets offer a more positive lock for the bolt than can be obtained with a
wedge type anchor.
When using post-installed concrete anchors, all anchors are to be embedded 8 bolt
diameters and must retain at least a 1 cover of concrete between the bottom of the hole
and the opposite face of the concrete. For slabs on grade, this value should increase to
at least 1-1/2. Because of this requirement, the size of the thickness of the concrete has
a direct impact on the maximum permitted anchor size. For instance, if the slab to which
the equipment is to be attached is 4 thick, this means that with 1 of cover, the maximum
embedment can be 3 and thus the maximum anchor size can only be 3/8 diameter. If
the required anchor is larger than this, some special treatment of the floor slab is required.
All anchors are rated for installation into a single, uninterrupted layer of concrete.
Because of this, unless poured at the same time and as one piece with the floor slab, the
added thickness of a housekeeping pad cannot be added to the floor slab thickness when
determining the maximum allowed anchor embedment. Instead, the housekeeping pad
by itself, must be adequately thick to accommodate the anchors and must be tied with an
array of smaller anchors to the structural floor. There is more information on designing
housekeeping pads in the appendix of this manual.
Although other anchors types can be used (provided they have an ICBO/ICC rating), their
allowed capacities are such that they are not viable alternates. Kinetics Noise Control
provides seismically rated wedge type anchors for most applications.
Because post-installed anchors are dependent on friction for their capacity, it is critical
that they are torqued to the appropriate level. Also, because anchors of similar sizes as
manufactured by different manufacturers do not possess equal capacities, it is not
permissible to substitute away from those that were assumed in the evaluation and
certification process. All Kinetics Certifications are based n the use of Kinetics Noise
Control provided anchors, torqued in conformance with the anchor torquing data provided
in the submittal information and also available in the product section of this manual.
An optional attachment method is to through drill floor slabs above grade and install the
restraint device using bolts and nuts. If this is done, any factors that may have been used

PAGE 2 OF 4

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.1.4
MEMBER
in the analysis to derate the anchors, can be ignored.

A second option is to cast an oversized embedment plate into the floor in the
approximately location of the required restraint device. This plate can be interfaced with
the steel reinforcement in the slab to ensure that it will not pull out. When the equipment
is installed at some later time, the restraints can be welded to the embed plate and the
entire restraint arrangement can be treated as though it was attached to concrete.
There are two different types of steel structures to which equipment may attach. The first
is a purpose built structure that was designed specifically to support the equipment being
restrained and the second is a structure whose primary design intent is based on the
capacity of the building envelope to withstand building design loads.
In the first case, attachment holes are common and have typically been accounted for in
the design of the structure. The use of bolts to attach the equipment is common practice,
but should be coordinated with the structures designer.
In the second case however, the attachment of equipment is really an afterthought. While
the structure would globally have been designed to have adequate capacity for both its
intended building function and equipment support, the addition of holes or locally applied
stress concentration can weaken it to the point that serious building structural issues can
emerge. Under no circumstances should the structure be modified in such a way that it
would be weakened without prior review of the structural engineer of record.
Connections to the building structure are normally accomplished by welding components
to the structure. These components can include holes or other bolting provisions. If the
attachment process involves the removal of fire proofing material on the steel, it must be
replaced prior to completion.
When fitting bolts, they are not permitted to exceed the nominal hardware size by more
than 1/8. Thus the largest hole permitted for a 5/8 bolt is 3/4. Slotting this hole for
alignment is not permitted and if required, the hole must be repaired to limit the clearance
to 1/8 prior to the installation of hardware. All bolts are to be tightened in conformance
with normal practice.
Connections to Structural Steel
Connections to Wood
There are a wide variety of wood sections to which people attach equipment. These
range from heavy timber members and engineered lumber to roof sheeting. When
seismically restraining equipment, connections should be made to structural grade or
engineered lumber.
Where possible, the preferred connection is to through-bolt the wood member and

PAGE 3 OF 4

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.1.4
MEMBER
incorporate a load spreading washer plate (or fishplate) on the back side of the wood to
prevent crushing.
Of these items, the first 3 are relatively straightforward. The last item is more ambiguous
and needs further explanation. The bolt capacity is a function of many factors and should
be sized specifically for the application under review. The density and type of the wood,
the angle of the screw relative to the grain and the redundancy of the connections all have
significant impact on the rating of the connection. In order to achieve the full rated
capacity of the restraint device (if connected with lag screws), the limiting capacity of the
screw must be a metal failure in the screw itself. In general, this means that for a
reasonably dense grade of structural lumber and a screw mounted at 90 degrees to the
grain axis, an embedment depth of 9 diameters is needed to achieve full capacity.
Further information on the design of lag screw connections is available in the NDS/ASD
National Design Specification for Wood Construction Manual published by American
Forest and Paper Association / American Wood Council or Section A7.3 in the Appendix
portion of this manual.
As with connections to steel, it is mandatory that the structural engineer of record is aware
of and approves connections to wood structures because of the possible adverse affect
that equipment attachment might have on the ability of the structure to carry primary
building loads.
Connections to Gage Materials
The most common applications that involve connections to gage materials involve curbs
and roof mounted equipment. In these cases, if light equipment is involved (like
mushroom fans), connections directly to sheet metal can frequently be adequate. In order
to be successful however, the connections need to be made up of a series of small
fasteners spaced evenly around the component being anchored. In general, applications
involving screws larger than #10 cannot be directly connected to gage materials.
Where it is necessary to screw into the wood, lag screws inserted into properly drilled
holes can be used providing the following rules are followed:
1) The edge distance from the center of the screw hole to the edge of the wooden
member in which it is inserted must be at least 1-1/2 bolt diameters.
2) The end distance (from the bolt to the end of the wooden member in the direction of
the grains axis must be at least 7 bolt diameters.
3) Spacing between bolts must be at least 4 bolt diameters.
4) Embedment is adequate for the design loads expected.
Where these connections can be made, it is also mandatory that the gage materials
themselves are also attached to larger structural elements with a series of smaller
connections. Again these must be designed such that the can transfer any seismic loads
forced into them by the equipment back into the structure without damage.

PAGE 4 OF 4

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.1.4
MEMBER
Oversized Base Plates How They Work & Why Use Them
An isolator or bracket that is designed to optimize the capacity of the concrete anchors
would have a footprint and fastener requirement that would be way too large for efficient
attachment to structural steel. Also, we at Kinetics Noise Control feel that it would be
prohibitively expensive to design one complete line of isolators or brackets for attachment
to steel, and another complete line of isolators or brackets for attachment to concrete.
Therefore, we design to optimize the isolator or bracket for attachment to structural steel,
and employ the appropriate oversized base plate for an application that specifies
attachment to concrete.
The oversized base plate is typically a square piece of steel plate with four anchor holes
in it. The isolator or bracket is welded more-or-less to the center of the plate with the
recommended amount of weld for attaching the isolator or bracket to structural steel. This
oversized base plate allows us to use an anchor size larger than would be allowed by the
mounting holes in the isolator or bracket. Also, the oversized base plate will allow us to
space the anchors far enough apart to take full advantage of the allowable loads
published for the concrete anchors. A typical wedge type concrete anchor, when loaded,
tends to produce a cone shaped stress field where the point of the cone is at the
embedded end of the anchor, and the large end of the cone is at the surface of the
concrete. When the anchors are too close together, these cone shaped stress fields will
interact and reduce the allowable capacities of the anchors.
Basic Analysis for Oversized Base Plates:
The normal design philosophy for Kinetics Noise Control, when designing a new seismic
isolator or restraint, is to size the components to allow the smallest package when the
isolator or bracket is to be attached to the structural steel of the building. This means that
the mounting fasteners and the footprint of the isolator or bracket optimized for the
attachment to steel. As a result, the maximum capacity of the isolator or bracket can not
be utilized when it is to be attached to concrete using either wedge type anchors or even
the undercut type concrete anchors.
Shown in Figure D5.2.1-1 is a typical oversized base plate with an isolator or bracket
attached to it at the center of the plate. In this figure, L is the length and width of the base
plate and t is the thickness of the base plate. The variable d represents the anchor size,
or diameter, to be used with the base plate. The height H is the distance from mounting
surface of the isolator or bracket to the center of the restraint. The seismic force is
represented by Fh for the horizontal component of the seismic force, and Fv for the vertical
component of the seismic force. The force component Fh is assumed to act at the center
of the restraint, and the force component Fv acts act the center of the base plate. There
will be three analyses, one for Fv = 0, one for Fh = 0, and on where Fh = Fv.
OVERSIZED BASE PLATES HOW THEY WORK & WHY USE THEM
PAGE 1 OF 7

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.2.1
MEMBER
Fv
L
L-3d
L-3d
L
#3
#4
4X d
ANCHORS
1.5d
Edge 0-0
Figure D5.2.1-1: Typical Oversized Base Plate.

Case 1: Fv = 0
In this case, the base plate will tend to tip around Edge 0-0. The analysis is based on the
following assumptions.
1.)
2.)
3.)
4.)
5.)
The base plate acts as a rigid member.

The anchors will remain elastic.
The deflections and rotations of the base plate will be small.
The tension in anchors #1 and #3 will be equal, T1 = T3.
The tension in anchors #2 and #4 will be equal, T2 = T4.
Fh
#2
Edge 0-0
#1
ISOLATOR BRACKET
1.5d
Sum moments about Edge 0-0 to determine the tension in the anchors. Counter clockwise
moments will be positive (+).
M0-0 = 0 = 2*T1*[L-(1.5*d)]+2*T2*(1.5*d)-Fh*(H+t)
(Eq. D5.2.1-1)
And;
Fh*(H+t) = 2*T1*[L-(1.5*d)]+2*T2*(1.5*d)
(Eq. D5.2.1-2)
It is clear that anchors #1 and #3 will be more highly loaded than anchors #2 and #4. So,
PAGE SERIES 2 OF 7

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.2.1
MEMBER
we will ultimately need to determine the tension in anchors #1 and #3. Through the
assumptions it is possible to relate the tension in anchors #2 and #4 to the tension in
anchors #1 and #3 in a linear fashion as follows.
T2 = T1*{(1.5*d) / [L-(1.5*d)]}
(Eq. D5.2.1-3)
Fh*(H+t) = 2*T1*[L-(1.5*d)]+2*T1*{(1.5*d)2 / [L-(1.5*d)]}
(Eq. D5.2.1-4)
Fh*(H+t)*[L-(1.5*d)] = 2*T1*[L-(1.5*d)]2+2*T1*(1.5*d)2
(Eq. D5.2.1-5)
T1 = Fh*(H+t)*[L-(1.5*d)] / {2*[(L-(1.5*d))2+(1.5*d)2]}
(Eq. D5.2.1-6)
The anchors will also be loaded in shear. Lets assume that all of the anchors are loaded
equally in shear. The shear load on each anchor, P1, will be as follows.
P1 = Fh / 4
(Eq. D5.2.1-7)
The base plate thicknesses were selected in order to make the anchors the limiting
components for values of H up to and including 20 inches. The stress in the base plate is
estimated by assuming that the base plate is a beam with both ends fixed, and a couple
Mo applied to the center of the beam, as shown in Figure D5.2.1-2.
L
1.5d
L-3d
(L-3d)/2
Mo
Substitute Equation D5.2.1-3 into Equation D5.2.1-2, simplify and solve for T1.
Figure D5.2.1-2: Assumed Base Plate Loading Arrangement for Case 1.
PAGE SERIES 3 OF 7

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.2.1
MEMBER
Because the isolator or bracket will be rather large, the center of the base plate will not be
subjected to a great deal of bending. The maximum bending will occur at the anchor
holes. The maximum applied moment in the at the anchor holes is;
M = Mo / 4
(Eq. D5.2.1-8)
The applied moment may be approximated as;

Mo
Fh*H
(Eq. D5.2.1-9)
M = Fh*H / 4
(Eq. D5.2.1-10)
In general, the bending stress, sb, in the base plate is given by;
sb = M*c / I
(Eq. D5.2.1-11)
In this equation, c is the distance from the neutral axis to the outer fibers of the beam, and
I is the area moment of inertia of the beam cross-section. For all of the cases presented in
this document, I and c have the following values.
I = L*t3 / 12
(Eq. D5.2.1-12)
c=t/2
(Eq. D5.2.1-13)
And;
The final form of the bending stress equation will be as follows.

sb = 3*Fh*H / (2*L*t2)
(Eq. D5.2.1-14)
The allowable bending stress, sA, is;

sA = 0.6*Sy
Then;
(Eq. D5.2.1-15)
Sy is the yield strength of the base plate.

The factors of safety for the anchors and the base plate are now computed. For each
case they must be greater than or equal to 1.00. For the anchors, the factor of safety is;
F.S. = {1 / [(T1 / TA)5/3+(P1 / PA)5/3]}
1.00
(Eq. D5.2.1-16)
PAGE SERIES 4 OF 7

/04
International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.2.1
MEMBER
In the above equation, TA and PA are the allowable tension and shear loads for the
anchors being used. The factor of safety for the base plate is given by;
F.S. = sA / sb
1.00
(Eq. D5.2.1-17)
Since the base plate has been assumed to be rigid and the deflections have been
assumed to be small, there will be little or no prying action on the anchors due to the
vertical component of the seismic force Fv. Also, since Fh = 0, there will be no shear
forces acting on the anchors. The vertical component of the seismic force will be equally
distributed between the four anchors, and;
T1 = Fv / 4 and P1 = 0
(Eq. D5.2.1-18)
The maximum bending will occur at the anchor holes. The base plate loading for Case 2
is shown in Figure D5.2.1-3.
Fv
(L-3d)/2
1.5d
Case 2: Fh = 0
L-3d
L
PAGE SERIES 5 OF 7

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.2.1
MEMBER
The maximum applied moment in the at the anchor holes is;

M = Fv*(L-3*d) / 8
(Eq. D5.2.1-19)
Substitute Equations D5.2.1-12, D5.2.1-13, and D5.2.1-19 into Equation D5.2.1-11 to

obtain the maximum bending stress in the base plate.
sb = 3*Fv*(L-3*d) / (4*L*t2)
Case 3: Fh = Fv = Fc
This is the combined loading case that helps determine the final shape of the capacity
envelope for the base plate. Again, we will sum moments about Edge 0-0 to determine
the maximum tension in the bolts. All of the assumptions that applied to Case 1 will apply
for Case 3.
M0-0 = 0 = 2*T1*[L-(1.5*d)]+2*T2*(1.5*d)-Fc*(H+t)- Fc*L/2
(Eq. D5.2.1-21)
And;
Fc*(2*H+2*t+L)/2 = 2*T1*[L-(1.5*d)]+2*T2*(1.5*d)
(Eq. D5.2.1-22)
Substitute Equation D5.32.1-3 into Equation D5.2.1-22, solve for T1.

Fc*(2*H+2*t+L)/2 = 2*T1*[L-(1.5*d)]+2*T1*{(1.5*d)2 / [L-(1.5*d)]}
(Eq. D5.2.1-23)
Fc*(2*H+2*t+L)*[L-(1.5*d)]/2 = 2*T1*[L-(1.5*d)]2+2*T1*(1.5*d)2
(Eq. D5.2.1-24)
T1 = Fc*(2*H+2*t+L)*[L-(1.5*d)] / {4*[(L-(1.5*d))2+(1.5*d)2]}
(Eq. D5.2.1-25)
The anchors will be also be loaded in shear, and this shear load may be estimated using
Equation D5.2.1-7.
(Eq. D5.2.1-20)
The maximum bending will occur at the anchor holes in this case as well. The base plate
loading for Case 3 is shown in Figure D5.2.1-4. The maximum bending moment at the
bolt holes will be,
M = Mc/4+Fc*(L-3*d)/8
(Eq. D5.2.1-26)
Mc = Fc*H
(Eq. D5.2.1-27)
PAGE SERIES 6 OF 7

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.2.1
MEMBER
Fc
(L-3d)/2
1.5d
L-3d
L

M = Fc*H/4+Fc*(L-3*d)/8
(Eq. D5.2.1-28)
M = (Fc/8)*[2*H+L-3*d]
(Eq. D5.2.1-29)
Substitute Equations D5.2.1-29, D5.2.1-12, and D5.2.1-13 into Equation D5.2.1-11 to

obtain the bending stress in the base plate.
sb = 3*Fc*(2*H+L-3*d) / (4*L*t2)
(Eq. D5.2.1-30)
Mc
The results of this analysis are presented and their applications are discussed in
Document D5.2.2.
PAGE SERIES 7 OF 7

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.2.1
MEMBER
Oversized Base Plates Capacities and Selection Guide
In Document D5.2.1 it was shown why oversized base plates are used with Kinetics Noise
Control designed seismic isolators and brackets when attaching to structural concrete.
This document also showed how the oversized base plates were intended to work, and
gave the mathematical basis for computing the capacities for square base plates with
varying isolator/bracket heights. This document is intended to show the capacities for the
current family of Kinetics Noise Control oversized base plates, and provide some
guidance in selecting the proper one for a given application.
Currently, Kinetics Noise Control has a standard series of square oversized base plates
that follow the form shown in Figure D5.2.2-1. The dimensional data for the series is
provided in Table D5.2.2-1.
L
1.5d
L-3d
L-3d
L
ISOLATOR BRACKET
4X d
ANCHORS
1.5d
Figure D5.2.2-1: Standard Oversized Base Plate Dimensions
OVERSIZED BASE PLATES CAPACITIES AND SELECTION GUIDE

PAGE 1 OF 12

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.2.2
MEMBER
Table D5.2.2-1: Standard Oversized Base Plate Dimensions.
01
8.00
0.38
0.38
3.00
02
10.00
0.50
0.50
4.00
03
12.00
0.50
0.63
5.00
04
14.00
0.63
0.75
6.00
05
16.00
0.63
0.75
6.00
06-A
20.00
0.75
1.00
8.00
06-B
20.00
0.75
1.00
9.00
07-A
22.00
0.75
1.00
8.00
07-B
22.00
0.75
1.00
9.00
08
24.00
1.00
1.25
10.00
Tables and Figures D5.2.5-2 through D5.2.2-11 Define the seismic capacities the of the
oversized base plates described in Table D5.2.2-1. These capacities are based on
Document D5.2.1. The isolator/bracket must be located more-or-less in the center of the
oversized base plate and Kinetics Noise Control supplied wedge type concrete anchors
must be used.
Selection of Oversized Base Plates:
1.) Choose an oversized base plate that fits the base plate of the isolator/bracket and
allows room enough for welding without interfering with the concrete anchor
installation.
2.) Determine the distance from the base of the isolator/bracket to the center of the
restraint, H.
3.) Determine the horizontal and vertical seismic loads from the Kinetics Noise Control
Seismic Certification sheet for the most highly loaded isolator/bracket, and plot this
point on the Seismic Capacity Envelope for the selected oversized base plate.
4.) The point from Step 3 should fall under the capacity envelope for the next larger
value of H than that determined in Step 2.
5.) For special cases, linear interpolation may be used to determine the capacity
envelope for the actual value of H determined in Step 2.
Plate
Anchor
Side
Anchor
Oversized
Length Thickness
Size
Embedment
Base Plate
d
L
t
Number
(in)
(in)
(in)
(in)

PAGE 2 OF 12

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.2.2
MEMBER
Oversized Base Plate No. 01: L = 8.00 inches; t = 0.38 inches; d = 0.38 inches
Restraint
Height
H
(in)
Horizontal
Load
Fh; Fv=0
(lbs)
Vertical
Load
Fv; Fh=0
(lbs)
Combined
Load
Fc; Fh=Fv
(lbs)
1.00
4,310
3,140
1,930
4.00
2,280
3,140
1,315
8.00
1,315
3,140
915
12.00
915
3,140
700
16.00
700
3,140
565
20.00
565
3,140
470
VERT. LOAD X 1000 (lbs)
Table D5.2.2-2: Seismic Capacities for Oversized Base Plate No. 01
H=1"
H=4"
H=8"
H=12"
H=16"
H=20"
1
0
0
HORIZ. LOAD X 1000 (lbs)

Figure D5.2.2-2: Seismic Capacity Envelopes for Oversized Base Plate No. 01

PAGE 3 OF 12

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.2.2
MEMBER
Restraint
Height
H
(in)
Horizontal
Load
Fh; Fv=0
(lbs)
Vertical
Load
Fv; Fh=0
(lbs)
Combined
Load
Fc; Fh=Fv
(lbs)
1.00
7,500
4,675
3,030
4.00
4,085
4,675
2,160
8.00
2,395
4,675
1,555
12.00
1,675
4,675
1,210
16.00
1,285
4,675
990
20.00
1,040
4,675
840
VERTICAL LOAD X 1000 (lbs)
5
H=1"
H=4"
H=8"
H=12"
H=16"
H=20"
2
1
0
0
HORIZONTAL LOAD X 1000 (lbs)


PAGE 4 OF 12

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.2.2
MEMBER
Restraint
Height
H
(in)
Horizontal
Load
Fh; Fv=0
(lbs)
Vertical
Load
Fv; Fh=0
(lbs)
Combined
Load
Fc; Fh=Fv
(lbs)
1.00
11,845
7,045
4,700
4.00
6,995
7,045
3,500
8.00
4,230
7,045
2,595
12.00
2,985
7,045
2,060
16.00
2,300
7,045
1,705
20.00
1,865
7,045
1,450
8
H=1"
H=8"
H=4"
H=12"
H=16"
H=20"
2
0
0
10
12


PAGE 5 OF 12

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.2.2
MEMBER
Restraint
Height
H
(in)
Horizontal
Load
Fh; Fv=0
(lbs)
Vertical
Load
Fv; Fh=0
(lbs)
Combined
Load
Fc; Fh=Fv
(lbs)
1.00
17,925
8,930
6,200
4.00
10,320
8,930
4,730
8.00
6,210
8,930
3,580
12.00
4,390
8,930
2,875
16.00
3,375
8,930
2,400
20.00
2,745
8,930
2,060
10
H=1"
H=4"
H=8"
H=12"
H=16"
H=20"
4
2
0
10 12 14 16 18


PAGE 6 OF 12

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.2.2
MEMBER
Restraint
Height
H
(in)
Horizontal
Load
Fh; Fv=0
(lbs)
Vertical
Load
Fv; Fh=0
(lbs)
Combined
Load
Fc; Fh=Fv
(lbs)
1.00
18,700
8,930
6,390
4.00
11,420
8,930
5,005
8.00
7,035
8,930
3,870
12.00
5,010
8,930
3,150
16.00
3,875
8,930
2,655
20.00
3,155
8,930
2,290
10
H=1"
H=4"
H=8"
H=12"
H=16"
H=20"
4
2
0
10 12 14 16 18 20


PAGE 7 OF 12

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.2.2
MEMBER
Oversized Base Plate No. 06-A: L = 20.00 inches; t = 0.75 inches; d = 1.00 inches
Restraint
Height
H
(in)
Horizontal
Load
Fh; Fv=0
(lbs)
Vertical
Load
Fv; Fh=0
(lbs)
Combined
Load
Fc; Fh=Fv
(lbs)
1.00
35,625
13,550
10,125
4.00
21,440
13,550
8,200
8.00
13,195
13,550
6,525
12.00
9,405
13,550
5,415
16.00
7,280
13,550
4,625
20.00
5,930
13,550
4,035
Table D5.2.2-7: Seismic Capacities for Oversized Base Plate No. 06-A
20
H=1"
16
H=4"
H=8"
12
H=12"
H=16"
H=20"
4
0
0
12
16
20
24
28
32
36
40

Figure D5.2.2-7: Seismic Capacity Envelopes for Oversized Base Plate No. 6A

PAGE 8 OF 12

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.2.2
MEMBER
Oversized Base Plate No. 06-B: L = 20.00 inches; t = 0.75 inches; d = 1.00 inches
Restraint
Height
H
(in)
Horizontal
Load
Fh; Fv=0
(lbs)
Vertical
Load
Fv; Fh=0
(lbs)
Combined
Load
Fc; Fh=Fv
(lbs)
1.00
39,865
18,855
13,650
4.00
26,905
18,855
11,155
8.00
17,495
18,855
8,940
12.00
12,725
18,855
7,450
16.00
9,945
18,855
6,380
20.00
8,140
18,855
5,575
20
Table D5.2.2-8: Seismic Capacities for Oversized Base Plate No. 06-B
H=1"
H=4"
16
H=8"
H=12"
12
H=16"
H=20"
8
4
0
0
12
16
20
24
28
32
36
40

Figure D5.2.2-8: Seismic Capacity Envelopes for Oversized Base Plate No. 06-B

PAGE 9 OF 12

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.2.2
MEMBER
Oversized Base Plate No. 07-A: L = 22.00 inches; t = 1.00 inches; d = 1.00 inches
Restraint
Height
H
(in)
Horizontal
Load
Fh; Fv=0
(lbs)
Vertical
Load
Fv; Fh=0
(lbs)
Combined
Load
Fc; Fh=Fv
(lbs)
1.00
35,275
13,500
10,135
4.00
22,210
13,500
8,360
8.00
14,065
13,500
6,765
12.00
10,150
13,500
5,675
16.00
7,910
13,500
4,885
20.00
6,465
13,500
4,290
Table D5.2.2-9: Seismic Capacities for Oversized Base Plate No. 07-A
20
H=1"
16
H=4"
H=8"
12
H=12"
H=16"
H=20"
4
0
0
12
16
20
24
28
32
36
40

Figure D5.2.2-10: Seismic Capacity Envelopes for Oversized Base Plate No. 07-A

PAGE 10 OF 12

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.2.2
MEMBER
Oversized Base Plate No. 07-B: L = 22.00 inches; t = 1.00 inches; d = 1.00 inches
Restraint
Height
H
(in)
Horizontal
Load
Fh; Fv=0
(lbs)
Vertical
Load
Fv; Fh=0
(lbs)
Combined
Load
Fc; Fh=Fv
(lbs)
1.00
39,585
18,855
13,665
4.00
27,710
18,855
11,370
8.00
18,550
18,855
9,265
12.00
13,685
18,855
7,805
16.00
10,775
18,855
6,735
20.00
8,860
18,855
5,920
Table D5.2.2-10: Seismic Capacities for Oversized Base Plate No. 07-B
20
H=1"
H=4"
16
H=8"
H=12"
12
H=16"
H=20"
8
4
0
0
12
16
20
24
28
32
36
40

Figure D5.2.2-10: Seismic Capacity Envelopes for Oversized Base Plate No. 07-B

PAGE 11 OF 12

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.2.2
MEMBER
Restraint
Height
H
(in)
Horizontal
Load
Fh; Fv=0
(lbs)
Vertical
Load
Fv; Fh=0
(lbs)
Combined
Load
Fc; Fh=Fv
(lbs)
1.00
48,185
27,310
19,145
4.00
37,280
27,310
16,265
8.00
26,745
27,310
13,505
12.00
20,355
27,310
11,525
16.00
16,290
27,310
10,040
20.00
13,530
27,310
8,885
32
H=1"
H=4"
24
H=8"
H=16"
H=12"
H=20"
16
8
0
0
16
24
32
40
48
56


PAGE 12 OF 12

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D5.2.2
MEMBER
CHAPTER D6
CURB MOUNTED EQUIPMENT
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Seismic Forces & Curb Mounted Equipment
D6.1
Sheet Metal Curbs

Basic Primer for Sheet Metal Curbs
D6.2.1
Attachment of Equipment to Sheet Metal Curbs
D6.2.2
Transferring Seismic Forces Through Sheet Metal Curbs
D6.2.3
Attachment of the Sheet Metal Curb to the Building Structure
D6.2.4
Limits of Sheet Metal Curbs in Seismic Applications
D6.2.5
Rules for Using Sheet Metal in Seismic Applications
D6.2.6
Structural Curbs
Basic Primer for Structural Curbs
D6.3.1
Attachment of Equipment to Structural Curbs
D6.3.2
Transferring Seismic Forces Through the Structural Curb
D6.3.3
Attachment of the Structural Curb to the Building Structure
D6.3.4
Limitations of Structural Curbs in Seismic Applications
D6.3.5
Rules for Using Structural Curbs in Seismic Applications
D6.3.6
Basic Curb Information

CURB MOUNTED EQUIPMENT

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
PAGE:
D6.0
MEMBER
Seismic Forces & Curb Mounted Equipment
The newer building codes such as 2000 IBC, TI-809-04, 2003 IBC, and NFPA 5000 have
mandated design seismic forces that are much larger in magnitude than were previously
specified in the older model building codes. These new codes have written the design
horizontal seismic force equation to account for the amplification of the accelerations due
to increasing flexibility as you go up in a building. Therefore, equipment that is mounted
on the roof of a building will have design seismic forces that are three times larger than a
similar piece of equipment that is mounted on grade. Great care must be taken in the
design, selection, and installation of supports and restraints for roof top curb mounted
equipment.
Basic Curb Types:
The roof curbs may be broken down into isolated and non-isolated types. The isolated
roof curbs may be further broken down into sheet metal and structural types. The
discussion will start with the isolated curb types.
Sheet Metal Seismic Isolation Curbs:
Kinetics Noise Control provides two products for isolation with sheet metal roof curbs.
First is the Kinetics Noise Control model KSR Isolation Rail. The KSR-1 and KSR-2 are
seismically restrained steel coil spring isolation systems that are built to be installed on
third party sheet metal roof curbs. Figure D6.1-1 shows a typical cross-section through the
springs of a KSR installation. Figure D6.1-2 is a typical cross-section through the
seismic/wind restraints of the KSR. KSR-1 systems are designed to operate with a
system Static Deflection of
when loaded, which gives a system Natural Frequency of
3.13 Hz. The KSR-2 systems are intended to operate with a loaded system Static
Deflection of , which produces a system Natural Frequency of 2.21 Hz. The Static
Deflection of the KSR systems is adjustable by adding or removing the spring coils,
which are easily accessible and compressed for insertion or withdrawal.
Introduction:
The seismic/wind restraints consist of stainless steel leaf horizontal restraints, and
reinforced neoprene strap vertical restraints. Each KSR installation requires a minimum of
one horizontal restraint per curb side. The vertical restraints are required only if uplift will
occur at any of the equipment corners. The leaves and straps, when required are
attached to the extruded aluminum top rail and the curb side wall through the nailer as
shown in Figure D6.1-2. The locations for the restraints are specified by the by Kinetics
Noise Control. The required number of restraints, horizontal and vertical, is determined by
analysis using the Kinetics Noise Control Seismic/Wind Certification Program.
SEISMIC FORCES & CURB MOUNTED EQUIPMENT

PAGE 1 OF 9

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.1
MEMBER
Supported
Roof Top
Equipment
2.05
1.52
Extruded Aluminum
Top Rail By Kinetics
KSR-1
7.42 Free Ht.
6.42 Oper. Ht.
Closed-Cell Foam Tape

Weather Seal by Kinetics
7.40
KSR-2
8.67 Free Ht.
6.72 Oper. Ht.
Neoprene Weather Seal

by Kinetics.
Pre-Punched Aluminum
Cover Strip by Kinetics.
Steel Coil Spring

Isolation by Kinetics
Extruded Aluminum
Bottom Rail by Kinetics.
1.83 Bottom Rail
Caulking by Kinetics.
Sheet Metal Roof Curb by Others.
Figure D6.1-1; Typical Cross-Section Through KSR Showing Isolation Springs.
Pre-Punched Holes in Extruded Aluminum

Top Rail for Mounting Hardware by Kinetics.
Seismic/Wind Restraints Quantity and
Location Pre-Determined by KInetics
Curb Attachment Hardware for

Seismic/Wind Restraints by Kinetics.
Figure D6.1-2; Typical Cross-Section Through KSR Showing Restraints.

PAGE 2 OF 9

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.1
MEMBER
Kinetics Noise Control also provides two complete seismically rated sheet metal curb and
isolation rail systems, the model KSCR-1 and KSCR-2. A typical cross-section through
the KSCR is shown in Figure D6.1-3.
Supported Roof Top
Equipment.
Steel Coil Spring

Isolation.
KSCR-1
21.42 Free Ht.
20.42 Oper. Ht.
Seismic/Wind Restraint.
Neoprene Weather Seal.
Poly Spring Cup &
Neoprene Washer.
Pre-Punched Aluminum
Cover Strip.
KSCR-2
22.67 Free Ht.
20.72 Oper. Ht.
Flashing by Others.
14.00
Standard
Curb
Ht.
Insulation
(Optional).
Cant Strip
by Others.
16 Gage Galvanized Steel Reinforced

with Treated 2x4's ~30" O.C.
Figure D6.1-3; Typical Cross-Section Through a KSCR.

As with the KSR-1 & -2, The KSCR-1 is a
Static Deflection isolation system, and the
KSCR-2 is a
Static Deflection isolation system. The horizontal and vertical restraints
used for the KSCR are the same ones used on the KSR. At least one horizontal restraint
per curb side wall is required, and more are added as indicated by analysis through the
Kinetics Noise Control Seismic/Wind Certification Program. The vertical restraints are
added where indicated by the analysis. Typically the curb itself is 16 Gage Galvanized
steel reinforced with treated wood 2x4s at 30 On Center. Curb heights greater may
require the use of heavier gage sheet steel in order to carry the seismic and wind loads
without danger of buckling failure.
Extruded Aluminum Top Rail.
Structural Seismic Isolation Curb:

Kinetics Noise Control provides the model ESR-1, ESR-2, and ESR-4 structural seismic
isolation curb systems. They are, respectively, , 2 , and
Static Deflection isolation
systems. The intended system Natural Frequencies are 3.13 Hz, 2.12 Hz, and 1.56 Hz
respectively.

PAGE 3 OF 9

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.1
MEMBER
3-Axis Neoprene
Seismic Snubber.
C4x5.4 Standard Top Rail.

C6x8.2 Top Rail for Drain Pans.
Welded Steel
Spring/Restraint Pedestal.
Steel Coil Spring

& Neoprene Isolation.
Wood
Nailers.
Continuous Galvanized
Steel Curb Perimeter. ESR-1 / -2
20.25
Leveling Bolt.
ESR-4
21.25
Removable
Access Panel.
Building Structural Steel
(ESR-1 / -2) - 12.50

(ESR-4) - 14.50
Figure D6.1-4; Typical ESR Pedestal Installation.
Equipment Outline.
Galvanized Flashing.
EPDM Weather Seal.
Wood Nailer.
C4x5.4 Top Rail.
Optional External Insulation.
3-axis Neoprene
Snubber.
Cover Strip.
Screws.
Welded Steel
Spring/Restraint
Pedestal.
Built-up Roof, Membrane

& Insulation by Others.
Building Structural
Steel.
(ESR-1 / -2) - 4.00 Min.

(ESR-4) - 6.00 Min.
Figure D6.1-5; Typical Cross-Section Through an ESR Pedestal Installation.

PAGE 4 OF 9

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.1
MEMBER
Application of Isolated Roof Curbs:

The KSR & KSCR are generally used for small to medium sized pieces of equipment, and
in low to medium seismic areas. For instance, they may work well for equipment weights
up to 8,000 lbs 10,000 lbs in areas like Central Ohio, Western Pennsylvania,
Northwestern New York, Chicago, etc. However, they may not be at all suitable for
equipment weights of 2,000 lbs 5,000 lbs in high seismic areas like Memphis,
Tennessee; Los Angeles, California; Salt Lake City, Utah; or Charleston, South Carolina.
Also, the building type may determine the usefulness of the KSR & KSCR. For instance,
they may not work well for the smaller units on the roof of a hospital in New York City.
The ESR is used for the larger pieces of equipment 10,000 lbs and up. Also, it will be
used for small to medium pieces of equipment in the high seismic areas. The ESR is used
when a structural curb is specified, when adjustment of the springs is an issue, and when
a low system Natural Frequency,
Static Deflection, is required for sensitive
applications.
Non-Isolated Sheet Metal Seismic Roof Curbs:
Kinetics Noise Control does not produce a non-isolated roof curb. However, Kinetics
Noise Control does make a set of kits to attach the supported piece of equipment to a roof
curb that is built by others, or the building structure. The attachment of equipment to third
party curbs is an issue that has not been well addressed by either the equipment
manufacturers or the curb manufacturers. The kits produced by Kinetics Noise Control
provide enough parts and hardware to connect a wide range of equipment types and
makes to sheet metal curbs.
The seismic forces are transferred from the equipment to the top rail through fasteners or
welds at each pedestal location. The size and number of the fasteners, and the size and
length of weld required at each pedestal is specified by the Kinetics Noise Control
Seismic/Wind Certification Program. The loads are transferred to the welded steel spring
restraint pedestal through the 3-axis neoprene snubber assembly. The loads then are
transferred from the pedestal to the building structure. The ESR is normally to be intended
to be attached directly to the building structural steel either by bolting or welding.
Mounting holes are provided for three (3) 5/8 Bolts/Anchors in the base plate of each
pedestal. An equivalent amount of weld is specified by Kinetics Noise Control for each
pedestal. Attachment of the ESR to the building structural steel will maximize the seismic
capacity of the system. If the ESR is to be attached to concrete or some type of wooden
structure, special analysis and additional components will be required to make an
adequate attachment, and the full capacity of the ESR may not be realized.
The horizontal seismic /wind restraint kits provided by Kinetics Noise Control are the
models KSMF, Figure D6.1-6; KSCM-1, Figure D6.1-7; and KSCM-2, Figure D6.1-8. A
minimum of four (4) kits are required for each curb. One (1) kit for each curb side wall.

PAGE 5 OF 9

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.1
MEMBER
Additional kits may be required based on an analysis by Kinetics Noise Control. The
required number and location of each kit are specified by Kinetics Noise Control.
Equipment
Wooden
Nailer
KSMF
Curb by
Others
KSMF Kinetics Seismic

Bracket Kit for Curb
Mounted Equipment
Preferred
Installation
Figure D6.1-6: Typical KSMF Seismic Attachment Kit Installation.
Weather Seal
by Others
1/8
3 Plc.s per
Brkt
Equipment
Optional Equipment
Connection Three (3)
Self-Drilling TEK
Screws by Kinetics
Roof Curb
by Others
KSCM-1 Kinetics Seismic

Restraint Bracket Kit for
Curb Mounted Equipment
Figure D6.1-7; Typical KSCM-1 Horizontal Seismic Attachment Kit Installation.

PAGE 6 OF 9

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.1
MEMBER
Weather Seal
by Others
Equipment
6 Plc.s per
Brkt
Optional Connection
Bracket-to-Bracket
& Bracket-to-Equipment
Using Threee (3) Self-Drilling
TEK Screws by Kinetics
Roof Curb
by Others
KSCM-2 Seismic Restraint

Brackets #1 & #2 by Kinetics
Attach to Curb Prior
to Setting Equipment
Figure D6.1-8; Typical KSCM-2 Horizontal Seismic Attachment Kit Installation.

The analysis performed by Kinetics Noise Control will indicate if uplift occurs at any of the
corners of the equipment. If uplift is present, Kinetics Noise Control will recommend the
use of model KSCV, Figure D6.1-9, vertical equipment restraint kits that restrain the
equipment directly to the building. A minimum of one (1) KSCV kit will be required at each
corner of the equipment. The analysis performed by Kinetics Noise Control will show
exactly how many kits are required for an application. The reason Kinetics Noise Control
recommends the use of the KSCV kits rather than taking the vertical loads through the
curb, is that we do not control the construction of the curb, and can not guarantee that the
curb side walls will be able to carry both horizontal and vertical loads generated by a
seismic or wind event.
The analysis performed by Kinetics Noise Control also looks at the curb side walls if
enough information is provided in the submittal sent to Kinetics. If the curb side walls do
not appear to be able to carry the design seismic or wind loads, Kinetics Noise Control will
make recommendations that reinforcements are to be used for the curb side walls and/or
that heavier gage steel is to be used in the curb side walls in order to meet the design
load requirements. If reinforcements are indicated by the analysis, Kinetics Noise Control
can provide the model KSVR, Figure D6.1-10, curb side wall reinforcement kit. The KSVR
kit is intended to carry the vertical loads generated by the equipment and leave the curb
side walls to carry the horizontal seismic loads. The analysis performed by Kinetics Noise
Control will recommend the number and spacing for the reinforcements.
1/8

PAGE 7 OF 9

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.1
MEMBER
Threaded Rod
& Hardware
by Kinetics
Equip.
PVC Pipe
Assem. by
Kinetics
Attaching
The KSCV
Bracket to
The Equipment
Cabinet by
Welding is not
Recommended
DO NOT
Block
Access &
Maintenance
Doors with
KSCV
Equipment
Bracket!
When Attaching KSCV Bracket

to Equipment Cabinet, Use
Only the Sheet Metal Screws
Provided by Kinetics
Threaded Rod by Kinetics
Figure D6.1-9; Typical KSCV Vertical Seismic Restraint Kit Installation.
Roof Curb by Others
H
Curb
Height
Hr
Measure
&
Cut to Fit
S = Max. Spacing
KSVR Reinforcement Kit by Kinetics
Figure D6.1-10; Typical KSVR Reinforcement Kit Installation.

PAGE 8 OF 9

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.1
MEMBER
Summary:
For roof top curb mounted equipment on a job requiring seismic restraint it is important to
perform a seismic analysis. If isolated, the analysis will indicate whether a KSR & KSCR
would be suitable for the application with the proper number of restraints, or whether an
ESR with the proper number of pedestals would be required. If non-isolated, the analysis
will show the correct number of horizontal and/or vertical restraint kits needed for the
application. It wall also show if the curb side walls require reinforcement, or if they need to
be made of a heavier gage steel.

PAGE 9 OF 9

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.1
MEMBER
Basic Primer for Sheet Metal Curbs
One of the most popular constructions for curbs is the sheet metal curb. Sheet metal
curbs are light, economical, and easily installed. They may be field fabricated or
purchased in pre-fabricated sections from a curb manufacturer. The plan view of the curb
may be rectangular, square, or L shaped. In this document, and the ones to follow, we
will be concerned with curbs that have a rectangular plan view. Shown in Figure 6.2.1-1 is
a plan view of a rectangular sheet metal curb.
SIDE D
La
Lb
SIDE B
SIDE A
SIDE C
Figure 6.2.1-1. Plan View of Rectangular Sheet Metal Curb.
Rooftop HVAC units normally require some type of penetration through the roof to allow
air to be transferred to and from the unit. These pieces of equipment are supported on a
curb that is built around the penetration in the roof. This allows the roof to be attached to
the curb and permanently sealed from the elements.
The two long sides will be identified as SIDE A and SIDE C as shown in Figure 6.2.1-1.
The short sides will be labeled as SIDE B and SIDE D, as in figure 6.2.1-1. The term La
will be the inside length of the long sides of the curb. The term Lb will represent the inside
length of the curb s short sides. Another term we will need to define now for later use is
the inside perimeter of the curb, Lp. The value of the inside perimeter will be as follows:
Lp = 2(La + Lb )
(Eq. 6.2.1-1)
Figure 6.2.1-2 shows two section views through a typical sheet metal curb. Each of the
views represents a slightly different construction. Some manufacturers use a 2 X 2 nailer,
BASIC PRIMER FOR SHEET METAL CURBS

PAGE 1 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.1
MEMBER
2X2
NAILER
H
2X4
NAILER
t
Figure 6.2.1-2. Typical Sheet Metal Curb Sections.

In Figure 6.2.1-2, H is the height of the curb. Normally, the standard height of the curb is
14 inches. This provides enough standoff to accommodate most roofing systems and still
allow for the flashing. The height of the curb can vary depending on the requirements of
the equipment, the sound attenuation equipment, and the slope of the roof, if any. The
term t is the thickness of the sheet metal used to construct the curb. There are three basic
material thickness values commonly used for the construction of curbs: 18 gage
(0.0478 inches), 16 gage (0.0598 inches), and 14 gage (0.0747 inches).
The curb height, H, and the sheet metal thickness, t, will determine the loads that can be
carried by the curb, as we shall see in Documents 6.2.3 and 6.2.4. It should be mentioned
here, as well as Document 6.2.3, that all of the loads must be carried in the plane side
walls of the curb. The sides of the curb do not behave as a beam. The curb walls are
really very thin plates that are loaded in compression on their long edges due to the
equipment weight, and in uniform shear along each edge. The principal failure mode of
the curb wall will be buckling. Documents 6.2.3, 6.2.4, 6.2.5, and 6.2.6 go into greater
detail concerning the applications and limitations of sheet metal curbs in areas prone to
earthquakes.
and others use a 2 X 4 nailer. The purpose of the wooden nailer is to permit the
equipment and the roof flashing to be easily attached to the curb. The wooden nailer also
adds some strength to the curb. However, the wood used is often sub-standard and
cannot be counted on to carry more than the roof flashing. Purpose-built seismic roof
curbs should have a good grade of treated lumber specified for the nailer.
BASIC PRIMER FOR SHEET METAL CURBS

PAGE 2 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.1
MEMBER
Attachment of Equipment to Sheet Metal Curbs
Curb side walls can carry loads only in the plane of the side wall. They cannot carry
significant loads that act perpendicular to the side wall. The weight load of the equipment
is carried as a distributed compressive load in the side wall. The horizontal wind and/or
seismic loads are carried as distributed shearing loads in the plane of the curb side wall.
Uplift forces should not be applied to a sheet metal curb that carries a significant weight
load and horizontal wind and/or seismic load. The uplift force would put the curb side wall
in bending which would reduce its horizontal load carrying capability to zero. For a
complete discussion of the transfer of forces through a sheet metal curb refer to document
D6.2.3.
Horizontal Restraints
There are many different types of equipment that are mounted on sheet metal roof curbs.
We will start with the smaller types. Typical of these are the powered ventilator
mushroom fans, louvers, and un-powered ventilators. A typical mushroom fan attached
to a curb is shown in Figure 6.2.2-1. The ventilators and louvers usually have weights that
are low enough and perimeters small enough that they are sufficiently rigid to carry the
required uplift forces without damage. Therefore, they are an exception to the rules in the
previous paragraph. Also, the curbs for ventilators and louvers often have the wooden
nailer attached directly to the top of the sheet metal. Thus, the attachment of the
equipment to the curbs has usually involved fastening directly to the wood of the nailer.
Figure 6.2.2-2 shows a typical installation of a seismic equipment bracket kit provided by
Kinetics Noise Control. For curb-mounted ventilators and louvers the model name for the
kit is the KSMF-1 (Kinetics Seismic Mushroom Fan), see Chapter P1 for product details
and ratings. This bracket design allows the attachments to be made to the sheet metal
part of the curb. The threads on the sheet metal screws must completely engage the
sheet metal of the curb in order to develop full strength. Sheet metal screws of the
appropriate diameter and length to accommodate most curb designs are provided in the
kit by Kinetics Noise Control.
The various equipment configurations do not always lend themselves to being attached to
a sheet metal roof curb. In the past, many pieces of equipment were not physically
fastened to the curb and relied on gravity and friction to keep them in place. In
geographical areas that can experience high, or even moderate, wind and/or seismic
loads, gravity and friction will be inadequate for restraint of the equipment. This document
will present several different styles of attachment brackets and attachment configurations.
Shown also in Figure 6.2.2-1 is the locating scheme for this type of seismic bracket kit.
The dimensions A and B are the locations of the restraints as specified on the Kinetics
Seismic and/or Wind Certification sheet.
A minimum of four kits are required for each piece of equipment. The restraints are placed
ATTACHMENT OF EQUIPMENT TO SHEET METAL CURBS

PAGE 1 OF 21

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.2
MEMBER
to keep the horizontal wind, and/or seismic force loads in the plane of the curb walls. More
may be required per the certification sheet. They should be evenly spaced along the
sides.
1
B/2
0.75 TYP
~2.25
TYP
A/2
A
Figure 6.2.2-1. Typical Mushroom Fan on Curb.

PAGE 2 OF 21

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.2
MEMBER
KSMF-1 KINETICS SEISMIC

BRACKET KIT FOR CURBMOUNTED EQUIPMENT.
EQUIPMENT
KSMF-1
CURB
PREFERRED
INSTALLATION
WOODEN
NAILER
CURB
OPTIONAL
INSTALLATION
WOODEN
NAILER
KSMF-1
Figure 6.2.2-2. Typical Restraint Installation for Mushroom Fans.

PAGE 3 OF 21

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.2
MEMBER
Next we will address larger pieces of rooftop equipment such as air handling units,
makeup air units, etc. These types of units are heavy enough, and have a large enough
perimeter, that the curb side walls will not be rigid enough to carry uplift forces as well as
horizontal forces. Therefore, the horizontal and uplift forces must be dealt with separately.
Figure 6.2.2-3 shows one possible option for attaching the equipment to the curb. The
KSCM-1 bracket is attached to the curb as shown using the three longer sheet metal
screws provided in the kit. These screws must pass through the nailer and the sheet
metal side wall. They must fully engage the sheet metal side wall to generate full strength.
The equipment may be attached to the bracket using the three short sheet metal screws
provided in the kit, or by welds (by others) as shown on the product submittals found in
chapter P1.
WEATHER SEAL
BY OTHERS.
1/8
3 PLC.S PER
BRKT
EQUIPMENT
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
CONNECTION THREE (3)
SELF-DRILLING TEK
SCREWS BY KINETICS.
ROOF CURB
BY OTHERS.
We will begin with the horizontal restraints for rooftop units with fairly uniform bottoms and
side rails. Kinetics Noise Control offers the KSCM-1 Seismic Bracket Kit for attaching this
type of rooftop unit to a sheet metal curb. Each kit consists of a heavy gage sheet metal
angle and enough sheet metal screws to attach it to the curb and the equipment.
KSCM-1 KINETICS SEISMIC

RESTRAINT BRACKET KIT FOR
CURB-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT.
Figure 6.2.2-3. Installation Option No. 1 Using KSCM-1 Kits.

Another installation option is shown in Figure 6.2.2-4. The attachments to the curb and the
equipment are made as described for the option shown in Figure 6.2.2-3.

PAGE 4 OF 21

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.2
MEMBER
WEATHER SEAL
BY OTHERS.
EQUIPMENT
3 PLC.S PER
BRKT
1/8
ROOF CURB
BY OTHERS.

RESTRAINT BRACKET KIT.
ATTACH TO CURB PRIOR TO
SETTING EQUIPMENT.
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION
THREE (3) SELF-DRILLING TEK
SCREWS BY KINETICS.

A third option for the KSCM-1 kit is demonstrated below in Figure 6.2.2-5.
WEATHER SEAL BY OTHERS.

EQUIPMENT
1/8
3 PLC.S PER
BRKT
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTION

THREE (3) SELF-DRILLING TEK
SCREWS BY KINETICS.
ROOF CURB
BY OTHERS.

RESTRAINT BRACKET KIT FOR
CURB-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT.

PAGE 5 OF 21

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.2
MEMBER
The sheet metal screws, or welds, are intended to be in shear parallel to the curb side
wall. Because the screws attaching the bracket to the curb are fully engaged in the side
wall, the loads are passed as directly as possible to the side wall. All of the specified
connections must be made fully for the restraint to be effective. The product details and
ratings may be found in Chapter P1.
Some pieces of rooftop equipment have long overhangs, or the side rails have long drops.
In these cases the KSCM-1 kit does not provide enough flexibility to properly attach the
equipment to the curb. Kinetics Noise Control has developed the KSCM-2 Seismic
Bracket Kit to address this problem. The kit consists of two heavy-gage sheet metal
angles of different sizes and enough hardware to attach it to the curb and the equipment.
Figures 6.2.2-6 through 6.2.2-8 demonstrate the use of the parts found in the KSCM-2 kit
for the same applications shown for the KSCM-1 kit. Figure 6.2.2-9 shows how the
KSCM-2 kit could be used to attach a rooftop unit with structural channel base rails. It
should be noted that in some circumstances the KSCM-1 kit could also be used for this
type of application. Also, Option No. 5 in Figure 6.2.2-10 could possibly be made using
the parts from the KSCM-1 kit.
Figures 6.2.2-11 through 6.2.2-13 illustrate possible situations where both of the KSCM-2
brackets could be used. In these cases, the two brackets are used together to deal with
situations where the equipment side rails overhang the curb and drop a considerable
distance below the top of the curb.
The three long sheet metal screws are used to attach the KSCM brackets to the curb.
They must fully engage to sheet metal of the curb side wall to develop the full capacity of
the attachment. Each of the KSCM-2 kits contains six short sheet metal screws. Three of
the screws may be used to connect a bracket to the equipment. The other three may be
used to connect the two brackets together. The equipment and bracket to bracket
connections may made using welds (by others) as shown on the product submittals found
in chapter P1.
These are just three of the possible attachment options that may be achieved with the
KSCM-1 kit. Note that final connections to the equipment can be made after the
equipment has been placed on the curb. In some cases the connections to the curb could
also be made after the equipment has been set. Thus, there are some cases where the
KSCM-1 kit would be a retrofit option after the equipment has been installed. The legs of
the KSCM-1 bracket may be trimmed to fit the application.
Care must be taken when attaching to the equipment with sheet metal screws that power
cables, control wires, and piping are not damaged. Also, the brackets must not block or
interfere with access and maintenance doors on the equipment.

PAGE 6 OF 21

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.2
MEMBER
WEATHER SEAL
BY OTHERS.
3 PLC.S PER
BRKT
EQUIPMENT
1/8
ROOF CURB
BY OTHERS.
KSCM-2 SEISMIC RESTRAINT

BRACKET #2 BY KINETICS.
ATTACH TO CURB PRIOR TO
SETTING EQUIPMENT.
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
SELF-DRILLING TEK
SCREWS BY KINETICS.
EQUIPMENT
1/8
ROOF CURB
BY OTHERS.
3 PLC.S PER
BRKT
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
SELF-DRILLING TEK
SCREWS BY KINETICS.
BRACKET #2 BY KINETICS IS
SHOWN. KSCM-2 BRACKET #2
BY KINETICS MAY ALSO BE USED.

PAGE 7 OF 21

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.2
MEMBER
WEATHER SEAL
BY OTHERS.
1/8
3 PLC.S PER
BRKT
EQUIPMENT
ROOF CURB
BY OTHERS.
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
SELF-DRILLING TEK
SCREWS BY KINETICS.
EQUIPMENT
1/8
3 PLC.S PER
BRKT

BRACKET #1 OR BRACKET #2
BY KINETICS.
ROOF CURB
BY OTHERS.


PAGE 8 OF 21

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.2
MEMBER

3 PLC.S PER
BRKT
EQUIPMENT
1/8
OPTIONAL EQUIPMENT
SELF-DRILLING TEK
SCREWS BY KINETICS.
ROOF CURB
BY OTHERS.
WEATHER SEAL
BY OTHERS.
EQUIPMENT
1/8
6 PLC.S PER
BRKT
OPTIONAL CONNECTION
BRACKET-TO-BRACKET
& BRACKET-TO-EQUIPMENT
USING THREE (3) SELF-DRILLING
TEK SCREWS BY KINETICS.
ROOF CURB
BY OTHERS.


BRACKETS #1 & #2 BY KINETICS.
ATTACH TO CURB PRIOR
TO SETTING EQUIPMENT.

PAGE 9 OF 21

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.2
MEMBER

EQUIPMENT
OPTIONAL CONNECTION
BRACKET-TO-BRACKET
ROOF CURB
BY OTHERS.
3 PLC.S PER
BRKT
1/8
WEATHER
SEAL BY
OTHERS.
EQUIPMENT
3 PLC.S PER
BRKT
1/8
OPTIONAL CONNECTION
BRACKET-TO-BRACKET
ROOF CURB
BY OTHERS.
6 PLC.S PER
BRKT
1/8


PAGE 10 OF 21

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.2
MEMBER
~(Lb/2)-3.0 TYP
2.00 TYP
No. 2
No. 9
No. 7
No. 5
SIDE B
No. 3
Lb = ~B
No. 11
La = ~A
SIDE A
~(La/2)-3.0
TYP
SIDE C
No. 12
No. 6
SIDE D
2.00 TYP
No. 1
No. 8
No. 10
No. 4
Figure 6.2.2-14. Locating Scheme for KSCM-1 & KSCM-2 Kits.

It is necessary to properly locate the brackets around the roof curb to ensure that the

PAGE 11 OF 21

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.2
MEMBER
A minimum of four KSCM Restraint Bracket Kits are required for each application. These
are located on the perimeter of the curb as shown in Figure 6.2.2-14 as No. 1 through
No. 4. They are located close to the corners to efficiently transfer the forces into the curb
side walls. Additional KSCM Restraint Bracket Kits may be required as indicated by the
Kinetics Seismic and/or Wind Certification Sheet. Additional KSCM Restraint Bracket Kits
are to be added in pairs, (No. 5) & (No. 6), (No. 7) & (No. 8), (No. 9) & (No. 10), and
(No. 11) & (No. 12), and located as shown in Figure 6.2.2-14. When there are more than
three (3) restraints per side, they must be equally spaced. It is important that the restraints
on any pair of opposite sides (Side A & Side C and Side B & Side D) be able to carry the
entire horizontal seismic and/or wind load.
Vertical Restraints
As stated earlier, the curb side walls will not carry significant simultaneous horizontal and
vertically upward loads. The vertical uplift forces must be carried as directly as possible
from the equipment to the roof structure. To address this issue, Kinetics Noise Control has
developed the KSCV Seismic & Wind Vertical Restraint Kits. The kit consists of two basic
groups of parts. The first group of parts is shown in Figure 6.2.2-15. Various examples of
the connections that may be made with these parts are shown in Figures 6.2.2-16 through
6.2.2-18. The local connection between the roof and the building structure must
equal the capacity of the KSCV restraint kit, see submittals in Chapter P1!
The parts shown in Figure 6.2.2-15 allow the roof to be penetrated and then sealed using
proven roofing technology. The KSCV PCV Pipe Assembly provides a standard sized roof
penetration that can be sealed with commercially available pipe flashing or boots (by
others). The flashing and boot are not included so that the roofers can use those parts
with which they are most familiar. Each KSCV restraint requires one hole to be drilled
through the roof structure per KSCV kit to allow the threaded rod to pass through. The
KSCV Restraint Channel provides adequate bearing area even when the roof structure is
corrugated steel. The steel washers and coupling nut at the top of the KSCV PCV Pipe
Assembly allow the roof attachment part of the kit to be fully assembled and roofed before
the rooftop unit is set on the curb. The coupling nut allows the equipment attachment part
of the kit to be connected to the roof attachment part of the kit after the unit is in place.
seismic and wind loads are transferred into curb side walls efficiently. Figure 6.2.2-14
presents a layout of the perimeter locating scheme for a typical rectangular roof curb.
Here again, the A and B dimensions correspond roughly to those same dimensions on
the Kinetics Seismic and/or Wind Certification sheet.
The parts shown in Figure 6.2.2-19 allow the equipment to be connected to the lower
portion of the KSCV restraint. The leg of the KSCV Equipment Bracket that has six (6)
holes punched in it mounts to the equipment. The two holes in the other leg are for the
short piece of threaded rod which screws into the coupling nut at the top of the building
attachment portion of the KSCV kit. The two (2) nuts and standard washer provide the

PAGE 12 OF 21

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.2
MEMBER
restraint connection. The KSCV Equipment Bracket may be attached to the equipment
with the six (6) sheet metal screws provided, or it can be welded to the equipment.
COUPLING NUT.
STANDARD
STEEL WASHERS.
KSCV
1-1/2" PVC
PIPE ASSEM.
STANDARD
STEEL WASHER.
STANDARD
HEX NUTS.
KSCV RESTRAINT
CHANNEL
THREADED ROD.
Figure 6.2.2-15. Building Attachment Parts for KSCV Kit.
CURB, NAILER, & RIGID

INSULATION BY OTHERS.
CANT STRIP BY OTHERS.
CAULKING
BY OTHERS.
STAND.
CURB
HT.
14.06
WEATHER STRIP BY OTHERS.

1-1/2" PIPE FLASHING OR
BOOT BY OTHERS.
ROOF SYSTEM
BY OTHERS.
INSULATION
BY OTHERS.
8.00
MAX.
INSULATION
CONCRETE
ROOF BY
OTHERS.
STEEL
DECKING
BY OTHERS.
KSCV
VERTICAL
RESTRAINT
KIT BY KINETICS. STRUCTURAL STEEL BY OTHERS.
Figure 6.2.2-16. KSCV Building Attachment Concrete Roof Deck.

PAGE 13 OF 21

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.2
MEMBER
CURB, NAILER, & RIGID

INSULATION BY OTHERS.
CANT STRIP BY OTHERS.
CAULKING BY
OTHERS.
STAND.
CURB
HT.
14.06
WEATHER STRIP BY OTHERS.

1-1/2" PIPE FLASHING
OR BOOT BY OTHERS.
ROOF SYSTEM
BY OTHERS.
INSULATION
BY OTHERS.
8.00
MAX.
INSULATION
STEEL
DECKING
BY OTHERS.
KSCV UPLIFT RESTRAINT

KIT BY KINETICS.
STRUCTURAL STEEL
BY OTHERS.
Figure 6.2.2-17. KSCV Building Attachment Metal Roof Deck.

CURB, NAILER, & RIGID INSULATION BY OTHERS.
CANT STRIP BY
WEATHER STRIP
OTHERS.
BY OTHERS.
CAULKING
BY OTHERS.
1-1/2" PIPE
FLASHING
OR BOOT
BY OTHERS.
ROOF SYSTEM
BY OTHERS.
STAND.
CURB
HT.
14.06
INSULATION BY
OTHERS.
STEEL DECKING
BY OTHERS.
KSCV UPLIFT RESTRAINT
KIT BY KINETICS.
16 GA. SHEET STEEL BRIDGE ACROSS

VALLEY BY OTHERS. HOLD IN PLACE
WITH SHEET METAL SCREWS
OR POP-RIVETS BY OTHERS.
Figure 6.2.2-18. KSCV Building Attachment Valley of Metal Roof Deck.

PAGE 14 OF 21

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.2
MEMBER
(2)STANDARD HEX NUTS.

STANDARD STEEL WASHER.
KSCV
EQUIPMENT
BRACKET.
OPT. 1
OPT. 2
THREADED ROD.
Figure 6.2.2-19. Equipment Attachment Parts for KSCV Kit.

Shown in Chapter P1 are the appropriate submittals for weld attachment details for the
KSCV Equipment Bracket. This section also includes the rating for the KSCV restraint.
Figures 6.2.2-20 through 6.2.2-23 give four examples of methods to attach the KSCV
restraint kit to various styles of equipment. The KSCV kit has sufficient flexibility to allow
for some misalignment between the equipment attachment and the building attachment.
However, the locations of the two parts of the restraint kit must be carefully planned. The
equipment attachment portion of the restraint must not block any maintenance or service
access doors. Also, there must be sufficient material in the equipment structure to handle
the loads imposed by the restraint.
(6) SELF-DRILLING
TEK SCREWS.
The basic locating scheme for the KSCV Seismic & Wind Vertical Restraint Kits around
the perimeter of a rectangular curb is shown in Figure 6.2.2-24. As before, the A and B
dimensions correspond roughly to those same dimensions on the Kinetics Seismic and/or
Wind Certification sheet. The KSCV Vertical Restraint Kits will be grouped at the corners
of the curb. If the Kinetics Seismic, and/or Wind Certification shows that a vertical restraint
is required at one corner, a vertical restraint will be required at each corner. This is
because we do not know from which direction the seismic wave or wind will come. If more
than one restraint is required at a corner, the same number of restraints must be applied
to each corner as shown in Figure 6.2.2-24.

PAGE 15 OF 21

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.2
MEMBER
3/16
EQUIP.
TRIM THREADED ROD

TO FIT APPLICATION.
3 PLCS
OPTIONAL
WELD
ATTACH.
TRIM PVC
PIPE ASSEM.
TO FIT APP.
DO NOT
BLOCK
ACCESS &
MAINT.
DOORS WITH
KSCV EQUIP.
BRACKET!
TRIM THREADED ROD TO FIT APPLICATION.
Figure 6.2.2-20. Example No. 1 KSCV Equipment Attachment.
3 PLCS
3/16
EQUIP.
TRIM THREADED ROD

TO FIT APPLICATION.
DO NOT
BLOCK
ACCESS &
MAINT.
DOORS WITH
KSCV EQUIP.
BRACKET!
OPTIONAL
WELD
ATTACH.
TRIM PVC PIPE

ASSEM. TO FIT
APPLICATION.

PAGE 16 OF 21

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.2
MEMBER
TRIM THREADED ROD

TO FIT APPLICATION.
3/16
BACK-UP/SPACER
PLATE, TO BE
ASTM A-36 MIN.
PLATE MUST BE
LARGE ENOUGH
FOR SPECIFIED
WELDS. PLATE
BY OTHERS.
3 PLCS
3/16
TRIM PVC
PIPE
ASSEM. TO
FIT APP.
EQUIP.
DO NOT
BLOCK
ACCESS &
MAINT.
DOORS WITH
KSCV EQUIP.
BRACKET!

WHEN ATTACHING KSCV BRACKET
TO EQUIPMENT CABINET, USE
ONLY THE SHEET METAL SCREWS
PROVIDED BY KINETICS.
TRIM THREADED
ROD TO FIT APP.
ATTACHING
THE KSCV
BRACKET TO
THE EQUIPMENT
CABINET BY
WELDING IS NOT
RECOMMENDED.
EQUIP.
TRIM PVC
PIPE
ASSEM. TO
FIT APP.
DO NOT
BLOCK
ACCESS &
MAINT.
DOORS WITH
KSCV EQUIP.
BRACKET!

PAGE 17 OF 21

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.2
MEMBER
1ST KSCV
FOR POINT 3
~2.00 TYP WHEN
KSCM BRACKET
IS NOT PRESENT.
SIDE B
1ST KSCV
FOR POINT 4
SIDE A
A=~La
SIDE C
Lb
La
1ST KSCV
FOR POINT 2
~3.25 TYP FROM

KSCM BRACKET
WHEN PRESENT
SIDE D
~5.50 TYP SPACING

FOR ADDITIONAL KITS
B=~Lb
THIS DIMENSION
IS DETERMINED
BY THE EQUIP.
OVERHANG.
1ST KSCV
FOR POINT 1
Figure 6.2.2-24. Locating Scheme for KSCV Kits.

PAGE 18 OF 21

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.2
MEMBER
There will be certain applications where a given curb will be marginally inadequate.
Kinetics Noise Control cannot analyze and certify the entire curb for a specified
application unless the curb is provided by Kinetics Noise Control. However, Kinetics Noise
Control can perform a basic analysis of the strength of the curb wall based on the curb
height, sheet metal thickness, the length of the curb walls, the equipment weight, and its
C.G. location. From that analysis Kinetics Noise Control can make a recommendation as
to whether reinforcement of the curb side walls would lead to an adequate curb
installation from a seismic point of view.
Kinetics Noise Control provides a kit that may be used to reinforce the curb side walls.
The kit consists of 2 X 2 treated lumber and self-drilling sheet metal screws, from which
several reinforcements may be made depending on the curb height. The philosophy
behind the KSVR Seismic Curb Wall Vertical Reinforcement Kit is to provide enough
vertical reinforcements to carry the entire weight load of the equipment. This will leave the
sheet metal curb side walls to carry the horizontal loads thus maximizing the curb s
seismic and wind load capacity. Figure 6.2.2-25 shows the KSVR kit installed on one curb
wall.
H
CURB
HEIGHT
Hr
MEASURE
&
CUT TO FIT
S = MAX. SPACING
2 X 2 TREATED WOOD
REINFORCEMENTS
Vertical Reinforcement of Curb Side Walls
Figure 6.2.2-25. Typical KSVR Kit Installation on a Curb Side Wall.

The analysis performed by Kinetics Noise Control will recommend a maximum spacing for
the installation of the vertical reinforcements. The minimum number of vertical
reinforcements that will ever be recommended per side is three (3). There will be a
vertical reinforcement on each end of the curb side wall and one in the middle. The
treated 2 X 2 provided by Kinetics Noise Control is cut to fit tightly between the foot of the
curb, and the wooden nailer at the top of the curb. Then, the vertical reinforcement is
fastened to the curb side wall using the sheet metal screws provided in the KSVR kit. The

PAGE 19 OF 21

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.2
MEMBER
number of screws, their spacing, and installation is specified in the product submittals
found in Chapter P1.
Figure 6.2.2-26 shows the range of curb heights for which the KSVR kit is suitable. Table
6.2.2-1 will show how many vertical reinforcements can be made from one KSVR kit.
H = 16.06 to 24.00
H = 8.06 to 16.00
H = 0.00 to 8.00
Figure 6.2.2-26. Application Range for KSVR Kits.

Table 6.2.2-1. Vertical Reinforcements per KSVR Kit
APPLICABLE CURB
HEIGHT RANGE
INCLUSIVE
(H)
(in.)
NUMBER OF
VERTICAL
REINFORCEMENTS
PER KIT
NUMBER OF
SELF-DRILLING
SHEET METAL SCREWS
PER REINFORCEMENT
0.00 to 8.00
8.06 to 16.00
16.06 to 24.00
24.06 to 36.00
H = 24.06 to 36.00
The kits described in this section provide components that will allow various pieces of

PAGE 20 OF 21

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.2
MEMBER
rooftop equipment to be attached to sheet metal curbs in areas that may be subjected to
high seismic and/or wind loadings. The analysis and ratings provided with the kits will
permit the curb manufacturer, and/or Design Professional of Record for a project, to
certify the curb for the specified seismic and/or wind loadings.

PAGE 21 OF 21
DUBLIN,sales@kineticsnoise.com
OHIO, USA MISSISSAUGA, ONTARIO, CANADA

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.2
MEMBER
Transferring Forces through a Sheet Metal Curb
La or Lb
w
f
WOODEN
NAILER
H
t
Rh
Rw
Figure 6.2.3-1. Loading on a Sheet Metal Curb.

H is the height of the curb, and t is the thickness of the sheet metal used in the
construction of the curb. The lengths represented by La and Lb are the inside lengths of
the long sides and the short sides of the curb, respectively. For the sake of simplicity,
assume that the weight of the equipment is evenly distributed around the perimeter of the
curb. This is close enough to the truth for our purposes assuming that the CG of the
equipment is more or less, located at the geometric center of the plan view of the curb.
This distributed weight load is denoted by w. The value of w may be determined by
considering a typical plan view for a rectangular curb as in Figure 6.2.3-2. The distributed
weight load will be given by the following equation.
Sheet metal curbs must be considered as non-structural items. The sides of a sheet metal
curb have no load-carrying capability unless they form a closed section in the plan view.
The sides must be fully attached to one another for the full height of the curb in order to
generate full strength in the individual sides. Figure 6.2.3-1, shown below, presents one
side of a typical sheet metal curb and the loads that the curb may be expected to carry.
TRANSFERRING FORCES THROUGH A SHEET METAL CURB

PAGE 1 OF 10

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.3
MEMBER
Lb
SIDE C
Figure 6.2.3-2. Plan View of a Rectangular Sheet Metal Curb.
w = W (2(La + Lb )) = W Lp
(Eq. 6.2.3-1)
where W is the weight of the equipment, and Lp is the length of the inside perimeter of the
curb.
The horizontal seismic force acting on the curb is shown as a uniformly distributed shear
load (f) acting along the top of the curb. The terms Rw and Rh are the reactions for the
distributed weight load, and distributed seismic force respectively.
It is very important to realize that the walls of the curb can only carry loads in the plane of
the wall. The curb wall can not effectively resist forces that act perpendicular to the wall of
the curb. This is especially true if the sides of the curb are long. The walls of the curb are
very thin plates that are loaded in compression on the top and bottom edges by the
distributed weight load of the equipment. The horizontal seismic load will be a distributed
shear load along the top and bottom edges.
SIDE D
La
SIDE B
SIDE A
Failure of the curb wall will generally be by buckling. Buckling is a very dangerous and
catastrophic failure mode. It is dangerous because it occurs at a stress that is well below
the yield point of the materials. It is catastrophic because the collapse is usually complete.
For a given curb height and material thickness there is a critical equipment weight in the
absence of a seismic load that will buckle the curb. Table 6.2.3-1 identifies the variation in
the critical equipment weight on the curb wall with the height of the curb (H) and the
thickness of the curb material (t). Again the critical equipment weight (w) is in terms of the

PAGE SERIES 2 OF 10

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.3
MEMBER
distributed weight of the equipment. Note that the load carrying ability of the curb will
CURB
HEIGHT
(H)
(in.)
w
FOR
MATERIAL
THICKNESS
14 GAGE
t = 0.0747 in.
w
FOR
MATERIAL
THICKNESS
16 GAGE
t = 0.0598 in.
w
FOR
MATERIAL
THICKNESS
18 GAGE
t = 0.0478 in.
14.0
15.0
18.0
21.0
24.0
27.0
30.0
33.0
36.0
57.66
50.23
34.88
25.63
19.62
15.50
12.56
10.38
8.72
29.58
25.77
17.90
13.15
10.07
7.95
6.44
5.32
4.47
15.11
13.16
9.14
6.71
5.14
4.06
3.29
2.72
2.28
decrease by approximately 70% as the thickness of the curb material decreases from 14
gage to 18 gage. In addition, there is an 80% decrease in the load-carrying capability of
the curb as its height is increased from 14 inches to 36 inches. Thus great care must be
exercised when placing large pieces of equipment on curbs fabricated from the lighter
gages of steel or when placing large pieces of equipment on extended-height curbs.
As one might expect, there is a critical horizontal seismic distributed load (f) that, when
applied to the top edge of the curb, will cause the curb to fail in buckling. The critical
seismic load will be a function of the height of the curb, the material thickness, and the
weight of the equipment being supported by the curb. For ease of use, the equipment
weight can be represented as an evenly distributed load (w). The variation of this critical
seismic load with the variables mentioned above is shown in Tables 6.2.3-2, 6.2.3-3, and
6.2.3-4.
Table 6.2.3-1. Critical Equipment Weight (w) (lbs./in.).

PAGE SERIES 3 OF 10

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.3
MEMBER
w
lbs./in.
H
(in.)
14.0
15.0
18.0
21.0
24.0
27.0
30.0
33.0
36.0
0.00
5.00
10.00
20.00
30.00
40.00
50.00
55.00
f
lbs./in.
326.2
284.2
197.3
145.0
111.0
87.7
71.0
58.7
49.3
f
lbs./in.
320.8
278.7
191.8
139.4
105.3
81.9
65.0
52.5
42.9
f
lbs./in.
315.1
272.9
185.8
133.0
98.4
74.3
56.2
40.5
N/A
f
lbs./in.
302.6
260.1
171.5
115.7
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
f
lbs./in.
288.3
244.9
150.2
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
f
lbs./in.
271.0
224.8
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
f
lbs./in.
247.1
181.8
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
f
lbs./in.
227.9
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Table 6.2.3-3. Critical Seismic Load for a 16 Gage Curb (t = 0.0598 in.).
w
lbs./in.
H
(in.)
14.0
15.0
18.0
21.0
24.0
27.0
30.0
33.0
36.0
0.00
2.50
5.00
10.00
15.00
20.00
25.00
30.00
f
lbs./in.
167.4
145.8
101.2
74.4
56.9
45.0
36.4
30.1
25.3
f
lbs./in.
164.6
143.1
98.5
71.6
54.1
42.1
33.5
27.0
22.1
f
lbs./in.
161.8
140.2
95.5
68.4
50.7
38.3
29.2
21.4
N/A
f
lbs./in.
155.6
133.8
88.4
60.0
36.8
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
f
lbs./in.
148.5
126.3
78.2
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
f
lbs./in.
140.0
116.6
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
f
lbs./in.
128.7
99.4
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
f
lbs./in.
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Table 6.2.3-2. Critical Seismic Load for a 14 Gage Curb (t = 0.0747 in.).

PAGE SERIES 4 OF 10

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.3
MEMBER
w
lbs./in.
H
(in.)
14.0
15.0
18.0
21.0
24.0
27.0
30.0
33.0
36.0
0.00
2.50
5.00
7.50
10.00
12.50
15.00
20.00
f
lbs./in.
85.5
74.5
51.7
38.0
29.1
23.0
18.6
15.4
N/A
f
lbs./in.
82.7
71.7
48.8
35.0
26.0
19.7
15.0
11.2
N/A
f
lbs./in.
79.6
68.5
45.3
30.9
19.8
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
f
lbs./in.
76.1
64.8
40.4
33.8
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
f
lbs./in.
71.9
60.0
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
f
lbs./in.
66.4
52.3
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
f
lbs./in.
55.3
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
f
lbs./in.
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Note that no safety factor has been applied to any of the values in Tables 6.2.3-1, 6.2.3-2,
6.2.3-3, or 6.2.3-4. These values should not be used for design or certifying sheet metal
curbs for seismic applications unless a factor of safety of not less than 2:1 is applied to
them. Values listed as N/A indicate combinations of equipment load, curb height, and
material thickness that are absolutely not viable for seismic applications. They indicate
that a thicker gage of material must be used for the construction of the curb. In the case of
Table 6.2.3-2, the combinations that are marked N/A indicate that a structural seismic
curb is required.
An obvious conclusion drawn from Tables 6.2.3-2, 6.2.3-3, and 6.2.3-4 is that if the
equipment load could be carried by components other than the wall of the curb, the
seismic load-carrying capacity of the curb could be maximized. The most cost-effective
method of providing vertical reinforcement to carry the equipment weight load is to use
treated wood 2 X 4s or 2 X 2s. This is usually the same material that is used for the
nailer at the top of the curb. A typical view of the side of a curb that has been vertically
reinforced with 2 X 2s is shown in Figure 6.2.3-3. This figure shows the minimum number
of vertical reinforcements. A vertical reinforcement is required on each end of the side of
the curb with at least one additional member located in the middle. Table 6.2.3-5 gives the
maximum allowable vertical reinforcement spacing (S) as a function of the curb height,
and the equipment weight load. These reinforcement members must be cut to fit tightly
between the underside of the nailer or curb lip and the top of the structural support
member at the base of the curb. If a gap exists they will not function properly. The
controlling failure mode is buckling. For selection purposes in the table below, a factor of
safety of 4:1 was applied to the vertical reinforcements to account for the variation in
grade and structure of the treated wood 2 X 2s. Table 6.2.3-5 indicates that for many
cases the minimum number of vertical reinforcements will be sufficient to carry the weight
Table 6.2.3-4. Critical Seismic Load for an 18 Gage Curb (t = 0.0478 in.).

PAGE SERIES 5 OF 10

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.3
MEMBER
of the equipment.
La or Lb
w
WOODEN
NAILER
VERTICAL
REINFORCEMENT
WOODEN 2 X 2'S
H
S
t
Rh
Rw
Figure 6.2.3-3. Typical Vertically Reinforced Curb.
Table 6.2.3-5. Maximum Spacing for Vertical Reinforcements Treated Wood 2x2s
Factor of Safety = 4:1 with Respect to Buckling.
w
lbs./in.
H
(in.)
14.0
15.0
18.0
21.0
24.0
27.0
30.0
33.0
36.0
0.00
5.00
10.00
20.00
30.00
40.00
50.00
55.00
S
(in.)
2,762
2,406
1,671
1,227
940
743
601
497
418
S
(in.)
1,381
1,203
835
614
470
371
301
249
209
S
(in.)
690
601
418
307
235
186
150
124
104
S
(in.)
345
401
209
153
117
93
75
62
52
S
(in.)
230
200
139
102
78
62
50
41
35
S
(in.)
173
150
104
77
59
46
38
31
26
S
(in.)
138
120
84
61
47
37
30
25
21
S
(in.)
126
109
76
56
43
34
27
23
19

PAGE SERIES 6 OF 10

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.3
MEMBER
In the course of a seismic event, the most significant vertical seismic loads occur at the
corners of the curb. This type of load will put the curb wall in bending. In the presence of a
horizontal seismic load, a vertical seismic load will cause the load-carrying ability of the
curb to drop to an unacceptable level. Thus vertical seismic loads should be transferred
from the equipment to the building structure in as direct a manner as possible. The mode
of transfer must minimize the bending moments in the curb wall to maintain the ability of
the curb to carry the equipment weight load and the horizontal seismic load.
SIDE A
SIDE B
Fd = 0.5FSIN( )
Fd = 0.5FSIN( )
SIDE D
Fa = 0.5FCOS( )
Fc = 0.5FCOS( )
SIDE C
Figure 6.2.3-4. Seismic Loading of Curb.
the curb. In this figure F is the horizontal seismic force. The angle f represents the
direction of motion for the seismic wave front. Since the curb wall can transfer forces only
in the plane of the wall as previously discussed, the forces carried by the individual curb
walls will be as shown in Figure 6.2.3-4. The resulting distributed seismic force acting on
the long sides of the curb will be equal to
fa = (0.5 La )F cos .
The distribution of the horizontal seismic load is addressed through a rational analysis.
Figure 6.2.3-4 shows the plan view of a curb with the equipment CG at the center of
(Eq. 6.2.3-2)
In a similar fashion, the distributed seismic force acting on the short sides of the curb will
be
f b = (0.5 Lb )F sin .
(Eq. 6.2.3-3)
Note that the ability of a sheet metal curb to resist a horizontal seismic load depends on

PAGE SERIES 7 OF 10

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.3
MEMBER
the length of the curb available to carry the loads. Thus, the worst-case scenario for a
curb would occur when f was equal to 90 degrees. The seismic load is parallel to the
short sides of the curb, which means that the short sides of the curb must be able to resist
the entire horizontal seismic load. So, for calculation purposes, the distributed seismic
load on the short sides of the curb would be as follows.
f h = 0. 5 F Lb
Equations 6.2.3-1 and 6.2.3-4 with Tables 6.2.3-1 through 6.2.3-4, along with a healthy
factor of safety, allow us to determine the suitability of a given curb in a specified seismic
application. Since the curb walls are very thin compared to any other dimensions, any
dents, creases, or other defects will drastically lower the critical buckling loads, a factor of
safety in the range of 3:1 or 4:1 is considered appropriate to account for the possibility of
such minor damage. Major damage must be corrected.
The last issue that must be addressed is the presence of large-scale penetrations in the
curb walls. Screw and pop rivet holes are not considered to be large-scale holes. Largescale penetrations are those that are made for ducts, pipes, or conduits. Figure 6.2.3-5
shows a rectangular penetration for a duct.
La or Lb
WOODEN
NAILER
H
t
(Eq. 6.2.3-4)
Figure 6.2.3-5. Typical Duct Penetration.

If left un-reinforced, this penetration would eliminate any significant seismic load-carrying
ability for that side of the curb. However, in some case an appropriate reinforcement
scheme for a duct penetration, similar to that shown in Figure 6.2.3-6, can be added. In

PAGE SERIES 8 OF 10

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.3
MEMBER
this scheme, the reinforcement ring made out of sheet metal is placed around the hole.
La or Lb
WOODEN
NAILER
H
t
Figure 6.2.3-6. Reinforcement of Duct Penetrations.

The ring must have a thickness equal to or greater than that of the curb wall and extend at
least 2 inches beyond the penetration. The ring must be pop riveted, screwed, or spot
welded in place. Enough fasteners should be used to ensure that the loads are
transferred to the ring. In addition to the ring, vertical restraints made up of treated wood
2 X 2s should be placed as shown in Figure 6.2.3-6. The total seismic load carrying ability
of this side of the curb should be reduced as follows:
fap = 0.5 F (La Lh )
(Eq. 6.2.3-5)
fbp = 0.5 F (Lb Lh )
(Eq. 6.2.3-6)
and,
REINFORCEMENT "RING" AROUND

DUCT PENETRATION.
In these two equations, fap and fbp are the distributed horizontal seismic loads carried by
the long and short sides, respectively, of a curb with a duct penetration in one of the walls.
The term Lh represents the length of the duct penetration. Another type of penetration is a
circular penetration for either a pipe or a cable conduit. This type of penetration is shown
in Figure 6.2.3-7. These penetrations are much smaller than the one for a duct. Ringing
these penetrations as shown in Figure 6.2.3-8 should provide sufficient reinforcement
without the loss of seismic load-carrying capacity. The rings should have the same
thickness as the walls of the curb and extend at least 2 inches beyond the penetration.
The attachment may be by pop rivet, screw, or spot weld. A sufficient number of fasteners

PAGE SERIES 9 OF 10

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.3
MEMBER
La or Lb
WOODEN
NAILER
Figure 6.2.3-7. Typical Piping/Conduit Penetrations.
La or Lb
REINFORCEMENT RINGS AROUND
PIPE & CONDUIT PENETRATIONS.
WOODEN
NAILER
H
t
Figure 6.2.3-8. Reinforcement of Piping/Conduit Penetrations.

must be used to ensure that loads are effectively transferred to the reinforcing rings.
The intent of this document is to provide input and guidance as to how loads are
transferred through a sheet metal curb. The tables and equations presented in this
document may be used with factors of safety of 3:1 to 4:1 in order to estimate the
performance of a curb for a specific seismic application. However, prior to installation a
thorough analysis should be made by the curb manufacturer or KINETICS NOISE
CONTROL.

PAGE SERIES 10 OF 10

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.3
MEMBER
Attachment of Sheet Metal Curbs to the Building
General Comments
We will begin by making some general comments on attaching sheet metal curbs to roofs
made of different materials.
1.) The attachment fasteners at the foot of the sheet metal curb are assumed to be
loaded primarily in shear.
2.) If uplift forces are present they must be carried directly to the roof by the KSCV
Seismic & Wind Vertical Restraint Kits at each corner of the equipment.
3.) The local attachment between the roof and the building structure must
have a capacity greater than or equal to the loads transferred from the
sheet curb foot and the KSCV kits to the roof!
4.) The minimum number of fasteners per curb side will be three regardless of the
fastener type or size. There will be one fastener approximately at each end of
the curb side, and one approximately at the middle.
5.) The actual positions of the fasteners are approximate to account for vertical
curb wall reinforcements, troughs in metal decking, etc.
6.) Support beneath the sheet metal curb side wall must be continuous
around the entire perimeter to maintain the full horizontal seismic, and/or
wind load rating. If the curb side wall is required to span significant
distances, it will be placed in bending, and thus suffer a large reduction in
the horizontal load-carrying capacity!
7.) Sheet metal curbs may be allowed to span the valleys in metal roof decking.
However, if vertical reinforcements are required for the curb side walls, the
reinforcements must not be located above a valley in the metal roof decking, or
the valley must be spanned with a support for the reinforcement as discussed in
a later paragraph.
Attachment of a sheet metal curb to a roof structure involves intimate knowledge of the
type of roof being used, the slope of the roof, the location of the curb on the roof, and the
orientation of the curb with respect to the roof structure and slope. We, at Kinetics Noise
Control, usually do not have access to all of the information necessary to completely
specify the connection between the curb and the roof structure. Having said all of that, this
document will provide some of the requisite guidelines for attaching a sheet metal curb to
a roof structure.
Attachment to Metal Decking

The sheet metal curb foot may be fastened to metal decking using sheet metal screws of
sufficient size and quantity to carry the required loads, see Figure 6.2.4-1. Kinetics Noise
Control requires that the screws be no smaller than No. 10 and that they have a washer-
ATTACHMENT OF SHEET METAL CURBS TO THE BUILDING

PAGE 1 OF 12

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.4
MEMBER
As shown in Figure 6.2.4-2, the curb may also be fastened to the metal deck with through
bolts and nuts. Standard steel washers should be used under the nuts and bolt heads to
prevent pull-through. It is good practice to insert the bolts as shown in Figure 6.2.4-2, and
to use double nuts. This will help to maintain the integrity of the joint over time. The
analysis by Kinetics Noise Control specifies the number of -20 UNC SAE Grade 2 bolts
to use per each curb side, and the maximum allowable spacing for use on a flat roof.
Curb installations have been made by welding the curb foot to the metal decking. The
strength of these welds is dependent on the type of welder being used, the procedure
being followed, and the actual materials involved in the weld joint. There are too many
unknowns for Kinetics Noise Control to specify the number and size of the welds required
to attach a curb to a metal roof deck. However, if the shear strength of the welds used is
equivalent to the shear strength of the fasteners indicated by Kinetics Noise Control, the
weld attachment will be adequate. It is up to the Design Professional of Record to specify
the number and size of the welds required to attach the curb to the metal deck once the
details of the welding process and materials are known.
When vertical reinforcements are used the reinforcement must not lie over top of an
unsupported portion of the curb foot. This would occur if the foot of the curb was spanning
a valley in the metal roof decking. A bridge that is tied into the adjacent portions of the
decking must be created beneath the vertical reinforcement. Figure 6.2.4-3 shows one
way this may be accomplished. It is important that at least two screws attach the bridge to
the deck on both the inside and the outside of the curb side wall.
Attachment to Structural Steel
type head. The washer-type head helps reduce the incidence of pull-through. The
analysis provided by Kinetics Noise Control is based on a flat roof, and will give a
recommended number of No. 10 or No. 12 sheet metal screws per side, and the
maximum allowable spacing for each screw size. The sheet metal screws must be long
enough so that their threads can be fully engaged at the maximum screw diameter to
generate full screw strength. Since the foot of the curb must be continuously supported,
14 gage sheet steel may be used to bridge the valleys in the metal roof decking to support
the foot of the curb as shown in the view in Figure 6.2.4-1.
Kinetics Noise Control requires that sheet metal curbs be attached to structural steel with
through bolts and nuts with washers beneath the bolt heads and nuts, as shown in Figure
6.2.4-4. Again it is good practice to insert the bolts as shown, and to use double nuts.
Certain structural shapes will require the use of square beveled structural washers. For a
flat roof the analysis provided by Kinetics Noise Control will indicate the proper number of
-20 UNC SAE Grade 2 bolts per curb side and the maximum allowable spacing. Note
that the curb side wall is fully supported by the structural members.

PAGE 2 OF 12

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.4
MEMBER
14 GA. STEEL SHEET, BY OTHERS,TO

BRIDGE METAL ROOF DECK VALLEY.
TWO (2) No. 12 OR No. 10 SHEET METAL SCREWS

PER FASTENER LOCATION, BY OTHERS.
No. 12 OR No. 10 SHEET METAL SCREWS TO ATTACH CURB

TO METAL DECK, NUMBER & SPACING SPEC'D BY KINETICS.
Figure 6.2.4-1. Attachment to Metal Decking Using Sheet Metal Screws.

PAGE 3 OF 12

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.4
MEMBER
14 GA. STEEL SHEET, BY OTHERS, TO

TWO (2) No. 12 OR No. 10 SHEET METAL

SCREWS PER FASTENER LOCATION,
BY OTHERS.
1/4-20 UNC SAE GRADE 2 BOLTS, NUTS & WASHERS TO ATTACH

CURB TO METAL DECK, NUMBER & SPACING SPEC'D BY KINETICS.
Figure 6.2.4-2. Attachment to Metal Decking Using Through Bolts.

PAGE 4 OF 12

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.4
MEMBER
OPTIONAL
INSTALLATION
KSCV VERTICAL SIDE WALL

REINFORCEMENT KIT
BY KINETICS
TWO (2) No. 12 OR No. 10 SHEET METAL SCREWS,
BY OTHERS, ON EACH SIDE OF THE CURB SIDE WALL.
14 GA. STEEL SHEET, BY OTHERS, TO

Figure 6.2.4-3. Vertical Reinforcement Placement for Metal Decking.

Curbs have been attached to structural steel by welding. As before, Kinetics Noise Control
will not make any recommendations concerning the weld size and number. It will be up to
the Design Professional of Record to specify the number of welds and their size.
However, the welds must be of sufficient size and number to have a capacity greater than
or equal to the number of -20 UNC SAE Grade 2 bolts specified by Kinetics Noise
Control for the application in question.
PREFERRED
INSTALLATION
Attachment to Concrete
In order to attach a curb to a concrete deck, the concrete must have a minimum
compressive strength of 3,000 psi and be steel reinforced. Figure 6.2.4-5 shows a typical
concrete roof installation. The analysis provided by Kinetics Noise Control will indicate the
proper number of concrete wedge-type anchors per side and the maximum allowable
spacing. The wedge-type anchors require an embedment depth of 2 and a minimum
distance to any edge of the concrete of 33/8. Double nuts are not necessary for this
installation due to the wedging action of the anchor when properly tightened.

PAGE 5 OF 12

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.4
MEMBER
1/4" SQUARE BEVELED STRUCTURAL

WASHER, BY OTHERS. REQUIRED FOR
(C), (MC), AND (S) STRUCTURAL SHAPES.
STRUCTURAL STEEL BENEATH

CURB END WALL, BY OTHERS.
STRUCTURAL STEEL BENEATH

CURB SIDE WALL, BY OTHERS.
1/4-20 UNC SAE GRADE 2 BOLTS, NUTS, & WASHERS TO ATTACH CURB
TO STRUCTURAL STEEL, NUMBER & SPACING SPEC'D BY KINETICS.
Figure 6.2.4-4 Attachment to Structural Steel Using Through Bolts.

PAGE 6 OF 12

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.4
MEMBER
2 in. MIN. ANCHOR EMBEDMENT

3 in. MIN. THICK
CONCRETE
4 in. DRILL
24 in. DRILL DEPTH
38 in. MIN. EDGE

DISTANCE TO
DUCT OPENING
1/4 X 3-1/4 WEDGE-TYPE CONCRETE ANCHORS WITH NUTS & WASHERS TO ATTACH
CURB TO A CONCRETE ROOF DECK, NUMBER AND SPACING SPEC'D BY KINETICS.
Figure 6.2.4-5 Attachment to Concrete Using Wedge-Type Anchors.

PAGE 7 OF 12

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.4
MEMBER
In order to maintain the full capacity of the wedge-type anchors, the spacing between
adjacent anchors must be no less than 4. In addition, the deck must be thick enough to
provide a minimum of 1 cover beneath the bottom of the hole for the wedge anchor.
In general, wood is a highly variable structural material in terms of its strength and
uniformity. The strength of a piece of wood depends very strongly on its grain structure
and direction, as well as its species, moisture content, and growing conditions. The in situ
strength of the wood can change over time as its moisture content increases or decreases
relative to the surrounding environment. Wood is also susceptible to strength reductions
due to aging and insect infestations. Also, plywood decking and glulam structural
components may be delaminated over time through exposure to harsh environments, and
thus lose their integrity.
Wherever possible, Kinetics Noise Control recommends that attachments be made to
wood using through bolts, nuts, washers, and fish-plates against the wood side of the
bolt joint. This arrangement is depicted in Figure 6.2.4-6. The bolts should be inserted as
shown and retained with double nuts. The minimum recommended fish-plate size and
material is X 3 X 3 ASTM A36 steel. The fish-plate distributes the compressive load
from the nut, and prevents crushing of the wood fibers. The fish-plate is to be provided
by others.
There may be some cases where the use of lag screws may be most appropriate. Two
examples of this type of installation are also detailed in Figure 6.2.4-6. Note, in both of the
cases shown, the required embedment for the lag screw is into the structural timber. The
embedment for the lag screw is measured to where the tapered point begins. Care must
be taken to maintain the proper edge and end distances in the structural timbers for the
lag screws in order to develop their full capacity. Pilot holes of the proper diameter must
be drilled slightly beyond the required embedment for the lag screws to prevent splitting of
the structural timbers. Do not allow the pilot holes to go clear through the structural timber.
Note that the curb side wall is fully supported by the structural timbers.
Attachment to Sloped Roofs
Attachment to Wood
Sloped roofs present an interesting problem for the attachment of sheet metal curbs. The
ideal sheet metal curb for a sloped roof would be one where the sheet metal was cut and
bent to accommodate the slope. This would keep the equipment level, and still allow the
curb to be attached to the roof directly using the fasteners as recommended by Kinetics
Noise Control. However, frequently standard curbs of uniform height are ordered and
applied to sloped roofs. Blocking is placed under the foot of the curb to level the curb.
Depending on the slope of the roof, the height of the blocking could be considerable. This
presents serious problems when attempting to create a competent connection between
the curb and the roof.

PAGE 8 OF 12

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.4
MEMBER
Figure 6.2.4-6 Attachment to Wood Using Through Bolts & Lag Screws.
PAGE 9 OF 12

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.4
MEMBER
11 PILOT
64
DRILL TYP.
1 in. PILOT DEPTH TYP.

24
2 in. PENTRATION TYP.
PLYWOOD DECKING
BY OTHERS.
"FISH-PLATE" BY OTHERS.
1/4 in. X 3 in. X 3 in.
ASTM A36 STEEL.
2 in. X 4 in. MIN.

WOODEN JOIST
SIZE FOR 1/4-10
LAG SCREW,
BY OTHERS
3/8 in. MIN.

EDGE DIST.
TYP.
1/4-10 LAG SCREWS & WASHERS OR 1/4-20 UNC SAE GRADE 2 BOLTS,
NUTS, WASHERS, & 1/4 in. X 3 in. X 3 in. "FISH-PLATES" TO ATTACH CURB
TO STRUCTURAL STEEL, NUMBER & SPACING SPEC'D BY KINETICS.
The attachment hardware passes through the blocking. This ensures that the blocking will
remain in position beneath the curb side wall. The holes through the blocking for the
attachment hardware should be tight against the hardware. It would be best if the
attachment hardware had to be tapped into place. A close fit with the attachment
hardware will reduce the bending stress to near zero, and keep the hardware in shear.
When the height of the blocking exceeds (3) three inches, the attachment hardware that
provides the most flexibility is -20 UNC SAE Grade 2 All-Thread. Use double nuts and
washers on each end of the All-Thread. Where the height of the blocking is not excessive,
the attachment hardware discussed in the previous paragraphs may be used as long as it
passes through the blocking with minimal clearance.
Figure 6.2.4-8 provides a detail to handle situations where the blocking on two adjacent
sides meets at a corner. To help maintain the integrity of the attachments, it is necessary
that the corners of the blocking be reinforced inside and out with field-fabricated sheet
metal angles. The angles must be attached to the curb with sheet metal screws as shown.
The threads of the screws must fully engage the sheet metal of both angles to develop the
full capacity of the screws. The minimum number of screws recommended per leg is (3)
three, (4) four screws per leg are shown. There will be corners where the blocking is short
enough so that corner bracket is not needed. It is only necessary to install the corner
brackets when the blocking exceeds (2) two inches in height.
Conclusion
This section has taken a quick and very general look at the attachment of sheet metal
curbs to roof structures. There will be many situations that are not specifically addressed
by this document, which is not intended to be all encompassing. The drawings and
descriptions are intended to provide general guidelines to help the Design Professional of
Record, and the contractor with the installation of a curb.
The blocking for a seismically rated sheet metal roof curb must continuously support the
curb side walls. This is required to prevent bending in the side walls which would
drastically reduce the curbs ability to carry horizontal seismic and/or wind loads. A
possible roof curb arrangement on a sloped roof is shown in Figure 6.2.4-7. The blocking
is cut in such a way that it provides full and continuous support for the curb side walls.
The use of mounting hardware larger that -20 UNC should be avoided. The use of a
larger number of smaller fasteners will provide a better load distribution along the foot of
the curb than a small number of larger fasteners. The key to using sheet metal curbs in
seismic applications is to distribute the loads entering the curb from the equipment and
exiting the curb to the equipment as evenly as possible.

PAGE 10 OF 12

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.4
MEMBER
ROOF LINE
BLOCKING, BY OTHERS,
TO BE CONTINUOUS.
Figure 6.2.4-7 Blocking & Attachment for a Sloped Roof.

PAGE 11 OF 12

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.4
MEMBER
No. 10 OR No. 12 SHEET METAL

SCREWS, BY OTHERS.
14 GAGE STEEL CORNER

BRACKETS, BY OTHERS.
Figure 6.2.4-8 Curb Blocking Corner Detail.

PAGE 12 OF 12

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.4
MEMBER
Limits of Sheet Metal Curbs in Seismic Applications
In order to understand the limitations of sheet metal curbs in seismic applications, a

review of how forces are transferred through the curb, which is covered in detail in
Document 6.2.3, is in order. This discussion will evolve around curbs that have a
rectangular plan view as shown in Figure 6.2.5-1. The sides of the curb will be designated
as shown in Figure 6.2.5-1. The inside length of the curb is designated La. The inside
width of the curb is given the designation Lb.
SIDE A
SIDE B
SIDE D
La
Lb
SIDE C
Figure 6.2.5-1. Plan View of a Rectangular Sheet Metal Curb.
An elevation view of any one of the curb side walls is shown in Figure 6.2.5-2. In this
figure, H is the height of the curb side wall. The thickness of the curb wall material is
designated as t. The term w is the distributed weight of the equipment. It is shown as an
even distribution; however, it may be an increasing quantity from one side to the other.
The horizontal applied seismic and/or wind load is designated as f. Again, f is shown as
an evenly distributed load, although it may also be increasing from one side of the curb to
the other. These loads must be carried in the plane of the curb wall. Loads that are
perpendicular to the plane of the curb wall will lead to premature buckling of the curb wall.
Introduction
Curb Side Wall Weight Bearing Limit

The primary failure mode for the curb side walls is buckling. Buckling is a very dangerous
LIMITS OF SHEET METAL CURBS IN SEISMIC APPLICATIONS

PAGE 1 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.5
MEMBER
failure mode. It is a geometry-related failure, it occurs in regions of compression loading,

and always occurs at a stress that is much lower than the yield stress of the material.
Structures that have at least one cross-sectional dimension that is small compared to the
length or height dimension are candidates for a buckling type-failure. If one side wall
La or Lb
w
WOODEN
NAILER
H
t
Rh
Rw
Figure 6.2.5-2. Typical Curb Side Wall Elevation View.

buckle, the adjacent side walls may not be able to carry the additional load and may fail
as well. Thus, buckling, when it occurs, is a catastrophic failure. We cannot predict the
exact load at which buckling will occur. We can only predict a load above which buckling
may occur in a perfect curb side wall. The actual buckling limit may be much lower due to
dents and imperfections in the curb side walls.
Table 6.2.5-1 presents the allowable distributed weight load, wA', that may be applied to a
curb side wall as a function of the curb height, H, and the curb wall thickness, t. This table
is base on Table 6.2.3-1, and is expanded to include 12 gage sheet steel for the curb side
walls. The allowable distributed weight load, wA', includes a factor of safety of 2:1. As an
initial check on the suitability of using a sheet metal curb with the specified piece of
equipment, compute an average distributed weight load for the equipment assuming that
the equipment C.G. is located in the geometric center of the equipment. Equation 6.2.5-1
w = W/[2*(La+Lb)]
(Eq. 6.2.5-1)
provides an estimate for the distributed weight loading for an application. An example of
how this equation may be used in conjunction with Table 6.2.5-1 to determine the proper
specifications for a curb to carry a given piece of equipment is presented. In Equation
6.2.5-1 W is the total weight of the equipment supported by the curb.

PAGE 2 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.5
MEMBER
Table 6.2.5-1; Allowable Vertical Curb Wall Loading ( wA' ) (lb/in)

CURB
WALL
18 GAGE
16 GAGE
14 GAGE
12 GAGE
10 GAGE
t (in.)
0.0478
0.0598
0.0747
0.1046
0.1345
6.0
41.1
80.5
157
431
916
9.0
18.3
35.8
69.8
192
407
12.0
10.3
20.1
39.2
108
229
14.0
7.55
14.8
28.8
79.2
168
15.0
6.58
12.9
25.1
69.0
147
18.0
4.57
8.95
17.4
47.9
102
21.0
3.36
6.57
12.8
35.2
74.8
24.0
2.57
5.03
9.81
26.9
57.3
30.0
1.65
3.22
6.28
17.2
36.7
36.0
1.14
2.24
4.36
12.0
25.5
H
(in.)
Example No. 1:
W = 14,000 lbs.
La = 375 in.
Lb = 99 in.
w = 14,000/[2*(375+99)] = 14.8 lb/in
If, H = 14 in., and the application is for a non-essential facility in a low seismic area,
the minimum curb wall must be 16 gage commercial quality sheet steel. If the
application is for an essential facility, or a medium to high seismic area, then the
minimum curb wall should be 14 gage commercial quality sheet steel.
If, H = 24 in., and the application falls into any facility and any seismic area, the
minimum curb wall must be 12 gage commercial quality sheet steel.
The preceding example clearly shows that care must be used in selecting a sheet metal

PAGE 3 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.5
MEMBER
wa = w*[La/(La-Ld)]
(Eq. 6.2.5-2)
And, for the short sides of the curb, the modification is given below.
wb = w*[Lb/(Lb-Ld)]
(Eq. 6.2.5-3)
In Equations 6.2.5-2 and 6.2.5-3 wa and wb are the distributed weight loads on the long
and short sides of the curb, respectively, when a duct opening is present in the curb side
wall. The term Ld represents the length of the duct opening in the curb side wall. Example
No. 2 demonstrates how the presence of a duct opening can affect the load-bearing
capacity of a sheet metal curb.
Example No. 2:
W = 14,000 lbs.
La = 375 in.
Lb = 99 in.
Ld = 24 in. The duct opening is in the short sides.
w = 14,000/[2*(375+99)] = 14.8 lb/in
curb for any application. The example did not consider a piece of equipment where the
C.G. was offset from the geometric center of the equipment by a significant amount, or a
curb that has a large opening cut in the side wall to accommodate ductwork. The offset
C.G. will lead to a non-uniform weight distribution and a concentration of load on one side
or in one corner. If the C.G. is offset from the geometric center of the equipment by more
than 5% of the length or width, then a detailed analysis must be done to ensure that local
buckling is not an issue. Holes cut in the curb side walls drastically reduce the loadbearing capacity of the curb, and must be taken into account. The length of the curb side
wall affected by the opening must be subtracted from the length of the curb side wall.
Then, for the curb side wall with the duct opening, the result of Equation 6.2.5-1 may be
modified for the side with the duct opening as follows for the long sides of the curb.
wb = 14.8*[99/(99-24)] = 19.5 lb/in

If, H = 14 in., and the application is for a non-essential facility in a low seismic area,
the minimum curb wall for the side with the duct opening must be 14 gage
commercial quality sheet steel. If the application is for an essential facility, or a
medium to high seismic area, then the minimum curb wall should be 12 gage
commercial quality sheet steel.
When a duct opening is present, the curb wall with the opening will need to be made from
heavier gage sheet steel than the curb walls without the duct opening.

PAGE 4 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.5
MEMBER
Curb Side Wall Horizontal Seismic and Wind Load Bearing Capacity
SIDE A
SIDE D
SIDE B
FA
FD
FH
FC
FB
4
SIDE C
Figure 6.2.5-3. General Horizontal Load Distribution to the Curb Walls.
In Figure 6.2.5-3, the horizontal seismic and/or wind load, FH, will be distributed into the
four curb side walls. In the absence of evidence to the contrary, it is reasonable to
assume the following:
FA = FC = FH*Cos
(Eq. 6.2.5-4)
FB = FD = FH*Sin
(Eq. 6.2.5-5)
As with the weight bearing limit, the horizontal seismic and wind load bearing limit of the
curb side walls will be dependent upon the buckling limit of the curb walls. The shearing
loads enter the walls at the top of the curb and exit at the bottom. They remain in the
plane of the curb side wall. Thus, only horizontal loads that are parallel to the curb walls
will be carried by those walls. This is demonstrated in the curb plane view shown in
Figure 6.2.5-3.
and
The allowable horizontal seismic and wind loadings for various curb side wall material
gages and curb heights are given in Tables 6.2.5-2 through 6.2.5-6. These are values

PAGE 5 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.5
MEMBER
based on the critical buckling shear load for the curb side walls. The allowable loads given
in Tables 6.2.5-2 through 6.2.5-6 have a factor of safety of 2:1 with respect to the critical
buckling load built into them. In these tables, w is the maximum allowable vertical load
with no shear load applied.
SIDE A
SIDE D
SIDE B
Since the horizontal load enters the curb as a distributed load, the horizontal load that
may be resisted by a curb side wall will depend on its length. Thus, the shorter the curb
wall, the less its capacity to resist a horizontal seismic and/or wind load. The worst
possible seismic and/or wind load case for a sheet metal curb would be where the
horizontal load was parallel to the two short sides of the curb as illustrated in
Figure 6.2.5-4.
FD
FB
4
SIDE C
2
FH
Figure 6.2.5-4. Worst-Case Horizontal Load Distribution to the Curb Walls.
For this worst-case loading the force balance will give the following relationship.
(Eq. 6.2.5-6)
F H = FB + FD
For the purpose of determining the suitability of a particular curb for a given application, it
will be convenient to assume that

PAGE 6 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.5
MEMBER
(Eq. 6.2.5-7)
F = FB = FD = FH/2
The distributed load applied to the short side walls of the curb, f, will be as follows:
The actual value for FH will be determined through the application of the building code in
force for the project. Example No. 3 will illustrated the application of Tables 6.2.5-1
through 6.2.5-6.
Example No. 3:
W = 2,000 lbs.
La = 115 in.
Lb = 45 in.
H = 24 in.
w = 2,000/[2*(150+50)] = 5.00 lb/in
For an un-reinforced curb wall, the minimum sheet metal for the curb walls will be
16 Gage, see Table 6.2.5-1.
A.) FH = 0.50*W (0.5g)

FH = 0.50*2,000 = 1,000 lbs.
f = 1,000/(2*50) = 10.00 lb/in
From Table 6.2.5-3, for w = 5.0 lb/in, fA' = 25.4 lb/in. This curb will perform well
in this application.
(Eq. 6.2.5-8)
f = FH/(2*Lb)
B.) FH = 1.00*W (1g)

FH = 1.0*2,000 = 2,000 lbs.
f = 2,000/(2*50) = 20.00 lb/in
From Table 6.2.5-3, for w = 5.0 lb/in, fA' = 25.4 lb/in. This curb will perform well
in this application.

PAGE 7 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.5
MEMBER
C.) FH = 1.50*W (1.5g)

FH = 1.50*2,000 = 3,000 lbs.
From Table 6.2.5-3, for w = 5.0 lb/in, fA' = 25.4 lb/in. In this case, the curb is
inadequate. Table 6.2.5-3 also shows that even if the curb side walls were
reinforced to carry the equipment weight load, the curb would be inadequate
for the proposed seismic application. In order to have a 24 in. high curb in
this seismic application, the minimum curb side wall would need to be
14 gage.
Duct openings will drastically reduce the ability of a curb wall to carry a horizontal seismic
and/or wind load. In the presence of a duct opening, the load applied to a long side of the
curb, fa, will be given by
fa = f*[La/(La-Ld)]
(Eq. 6.2.5-2)
In the presence of a duct opening, the load applied to the short side of the curb, fb, will be
fb = f*[Lb/(Lb-Ld)]
(Eq. 6.2.5-3)
The effects of a duct opening on the seismic load carrying ability of the curb are illustrated
in Example No. 4.
Example No. 4:
W = 2,000 lbs.
La = 150 in.
Lb = 50 in.
Ld = 25 in. (Duct opening in short curb side.)
H = 24 in.
t = 16 Gage = 0.0598 in. (Curb side wall material thickness.)
f = 3,000/(2*50) = 30.00 lb/in
w = 2,000/[2*(150+50)] = 5.00 lb/in

wb = 5.00*[50/(50-25)] = 10.00 lb/in
FH = 0.50*W (0.5g)
FH = 0.50*2,000 = 1,000 lbs.

PAGE 8 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.5
MEMBER
f = 1,000/(2*50) = 10.00 lb/in

fb = 10.00*[50/(50-25)] = 20.00 lb/in
The applicability of sheet metal curbs in seismic applications will be limited by many
different factors. Each proposed application must be individually assessed to determine its
suitability for a seismic or high wind installation. The tables and examples presented in
this document will allow the reader to make a rough estimate on the suitability of a sheet
metal curb for their application. However, the manufacturer of the curb, or Kinetics Noise
Control as the manufacture of the seismic restraints should be consulted for a detailed
assessment of the curb and its application. Kinetics Noise Control has developed a
generalized analysis of sheet metal curbs based on the buckling strength of the curb side
walls. This analysis is used to specify the number of horizontal and vertical restraints
required to resist the code-determined loadings. The analysis will also determine whether
vertical reinforcement will enhance the application of the curb.
The presence of a duct opening moves the curb specified in this example from
being adequate for a 0.5g application to being inadequate. The curb wall with the
duct opening would need to have a minimum material thickness of 14 gage.

PAGE 9 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.5
MEMBER
Table 6.2.5-2; Allowable Horizontal Seismic & Wind Curb Wall Loading ( fA' ) (lb/in)
---------
w
(lb/in
w'
(lb/in)
H
(in)
82.3
0.0
2.5
5.0
10.0
15.0
25.0
50.0
75.0
150
6.0
233
231
230
227
224
218
200
170
N/A
36.6
9.0
104
102
101
97.8
94.5
86.4
N/A
N/A
N/A
20.6
12.0
58.3
56.9
55.4
52.0
47.7
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
15.1
14.0
42.7
41.3
39.8
35.9
27.6
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
13.2
15.0
37.3
35.9
34.4
30.1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
9.14
18.0
25.9
24.4
22.7
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
6.71
21.0
19.0
17.5
15.4
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
5.14
24.0
14.5
13.0
9.87
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
4.06
27.0
11.5
9.83
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
3.29
30.0
9.31
7.50
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
2.72
33.0
7.69
5.59
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
2.28
36.0
6.45
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
CURB WALL: 18 GAGE; t = 0.0478 in

PAGE 10 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.5
MEMBER
---------
w
(lb/in)
w'
(lb/in)
H
(in)
161
0.0
2.5
5.0
10.0
15.0
25.0
50.0
75.0
150
6.0
455
454
453
450
447
442
426
409
327
71.6
9.0
203
201
200
197
194
188
168
N/A
N/A
40.3
12.0
114
113
111
108
105
97.4
N/A
N/A
N/A
29.6
14.0
83.7
82.4
80.9
77.8
74.3
64.4
N/A
N/A
N/A
25.8
15.0
73.0
71.6
70.2
67.0
63.2
49.9
N/A
N/A
N/A
17.9
18.0
50.6
49.3
47.8
44.2
39.1
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
13.1
21.0
37.1
35.7
34.1
29.8
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
10.1
24.0
28.6
27.1
25.4
18.6
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
7.95
27.0
22.5
21.0
19.2
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
6.44
30.0
18.2
16.7
14.6
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
5.32
33.0
15.0
13.5
10.7
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
4.47
36.0
12.6
11.0
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A

PAGE 11 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.5
MEMBER
---------
w
(lb/in)
w'
(lb/in)
H
(in)
314
0.0
2.5
5.0
10.0
15.0
25.0
50.0
75.0
150
6.0
888
887
885
883
880
875
860
846
795
140
9.0
396
395
393
391
388
382
366
348
N/A
78.5
12.0
222
221
219
217
214
207
189
155
N/A
57.7
14.0
163
162
160
158
155
148
124
N/A
N/A
50.2
15.0
142
141
139
136
133
126
90.6
N/A
N/A
34.9
18.0
98.7
97.4
96.0
92.9
89.6
81.2
N/A
N/A
N/A
25.6
21.0
72.4
71.0
69.6
66.4
62.6
48.8
N/A
N/A
N/A
19.6
24.0
55.4
54.1
52.6
49.2
44.6
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
15.5
27.0
43.8
42.5
40.9
37.1
30.0
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
12.6
30.0
35.6
34.2
32.6
28.2
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
10.4
33.0
29.4
28.0
26.3
20.3
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
8.72
36.0
24.7
23.2
21.4
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A

PAGE 12 OF14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.5
MEMBER
---------
w
(lb/in)
w'
(lb/in)
H
(in)
862
6.0
2,438 2,437 2,435 2,433 2,430 2,425 2,411 2,397 2,355
383
9.0
1,083 1,082 1,081 1,078 1,075 1,070 1,056 1,041
215
12.0
608
607
605
603
600
594
580
564
504
158
14.0
447
446
444
441
439
433
418
400
314
138
15.0
390
389
388
385
382
376
361
342
N/A
95.8
18.0
271
270
268
266
263
257
239
216
N/A
70.4
21.0
199
198
196
194
191
184
164
N/A
N/A
53.9
24.0
152
151
150
147
144
137
110
N/A
N/A
42.6
27.0
120
119
118
115
112
104
N/A
N/A
N/A
34.5
30.0
97.6
96.2
94.8
91.8
88.4
80.0
N/A
N/A
N/A
28.5
33.0
80.6
79.3
77.8
74.7
71.1
60.6
N/A
N/A
N/A
23.9
36.0
67.6
66.2
64.8
61.5
57.6
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
0.0
2.5
5.0
10.0
15.0
25.0
50.0
75.0
150
993

PAGE 13 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.5
MEMBER
---------
w
(lb/in)
w'
(lb/in)
H
(in)
1,833
6.0
5,185 5,183 5,182 5,179 5,177 5,171 5,158 5,144 5,103
814
9.0
2,302 2,301 2,300 2,297 2,294 2,289 2,275 2,262 2,219
458
12.0
1,295 1,294 1,293 1,290 1,287 1,282 1,268 1,254 1,208
337
14.0
953
952
951
948
945
940
926
911
861
293
15.0
829
827
826
823
821
815
801
786
734
204
18.0
577
576
574
572
569
563
549
532
471
150
21.0
424
423
422
419
416
410
395
377
260
115
24.0
325
324
323
320
317
311
295
275
N/A
90.5
27.0
256
255
253
251
248
242
224
199
N/A
73.3
30.0
207
206
205
202
199
193
173
N/A
N/A
60.6
33.0
171
170
169
166
163
156
133
N/A
N/A
50.9
36.0
144
143
141
138
135
128
95.9
N/A
N/A
0.0
2.5
5.0
10.0
15.0
25.0
50.0
75.0
150

PAGE 14 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.5
MEMBER
1. The seismic load carrying capability of a sheet metal roof curb is greatly
improved with the addition of sufficient vertical reinforcement to the curb walls
to carry the weight load of the equipment. Reinforcement in the form of treated
wooden 2 X 2s is adequate. A minimum of three per side is required: one at
each end and one in the middle. More reinforcement may be required for tall,
narrow equipment particularly in conjunction with high seismic loads.
2. Provisions must be made to transfer vertical uplift loads produced by seismic or
wind forces directly to the roof structure without producing excess bending in
the curb wall.
3. For light-gage curbs, horizontal loads may be transmitted only in the plane of
the curb walls. Opposite curb walls will carry similar loads.
4. For design purposes, the short sides of the curb must be able to carry the entire
horizontal seismic or wind load.
5. If the Center of Gravity (CG) of the equipment is more than 10% off of the
geometric center of the plan view of the curb special attention must be given to
more heavily loaded portions of the curb. CG variation greater than that
mentioned above causes high stresses and possible local buckling of the curb
in the corner carrying the highest weight.
6. Large penetrations (larger than a screw or bolt hole) of the curb walls for
ductwork, piping, and power cable conduits are not be permitted unless the
penetration has been adequately reinforced. Adequate reinforcement shall
consist of enough treated wood 2 X 2s to carry the weight load of the
equipment across the penetration, see Document 6.2.3. Also, the curb wall is to
be reinforced with sheet metal of a thickness equal to that of the curb wall. The
width of this reinforcement is to be not less than 2 inches, see Document 6.2.3.
This is necessary to transfer the horizontal seismic force around the
penetration. The allowable seismic load of the side with the penetration and its
opposite side should also be reduced by 50%.
Rules for Sheet Metal Curbs in Seismic Applications
RULES FOR SHEET METAL CURBS IN SEISMIC APPLICATIONS

PAGE 1 OF 1

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D6.2.6
MEMBER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SUSPENDED EQUIPMENT
Seismic Forces Acting On Equipment
D10.1
Basic Primer for Suspended Equipment with Cable Restraints
D10.2
Pros and Cons of Struts versus Cables
D10.3
Layout Requirements for Suspended Equipment

Requirements for Suspended Equipment Restraints
(Definitions and Locating Requirements)
D10.4.1
Suspended Equipment Restraint Arrangements
D10.4.2
Suspended Equipment Restraint Attachment Details

Transferring Forces
D10.5.1
Cable Clamp Details
D10.5.2
Suspended Equipment Attachment Details
D10.5.3
Structural Attachment Details
D10.5.4
Connection Options for Awkward Situations
D10.6
Chapter D10

SUSPENDED EQUIPMENT

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
PAGE:
D10.0
MEMBER
Seismic Forces Acting on Suspended Equipment
In most cases, equipment is suspended from the deck above on either fixed or isolated
hanger rod systems. On more rare occasions the equipment may be bolted directly to the
underside of the structure without the inclusion of hanger rods. For the later, the
anchorage must be assumed to resist the seismic as well as gravity forces. When
mounted on hanger rods, struts or cables are used to absorb the seismic forces.
When working with suspended equipment, unlike piping and ductwork, the codes in
general do not identify global exemptions. Refer to the code section for specific
exemptions, but in general equipment less than 15 pounds in weight does not require the
installation of purpose built seismic restraint componentry. Conventional attachment is
assumed to be adequate.
When installing restraints on hanging equipment, it must be kept from moving in any
horizontal direction. The use of cable restraints or struts can induce uplifting forces at
their attachment point and if these overcome gravity forces, devices to resist this uplift are
also required.
Whether restraining equipment with cables or struts, a minimum of 4 restraints are
needed for each piece of equipment. Cables are typically connected to the equipment
corners (approx) and run in a direction diagonal to the unit. When looking up at the
equipment, each cable should be oriented at approximately 90 degrees to the cables on
either side of it creating a paddle wheel look with 4 paddles.
When struts are used, they can be oriented like the cables or they can be oriented as
shown below.
When subjected to an earthquake, Suspended equipment must resist all lateral forces,
without regard to their direction. The restraint components for these systems must resist
pullout and localized structural failures. Unlike piping and ductwork, there are rarely
concerns about the buckling of the equipment. Generally the equipment is assumed to be
rugged enough to maintain it shape throughout the seismic event.
SEISMIC FORCES ACTING ON HANGING EQUIPMENT

PAGE 1 OF 3

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.1
MEMBER
The requirement for 4 struts is to prevent the rotation of the equipment that will occur if 2
struts are used that do not line up exactly with the equipments center of gravity.
The net result is that for cable systems or for struts loaded in tension, the uplift force
caused by the cable or strut can be greater than the downward weight load from the
equipment. Depending on the support rod length and stiffness, this can cause the support
rod to buckle. Rod stiffeners are used to protect against this condition and sizing
information is available in Chapter D4 of this manual.
Unlike cables, if struts are used for restraint they can also be loaded in compression. The
hanger rod and its anchorage for these applications must be designed to accommodate
these combined loads. Hanger rod sizing information is also available in Chapter D4 of
this manual.
Proper Use of Force Class Tables when evaluating Hanging Equipment
The Force Class tables presented in Chapter D4 can be used to size cables, struts,
hanger rods and stiffeners for equipment as well as for ductwork. Table 1 and 1A (D4.5)
tailored with appropriate values for the equipment type (note that this may be different
than the values used for piping or ductwork in the same structure) is the first table of
interest.
Because this table is based on weight per foot of the piping or ductwork, it requires a
modification before being used directly. Using the 10 ft OC spacing table, multiply the
values in the weight per ft column by 10 to produce a table that reads directly in pounds.
All values within the output portion of the 10 ft OC table remain unchanged.
The total equipment weight can then be compared to the modified values in the weight
column and the elevation in the structure to the appropriate elevation column to determine
the force class (or lateral restraint in pounds) that is required to properly restrain the
equipment.
Ideally, the restraint members should be at as shallow an angle as possible (mostly

horizontal). As the angle becomes steeper (the restraint member becomes more vertical),
the vertical forces in the hanger rods increase. At 45 degrees the vertical force equals the
horizontal force and at 60 degrees the vertical force is 1.73 times the horizontal force.
Tables 2 and 3 (D4.6) deal with piping and ductwork only and are not required when
working with equipment.
Tables 4a, b, c all deal with sizing hanger rods, rod anchorage, struts and rod stiffeners.
These can be used directly, inputting the weight for the worst case support location and
the Force Class as determined above.

PAGE 2 OF 3

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.1
MEMBER
The final Tables (5 and 5a) in section D4.8 of the manual can also be used directly to size
cables, anchors and anchorage hardware components based on the Force Class or the
lateral restraint force in pounds requirement that was previously determined.
A more detailed explanation of the use of these tables is in section D4.4 of the manual.

PAGE 3 OF 3

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.1
MEMBER
Basic Primer for Suspended Equipment
Because of the impact that failures of these systems have had in the past, design
requirements for piping systems and interfacing equipment have become much more
stringent.
Within a building structure, there are multitudes of different kinds of systems, each with its
own function and requirements, many of which interface with suspended equipment or are
in the immediate proximity of this equipment. Significant effort must be expended to
ensure that motion of the equipment induced by an earthquake will not damage
surrounding systems or the equipment itself.
This chapter of the manual is a how to guide and will deal only with the proper
installation and orientation of restraints and not whether or not they are required by
code, which can be researched further in Chapter D2, or by specification.
This chapter also does not address the sizing of restraint hardware. Section D10.1
and Chapter D4 include sections on sizing componentry based on the design
seismic force and the weight of the system being restrained and should be
consulted for this task.
Process equipment is not directly associated with building operating systems and often
has its own set of requirements. If there are no applicable special requirements, this
equipment should be restrained in a similar fashion to the building mechanical systems.
This manual will not address any special requirements for non-building processes.
Failures in piping systems resulting from earthquakes have historically resulted in large
quantities of water or other materials being dumped into occupied spaces of the building
structure. The resulting dollar damage to the building and its contents is often
considerably more than the costs of damage to the building structure itself. In addition,
failure of the buildings mechanical systems can render the structure unoccupiable until
the damage is corrected, and result in major problems for the tenants and/or owners.
BASIC PRIMER FOR SUSPENDED EQUIPMENT

PAGE 1 OF 1

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.2
MEMBER
Pros and Cons of Struts Versus Cables
When restraining equipment there is typically no difference in the number of restraints

needed. This is unlike piping or ductwork where normally a single strut can replace 2
cable assemblies. The difference between equipment and piping/ductwork is that the
equipment is small enough that in addition to swinging laterally from a seismic input, it can
easily rotate. 2 struts acting at 90 degrees to one another cannot resist this rotation.
Under some cases it can be resisted using 3 struts properly aligned, but unless carefully
reviewed a minimum of 4 struts are recommended.
The obvious advantage to struts is that, when space is at a premium, cables angling up to
the ceiling on each side of a piece of equipment may take more space than is available.
Struts can be fitted to one side only, allowing a more narrow packaging arrangement.
There are three significant advantages of cables, where they can be used. First, they
cannot increase the tensile forces in the hanger rod that results from the weight load, so
rod and rod anchorage capacities are not impacted. Second, they are easily set to the
proper length. And third, they are well suited to isolated equipment applications.
To better explain the differences between the systems, it is necessary to look at how
seismic forces are resisted with cables and struts. Shown below are sketches of both
cable-restrained and strut-restrained equipment.
Both cables and struts have their place in the restraint of equipment. In order to minimize
costs and speed up installation, the differences between the two should be understood.
Cable Restrained
PROS AND CONS OF STRUTS VERSUS CABLES

PAGE 1 OF 3

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.3
MEMBER
The key factor to note is that cables can only be loaded in tension. This means that
seismic forces can only generate compressive loads in the hanger rod. Seismic forces
can, however, load the strut in compression resulting in a tensile load on the hanger rod.
This tensile load is in addition to any deadweight load that may already be supported by
the hanger and is often significantly higher than the original load. This has the potential to
rip the hanger rod out of the support structure and must be considered when sizing
components.
Because of this added tensile component and the resulting impact on the necessary
hanger rod size, most strut manufacturers limit the maximum allowable strut angle (to the
horizontal) to 45 degrees. This is lower than typical allowable angles for cables that often
reach 60 degrees from the horizontal. Although the tables listed in Chapter D4 of this
manual allow the use of higher angles for strut systems, users will find that the penalties
in hanger rod size and anchorage will likely make these higher angles unusable in
practice.
It should also be noted that the hanger rods in tension become seismic elements. This
occurs with struts, but does not with cables. As a result, the system must comply with all
of the anchor requirements specified by ICBO. This includes the use of wedge-type
anchors and embedment depths that are a minimum of 8 anchor diameters. With larger
anchor sizes, floor slab thickness may cause this to become a significant problem.
Strut Restrained
With both cables and struts, the hanger rods can be loaded in compression. As the
seismic force increases, it eventually overcomes the force of gravity and produces a
buckling load in the hanger rod. It is mandatory in all cases that the rod be able to resist
this force.
There is a wide range of variables involved in determining the need for rod stiffeners to
resist this buckling load. Factors that impact this need are 1) the magnitude of the
compressive force, 2) the weight load carried by the hanger rod, 3) the length of the
hanger rod, 4) the diameter of the hanger rod, and 5) the angle between the restraint strut

PAGE 2 OF 3

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.3
MEMBER
or cable and the horizontal axis.

Tables are included in Chapter D4 of this manual that allow the user to determine if there
is a need for a stiffener and to allow the proper selection if required.
Second, a limit stop must be fit to the hanger rod, just beneath the hanger such that when
the rod is pushed upward a rigid connection is made between the hanger housing and the
hanger rod that prevents upward motion. This is accomplished by adding a washer and
nut to the hanger rod just below the isolator (see the sketch below).
Because uplift occurs, some attention must be given to isolated systems. First, when
using isolators, the location of the isolation element needs to be at the top end of the
hanger rod (close to, but not tight against the ceiling). If placed at the middle of the
hanger rod, the rod/isolator combination will have virtually no resistance to bending and
will quickly buckle under an uplift load.

PAGE 3 OF 3

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.3
MEMBER
Requirements for Suspended Equipment Restraints

Definitions and Locating Requirements
With respect to the conceptual restraint arrangement illustrations, many of the SMACNA
concepts are appropriate and are referenced here.
In general, equipment is restrained on a unit by unit basis and the concept of runs as
defined in the piping and ductwork sections of the manual are not appropriate. In places
where there are long lengths of pipe or duct integral to the equipment (like radiant
heaters), that portion of the equipment should be restrained in the same manner as piping
or ductwork. More information on this can be found in the piping/ductwork Chapters of the
manual on this.
Also, in some cases, small pieces of equipment may be hard mounted into the ductwork.
Under some conditions (see the code section of the manual), these can be treated as part
of the duct and properly restraining the duct will result in acceptable restraint of the
equipment. This is not true if the equipment is connected to the duct using a flexible
material.
Definitions
Lateral A horizontal force acting on the equipment in any direction.
Restraint A device that limits the motion of the equipment in any horizontal direction.
While SMACNA has developed a set of restraint placement criteria based on analytical
review, practical experience, and historical analysis for piping and ductwork, their material
does not address the restraint of equipment. The criterion presented in this manual is
generally based on SMACNA concepts and criteria, except that it is modified to make it
appropriate for use on equipment applications. The only exception to this is that the data
has been extrapolated to higher seismic force levels and hardware capacity limited forces
and is not limited by buckling issues as is the case with piping and ductwork.
Rod Stiffener A component added to a hanger rod to prevent it from buckling

Restraint Requirements
1) Equipment must be restrained against a lateral force that can act in any direction.
Multiple restraint components may be required to accomplish this task.
2) For long modularized equipment (20 ft or longer), additional restraints should be
installed so the span between the restraints does not exceed 20 ft.
DEFINITIONS AND LOCATING REQUIREMENTS

PAGE 1 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.4.1
MEMBER
3) Restraints must be connected to substantial attachment points on the equipment or to

equipment support members that are in turn connected substantially to the equipment.
Hardware in size equal to that identified for the restraint attachment (Chapter D4)
should be used to attach the equipment.
5) With longer hanger rods, rod stiffeners are likely to be required. Refer to the
appropriate table in Chapter D4 to determine: (1) if needed, (2) what size stiffener
material is appropriate, and (3) how frequently it needs to be clamped to the hanger
rod.
6) In addition to possibly requiring rod stiffeners, when struts are used to restrain
equipment, the size of the hanger rod and its anchorage also become critical. Again
refer to the appropriate table in Chapter D4 to determine the minimum allowable size
for the hanger rod and anchor.
7)
4) All restraints for a given piece of equipment must be the same. (You cannot mix struts
and cables.)
There is no hanger rod length or component size based exclusion rules for
equipment as there is for piping or ductwork with the following exception. If the
equipment is hard connected to a duct, small enough to be considered part of the
duct (see appropriate code section) and the duct is exempted by one of these rules,
the equipment can also be considered to be exempted.
DEFINITIONS AND LOCATING REQUIREMENTS

PAGE 2 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.4.1
MEMBER
Suspended Equipment Restraint Arrangements
Details of the end connections and anchorage hardware are shown in subsequent
sections of the manual. It is assumed in this manual that the restraint component is
attached to a structural element capable of resisting the design seismic load.
Due to variations in the installation conditions such as structural clearance, locations of
structural attachment points, and interference with other pieces of equipment or systems,
there will likely be significant benefits to using different arrangements in different locations
on the same job.
The only significant caution here is that it is not permissible to mix struts and cables on
the same piece of equipment.
This manual addresses diagonal bracing slopes of between horizontal and 60 degrees
from the horizontal. Angles in excess of 60 degrees to the horizontal are not permitted.
Although the basic principle of diagonal bracing is almost always used to design restraint
systems, the actual arrangement of these systems can vary significantly. Despite what
looks like substantially different designs, the design forces in the members remain the
same, and the same rules apply when sizing components. Illustrated here are many
different restraint arrangements, all of which can be used in conjunction with the design
rules provided in this manual.
When installing restraints, each individual restraint should be installed perpendicular

(10 degrees) to the adjacent restraint as viewed from underneath. In addition, the
restraints should be approximately aligned with the center of gravity of the piece of
equipment being restrained. Although it is typical to install restraints at each corner
extending radially outward from the piece of equipment, this arrangement is not
SUSPENDED EQUIPMENT RESTRAINT ARRANGEMENTS

PAGE 1 OF 8

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.4.2
MEMBER
mandatory. See the sketches below.
(4 Restraint Options, Restraint angles can vary 10 degrees from those shown)
(8 Restraint Options, Restraint angles can vary 10 degrees from those shown)
(4 Strut Option, Restraint angles can vary 10 degrees from those shown)

PAGE 2 OF 8

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.4.2
MEMBER
In general, when restraining equipment, the component actually being restrained is the
member that supports the equipment rather than the equipment itself. This is normally a
trapeze bar. Because the goal is to restrain the actual equipment, it is necessary that the
restrained element be connected to the equipment in such a way as to transfer the
appropriate forces between the two.
Hanging Equipment Restrained with Cables

(Note on these and all sections below, the cables must be oriented in the plan view as
identified earlier in the paper.)
Restraint Examples
For some pieces of equipment that are intended to be suspended, mounting points are
normally provided. An example is an axial flow fan. For these kinds of equipment the
restraints and the supporting hangers are normally connected to these mounting points
directly as shown below. This arrangement works with both isolated and non-isolated
systems. Note that the isolators are mounted with minimal clearance to the structure and
that a travel limiting washer is fitted to the hanger rod just below the isolator in the isolated
arrangement.
If using the Force Class tables, the minimum bolt size used should equal or exceed the
listed bolt size for a Bolted type connection for the restraint (Table 5/5a in section D4.8).
If using a certified calculation as provided by Kinetics Noise Control, the minimum bolt
size will be identified on the calculation document.
Cable Restraints used to restrain an Axial Flow Fan (Non-isolated)

PAGE 3 OF 8

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.4.2
MEMBER
Most equipment however is mounted using a trapeze bar arrangement. There are many
options that exist for the arrangements of restraints used in conjunction with trapezemounted systems. Shown below are several options for both non-isolated and isolated
cable-restrained systems.
\_/ (TOP)
BOXED
\_/ (BOTTOM)
\_/ (TOP)
SUSPENDED
Cable Restraints used to restrain an Axial Flow Fan (Isolated)
Typical Cable Restraint Arrangements Mounted to a Trapeze (Non-isolated)

PAGE 4 OF 8

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.4.2
MEMBER
In addition to the conventional \_/ mounting arrangement, where there is sufficient room
above the equipment, and X type of arrangement shown below can often be an attractive
alternative.
X (TOP)
BOXED
X Type Cable Restraint Arrangement Mounted to a Trapeze (Non-isolated)
\_/ (TOP)
BOXED
\_/ (BOTTOM)
\_/ (TOP)
SUSPENDED
Typical Cable Restraint Arrangements Mounted to a Trapeze (Isolated)

PAGE 5 OF 8

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.4.2
MEMBER
X Type Cable Restraint Arrangements Mounted to a Trapeze (Isolated)

Hanging Equipment Restrained with Struts
(Note on these and all sections below, the cables must be oriented in the plan view as
identified earlier in the paper.)
It is recommended that struts not be used to restrain isolated equipment. Struts will
generate hard connections between the equipment and structure and will greatly reduce
the efficiency of the isolation system. Having said that, in some special situations it may
be possible to design restraint struts with integral isolation elements, but this is tedious
and should be avoided unless drastic measures are required.
Restraint Examples
For a strut-restrained piece of equipment with integral attachment points located away
from the top surface, there is only one common arrangement. It is to connect the restraint
and the support to the attachment point as shown below.
X (TOP)
TRAPPED
Strut Restraint Arrangement for Axial Fan (Non-Isolated only)

If the connection points for the equipment are on the top surface, the strut can be angled
in the opposite direction as shown below.

PAGE 6 OF 8

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.4.2
MEMBER
Shown below are 4 options for trapeze-mounted equipment. All are equivalent.
4 Arrangements for the restraint of Trapeze mounted equipment with Struts

Special Cases
Equipment Supported at 2 points
When equipment is supported on only 2 points, caution must be used to ensure that the
restraints are connected in such a way as to prevent lateral motion of the equipment
without allowing it to sway and put undo stress on the hanger rods. Classic examples of
this type of equipment are Unit Heaters.
The condition of concern is illustrated below.

PAGE 7 OF 8

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.4.2
MEMBER
In order to keep this swaying motion from occurring, it is necessary to ensure that on the
axis where swaying can occur, the restraints connect to the equipment at its vertical
center of gravity (approx). This is not necessary on the opposite axis. See Below.
Possible Sway in Equipment Mounted on 2 Support Hanger Rods
Acceptable Restraint Attachment Elevations for Double Rod Supported Equipment

PAGE 8 OF 8

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.4.2
MEMBER
Transferring Forces (Suspended Equipment)
The next several sections of this manual will deal with specific components used to clamp
cable ends together or anchor cables or struts to steel members, wood members, and
concrete or masonry. There are several types of connections used for each of these
conditions, and each type of connection requires some degree of care and understanding
to achieve full capacity.
There are a few general rules that apply when adding restraints to systems. These are
listed below along with a few comments meant to provide a basic understanding or
rationale.
1) Friction generally cannot be counted on when dealing with dynamic, seismic load
conditions. Connections, with the following exceptions, should be positive in nature
and not require friction to ensure their continued long-term operation.
Exceptions:
A) Cable end connections (swaged ends, u-bolts, Gripple clips, and cable nuts can
be used with appropriate installation procedures).
B) Toothed strut nuts used in conjunction with a purpose-designed strut material
(Unistrut, for example).
(Rationale: Permitted friction connections have been well researched and deal with a
narrow range of applications. In addition, once properly tightened, the components
are such that the likelihood of their coming loose as a result of seismic load conditions
is very low.)
2) Anchors used for the support of overhead equipment cannot also be used for the
anchorage of seismic restraints. (Rationale: The loads used to size hanger rods and
anchors are based on the weight loads generated by the piping system. Seismic
forces can increase the tensile loads significantly, and the combination of loads can
cause the anchorage to fail.)
In order for a restraint system to do its job, all elements of the connections need to be
sized and installed properly. Because of the large variety and quantity of interfacing
conditions in any given installation, suspended systems in general are prone to problems
in this area.
3) Anchors to concrete must comply with minimum edge distance, spacing, and slab
thickness requirements. To achieve full capacity ratings they must further not be
installed into a surface containing significant tensile forces. (Rationale: All anchorage
must be in compliance with ICC allowables for seismic applications. Unless otherwise
noted, it is assumed that connections are not made to the underside of structural
concrete beams.)
4) Screws attached to wood must comply with minimum edge distance, spacing, and
TRANSFERRING FORCES (SUSPENDED EQUIPMENT)

PAGE 1 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.1
MEMBER
embedment requirements, and must further not be embedded into the end grain of the
wooden member. (Rationale: All wood anchorage must be in compliance with NDS
allowables for seismic applications. Full capacity can only be achieved with adequate
embedment, end, and edge distances into the side grain of structural wood members.)
6) Connections that have the potential to generate significant lateral loads on the weak
axis of I-beams or channels used as joists or columns are not permitted unless
approved by the structural engineer of record. (Rationale: Floor or roof support beams
are significantly weaker in their minor axis than in their major axis. While they can,
under some conditions, withstand some lateral loads, the engineer of record should be
consulted to ensure that capacity exists on particular members to withstand the
anticipated loads. If these loads are exceeded, catastrophic failures can quickly
result.)
7) Holes should not be added to key structural members without prior authorization from
the engineer of record. (Rationale: The addition of holes, particularly in flanges, can
greatly reduce the structural capacity.
5) Connections that have the potential to expose open bar joist chords to significant
lateral loads are not permitted. (Rationale: Open joists are notoriously weak in their
lateral axis. They are not designed to take loads, particularly on the lower cord, and
even light lateral loads can generate buckling and quickly cause catastrophic failure.)
TRANSFERRING FORCES (SUSPENDED EQUIPMENT)

PAGE 2 OF 2

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.1
MEMBER
Cable Clamp Details

There are three different types of cable clamp arrangements that are acceptable for use
on Kinetics Noise Control cable restraint systems. These are factory swaged, clamped
with U-bolt cable clips, and connections made using seismically rated Gripple
connectors. Other types of connections have either not been tested, or when tested do
not meet the capacity standards required for consistent performance.
When so ordered, one end of a cable assembly can be obtained with a factory-swaged
connection. Crimping a zinc-coated copper or a stainless steel sleeve onto a cable loop
at the termination point makes these connections. Multiple crimp locations are required
with the actual number varying based on the cable size. To obtain a seismic rating, these
swaged connections must be performed using the appropriate calibrated hydraulic press
and must not use aluminum sleeves. Field-swaged connections and in particular those
made using hand crimping tools are not suitable for seismic applications. All Kinetics
Noise Control computed seismic certifications are based on capacities obtained from
components provided by Kinetics Noise Control. No certifications can be offered on
components crimped by others.
Swaged Connector
U-Bolt Cable Clip Connections
Factory-Swaged Connections
For larger cables, as an option to the seismically rated Grippleon smaller cables, and
where field connections are necessary or desired, U-bolt cable clips can be used. When
used, a minimum of three clips is required per connection for sizes up to 3/8cable. For
1/2cables a minimum of four clips is required per connection.
CABLE CLAMP DETAILS

PAGE 1 OF 7

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.2
MEMBER
SADDLE
CABLE CLIPS
When fitting cable clips, the saddle side of the clip must always be against the live
portion of the cable. The liveside of the cable is the side that does not terminate at the
connection, but continues to the clip at the opposite end.
CORRECT
INSTALLATION
NOT LIKE
THIS
Failure to orient the clip in the proper fashion will cause premature failure of the cable
assembly.
While proper tightening of the clip nuts and adequate turnback (or overlap) length of the
cable is important, tests conducted have found that it is not as critical for seismic
applications as it is for lifting applications. Reasonable variations from the values listed
below have a minimal impact on the capacity of the connection. Below is a table with the
desired minimum tightening torques recommended by clip manufacturers, clip quantities,
and turnback lengths listed for various sized cables.
U-Bolt Cable Clips
Minimum
Minimum
Amount of Rope
Torque in
Cable Size Number
Turnback/Inches
Ft. Lbs.
in Inches of Clips
1/8
3/16
1/4
3/8
1/2
3
3
3
3
4
3-3/4
3-3/4
4-3/4
6-1/2
11-1/2
3
4.5
15
30
45
CABLE CLAMP DETAILS

PAGE 2 OF 7

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.2
MEMBER
Gripple Connections
Gripple Connector
GRIPPLE Installation Procedure

1) Feed the proper sized cable as provided by Kinetics Noise Control through the Gripple
as shown.
FEED CABLE THROUGH GRIPPLE

IN DIRECTION OF ARROW
For smaller cables (up to 5mm (metric) and up to 3/16 (English)), special proprietary
Grippleconnection clips can be used. These clips offer significant benefits in speed of
installation and can be used in a large variety of common light-duty applications. When
using Gripple connectors or Gripple restraint connection kits, it is critical that
seismically rated components are used. While Kinetics Noise Control offers only
seismically rated components, those supplied by others may not be. Grippleconnectors
for sizes in excess of 5mm or 3/16are not appropriate for seismic installations as they
will not seat properly and consistently without the application of a constant tensile load.
2) Loop the cable through the attachment bracket or hardware. If the cable rides against
any sharp corners (not counting the hole in the Kinetics Noise Control provided
bracket itself) or is subject to excessive vibration in service, fit the Kinetics Noise
Control provided thimble in the loop and then feed the cable back through the opposite
side of the GRIPPLE.
CABLE CLAMP DETAILS

PAGE 3 OF 7

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.2
MEMBER
3) Remove the slack from the cable by slipping the cable through the GRIPPLE, but
leave the loop slightly oversized to allow later tensioning.
STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENT
POINT (ACTUAL HARDARE AND
GEOMETRY CAN VARY FROM
THAT SHOWN)
CONCRETE OR STEEL
STRUCTURE BY OTHERS
DURING INITIAL INSTALLATION

LEAVE LOOP SLIGHTLY OVERSIZE
EQUIPMENT ATTACHMENT POINT

(ACTUAL HARDWARE AND GEOMETRY
CAN VARY FROM THAT SHOWN)
4) Apply a sideways load to the cable by pulling or pushing on it to fully seat the
GRIPPLE.
LOOP CABLE AROUND BRACKET

(INSERT THIMBLE IF CABLE RUBS
ON A SHARP CORNER OR VIBRATION
IS AN ISSUE) AND THEN FEED
CABLE BACK THROUGH GRIPPLE IN
DIRECTION OF ARROW
PUSH SIDEWAYS ON CABLE

TO SET JAW IN GRIPPLE
CABLE CLAMP DETAILS

PAGE 4 OF 7

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.2
MEMBER
5) When seating the GRIPPLE, jaws will ride up an internal ramp in the GRIPPLE itself
and bite into the cable. In a properly seated GRIPPLE, the cable will shift
approximately 1-1/2 cable diameters (the preset distance) as the jaws engage. If need
be, mark the cable to check the preset. This step may be required initially, but once a
feelfor it is obtained, this is no longer necessary. Once the 1-1/2 cable diameter
preset dimension has been obtained, the GRIPPLE is adequately seated.
PRESET DIMENSION
MEASUREMENT
LOCATION
6) Once fully seated, any additional slack should be removed from the cable restraint by
pulling on the dead end or tailof the cable sticking out of the GRIPPLE. If Isolated,
the cables should not be made tight, but should instead be left slightly loose to prevent
the transfer of vibrations into the structure. (Slightly loose could be defined as having
approx 1/8 to 1/4of visible sag in the cable 1/8 for short cables (up to 2 ft), 1/4 for
cables longer than that.)
APPROX
1-1/2 CABLE
DIA. PRESET
PULL DEAD END OR "TAIL"

TO REMOVE REMAINING
SLACK FROM CABLE.
7) The GRIPPLE installation is now complete.
CABLE CLAMP DETAILS

PAGE 5 OF 7

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.2
MEMBER
Cable Thimbles
Cable Thimble
Unacceptable Connectors
Drilled bolt Cable Connections exhibit undesirable inconsistancies in capacity if
precautions are not taken during the assembly process. Undertightening these types of
connections results in a loss of frictional capacity while overtightenting cuts into the cable
and generates premature cable failures.
Where sharp corners can bear against the cable loop or where vibration or other dynamic
forces can cause the cable loop to abraid, a cable thimble should be used. A cable
thimble fit inside the cable loop is shown in the picture below.
Unacceptable Cable Connection Detail and Common Application

If used, the only consistant way to properly install cable connectors of this or similar type
is with the use of a torque wrench. Variations of as little as 5 ft-lb of tightening torque can
drop the tensile failure load on the cable by 30% or more. Since the use of torque
wrenches or other torque-controlled devices in the field is limited, the level of confidence
in the capabilities of these connections is lower than desired for critical seismic
CABLE CLAMP DETAILS

PAGE 6 OF 7

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.2
MEMBER
applications.
Because of the extreme sensitivity of the cable pull strength to the tightening torque of the
bolt, drilled cable retention bolts have not been found to be acceptable by Kinetics Noise
Control for use as connection hardware.
CABLE CLAMP DETAILS

PAGE 7 OF 7

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.2
MEMBER
Suspended Equipment Attachment Details
If the equipment is isolated, cable restraints need to be used in lieu of struts to prevent the
transfer of vibration through the strut into the structure. For non-isolated arrangements,
where cables are illustrated, they can be replaced with a single strut mounted in a similar
fashion.
Equipment with integral support points suspended on Hangers

All pieces of equipment should be suspended on a minimum of two hanger rods and
should be fitted with a minimum of four cable or four strut restraint members.
Common mounting arrangements involve four or more supports and four restraints
oriented as described in Section D10.4.2 A typical detail for an Axial Fan is shown below.
Equipment is normally supported individually but on rare occasions can be grouped

together and supported on a trapeze structure. Restraints can be installed in the same
manner. When installing restraints, however, it is critical that (except for horizontally
oriented restraint members) they be located in the immediate proximity of a vertical
hanger rod, as the support is required to absorb vertical forces that are developed during
the restraint process.
Note that on this isolated case, the spring isolators are mounted close to, but not in direct
contact with the supporting structure. In addition, the hanger rods are fitted with a nut and
washer directly below the hanger box that will limit the maximum upward travel of the rod
(and thus the equipment) to
When using the double rod arrangement, restraints must connect at an elevation that will
preclude swaying of the equipment. See also section D10.4.2 for more information on
this.
SUSPENDED EQUIPMENT ATTACHMENT DETAILS

PAGE 1 OF 8

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.3
MEMBER
It is likely that equipment supplied for the installation is not equipped with mounting points
that are aligned with the horizontal CG. If this is the case, additional restraint points will
have to be added by the installation contractor to facilitate this connection.
Restraint Arrangements for Equipment Supported on a Trapeze

General Trapeze Design
Where there is no direct provision on equipment to allow its suspension directly, it can be
supported on trapeze bars. Depending on the installation, it may be preferable to attach
restraints to the top of the equipment rather than to the bottom. This can be done, but
there are two key items that must be addressed when fitting the restraints.
1) The bar that is being laterally restrained must be the bar that is bolted or welded to
the equipment. It is not appropriate to sandwich the equipment between two trapeze
bars, bolt that equipment to the bottom one and restraint the top one. It the top bar is
connected to the restraints, it must also be hard connected to the equipment.
Right and Wrong was to restrain equipment supported on 2 hanger Rods
2) A positive connection between the restraint cable or strut and the support hanger rod
(that can withstand both tensile and compressive loads) is required. This means that
the trapeze bar must be locked in place on the hanger rod with nuts both above and
below the trapeze bar. In addition, it means that all components that are between the
connection point of the restraint and the connection point of the hanger must be
positively interconnected.

PAGE 2 OF 8

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.3
MEMBER
Section that is Stiff Vertically

But Weak Horizontally
Equipment Connections to Trapeze Bars
When installing restraints on large units that use 3 or more trapeze bars for support,
typically not all support points will require treatment. For those trapeze bars that are not
laterally restrained, no special connection treatment is required. Where lateral restraint is
provided at a location, motion between the equipment and the trapeze bar must be
prevented.
This is normally accomplished with the use of hardware that is similar in size to that used
to secure the restraint to the trapeze bar.
When restraining large pieces of equipment, some caution should be exercised when
selecting the trapeze bar to ensure that it has adequate capacity to transfer the horizontal
load from the equipment to the restraint connections. This is particularly true when using
some channel type strut arrangements which can be significantly stiffer in the vertical axis
than they are in the horizontal (see illustration below.) These components are normally
selected based on the deadweight load, but in some cases with current code
requirements, horizontal loads may be 3 to 4 times higher. Because the range of
applications for trapeze bars is limitless, details will not be addressed here, but should be
reviewed by a competent design professional.
Connections should not be made to sheet metal or other non-structural materials in the
equipment without the prior consent of the equipment manufacturer. It should not be
assumed that these are designed to withstand seismic loads and as such, without
confirmation that they are adequate, should be ignored when arranging restraints.
Cable and Strut Hardware Attachment Options for use on equipment

with integral connection points
A typical equipment installation begins with suspending the equipment, and then returning
later and adding restraints. While this eliminates the need to deal with restraints when

PAGE 3 OF 8

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.3
MEMBER
actually hanging the equipment, it normally results in more time expended, and possible
rework, during the restraint installation phase. Increasing the diameter of hanger rods for
strut-restrained systems, relocation or duplication of supports for more accessible restraint
installation, and dismantling and reassembling hanger components to make appropriate
connections are the three primary examples of this.
While there is little that can be done from a hardware standpoint to deal with relocation
issues, the proper selection of restraint hardware can reduce or eliminate the need to
dismantle and reassemble previously installed supports.
The CCA mounting clip can be used with either cables or struts, but for struts, the angle
between the strut and the ground is limited to 45 degrees. See the sketches below.
Side-Mounted CCA Clip with Cable and Strut Connections

As an option to the CCA clip, a KSCU clip can be used for side-mounted cable restraint
applications as shown below.
Cable/Strut Restraint Connection Hardware for Hanger Brackets
Side-Mounted KSUA Clips with Cable Connections

PAGE 4 OF 8

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.3
MEMBER
Hanger Rod-Mounted KSCA Cable Restraint Clip

The KSCA is not suitable for extremely heavy-duty applications. This would encompass
larger pieces of equipment in high seismic areas. However, it is appropriate for most
applications. See the tables in Chapter D4 in this manual for sizing components.
Cable/Strut Restraint Connection Hardware for Trapeze Bars
One of the most common materials for trapezed support of equipment is formed strut-type
channel (eg. Unitstrut). Connections to these materials, if using strut nuts, require the use
of toothed nuts. Smooth nuts do not provide adequate resistance against friction and as
such are not acceptable. All nuts must be tightened to their full-rated torque.
Shown below are various acceptable methods of mounting restraint hardware to struts.
The KSCA is the most versatile clip manufactured by Kinetics Noise Control. In
applications involving connections to hanger rods, it offers the ability to directly connect to
the hanger rod, offering a significant savings in installation time and cost. Shown here is
both an inline arrangement for single axis restraint and a V arrangement where biaxial
restraint is needed.

PAGE 5 OF 8

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.3
MEMBER
Similar types of mounting arrangements can be used with trapeze bars made out of angle
or other structural shapes as illustrated below.
Cable Restraint Bracket to Strut Trapeze Bar Connections (Typical)

PAGE 6 OF 8

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.3
MEMBER
Hanger Rod Stiffening Arrangements

In some cases, depending on hanger rod length and the applied seismic force, it may be
necessary to protect the hanger rod from the buckling forces that can occur during a
seismic event. Chapter D4 includes a section on determining the need for and sizing of
the stiffener. When required, either a pipe or an angle can be used as a stiffener and
must be clamped tightly to the hanger rod using rod clamps.
Kinetics Noise Control makes clamps for both pipe and angle stiffeners. These are
designated the KSRC-P (for pipe) and KSRC-A (for angle). Both are adjustable and can
be used over a wide range of hanger rod and stiffener sizes.
Cable Restraint Bracket to Structural Steel Trapeze Bar Connections (Typical)
KSRC-P Hanger Rod Stiffener Clamp can be used to clamp Rods from .5 to 1.0
Diameter to Pipes from .75 to 1.5 Diameter
Both clamps feature two-part construction and no tool required installation. The KSRCP is comprised of a flexible band punched with a number of slots that is fit to a clamp body
with an integral seat for the hanger rod. Based on the size of the pipe stiffener and the
hanger rod, the appropriate slot in the clamp band can be used for preliminary

PAGE 7 OF 8

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.3
MEMBER
KSRC-A Hanger Rod Stiffener Clamp can be used to clamp Rods from .5 to 1.0
Diameter to Angles with Leg lengths from 1 to 2 inches
Shown above is the KSRC-A Clamp. It is made up of two telescoping jaws and a
thumbscrew. Preliminary adjustment is made by aligning the appropriate holes in the
jaws for the thumb screw, and final tightening is made by tightening the screw.
For both of the above clamps the clamping screws are to be tightened so that they will not
come loose in service through vibration. If significant vibration is expected, the use of
Loctite or other thread binder is recommended.
adjustment, with final tightening by means of a wing nut.

PAGE 8 OF 8

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.3
MEMBER
Structural Attachment Details

for Suspended Equipment Restraints
When restraining suspended equipment to a structure, there are several different
construction options that impact the restraint selection. Primary among these are the
interface with masonry- or concrete-, steel-, and wood-framed structures. Within each of
these are subgroups that can impact the restraint selection as well.
While this section addresses local stresses at attachment points, it is critical in any
seismic installation that the design professional responsible for the structure as a whole is
made aware of the particular attachment points. Locations and estimated loads must be
provided and there must be agreement that the addition of these loads will not overload
the structure.
In addition, the attachment of this hardware should be done in such a way as to avoid any
significant reduction in capacity of the member to which it is being connected.
The authors of this manual in no way assume any liability relative to any limitations on the
capacity of the structure to resist the potential forces carried through the restraints or any
reduction in capacity of the structure that might result from improper or inappropriate
installation of the hardware.
General Installation Issues
Caution should be exercised when using struts for restraint in lieu of cables. A more
detailed summary is available earlier in this chapter. The use of struts will more than
likely require an increase in the hanger rod size and a decrease in the restraint spacing as
compared to cables, and appropriate factors must be used for component selection and
placement.
This chapter is broken down into the three main categories listed above, and offers
examples of restraint attachment arrangements suitable for each.
Code requirements also dictate that systems are supported from and restrained to
components that do not move in a significantly different fashion during an earthquake.
Because structures tend to flex about 1% with respect to height, this would indicate that a
relative motion between the floor and ceiling of a 10 ft tall room would be about . As a
result, attachment of a component to the ceiling and restraint to the floor (or the reverse)
is unacceptable. Ideally, the components should be supported from and restrained to the
same surface (mount to ceiling/restrain to ceiling). As a worst case, no more than
relative motion should be permitted (which might permit mounting to the ceiling and
restraining to a surface near the top of an adjacent structural wall). The stiffer the
structure, the more flexibility the installer has in placing restraints.
STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENT DETAILS / SUSPENDED EQUIP RESTRAINTS

PAGE 1 OF 18

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.4
.5.4
MEMBER
When installing restraints there are often opportunities to use the same attachment points
used for suspending hanger rods to also connect restraint cables or struts. All hardware
size information indicated in this manual is based on independent support and restraint
hardware. The use of common connection points is not recommended and, if used, both
seismic and support forces along with worst-case safety factors and hardware selection
criteria must be included in the evaluation. This is beyond the scope of this document.
Masonry structural elements can be either concrete or block. When concrete, they might
be poured in place with a removable form, poured over decking, or pre-cast and erected
on site. When attaching to masonry, it is important to be aware of the locations of any
reinforcing steel that may be embedded in it. It is not permissible to damage the
reinforcement.
Damage to the reinforcement will (at best) weaken the structure and can (at worst) result
in severe injury or death. Do not under any circumstances drill into a masonry element
without first obtaining approval and, second, locating and avoiding any reinforcement
components.
All connections that bear the weight (only) of ceiling-mounted components must be rated
for a 5:1 safety factor, but may not require seismically approved anchorage hardware.
Any connection that must resist only a seismic force must use seismically rated hardware
with an inherent 2:1 safety factor. Connections that must withstand both seismic and
gravity loads require both seismically rated anchorage and a 5:1 safety factor. Examples
of the above are as follows:
Hanger rod Anchorage for Cable-Restrained System

Restraint Anchor (Strut or Cable System)
Hanger rod Anchorage for Strut-Restrained System
5:1
Yes
No
Yes
Seismic
Rating
No
Yes
Yes
Connections to Masonry Structures (Including Concrete)
Connections into portions of beams or other elements that are loaded in tension will have
a reduced capacity as compared to published ratings. These should be avoided, or if
unavoidable, should be analyzed independently of the charts and tables published in this
document.
All tables used in this document are based on the use of Kinetics Noise Control-supplied
seismically rated anchors. Caution should be used to ensure that adequate embedment
depth and cover (per local code or anchor manufacturer with a 1 minimum) is provided.

PAGE 2 OF 18
RELEASE DATE 05/05/04

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.4
MEMBER
Ceiling Connections
The most efficient connection to the underside of a concrete slab is with a single anchor.
Depending on the load requirements and available slab thickness, this may not be
practical, and in order to get adequate capacity, multiple anchors may be required.
Single anchor attachments can be made with anchors from up to using the Kinetics
Noise Control KSCA bracket and the KSUA bracket as shown below.
KSCA Clip with Single to Anchor
Minimum Anchor Installation Requirements
KSCU Clips for Through Anchors

PAGE 3 OF 18
RELEASE DATE 05/05/04

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.4
MEMBER
Depending on the
CCA Clips for Single 5/8 and 3/4 Anchors

Anchors can be embedded in concrete through the decking as shown below:
Typical Restraint Clip Anchored to Concrete Through Decking

In cases where multiple anchors are required to meet load and/or maximum allowable
embedment requirements, a clip fitted with a multiple-anchor embedment plate or a
bridging strut member should be used. If using a strut, spacing between anchors must
not be less than the allowed spacing per Kinetics Noise Control anchor data tables
(Chapter P10).
For larger, single-anchor arrangements, the CCA can be used.

orientation, it can be used with either a 5/8 or 3/4 anchor.
CCA Clip attached using Kinetics Noise Control 2/4 Bolt Mount Plate

PAGE 4 OF 18

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.4
MEMBER
Under extreme conditions, where the slab to which the restraint is being attached is too
thin to achieve the needed capacity with conventional concrete anchors, it may be
necessary to bolt through the slab. This method eliminates concerns related to failures
due to anchor pullout and allows both the use of the higher through-bolt rating as well as
eliminates the penalty factors associated with connections using concrete anchors.
Connections made in this manner must bridge over reinforcement steel embedded in the
concrete slab as shown below.
Multiple-Anchor Mounting Using Strut Channel
Typical Through-Bolted Restraint Attachment Option

Wall and Column Connections
In general, restraint connections to walls and columns made of concrete are very similar
to the connections to the ceiling. Wall connections in this group, however, also
encompass connections to masonry walls which require some additional attention.
Illustrated below are the wall or column versions of the connections previously shown for
the ceiling applications.

PAGE 5 OF 18

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.4
MEMBER
KSCA Clip with Single 1/4 to 1/2 Anchor
KSCU Clips for 1/4 Through 1/2 Anchors
CCA Clips for Single 5/8 and 3/4 Anchors

PAGE 6OF 18

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.4
MEMBER
Through Bolted Connection

Because of the materials lesser strengths, there are limited methods of attachment to
masonry block walls. Caution should be exercised to avoid installing wedge-type anchors
directly into the mortar used to cement the blocks together.
When used, anchors must penetrate into the core of the masonry unit and achieve
adequate embedment into the concrete or grout that fills the cavity. If the blocks are not
filled, the use of seismically rated wedge-type anchors should be avoided.
CCA Clip attached using Multiple Bolt Mount Plate and Strut Channel
When working with hollow core block walls, restraint components must bolt through either
one or both surfaces of the block units. Penetrations through both sides require backer
plates of adequate size to distribute stress, while penetrations through one wall are more
limited in capacity and must make use of an umbrella or other positive gripping internal
element.
Masonry walls used to anchor restraints, as with other structural elements to which
restraints are connected, must be reviewed and approved by the design professional of
record on the project.

PAGE 7 OF 18

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.4
MEMBER
Shown below is an example of a rated anchor embedded into the filled core of a masonry
wall unit.
Attachment to filled Masonry Wall with Wedge-Type Anchor
Through-Bolted Connection to a Hollow Block Masonry Wall

PAGE 8 OF 18

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.4
MEMBER
Connections to Steel Structures

Connections can be made to steel building elements by drilling and bolting, clamping (in
some instances), or by welding. As most connections are made to hanging components,
the most common structural members used as restraint supports tend to be beams and
trusses.
Some cautions are appropriate when connecting to these elements, as their primary
function is normally to support the floor or roof above, and they are already subject to
significant stress. In addition, these elements are oriented such that, while they can
withstand high vertical loads, they can be quite weak when horizontal loads are applied to
them, especially when the loads are applied at 90 degrees to the beam axis (transverse).
While it is generally safe to make seismic restraint connections near the top of these
beams, it is often less convenient than making the attachment at the bottom. Extreme
caution must be exercised when connecting to the bottom flange of I-beams and, in
particular, open web joists, as frequently a small lateral load applied to these areas can
result in a catastrophic failure of the beam. No connections should be made without prior
review and approval of the design professional of record.
Filled Umbrella-Type Anchor for and Bolt Sizes
Assuming approval has been granted for the installation of a restraint at a particular
location, welding or clamping the restraint in place is typically the fastest, least invasive
method of making the connection. Bolting requires that the structural element be drilled
and is normally avoided where possible.

PAGE 9 OF 18

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.4
MEMBER
Welded Connections to Beams and Columns

There are two basic methods for making weld attachments. The first is to directly weld a
bracket to the structure and the second is to weld a threaded piece of hardware (typically
a nut or bolt) to the structure and then attach the bracket to it. Looking first at the direct
bracket welding options, the most suitable clips are the KSCA and the CCA.
Below are shown optional weld locations for the KSCA clip mounted to both beams and
columns. These same arrangements are appropriate for floor- or roof-mounted
connections with the exception that they are inverted.
Weld Data and Orientation for the attachment of the KSCA Clip
The CCA clip can be mounted in a similar fashion.
Weld Data and Orientation for the attachment of the CCA Clip

PAGE 10 OF 18

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.4
MEMBER
Weld Data and Orientations for attachment of the KSCU Clip
Bolted Connections to Steel Members

When used, bolted connections to steel structural members are normally made to open
web joists or trusses. These are amenable to bolted connections as they have an integral
slot, although caution is required to ensure that the addition of the restraint loads will not
result in a buckling failure. It is also important to ensure that the load is oriented in such a
way as to not cause the attachment bolt to slip in the slot to which it is attached.
The second type of weld attachment is to weld hardware to the structure and use that to
attach the restraint bracket. The KSCU is well adapted to that type of connection.
Transverse load Connections to X Braced Open Web Trusses

It is not recommended that restraints be connected to the bottom flange of an open web
truss without substantial X bracing in the immediate area of the restraint attachment
point. The bracing must be sufficient in nature and adequately connected to the truss to

PAGE 11 OF 18

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.4
MEMBER
Connections to the Top Chord of an Open Web Truss

X bracing is normally not required when restraints are connected to the top chord of an
open web truss as long as the truss is adequately tied into the decking and/or floor
structure above. This, along with the case below showing loads that are carried parallel to
the truss, transfer only minimal stress to the truss itself. Even so, as with the other
arrangements, permission should be obtained before making either of these connections.
carry all restraint loads to the deck above.
Bolted Connection to an Open Web Truss for loads parallel to the Truss

PAGE 12 OF 18

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.4
MEMBER
Clamped Connections to Steel Members

Another frequent restraint connection arrangement is to clamp the cable to a beam with a
beam clamp. Again it is critical to ensure that the addition of these loads will not result in
damage to the beam. The beam clamp selected must have a significant lateral force
transferring capacity. Most readily available clamps are intended as supports for vertical
loads and have only minimal lateral capacity. As such they are not suitable.
Shown below is Kinetics Noise Control s KSBC beam clamp.
The KSBC Beam Clamp can be mated with a wide range of I-Beams as well as
KSUA, KSCA, and CCA Restraint Clips
KSBC Beam Clamps are also compatible with Strut and Angle Bracing

PAGE 13 OF 18

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.4
MEMBER
Connections to Wood
Connections to Ceilings and other Horizontal Surfaces
The capacity of connections to wood using through bolts and a backer plate is limited only
by bolt capacity and the structural capacity of the frame member. Capacities using lag
bolts are severely limited, as the pull-out capacity of the lag bolt is much less than that of
a through bolt.
Shown below are typical connections to the underside of horizontal surfaces (floormounted systems would be the same, but inverted).
KSCA Clip with Single 1/4 to 1/2 Lag Bolt
Wood structural members can often create issues when it comes to connecting seismic
restraint hardware. Although lag screws are easy to install, adequate depth, end and
edge distance issues frequently make them impractical. The option to bolt through a
wood member and include a backer plate eliminates the depth issue, but the end and
edge distance requirements still must be met. The minimum edge distance is 1.5 bolt
diameters and the minimum end distance is seven times the bolt diameter.
KSCU Clips for 1/4 Through 1/2 Lag Bolts

PAGE 14 OF 18

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.4
MEMBER
Where loads are such that a single anchor is inadequate, multiple anchors can be used as
shown below.
CCA Clip attached using Kinetics Noise Control 2/4 Bolt Mount Plate
As long as adequate resistance to prevent twisting of the joists is provided, it is possible to
bridge across multiple joists and install a restraint in between.
CCA Clip with Lag Bolts 5/8 and 3/4 Diameter
Two Anchor Mounting using a Strut Channel

PAGE 15 OF 18

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.4
MEMBER
Through-Bolted Application with Backer Plate

Wall and Column Connections
As with concrete anchors, the wall and column connections to wood members are very
similar to those for horizontally oriented surfaces. Shown below are typical examples.
KSCA Clips Mounted with Single 1/4 to 1/2 Lag Bolts
For worst-case conditions, as with concrete anchors, it is possible to bolt through a wood
member with a backer plate.
KSCU Clips for 1/4 and 1/2 Diameter Lag Screws

PAGE 16 OF 18

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.4
MEMBER
CCA Clip with Lag Bolts 5/8 and 3/4 Diameter
Multiple Bolt Anchor Plate with CCA Clip
Through-Bolted Connection

PAGE 17 OF 18

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.4
MEMBER
Conclusion
This sections attempts to list the bulk of the structural attachment arrangements that are
likely to be found in the field. Not all combinations of struts, angles, cables, etc., have
been shown for each option. Except for cases where a connection obviously won t fit, the
ability to mix and match the various end connection combinations shown can be
assumed.

PAGE 18 OF 18

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.5.4
MEMBER
Connection Options for Awkward Situations

Almost every project will include some areas where installing restraints in a conventional
fashion will be difficult. This segment of the manual offers options to consider when
confronted with various situations.
Note: The options shown below illustrate equipment viewed on a single axis,
Equivalent restraint is however needed on both principle axies.
Probably the most common issue in the field is how to deal with restraints in long, narrow
spaces. Often in these kinds of spaces there is not enough room to angle restraints up to
the ceiling structure. Frequently the walls are not structural and do not offer a surface to
which to anchor.
When evaluating these kinds of spaces, the first issue is to determine if either of the walls
bordering the space are structural. If they one or both are structural, they can offer a
surface to which the restraints can often be attached. For structural walls, any relative
displacement issues between the wall and the structure supporting the pipe must be
identified. The maximum permitted relative displacement is inch, which for most
structures correspond to a difference in elevation of approximately 2 feet (see also the
structural attachment section of this chapter).
Assuming the wall meets both of the above requirements, a lateral restraint can be run
either directly over to the wall or up at a slight angle to the wall. Normally this would be
done with a strut as shown below.
Long, Narrow Spaces
Trapeze-Mounted Equipment Restrained to Structural Wall

or Column with a Strut
CONNECTION OPTIONS FOR AWKWARD SITUATIONS

PAGE 1 OF 5

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.6
MEMBER
For the case where there are no nearby structural connection points or where the nearby
structural elements are not suitable, there are several options that can be considered.
X or Diagonally Braced Restraint Arrangements

A K or double K brace can also be used. The K can either be located inside the
support rods or outside the support rods, but in the case of a double K, both sides must
be identical (either inside or outside).
The first option is to restrain to the ceiling using X bracing or a diagonal strut.
Single and Double K Brace Restraint Arrangement

PAGE 2 OF 5

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.6
MEMBER
Wall Penetration Restraint (Strut)

Piggyback or Double-Tier Restraint
In congested areas, It may be possible to restrain a piece of equipment as well as an
associated distribution system with one set of restraints. Care should be used in doing
this to ensure that the the components restrained together have similar properties. For
example:
1) Ductwork can be restained with small AHU units or VAV boxes.
2) Pumps can be restrained with piping, valves or other piping components
3) Piping should not be restrained with AHUs
4) Ductwork should not be restrained with pumps.
5) Isolated systems must be restrained with other isolated systems
6) If piping or ductwork does not require restraint because of size or proximity to the
ceiling, it cannot be connected to a piece of equipment that does.
Wall Penetration Restraint (Cable)
When selecting restraints, the restraints must be adequate in capacity to resist the total
load generated by both the equipment and distribution system. These forces can be
determined independently using the Force Class (D4) or other methods and then the
results are simply added together to select components.

PAGE 3 OF 5

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.6
MEMBER
Piggyback Restraint Arrangement

It is possible under some conditions to brace one trapeze bar to the other, and then
restrain the second trapeze bar to the structure. This is shown below:
Double-Tier Restraint Arrangement

PAGE 4 OF 5

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.6
MEMBER
Restraints for Equipment Mounted Well Below the Support Structure

This situation is not easily handled. Past history has shown, and the code is quite clear,
that it is not a good idea to support the equipment from one structural element and
restrain it using another structural element that will undergo significantly different motions.
Restraints fit in this fashion will likely fail or cause the equipment supports to fail. Neither
of these outcomes is desirable.
The structure can be supported off the floor, off the ceiling, or from structural walls or
columns. The support structure must be rigid enough to absorb all of the seismic loads,
and particularly the moments, with minimal deformation, transferring pure shear or tensile
forces into the supporting structure.
About the only solution to this is to add a support structure for the equipment that is
located either just above or just below the level of that equipment. The equipment can
then be both attached and restrained to this structure.

PAGE 5 OF 5

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D10.6
MEMBER
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Floating Floor Systems

Floating Floor Seismic Restraint Design
D.11.1
Isolated Ceiling Systems

Isolated Ceiling Seismic Restraint Design
D.11.2
Isolated Wall Systems

Isolated Wall Seismic Restraint Design
D.11.3
ARCHITECTURAL ELEMENT RESTRIANT SYSTEMS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ARCHITECTURAL ELEMENT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540

PAGE:
D11-0
MEMBER
Floating Floor Seismic Restraint Design

Floating floors, by nature of their design, can move horizontally when subjected to
earthquakes. Large lateral movements could generate instability in the isolation pads or
springs and must be prevented. The amount and type of restraint required is a function of
the design earthquake and the properties of both the isolation system and the floor
design.
There are two basic types of floating floor seismic restraints perimeter and interior. A
perimeter isolation system consists of shock-absorbing pads spaced around the perimeter
of the floor and attached to structural supports. These pads prevent direct contact
between the floating floor and the supporting structural elements and their flexibility
reduces the impact load on the floor and provides some damping for the horizontal
motion. Ideally, the structural support will be integral with the building structural system,
consisting of a structural wall or curb around the floor perimeter. Alternatively, the support
system can be installed after the structure is complete by anchoring structural angles to
the structural system. Both types of restraints are shown in Figures 1 and 2.
Interior restraints are embedded within the floating floor. Each restraint restricts seismic
motion in all horizontal directions, reducing the number of restraints required. Large floors
often require internal restraints to prevent buckling of the floor during an earthquake.
Another common application is for a floor without perimeter supports where the use of
angles is not desired. Figures 3 and 4 show typical installations of internal seismic
restraints.
Restraint Selection
The choice of internal versus external seismic restraint most often depends upon the size
of the floor to be restrained (preventing buckling in the floor system) and the presence or
absence of a perimeter structural support. Kinetics Noise Control or the Structural
Engineer or Architect of Record for the project should determine the buckling
characteristics of the floor.
Restraint Types
If a perimeter system is selected, the ability of any supporting structure (curb or wall) to
carry the applied seismic load must be determined by the Structural Engineer of Record.
If no adequate support is available, a support can be designed and supplied by Kinetics.
The perimeter isolation system usually consists of twelve-inch wide neoprene pads
spaced five to six feet on center, with the actual spacing determined by calculation.
Kinetics PIB is placed between the pads to eliminate any flanking path for noise.
Internal restraints are used when they are required to prevent buckling of the floor or
FLOATING FLOOR SEISMIC RESTRAINT DESIGN

PAGE 1 OF 3

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D11.1
MEMBER
when no adequate perimeter support is available. The restraints are placed before the
floor is formed in either the final position (RIM-type floor) or on the structural slab (lift-slab
system). The outer portion of the restraint is attached to the floating floor while the inner
portion is attached to the structural slab. Neoprene pads integral to the support provide
the impact cushioning and damping required for proper restraint.
STRUCTURAL SUPPORT (WALL OR CURB)

KINETICS NEOPRENE SEISMIC RESTRAINT
KINETICS ISOLATION SYSTEM (RIM SHOWN)

BUILT-UP FLOATING FLOOR
STRUCTURAL FLOOR
Figure 1. Floating Floor Perimeter Isolation w/Structural Support.

KINETICS STRUCTURAL SUPPORT
KINETICS NEOPRENE SEISM IC RESTRAINT
KINETICS ISOLATION SYSTEM (RI M SHOWN)
BUILT-UP FLOATING FLOOR
STRUCTURAL FLOOR
Figure 2. Floating Floor Perimeter Isolation w/Kinetics Structural Support.

Page 2 of 3

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D11.1
MEMBER
a) Initial Position
b) Raised Position
Figure 3. Internal Restraint for Lift-Slab System.
Figure 4. Internal Restraint for Roll-Out System.

PAGE 3 OF 3

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D11.1
MEMBER
Isolated ceilings typically weigh between 2 and 7.5 pounds per square ft and are made of
1, 2 or 3 layers of drywall. Over larger areas, the total weight of a ceiling system can
become significant and the resulting seismic forces can be significant as well. In addition,
it is not uncommon for ceilings to have a stepped or otherwise non-flat profile that can
limit the ability to transfer these forces out to the perimeter. Even where this is not the
case, significant crushing can occur along the perimeter on even moderately sized
ceilings if no centralized restraint system is provided. Because of this, for ceilings either
whose length or width exceeds 15 ft, internal seismic restraint elements are
recommended.
Even on smaller ceilings in some cases, equipment or light fixtures can add to the seismic
loading that must be resisted and requires that appropriately sized restraints be fitted.
Restraint Types
Typically cable restraint systems are used to transfer seismic forces from the isolated
ceiling to the structure in much the same way as with piping or duct systems. Because
the ceilings are isolated, there is a need for cables rather than struts. An added issue
when fitting restraint cables is that the cables must typically be installed and adjusted prior
to the installation of the ceiling. As the ceiling adds significant weight, the springs that
support it will deflect a noticeable additional amount under that weight. Care must be
taken to ensure that this added deflection does not take all of the clearance out of the
restraint cables and in so doing, generate a mechanical short for vibrations.
In some cases, seismically rated, housed ceiling isolators can be used, These are tolerant
of the added deflection which occurs with the addition of the drywall. These however may
not be suitable for all applications. More commonly conventional cable restraints are used
with special attention given to ensure that no mechanical shorts will occur.
Seismically Rated KSCH Ceiling Support Isolator

PAGE 1 OF 4

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D11.2
MEMBER
ADDED #10 SCREW
These Isolators are capable of supporting loads up to 140 lb per isolator while at the same
time offer a horizontal restraint capacity of 100 lb each.
This isolator bolts directly to wood or concrete and offers positive seismic restraint for a
broad range of applications. Included is a saddle that fully contains the CR channel
commonly used to support isolated drywall ceiling systems. This saddle prevents side to
side motion of the channel in its basic configuration. For use in seismic applications, it
must be fitted with an optional #10 screw to prevent the channel from sliding through the
saddle. See also the picture below.
Typical KSCH Installation

PAGE 2 OF 4

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D11.2
MEMBER
Where the isolated ceiling is suspended below the structure a significant distance, the
ICW Seismic Isolator can often be used. Unless the ceiling grid is tight up against the
underside of the Isolator, it is necessary to incorporate 2mm KSCU cable assemblies to
protect the hanger rod as shown below.
Seismically Rated ICW Ceiling Support Hanger
The cable restraint assemblies must connect to the hanger rod within of the underside
of the ICW restraint bracket as shown, but the actual exposed length of the hanger rod
can be as much as 12. Connections to the ceiling grid must be with a bolt (min).

PAGE 3 OF 4

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D11.2
MEMBER
Restraining Ceiling Systems with Cables

Ceiling systems can be restrained using cable restraints in fashion similar to that shown
above, but with the restraints connected directly to structure. When this is done, the
Force Class rules in chapter D4 of this manual apply.
When installed, it should be assumed that the ceiling will drop - 1 for most systems
and provisions must be made in the cable tightness to accommodate this. It is generally
recommended that the cable be put in on a shallow slope not to exceed 15 degrees from
the horizontal. In addition the grid should be deflected downward manually when
installing the cables to approximately the expected deflection amount. In that condition,
the cable should be slightly loose (1/16 to 3/16 lateral motion allowed).
This restraint device is rated for 60 lb in any direction.
In addition, the isolation hangers should be mounted close to, but not in contact with the
underside of the ceiling structure. Maximum clearance under load should not exceed
1/8.
The recommended restraint kit for ceiling restraint is the 2mm KSCU kit. Each kit
contains 2 cables and 2 kits are required at each restraint location. Maximum lateral
capacity at each restraint location for this kit is 200 lb.

PAGE 4 OF 4

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D11.2
MEMBER
Because masonry walls require high compressive loads to prevent internal buckling and
because they possess a high level of mass, the requirement for restraint becomes more
critical. The stabilizing compressive load present in a load bearing wall is not present in a
free standing wall rendering them easily susceptible to seismic damage.
To determine the amount of support required by the wall several factors must be taken
into account. These are: 1) the amount of natural support dictated by the room geometry
(corners and intersections), 2) the stability provided by the type of construction, 3) the unit
mass of the isolated wall and 4) the anticipated lateral loading to which the wall may be
subjected.
Beginning with the rooms "natural support", it is safe to assume that any corner or
intersection point that occurs in the isolated wall system where at least 2 of the
intersecting walls extend a distance equal to 50% of the walls height can be considered to
form a natural restraint. For example, a 10 ft x 10 ft room with 8 ft tall isolated walls can
be considered to have 4 naturally supported corners. However, if we consider a wall with
a 6 in long jog in its center, the jog (since it's length is less than 50% of the wall height)
cannot be considered to be a natural support.
The various methods used to construct isolated walls have different levels of resistance
against buckling. For example, a masonry wall that is not subjected to weight bearing
loads is quite weak in buckling, where a masonry wall that is bearing weight can be quite
resistant to it. In non-weight bearing applications, frame construction is generally more
resistant to vertical buckling loads than masonry. On the other hand, frame construction
is also generally weaker than masonry walls when evaluating the transfer of loads along
the length of the wall. This is because, apart from the top and bottom, the framing
members do not normally run in the horizontal axis.
Proper installation of isolated walls requires that the wall not only be resiliently supported,
but that they are also resiliently stabilized. Because the walls are not part of the building
structure, they do not have a membrane to support the upper edges. This makes them
inherently unstable. They are also subject to lateral loads from contact with other objects
or due to the attachment of wall mounted components to them. The requirement for
stabilization is compounded in seismic areas where the walls can be exposed to
significant lateral acceleration forces.
The surface mass of a wall works in conjunction with seismic accelerations to generate
buckling and toppling forces. Lower surface mass framed walls are much less subject to
damage from seismic loads than are heavy masonry ones.
Floating walls subjected to horizontal loads can buckle or topple in the vertical plane or

PAGE 1 of 5

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D11.3.1
MEMBER
can buckle along their length. Illustrations of the vertical failure modes are shown below.
The first case (buckling) is the result of the wall being restrained top and bottom but with
too great a vertical center distance between restraints. The second (toppling) is the result
of inadequate restraint at the top.
TOPPLING
The buckling mode along the walls length is similar to the buckling case above except that
it occurs in the horizontal plane. It most commonly occurs along the top edge of a wall
where there is no positive continuous restraint fitted and where the horizontal distance
between localized restraints is excessive.
All walls must be designed to resist the anticipated seismic forces (as a minimum) and if
there are known or anticipated forces that may result from other factors which exceed the
seismic loads, they must be identified and used for sizing the appropriate restraint
devices. This document will identify the restraints necessary based on seismic
requirements only.
In the case of seismic events, the driving force is created by horizontal accelerations
acting on the mass of the wall. Resisting this loading are the restraints and the buckling
strength of the wall itself. The wall's buckling strength and mass can be determined for
commonly used building cross sections and using this, the wall's natural ability to
withstand horizontal accelerations can be determined. This resistance/force relationship
can then be used to determine the maximum allowable span length between restraints.
BUCKLING
AT CENTER
Once the spacing is determined, the actual load that the restraint must be capable of
handling can be quickly determined by dividing the supported wall mass among the
supporting restraints and applying the appropriate acceleration factor to it.
As wall restraints/isolators include no running clearance, these devices must be capable
of developing this force while still maintaining a low enough natural frequency to ensure

PAGE 2 of 5

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D11.3.1
MEMBER
the isolation characteristics of the wall.
It is always worthy of note to indicate that when isolators are oriented horizontally and are
not affected by gravity, the installed deflection is not part of the design requirement. This
is because natural frequency is a function of mass and spring rate and not of deflection.
Based on the trade-off between the inherent or natural strength of isolated walls of various
constructions and their mass, the following table has been generated. It provides a
recommended maximum spacing for restraints on both the vertical and horizontal axis
based on seismic accelerations and is broken down by wall type. It also lists the
approximate maximum load that the restraint is likely to see.
Seismic Acceleration in G's
Acceleration Factor
Type Wall
Masonry
6" Block/Hollow
6" Block/Sand Filled
8" Block/Hollow
12" Block/Hollow
Maximum
Restraint
Horiz Vert Horiz Vert Horiz Vert Horiz Vert Horiz Vert Horiz Vert
Force
CD (in) CD (in) CD (in) CD (in) CD (in) CD (in) CD (in) CD (in) CD (in) CD (in) CD (in) CD (in)
lbs
2
0.75
0.4
0.2
0.1
22
26
23
27
24
28
22
26
23
27
24
28
31
36
33
38
34
40
31
36
33
38
34
40
36
42
38
44
40
46
36
42
38
44
40
46
49
57
52
60
54
63
49
57
52
60
54
63
70
81
73
85
77
89
70
81
73
85
77
89
99
114
104
120
109
120
99
114
104
120
109
120
509
509
749
749
1232
1232
16" Centers / 1/2" Drywall

16" Centers / 1" Drywall
16" Centers / 1-1/2" Drywall
22
17
14
21
16
13
78
60
51
72
55
46
32
24
20
29
22
19
111
85
72
102
77
65
37
28
24
34
26
21
120
98
83
118
89
75
50
38
32
46
35
29
120
120
113
120
120
102
71
54
46
65
50
41
120
120
120
120
120
120
71
77
65
93
70
59
120
120
120
120
120
120
61
61
61
61
61
61

24" Centers / 1" Drywall
24
18
15
22
16
13
67
51
42
62
46
38
33
25
21
31
23
19
95
72
60
87
65
54
39
29
24
35
26
22
110
83
69
101
75
62
53
40
33
48
36
30
120
113
94
120
102
85
75
56
47
68
51
42
120
120
120
120
120
120
75
79
66
97
72
60
120
120
120
120
120
120
50
50
50
50
50
50
Frame/Drywall
As the natural frequency of a system is a function of its supported mass and spring rate
(measured as deflection if the spring is oriented vertically). A restraint should be selected
based on its having the desired spring rate in the unloaded condition. It is also desirable
to have a relatively short working range to minimize wall motion during a seismic event.
Restraints with a graduated spring rate such as occur in neoprene pads with simple
shapes tend to be ideal for this.
To ensure that the wall is not damaged when subjected to the max loading condition, total
design deflection in the restraint device should be limited to 1/4" (max).

PAGE 3 of 5

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D11.3.1
MEMBER
The following assumptions were used in compiling these tables:

The masonry construction assumes a tensile strength of 275 PSI in the mortar.
MIN FRAME WALL

MID SPAN
STIFFENER
CONSTRUCTION
MIN FRAME WALL

HEADER
CONSTRUCTION
Wall Top and Bottom Restraints

Isolated Masonry walls are normally set into a pocket formed by extending the recess in
the structural slab allowed for installation of a floating floor beyond the perimeter of the
floating floor itself. When used, this gap is sized to allow an isolated wall to penetrate the
floating floor and sit on its own set of support pads. As an option, masonry walls can also
be set onto the perimeter of the floating floor and doweled to it in a fashion that can resist
seismic shear loads at the walls base.
Framed walls are frequently supported either on the perimeter of the floating floor as
mentioned above or are mounted on their own set of isolation pads that are spaced at
regular intervals down the length of the base rail. In either case, the anchors used to
connect the wall to the floor must be sized to resist the seismic shear loads that can occur
at the base of the wall. Normal spacings as specified by Kinetics Noise Control are
adequate for this task in all seismic conditions
The frame construction assumes the use of 20 ga metal 2 x 4 studs. It also requires that
if the frame wall exceeds 120" in height, 2-20 ga metal 2 x 4 studs are interlocked and
sandwiched between 2-20 ga 2 x 4 metal framing channels. These must run horizontally
along the walls length and are oriented to align the ends of the upper and lower vertically
oriented studs. For all frame walls a single 20 ga metal 2 x 4 stud is welded or screwed to
a 20 ga 2 x 4 metal framing channel to form the top plate of the wall.
As the isolated wall is intended to reduce the flow of noise from one space to another, the
tops of these walls will normally abut the underside of a floor or ceiling element. These
connections should be sealed to resist the flow of sound and frequently this is
accomplished via the use of rubber faced angles that hard attach to the structure and
cradle the top of the wall. If these are used for restraint purposes, they must be sized
based on the expected load. Kinetics Noise Control offers the IPRB, neoprene faced
angle brackets that are frequently used for this task.

PAGE 4 of 5

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D11.3.1
MEMBER
Seismic Sway Braces for Masonry
PSB Sway Brace

An additional option for lighter duty applications is the KWSB. This is lighter duty and is
made to connect to the framing members that make up the structure of the isolated wall.
Capacities on KWSB go up to 50 lb.
Probably the best solution for gauge material is the Isomax wall clip. This is designed to
both support a wall and when spaced in a 24 x 48 array, can provide adequate restraint
for walls made up of as much as 3 layers of 5/8 drywall in applications as high as .5 G.
The Seismic rating can increase with reduced spacing if need be.
For the interior expanse of isolated walls or where the IPRB does not possess adequate
capacity on its own to restrain the top, there are several products that can be used. The
Kinetics PSB sway brace is commonly used for the restraint of isolated walls made of
masonry. These are rated with capacities up to 2000 lb.
IsoMax Wall Isolation Clip

PAGE 5 of 5

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D11.3.1
MEMBER
CHAPTER D12
RECOMMENDED SEISMIC SPECIFICATIONS
KINETICS Long Form Seismic Specification
D12.1
TABLE OF CONTENTS

RECOMMENDED SEISMIC SPECIFICATIONS

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:

800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
PAGE:
D12-0
MEMBER
KINETICS LONG FORM SEISMIC SPECIFICATION

1.0 General
1.01 Related Work Specified Elsewhere
(Vibration Isolation portion of specs, fill in as required)
1)
Av: Effective peak velocity related acceleration coefficient BOCA, SBC Code.
2)
S1: Mapped Long Period Seismic acceleration coefficient IBC, TI-809-04 Code.
3)
Ss: Mapped Short Period Seismic acceleration coefficient IBC, TI-809-04 Code.
4)
v: Zonal Velocity coefficient NBC-Canada
5)
SMACNA: (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association) has
developed Guidelines for the installation of restraints for piping and duct systems.
6)
VISCMA: (Vibration Isolation and Seismic Control Manufactures Association) has

developed Testing and Rating Standards for Seismic Restraint Components that
comply with Code and ASHRAE based requirements.
7)
Z: Seismic Zone defines Seismic Coefficient Ca used by UBC Code.
1.03 Performance Requirements

1)
Design Ground Acceleration Coefficient (Av, Ss, v or Z depending on Code =X.XX )
2)
(If IBC or TI-809-04) Design Long Period Ground Acceleration Coefficient (S1
=X.XX )
3)
Design Soil Type = (Sa, Sb, Sc, Sd) as appropriate. (If NBC Canada, the Foundation
Factor)
4)
Importance or Performance Factor appropriate to structure = X.XX
5)
If UBC Zone 4, Proximity to Fault and, if less than 10km, Fault Type
6)
Equipment Schedule (IBC, TI-808-04, 97UBC) The Mechanical Engineer of record

will provide a comprehensive Equipment Schedule indication individual equipment
importance factors, Ip, (including equipment whose importance factor, Ip, may be
increased by proximity to essential life safety or hazardous components),
equipment elevation both in the structure and(if floor mounted, relative to the floor),
roof elevation and structural interface material, i.e., anchored to concrete, bolted or
welded to steel.
7)
Schedule or drawings indicating critical (Ip=1.5) Duct/Piping systems, including

systems whose importance factor may be increased by proximity to critical
components.
1.02 Definitions
1.04 Submittals
1)
Product Data: Include Seismic Rating Curve for each seismically rated isolator or

PAGE 1 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D12.1
MEMBER
restraint component
2)
Samples: The contractor shall submit samples of specified seismic snubber

devices upon request of the engineer for approval
3)
Shop Drawings: Include the following:
B) Vibration Isolation Bases: Dimensional drawings including anchorage

and attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include
auxiliary motor slides and rails, base weights, equipment static loads.
C) Seismic-Restraint Details: Detail submittal drawings of seismic restraints
and snubbers. Show anchorage details and indicate quantity, diameter,
and depth of penetration of anchors.
D) Submittals for Interlocking Snubbers: Include ratings for horizontal,
vertical and combined loads.
E) Equipment Manufacturer Seismic Qualification Certification: The
Equipment Manufacturer must submit certification that each piece of
provided equipment will withstand seismic forces identified in
"Performance Requirements" Article above. Include the following:
1) Basis for Certification: Indicate whether the withstand
certification is based on actual test of assembled components or
on calculations.
2) Indicate the equipment is certified to be durable enough to:
A) structurally resist the design forces and/or
B) will also remain functional after the seismic event.
F) Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of
gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
A) Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for selecting vibration

isolators and seismic restraints and for designing vibration isolation
bases. Certification documents to be signed and sealed by a qualified
Professional Engineer with at least 5 years experience in the design of
seismic restraints.
G) Detailed description of the assumed equipment anchorage devices on

which the certification is based.
1.05 Work Furnished But Not Installed
1) The materials and systems specified in this section shall be purchased by the
mechanical contractor from a single seismic snubber restraint materials
manufacturer to assure sole source responsibility for the performance of the seismic
restraints used.

PAGE 2 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D12.1
MEMBER
2) The materials and systems specified in this section can, at the contractor
s option,
be installed by the subcontractor who installs the mechanical equipment, piping, or
ductwork.
1.06 Coordination
1) Coordinate size, shape, reinforcement and locate cast in place anchor-bolt inserts
for concrete Inertia bases. 3000 psi min Concrete and/or formwork as needed is
provided by others.
1.07 Description of System

1)
It shall be understood that the requirements of this seismic restraint section are in
addition to other requirements as specified elsewhere for the support and
attachment of equipment and mechanical services, and for the vibration isolation of
same equipment. Nothing on the project drawings or specifications shall be
interpreted as justification to waive the requirements of this seismic restraint section.
2)
The work under this section shall include furnishing all labor, materials, tools,
appliances, and equipment, and performing all operations necessary for the
complete execution of the installation of seismic snubber restraint assemblies as
shown, detailed, and/or scheduled on the drawing and/or specified in this section of
the specifications
3) All seismic snubber restraint assemblies shall meet the following minimum
requirements:
A) The snubber shall include a high quality elastomeric element that will
ensure that no un-cushioned shock can occur.
B) It shall be possible to visually inspect the resilient material for damage
and replace it if necessary.
C) Resilient material used in snubber assemblies to be a minimum of 0.25
(6 mm) thick.
D) Resilient material used in snubber grommets to be a minimum of 0.12
(3 mm) thick.
2) Coordinate design of roof curbs and equipment supports to be compatible with

equipment parameters.
E) All Interlocking Snubbers to include a maximum air gap of .25 in (6mm).

F) Assembly must be designed to offer seismic restraint in all directions,
unless otherwise noted below.
G) Seismic restraint capacities to be verified by an independent test
laboratory or certified by an experienced registered Professional
Engineer to ensure that the design intent of this specification is realized.
4) Vibration Isolation Bases: Dimensional drawings including anchorage and
attachments to structure and to supported equipment. Include auxiliary motor slides
1.08 System Design

PAGE 3 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D12.1
MEMBER
1) Seismic snubber manufacturer shall be responsible for the structural design of

attachment hardware as required to attach snubbers to both the equipment and
supporting structure on vibration isolated equipment, or to directly attach equipment
to the building structure for non-isolated equipment.
3) All piping and ductwork is to be restrained to meet code requirements. Spacing

between restraints is not to exceed the allowable spacing listed in the latest revision
of the SMACNA manual (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National
Association, Inc.) Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems,
Second Edition, 1998. At a minimum, the seismic restraint manufacturer will provide
documentation on maximum restraint spacing for various cable sizes and anchors,
as well as
worst casereaction loads at restraint locations. In addition, seismic
restraint manufacturer will provide support documentation containing adequate
information to allow the installation contractor to make reasonable field modifications
to suit special case conditions.
4) The contractor shall ensure that all housekeeping pads used are adequately
reinforced and are properly attached to the building structural flooring, so to
withstand anticipated seismic forces. In addition, the size of the housekeeping pad
is to be coordinated with the seismic restraint manufacturer so to ensure that
adequate edge distances exist in order to obtain desired design anchor capabilities.
1.09 Alternate Systems
1) Provisions of the General Conditions and Supplemental Conditions of the
specifications shall govern the use of alternate systems to those specified.
2) Manufacturers not listed as approved in Part 2 Materials of this section must
secure approval to bid a minimum of ten (10) days prior to the project bid date.
3) Uncertified internal equipment seismic restraint systems are disallowed for use on
this project.
2) The contractor shall furnish a complete set of approved shop drawings of all
mechanical and electrical equipment which is to be restrained to the seismic
restraint manufacturer, from which the selection and design of seismic restraint
devices and/or attachment hardware will be completed. The shop drawings
furnished shall include, at a minimum, basic equipment layout, length and width
dimensions, installed operating weights of the equipment to be restrained and the
distribution of weight at the restraint points.
1.10 Installation
1) Installation of all seismic restraint materials specified herein shall be accomplished
following the manufacturer
s written instructions. Installation instructions shall be
submitted to the engineer for approval prior to the beginning of the work.
2.0 Materials
2.01 Source of Materials

PAGE 4 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D12.1
MEMBER
1) All seismic snubbers and combination snubber / vibration isolation materials

specified herein shall be provided by a single manufacturer to assure sole source
responsibility for the proper performance of the materials used. Manufacturer is to
be a member of VISCMA (Vibration Isolation and Seismic Control Manufacturers
Association).
3) Materials and systems specified herein and detailed or scheduled on the drawings
are based upon materials manufactured by Kinetics Noise Control, Inc. Materials
and systems provided by other manufacturers are acceptable, provided that they
meet all requirements as listed in this specification.
4) Where not protected by a shield, resilient materials shall be easy to visually inspect
for damage.
2.02 Factory Finishes
1) Manufacturer's standard prime-coat finish ready for field painting.
2) Finish: Manufacturer's standard paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested
equipment before shipping.
A) Powder coating on springs and housings.
B) All hardware shall be electrogalvanized. Hot-dip galvanize or powder
coat metal housings for exterior use.
C) Enamel or powder coat metal components on isolators for interior use.
D) Color-code or otherwise mark vibration isolation and seismic-control
devices to indicate capacity range.
2.03 Seismic Snubber Types
Isolator / Snubber Types contained herein are per ASHRAE (American Society of
Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.) Handbook, 2003 HVAC
Applications, Chapter 54 Seismic and Wind Restraint Design, Pages 12 and 13.
1) Type A): Coil Spring Isolator Incorporated Within A Ductile Iron Or Cast
Aluminum Housing
2) Mechanical anchor types and sizes are to be per the design data as provided by the
seismic restraint manufacturer.
A) Cast iron or aluminum housings are brittle when subjected to shock

loading and are therefore not approved for seismic restraint
applications.
2) Type B): Coil Spring Isolator Incorporated Within A Steel Housing
A) Spring isolators shall be seismic control restrained spring isolators,
incorporating a single or multiple coil spring element, having all of the
characteristics of free standing coil spring isolators as specified in the
vibration isolation portion of this specification.
Springs shall be
restrained using a housing engineered to limit both lateral and vertical

PAGE 5 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D12.1
MEMBER
B) Vibration isolators shall incorporate a steel housing and neoprene

snubbing grommet system designed to limit motion to no more than
(6 mm) in any direction and to prevent any direct metal-to-metal contact
between the supported member and the fixed restraint housing. The
restraining system shall be designed to withstand the seismic design
forces in any lateral or vertical direction without yield or failure. Where
the capacity of the anchorage hardware in concrete is inadequate for
the required seismic loadings, a steel adapter base plate to allow the
addition of more or larger anchors will be fitted to fulfill these
requirements. In addition to the primary isolation coil spring, the load
path will include a minimum (6 mm) thick neoprene pad.
C) Spring elements shall be color coded or otherwise easily identified.
Springs shall have a lateral stiffness greater than 1.2 times the rated
vertical stiffness and shall be designed to provide a minimum of 50%
overload capacity. Non-welded spring elements shall be epoxy powder
coated and shall have a minimum of a 1000 hour rating when tested in
accordance with ASTM B-117.
D) To facilitate servicing, the isolator will be designed in such a way that
the coil spring element can be removed without the requirement to lift or
otherwise disturb the supported equipment.
E) Spring isolators shall be Model FHS as manufactured by Kinetics Noise
Control, or by other manufacturers who can meet the requirements as
listed in sections 1.04 through 1.09 inclusive, and sections 2.01, 2.02
and 2.03 (2).
3) Type C): Coil Spring Isolator Incorporated Within A Steel Housing
A) Spring isolators shall be seismic control restrained spring isolators,
incorporating one or more coil spring elements, having all of the
characteristics of free standing coil spring isolators per the vibration
isolation section of this specification, for equipment which is subject to
load variations and/or large external forces. Isolators shall consist of
one or more laterally stable steel coil springs assembled into fabricated
welded steel housings designed to limit movement of the supported
equipment in all directions.
movement of the supported equipment during an earthquake without

degrading the vibration isolation capabilities of the spring during normal
equipment operating conditions.
B) Housing assembly shall be made of fabricated steel members and shall

consist of a top load plate complete with adjusting and leveling bolts,
adjustable vertical restraints, isolation washers, and a bottom load plate
with internal non-skid isolation pads and holes for anchoring the housing
to the supporting structure. Housing shall be hot dipped galvanized for
outdoor corrosion resistance. Housing shall be designed to provide a
constant free and operating height within 1/8(3 mm).
C) The isolator housing shall be designed to withstand the project design

PAGE 6 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D12.1
MEMBER
seismic forces in all directions.
E) Spring isolators shall be Model FLSS as manufactured by Kinetics Noise

and 2.03 (3)
4) Type D): Coil Spring Isolator Incorporated With Integral Seismic Restraint
A) Spring isolators shall be single or multiple coil spring elements which
have all of the characteristics of free standing coil spring isolators as
specified in the vibration isolation portion of this specification,
incorporating lateral and vertically restrained seismic housing
assemblies. Spring elements shall be readily replaceable without the
need to lift or remove the supported equipment.
B) Restraint housing shall be sized to meet or exceed the force
requirements of the application and shall have the capability of
accepting coil springs of various sizes, capacities, and deflections as
required to meet the required isolation criteria. All spring forces shall be
contained within the coil / housing assembly, and the restraint anchoring
hardware shall not be exposed to spring generated forces under
conditions of no seismic force. Spring element leveling adjustment shall
be accessible from above and suitable for use with a conventional
pneumatic or electric impact wrench.
C) Restraint element shall incorporate a steel housing with elastomeric
elements at all dynamic contact points. Elastomeric elements shall be
replaceable. Restraint shall allow (6 mm) free motion in any direction
from the neutral position. Restraint shall have an overturning factor
(ratio of effective lateral snubber height to short axis anchor spacing) of
0.33 or less to ensure optimum anchorage capacity.
D) Coil spring elements shall be selected to provide static deflections as

shown on the vibration isolation schedule or as indicated or required in
the project documents. Spring elements shall be color coded or
otherwise easily identified. Springs shall have a lateral stiffness greater
than 1.2 times the rated vertical stiffness and shall be designed to
provide a minimum of 50% overload capacity. Non-welded spring
elements shall be epoxy powder coated and shall have a minimum of a
1000 hour rating when tested in accordance with ASTM B-117.
D) Spring isolators shall be Model FMS as manufactured by Kinetics Noise

and 2.03 (4).
5) Type E): All Direction Neoprene Isolator
A) Vibration Isolators shall be neoprene, molded from oil resistant
compounds, designed to operate within the strain limits of the isolator so
to provide the maximum isolation and longest life expectancy possible

PAGE 7 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D12.1
MEMBER
using neoprene compounds. Isolators shall include encapsulated castin-place top steel load transfer plate for bolting to equipment and a steel
base plate with anchor holes for bolting to the supporting structure.
Ductile iron or cast aluminum components are not acceptable
alternatives and shall not be used due to brittleness when subjected to
shock loading.
B) Isolator shall be capable of withstanding the design seismic loads in all
directions with no metal-to-metal contact.
D) Neoprene isolators shall be Model RQ as manufactured by Kinetics

Noise Control, or by other manufacturers who can meet the
requirements as listed in sections 1.04 through 1.09 inclusive, and
sections 2.01, 2.02 and 2.03 (5)
6) Type F): Light Capacity All Direction 3-Axis External Seismic Snubber
Assembly
A) Equipment shall be restrained against excessive movement during a
seismic event by the use of 3-axis resilient snubbers, designed to
withstand the project required seismic forces. A minimum of two (2)
snubbers are to be used at each equipment installation, oriented to
effectively restrain the isolated equipment in all three directions, and
additional snubbers shall be used as required by seismic design
conditions.
B) Snubbers shall be of interlocking steel construction and shall be
attached to the equipment structure and equipment in a manner
consistent with anticipated design loads. Snubbers shall limit lateral and
vertical equipment movement at each snubber location to a maximum of
(6 mm) in any direction.
C) Snubbers shall include a minimum (6 mm) thick resilient neoprene
pads to cushion any impact and to avoid any potential for metal-to-metal
contact. Maximum neoprene bearing pressure shall not exceed 1500
pounds / sq. inch (10.4 N / sq. mm). Snubber shall be capable of
withstanding an externally applied seismic force of up to 3,000 pounds
(1360 kg.) in any direction. Snubber shall be installed only after the
isolated equipment is mounted, piped, and operating so as to ensure
that no contact occurs during normal equipment operation.
C) Isolator shall have minimum operating static deflections as shown on the

project Vibration Isolation Schedule or as otherwise indicated in the
project documents and shall not exceed published load capacities.
D) Three-axis seismic snubbers shall be Model HS-5 as manufactured by

Kinetics Noise Control, or by other manufacturers who can meet the
requirements as listed in sections 1.04 through 1.09 inclusive, and 2.01,
2.02 and 2.03 (6)
7) Type G): Lateral 2-Axis External Seismic Snubber Assembly
A) Equipment shall be restrained against excessive lateral movement

PAGE 8 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D12.1
MEMBER
during a seismic event by the use of 2-axis horizontal resilient snubbers,

designed to withstand the project required seismic forces. A minimum
of two (2) snubbers are to be used at each equipment installation,
oriented to effectively restrain the isolated equipment in all horizontal
directions, and additional snubbers shall be used as required by seismic
design conditions.
C) Snubbers shall include a minimum of (6 mm) thick resilient neoprene

pads to cushion any impact and to avoid any potential for metal-to-metal
contact. Snubber shall be installed only after the isolated equipment is
mounted, piped, and operating so as to ensure that no contact occurs
during normal equipment operation.
D) Two-axis lateral seismic snubbers shall be Model HS-2 as manufactured
by Kinetics Noise Control, or by other manufacturers who can meet the
sections 2.01, 2.02 and 2.03 (7)
8) Type H): Heavy Capacity All Direction 3-Axis External Seismic Snubber
Assembly
A) Equipment shall be restrained against excessive vertical and horizontal
movement during a seismic event by the use of 3-axis resilient
snubbers, designed to withstand the project required seismic forces. A
minimum of two (2) snubbers are to be used at each equipment
installation, oriented to effectively restrain the isolated equipment in all
three directions, and additional snubbers shall be used as required by
seismic design conditions.
B) Snubbers shall be of welded interlocking steel construction and shall be
consistent with anticipated design loads. Snubbers shall limit lateral and
vertical equipment movement at each snubber location to a maximum of
(6 mm) in any direction.
B) Snubbers shall be of interlocking steel construction and shall be

consistent with anticipated design loads. Snubbers shall limit lateral
equipment movement at each snubber location to a maximum of (6
mm).
C) Snubbers shall include resilient neoprene pads with a minimum

thickness of (6 mm) to cushion any impact and to avoid any potential
for metal-to-metal contact. Snubber shall be capable of withstanding an
externally applied seismic force of up to 10,000 pounds (4,540 kg.) in
any direction. Snubber shall be installed only after the isolated
equipment is mounted, piped, and operating so as to ensure that no
contact occurs during normal equipment operation.
D) Three-axis seismic snubbers shall be Model HS-7 as manufactured by

PAGE 9 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D12.1
MEMBER
sections 2.01, 2.02 and 2.03 (8)

9) Type I): Horizontal 1-Axis External Seismic Snubber Assembly
B) Snubbers shall be of steel construction and shall be attached to the

equipment structure and equipment in a manner consistent with
anticipated design loads.
Snubbers shall limit lateral equipment
movement at each snubber location in the direction of impact to a
maximum of (6 mm).
C) Snubbers shall include resilient neoprene pads with a minimum
thickness of (6 mm) to cushion any impact and to avoid any potential
for metal-to-metal contact. Snubber shall be installed only after the
isolated equipment is mounted, piped, and operating so as to eliminate
any contact during normal equipment operation.
D) Single-axis seismic snubbers shall be Model HS-1 as manufactured by
sections 2.01, 2.02 and 2.03 (9)
10) Type J): Cable Restraints For Suspended Piping and Ductwork
A) Seismic wire rope cable restraints shall consist of steel wire strand
cables, sized to resist project seismic loads, arranged to offer seismic
restraint capabilities for piping, ductwork, and suspended equipment in
all lateral directions.
B) Building and equipment attachment brackets at each end of the cable
shall be designed to permit free cable movement in all directions up to a
45 degree misalignment. Protective thimbles shall be used at sharp
connection points as required to eliminate potential for dynamic cable
wear and strand breakage.
A) Equipment shall be restrained against excessive horizontal one-axis

movement during a seismic event by the use of single-axis resilient
snubbers, designed to withstand the project required seismic forces. A
minimum of four (4) snubbers are to be used at each equipment
installation, oriented to effectively restrain the isolated equipment in all
lateral directions.
C) Restraints shall be sized to the capacity of the cable or to the capacity of

the anchorage, whichever is the lesser.
D) Seismic wire rope connections shall be made using overlap wire rope
Uclips or seismically rated tool-less wedge insert lock connectors.
E) Vertical suspension rods shall be braced as required to avoid potential
for buckling due to vertical
upforces. Braces shall be structural steel
angle uniquely selected to be of sufficient strength to prevent support
rod bending. Brace shall be attached to the vertical suspension rod by a
series of adjustable clips. Clips shall be capable of securely locking
brace to suspension rod without the need for hand tools.

PAGE 10 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D12.1
MEMBER
F) Where clevis hanger brackets are used for seismic restraint attachment,
they will be fitted with clevis internal braces to prevent buckling of the
hanger brackets.
H) Seismic cable building and equipment attachment brackets shall be

Model KSCA, KSCU or KSCC as manufactured by Kinetics Noise
and 2.03 (10).
I)
Seismic cable concrete anchor bolts shall be (Model KCAB Wedge) /

(Model KUAB Undercut) as manufactured by Kinetics Noise Control, or
by other manufacturers who can meet the requirements as listed in
sections 1.04 through 1.09 inclusive, and sections 2.01, 2.02 and 2.03
(10).
J) Seismic wire rope connectors shall be (Model KWRC -

Uclamp) /
(Model KWGC - Tool-less wedge lock) as manufactured by Kinetics
Noise Control, or by other manufacturers who can meet the
sections 2.01, 2.02 and 2.03 (10).
K) Seismic vertical suspension stiffener rod clips shall be Model KHRC as
manufactured by Kinetics Noise Control, or by other manufacturers who
can meet the requirements as listed in sections 1.04 through 1.09
inclusive, and sections 2.01, 2.02 and 2.03 (10).
L) Clevis Internal Braces shall be Model KHHB as manufactured by
sections 2.01, 2.02 and 2.03 (10).
3.0 Execution
3.01 Installation
G) Seismic cable shall be as manufactured by Kinetics Noise Control, or by

other manufacturers who can meet the requirements as listed in
sections 1.03 through 1.07 inclusive, and sections 2.01, 2.02 and 2.03
(10)
1) Installation of all seismic restraint materials specified in this section shall be

accomplished as per the manufacturer
s written instructions.
2) Upon completion of installation of all seismic restraint materials and before start up
of restrained equipment, all debris shall be cleaned from beneath all protected
equipment, leaving equipment free to contact snubbers.
3) No rigid connections between the equipment and the building structure shall be
made which degrades the seismic restraint system herein specified. All electrical
conduit to restrained equipment shall be looped to allow free motion of equipment
without damage to the electrical wiring.

PAGE 11 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D12.1
MEMBER
4) Adjust isolators after piping systems have been filled and equipment is at operating
weight.
5) Adjust limit stops on restrained spring isolators to mount equipment at normal
operating height. After equipment installation is complete, adjust limit stops so they
are out of contact during normal operation.
6) Adjust snubbers according to manufacturer's written recommendations.
7) Adjust seismic restraints to permit free movement of equipment within normal mode
of operation.
equipment
manufacturer's
written
3.02 Execution
1) Shackle piping to the trapeze when restraining trapeze mounted piping, conduit and
ductwork. Install cables so they do not bend across sharp edges of adjacent
equipment or building structure.
2) Install steel angles to stiffen hanger rods and prevent buckling where appropriate.
Clamp with adjustable steel clamps to hanger rods. Requirements apply equally to
hanging equipment. Do not weld angles to rods
3) If there is greater than a 1/8diameter mismatch between anchorage hardware and
hole diameter, reduce clearance in hole with epoxy grout or flanged neoprene
bushings.
4) Housekeeping Pads must be adequately reinforced and adequately thick for proper
embedment of equipment anchors. Refer also to written restraint manufacturers
instructions.
A) Install dowel rods to connect concrete base to concrete floor. Unless
otherwise indicated, install dowel rods on 18-inch (450-mm) centers
around the full perimeter of the base.
B) Install adequate reinforcement in the concrete base to ensure its
integrity in a seismic event.
C) Install wedge type anchors into concrete base. If base thickness is
inadequate for full anchor embedment, install epoxy-coated anchor bolts
that extend through concrete base and adequately anchor into structural
concrete floor.
8) Torque anchor bolts according to

recommendations to resist seismic forces
D) Place and secure anchorage devices. Use setting drawings, templates,

diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be
embedded.
E) Install anchor bolts to elevations required for proper attachment to
supported equipment.
F) Install anchor bolts according to anchor bolt manufacturer's written
instructions.

PAGE 12 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D12.1
MEMBER
1)
The contractor shall notify the local representative of the seismic restraint materials
manufacturer prior to installing any seismic restraint devices. The contractor shall
seek the representative
s guidance in any installation procedures with which he is
unfamiliar.
2)
Upon completion of the installation of all seismic restraint devices herein specified,
the local representative of the seismic snubbers manufacturer shall, at the
contractors request, inspect the completed system and report in writing any
installation errors, improperly selected snubber devices, or other fault in the system
which could affect the performance of the system.
3)
The installing contractor shall submit a report upon request to the building architect
and/or engineer, including the manufacturer
s representative
s final report,
indicating that all seismic restraint material has been properly installed, or steps to
be taken by the contractor to properly complete the seismic restraint work as per
the specifications.
4.0 Seismic Restraint for Piping and Ductwork

4.01 Piping
1) Seismically restrain all piping listed below. Use Type J Cable Restraints for all
piping supported by vibration isolation hanger assemblies, including:
A) Natural gas piping, medical gas piping, vacuum piping, petroleum based
liquid piping, and compressed air piping equal to or greater than 1(25
mm) in inside diameter.
B) Brace remainder of piping to code requirements (IBC or TI-809-04)) or in
conformance with SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors National Association, Inc.) Seismic Restraint Manual
Guidelines for Mechanical Systems, Second Edition (Remaining
Codes)
4.02 Ductwork
1) Seismically restrain all ductwork listed below. Use Type J Cable Restraints for all
ductwork supported by vibration isolation hanger assemblies, including:
3.03 Inspection
A) All rectangular and oval ducts with cross sectional area equal to or
greater than 6 sq. ft. (0.55 sq. meters).
B) All round ducts with diameters equal to or greater than 32(812 mm).
C) Brace remaining ductwork to code requirements (IBC or TI-809-04)) or
in conformance with SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Codes)
4.03 Conduit

PAGE 13 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D12.1
MEMBER
1) Seismically restrain all electrical conduit listed below. Use Type J Cable Restraints
for all conduit supported by vibration isolation hanger assemblies, including:
A) All round ducts with diameters equal to or greater than 32(812 mm).
4.04 Fire Protection Piping

1) Fire protection, sprinkler piping, and related equipment is considered as Life Safety
Equipmentand is to be seismically restrained per guidelines as published by NFPA
(National Fire Protection Association).
End of Section
B) Brace all conduit to code requirements (IBC or TI-809-04) or in

conformance with SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Codes).

PAGE 14 OF 14

International:
Fax:
World Wide Web:
Email:
800-959-1229
614-889-0480
614-889-0540
DOCUMENT:
D12.1
MEMBER

Design and Application Guidelines

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Design and Application Guidelines

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

CHAPTER D1

SEISMIC BUILDING CODE REVIEW

Purpose, Extent and Limitations of Analysis

Overview of Analytical Methods Used

Static vs Dynamic Modeling Techniques

Required Calculation Input

Understanding Standard Calculation Output

Understanding non-Standard Calculation Output

General Assumptions and Disclaimer

KINETICS Seismic Design Manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS (Chapter D1)

DUBLIN, OHIO, USA MISSISSAUGA, ONTARIO, CANADA

Toll Free (USA only):

RELEASE DATE: 10/1/03

PURPOSE, EXTENT AND LIMITATIONS OF A SEISMIC ANALYSIS

KINETICS Seismic Design Manual

PURPOSE, EXTENT AND LIMITATIONS OF A SEISMIC ANALYSIS

DUBLIN, OHIO, USA MISSISSAUGA, ONTARIO, CANADA

RELEASE DATE: 09/02/04

KINETICS Seismic Design Manual

IBC (International Building Code) (International Code Council), 2000

DUBLIN, OHIO, USA MISSISSAUGA, ONTARIO, CANADA

RELEASE DATE: 9/24/03

KINETICS Seismic Design Manual

DUBLIN, OHIO, USA MISSISSAUGA, ONTARIO, CANADA

RELEASE DATE: 9/16/04

OVERVIEW OF ANALYTICAL METHODS USED

KINETICS Seismic Design Manual

Unless otherwise specified, the analyses performed by

OVERVIEW OF ANALYTICAL METHODS USED

DUBLIN, OHIO, USA MISSISSAUGA, ONTARIO, CANADA

RELEASE DATE: 9/24/03

KINETICS Seismic Design Manual

OVERVIEW OF ANALYTICAL METHODS USED

DUBLIN, OHIO, USA MISSISSAUGA, ONTARIO, CANADA

RELEASE DATE: 9/24/03

KINETICS Seismic Design Manual

OVERVIEW OF ANALYTICAL METHODS USED

DUBLIN, OHIO, USA MISSISSAUGA, ONTARIO, CANADA

RELEASE DATE: 9/24/03

OTHER SIGNIFICANT FACTORS

KINETICS Seismic Design Manual

SINGLE DIRECTION SNUBBERS

OVERVIEW OF ANALYTICAL METHODS USED

DUBLIN, OHIO, USA MISSISSAUGA, ONTARIO, CANADA

RELEASE DATE: 9/24/03

OPEN SPRING ISOLATORS

KINETICS Seismic Design Manual

CONTAINED SPRING ISOLATORS

OVERVIEW OF ANALYTICAL METHODS USED

DUBLIN, OHIO, USA MISSISSAUGA, ONTARIO, CANADA

RELEASE DATE: 9/24/03

KINETICS Seismic Design Manual

OVERVIEW OF ANALYTICAL METHODS USED

DUBLIN, OHIO, USA MISSISSAUGA, ONTARIO, CANADA

RELEASE DATE: 9/24/03

STATIC vs DYNAMIC MODELING

The static analysis involves applying a force either mathematically to a mathematically

KINETICS Seismic Design Manual

STATIC vs DYNAMIC MODELING

DUBLIN, OHIO, USA MISSISSAUGA, ONTARIO, CANADA

RELEASE DATE: 9/16/04

KINETICS Seismic Design Manual

STATIC vs DYNAMIC MODELING